Deawoo Solar S140W-V Shop Manual

Solar 140/160W-V
Shop Manual
023-00065E
Serial Number 1001 and Up
Daewoo reserves the right to improve our products in a continuing process to provide the best possible
product to the market place. These improvements can be implemented at any time with no obligation to
change materials on previously sold products. It is recommended that consumers periodically contact their
distributors for recent documentation on purchased equipment.
This documentation may include attachments and optional equipment that is not available in your
machine’s package. Please call your distributor for additional items that you may require.
Illustrations used throughout this manual are used only as a representation of the actual piece of
equipment, and may vary from the actual item.
023-00065E Shop Manual

Pub.No. 023-00065E
Serial Number 1001 and Up
Solar 140/160W-V
Product Label
Instructions
Trim Out The Label Along

The Lines And Insert Into
Pocket On The Binder Spine
Pub. No. 023-00065E

1TABLE OF CONTENTS
Return to Master Table of Contents
Safety
Wheel Excavator Safety ..................................................................... S0102025K
Specifications
Specifications for S140W-V / 160W-V ................................................ S0202055K
General Maintenance
General Maintenance Procedures .........................................................S0302000
Standard Torques ..................................................................................S0309000
Upper Structure
Cab ..................................................................................................... S0402040K
Counterweight..................................................................................... S0403015K
Fuel Tank............................................................................................ S0405045K
Fuel Transfer Pump ...............................................................................S0405500
Swing Bearing........................................................................................S0407010
Swing Reduction Gearbox .................................................................. S0408025K
Lower Structure and Chassis

Ram Lock Valve Operation....................................................................S0503000
Engine and Drive Train

Front Axle (Dana) ............................................................................... S0602055K
Rear Axle (Dana) ................................................................................ S0602056K
Air-Conditioner.................................................................................... S0605060K
Transmission (ZF 2HL-100)................................................................ S0607055K
Drive Coupling (Main Pump)..................................................................S0609000
Table of Contents
Page I
Hydraulics
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjustment ............. S0702065K
Accumulator........................................................................................ S0703010K
Center Joint (Swivel)..............................................................................S0704070
Cylinders................................................................................................S0705000
Swing Motor...........................................................................................S0707260
Travel Motor...........................................................................................S0707350
Main Pump (Tongmyung) ................................................................... S0708306K
Gear Pump (Steering Pump & Brake Pump) ...................................... S0708435K
Brake Supply Valve ...............................................................................S0709220
Counterbalance Valve ...........................................................................S0709300
Main Control Valve ............................................................................. S0709416K
Pilot Control Valve (Work Lever / Joystick)......................................... S0709451K
Steering Valve .......................................................................................S0709710
Dozer Control Valve............................................................................ S0709905K
Hydraulic Schematic (S140W-V / 160W-V) ........................................ S0792145K
Electrical System
Electrical System ................................................................................ S0802125K
Electrical Schematic (S140W-V / 160W-V)......................................... S0892075K
Attachments
Boom and Arm.......................................................................................S0902060
Bucket....................................................................................................S0904000
Publication Request for Proposed Revision
Table of Contents
Page II
1SAFETY
S0102025K
1WHEEL EXCAVATOR
SAFETY
CAUTION!
Follow all safety recommendations and safe shop practices outlined in the front of this manual
or those contained within this section.
Always use tools and equipment that is in good working order.
Use lifting and hoisting equipment capable of safely handling load.
Remember, that ultimately safety is your own personal responsibility.
WHEEL EXCAVATOR SAFETYS0102025K
MODEL SERIAL NUMBER RANGE

Solar 140W-V 1001 and Up
Copyright 2002 Daewoo

July 2002
Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
To the Operator of a Daewoo Excavator ........................................................ 3

General Safety Essentials .............................................................................. 6
Location of Safety Labels ............................................................................... 6
Summary of Safety Precautions for Lifting in Digging Mode .......................... 7
Unauthorized Modifications ............................................................................ 8
General Hazard Information ........................................................................... 8
Before Starting Engine ................................................................................. 17
Machine Operation ....................................................................................... 20
Maintenance................................................................................................. 25
Battery.......................................................................................................... 33
Towing .......................................................................................................... 35
Shipping and Transportation ........................................................................ 36
Lifting With Sling........................................................................................... 36
S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Page 2
TO THE OPERATOR OF A DAEWOO EXCAVATOR
DANGER!
Unsafe use of the excavator could lead to serious injury or death. Operating procedures,
maintenance and equipment practices or traveling or shipping methods that do not follow the
safety guidelines on the following pages could cause serious, potentially fatal injuries or
extensive damage to the machine or nearby property.
Please respect the importance of taking responsibility for your own safety, and that of other people who
may be affected by your actions.
The safety information on the following pages is organized into the following sections:
1. “General Safety Essentials” on page 6
2. “Location of Safety Labels” on page 6
3. “Summary of Safety Precautions for Lifting in Digging Mode” on page 7
4. “Unauthorized Modifications” on page 8
5. “General Hazard Information” on page 8
6. “Before Starting Engine” on page 17
7. “Machine Operation” on page 20
8. “Maintenance” on page 25
9. “Battery” on page 33
10. “Towing” on page 35
11. “Shipping and Transportation” on page 36
12. “Lifting With Sling” on page 36

Page 3
WARNING!
Improper operation and maintenance of this machine can be hazardous and could result in
serious injury or death.
Operator and maintenance personnel should read this manual thoroughly before beginning
operation or maintenance.
Keep this manual in the storage compartment to the rear of the operator’s seat, and have all
personnel involved in working on the machine read the manual periodically.
Some actions involved in operation and maintenance of the machine can cause a serious
accident, if they are not done in a manner described in this manual.
The procedures and precautions given in this manual apply only to intended uses of the
machine.
If you use your machine for any unintended uses that are not specifically prohibited, you must
be sure that it is safe for any others. In no event should you or others engage in prohibited uses
or actions as described in this manual.
Daewoo delivers machines that comply with all applicable regulations and standards of the
country to which it has been shipped. If this machine has been purchased in another country or
purchased from someone in another country, it may lack certain safety devices and
specifications that are necessary for use in your country. If there is any question about whether
your product complies with the applicable standards and regulations of your country, consult
Daewoo or your Daewoo distributor before operating the machine.

Page 4
SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL
Be Prepared - Get To Know All Operating and Safety Instructions.
This is the Safety Alert Symbol. Wherever it appears in this manual or on safety signs on the
machine you should be alert to the potential for personal injury or accidents. Always observe
safety precautions and follow recommended procedures.
LEARN THE SIGNAL WORDS USED WITH THE SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL
The words "CAUTION," "WARNING," and "DANGER" used throughout this manual and on decals on the
machine indicate degree of risk of hazards or unsafe practices. All three degrees of risk indicate that safety
is involved. Observe precautions indicated whenever you see the Safety Alert "Triangle," no matter which
signal word appears next to the "Exclamation Point" symbol.
CAUTION!
This word is used on safety messages and safety labels and indicates potential of a hazardous
situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert
against a generally unsafe practice.
WARNING!
This word is used on safety messages and safety labels and indicates potential of a hazardous
situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. It may also be used to alert
against a highly unsafe practice.
DANGER!
This word is used on safety messages and safety labels and indicates an imminent hazard of a
situation that, if not avoided, is very likely to cause death or extremely serious injury. It may also
be used to alert against equipment that may explode or detonate if handled or treated carelessly.
Safety precautions are described in SAFETY from page -6 on.

Daewoo cannot predict every circumstance that might involve a potential hazard in operation and
maintenance. Therefore the safety messages in this manual and on the machine may not include all
possible safety precautions. If any procedures or actions not specifically recommended or allowed in this
manual are used, you must be sure that you and others can do such procedures and actions safely and
without damaging the machine. If you are unsure about the safety of some procedures, contact a
DAEWOO distributor.

Page 5
GENERAL SAFETY ESSENTIALS
ACCESSORY APPLICATIONS
The excavator has been primarily designed for moving earth with a bucket. For use as a grapple or for
other object handling, contact Daewoo for proper installation and application. Lifting-work applications
(unless restricted or prohibited by local regulations) are permitted in approved lift configuration, to rated
capacity only, with no side-loading. DO NOT use the machine for activities for which it was not intended.
DO NOT use the bucket for lifting work, unless lift slings are used in the approved configuration.
Use of an accessory hydraulic hammer (breaker), work in rough terrain, demolition applications or other
hazardous operation may require installation of additional protective structures to safeguard the operator.
LIFTING CAPACITY RATING CONFIGURATION

Lifting capacity ratings that are printed at the end of this safety section are based on the machine being
level, on a firm supporting surface, with hooks and slings attached in approved configuration. Loads must
be balanced and supported evenly. Use taglines to keep the load steady if wind conditions and large
surface area are a problem. Work crew hand signals, individual tasks and safe procedures should all be
universally understood before the lift is made.
LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS
IMPORTANT
Before using the excavator to make lifts check municipal and regional regulations or statutes
that could apply. Governing ordinances may require that all heavy lifting be done with single
purpose equipment specifically designed for making lifts, or other local restrictions may apply.
Making heavy lifts with a general purpose excavator that can be used for digging, loading,
grading or other work may be expressly forbidden by a regional injunction or other legal
prohibition. Always follow all of the other instructions, guidelines and restrictions for Safe
Lifting in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
Location of safety labels (decals) can vary from unit to unit. Refer to appropriate Operation and
Maintenance Manual, and parts manual for your unit.
Always replace damaged or faded decals.

Page 6
SUMMARY OF SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR LIFTING
IN DIGGING MODE
DANGER!
Unsafe use of the excavator while making rated lifts could cause serious, potentially fatal
injuries or extensive damage to the machine or nearby property. Do not let anyone operate the
machine unless they’ve been properly trained and understand the information in the Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
To lift safely while in Digging Mode, the following items must be evaluated by the operator and the work site
crew.
• Condition of ground support.
• Excavator configuration and attachments.
• Weight, lifting height and lifting radius.
• Safe rigging of the load.
• Proper handling of the suspended load.
Taglines on opposite sides of the load can be very helpful in keeping a suspended load secure, if they are
anchored safely to control points on the ground.
WARNING!
NEVER wrap a tagline around your hands or body.
NEVER rely on taglines or make rated lifts when wind gusts are more than 48.3 km/h (30 MPH).
Be prepared for any type of wind gust when working with loads that have a large surface area.
Always engage the "Digging Mode" control on the Instrument Panel before using the excavator for lifting
work.
WARNING!
If you need more information or have any questions or concerns about safe operating
procedures or working the excavator correctly in a particular application or in the specific
conditions of your individual operating environment, please consult your local Daewoo
representative.

Page 7
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS
Any modification made without authorization or written approval from Daewoo can create a safety hazard,
for which the machine owner must be held responsible.
For safety’s sake, replace all OEM parts with the correct authorized or genuine Daewoo part. For example,
not taking the time to replace fasteners, bolts or nuts with the correct replacement parts could lead to a
condition in which the safety of critical assemblies is dangerously compromised.
GENERAL HAZARD INFORMATION

SAFETY RULES
Only trained and authorized personnel can operate and maintain the machine.
Follow all safety rules, precautions and instructions when operating or performing maintenance on the
machine.
Do not operate the machine if you are not feeling well, if you are taking medication that makes you feel
sleepy, if you have been drinking, or if you are suffering from emotional problems. These problems will
interfere with your sense of judgement in emergencies and may cause accidents.
When working with another operator or with a person on work site traffic duty, be sure that all personnel
know the nature of the work and understand all hand signals that are to be used.
Always observe strictly any other rules related to safety.
SAFETY FEATURES
Be sure that all guards and covers are installed in their proper position. Have guards and covers repaired
immediately if damaged.
Be sure that you understand the method of use of safety features such as safety lock lever and the seat
belt, and use them properly.
Never remove any safety features. Always keep them in good operating condition.
Failure to use safety features according to the instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manual could
result in serious bodily injury.

Page 8
INSIDE OPERATOR'S COMPARTMENT
When entering the operator's compartment, always remove all mud and oil from the soles of your shoes. If
you operate the travel pedal with mud or oil stuck to your shoes, your foot may slip and this may cause a
serious accident.
After using the ashtray, make sure that any matches or cigarettes are properly extinguished, and be sure to
close the ashtray. If the ashtray is left open, there is danger of fire.
Do not stick suction pads to the window glass. Suction pads act as a lens and may cause fire.
Do not leave lighters laying around the operator's compartment. If the temperature inside the operator's
compartment becomes high, there is danger that the lighter may explode.
Do not use cellular telephones inside the operator's compartment when driving or operating the machine.
There is danger that this may lead to an unexpected accident.
Never bring any dangerous objects such as flammable or explosive items into the operator's cab.
To ensure safety, do not use the radio or music headphones when operating the machine. There is danger
that this may lead to a serious accident.
When operating the machine, do not put your hands or head out of the window.
When standing up from the operator's seat, always place safety lock lever securely in the "LOCK" position.
If you accidentally touch the work equipment levers when they are not locked, the machine may suddenly
move and cause serous injury or damage.
When leaving the machine, lower the work equipment completely to the ground, set safety lock lever to the
"LOCK" position and shut down engine. Use the key to lock all the equipment. Always remove the key and
take it with you.

Page 9
CLOTHING AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
ITEMS
Contain long hair, and avoid loose clothing and
jewelry. They can catch on controls or in
protruding parts and cause serious injury or
death.
Do not wear oily clothes. They are highly
flammable.
Full eye protection, a hard hat, safety shoes and
gloves may be required at the work site.
HAOA020L
While working on the machine, never use
Figure 1
inadequate tools. They could break or slip,
causing injury, or they may not adequately
perform intended functions.
BREATHING MASKS, EAR PROTECTION MAY BE REQUIRED

Do not forget that some risks to your health may not be immediately apparent. Exhaust gases and noise
pollution may not be visible, but these hazards can cause disabling or permanent injuries.

Page 10
MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING
Before getting on or off the machine, if there is any oil, grease, or mud on the handrails or steps, wipe it off
immediately. Always keep these parts clean. Repair any damage and tighten any loose bolts.
Never jump on or off the machine. In particular, never get on or off a moving machine. These actions may
lead to serious injury.
When getting on or off the machine, always face the machine, and maintain three-point contact (both feet
and one hand or one foot and both hands) with the handrails, steps, and track shoes to ensure that you
support yourself securely.
Never hold any control levers when getting on or off the machine.
Apply the door lock securely. If you grip the handrail inside the door when moving on top of the chassis and
the door lock is not applied securely, the door may move and cause you to fall.
Use the points marked by arrows in the diagram when getting on or off the machine.
Figure 2

Page 11
FUEL, OIL AND HYDRAULIC FLUID FIRE
HAZARDS
Fuel, oil and antifreeze will catch fire if it is
brought close to a flame. Fuel is particularly
flammable and can be hazardous.
Always strictly observe the following.
Add fuel, oil, antifreeze and hydraulic fluid to the
machine only in a well-ventilated area. The
machine must be parked with controls, lights
and switches turned "OFF." The engine must be
"OFF" and any flames, glowing embers,
auxiliary heating units or spark-causing
equipment must be doused, turned off and/or
kept well clear of the machine.
Static electricity can produce dangerous sparks
at the fuel filling nozzle. In very cold, dry Figure 3
weather or other conditions that could produce a
static discharge, keep the tip of the fuel nozzle
in constant contact with the neck of the fuel
filling nozzle, to provide a ground.
Keep fuel and other fluid reservoir caps tight and
do not start the engine until caps have been
secured.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING FLUIDS

AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
Immediately after operations are stopped, the
coolant, engine oil, and hydraulic oil are at high
temperature and the radiator and hydraulic tank
are still under pressure. Attempting to remove
the cap, drain the oil or coolant, or replace the
filters may lead to serious burns. Always wait for
the temperature to go down, and follow the
specified procedures when carrying out these
operations.
HAOA050L
Figure 4
To prevent hot coolant from spurting out, shut
down engine, wait for the coolant to cool, then
loosen the cap slowly to relieve the pressure.
To prevent hot oil from spurting out, shut down
engine, wait for the oil to cool, then loosen the
cap slowly to relieve the pressure.
ARO1760L
Figure 5

Page 12
ASBESTOS DUST HAZARD PREVENTION
Asbestos dust can be HAZARDOUS to your
health if it is inhaled. Materials containing
asbestos fiber can be present on work site.
Breathing air that contains asbestos fiber can
ultimately cause serious or fatal lung damage.
To prevent lung damage from asbestos fiber,
observe following precautions;
• Use a respirator that is approved for
use in an asbestos-laden
atmosphere. ARO1770L
• Never use compressed air for Figure 6
cleaning.
• Use water for cleaning to keep down
the dust.
• Work on the machine or component
with the wind at your back whenever
possible.
• Always observe any rules and
regulations related to the work site
and working environment.
INJURY FROM WORK EQUIPMENT

Do not enter or put your hand, arm or any other
part of your body between movable parts, such
as between the work equipment and cylinders,
or between the machine and work equipment.
If the control levers are operated, the clearance
between the machine and the work equipment
will change and this may lead to serious
damage or personal injury.
If going between movable parts is necessary,
always position and secure the work equipment HDO1010L
so that it cannot move. Figure 7

Page 13
FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND FIRST AID KIT
As a precaution if any injury or fire should occur,
always do the following.
• Be sure that fire extinguishers have
been provided and read the labels to
ensure that you know now to use
them. It is recommended that an
appropriately sized (2.27 kg [5 lb] or
larger) multipurpose "A/B/C" fire
extinguisher be mounted in the cab.
Check and service the fire HDO1009L
extinguisher at regular intervals and
Figure 8
make sure that all work site crew
members are adequately trained in
its use.
• Provide a first aid kit in the storage compartment and keep another at the work site. Check the
kit periodically and make any additions if necessary.
• Know what to do in case of injury from fire.
• Keep emergency numbers for doctor, ambulance service, hospital and fire department near
your telephone.
If the machine catches fire, it may lead to serious personal injury or death. If a fire occurs during operation,
escape from the machine as follows;
• Turn the starter switch "OFF" and shut down engine.
• If there is time, use the fire extinguisher to extinguish as much of the fire as possible.
• Use the handrails and steps to escape from the machine.
The above is the basic method for escaping from the machine, but changing the method may be necessary
according to the conditions, so carry out practice drills at the work site.
PROTECTION FROM FALLING OR FLYING OBJECTS

On work sites where there is danger that falling objects or flying objects may hit the operator's cab select a
guard to match the operating conditions to protect the operator.
Working in mines, tunnels, deep pits or on loose
or wet surfaces could produce danger of falling
rock or hazardous flying objects. Additional
protection for the operator's cab could be
required in the form of a FOPS (Falling Object
Protective Structure) or window guards.
HAOA110L
Figure 9

Page 14
Never attempt to alter or modify any type of
protective structure reinforcement system, by
drilling holes, welding, remounting or relocating
fasteners. Any serious impact or damage to the
system requires a complete integrity
reevaluation. Reinstallation, recertification and/
or replacement of the system may be
necessary.
Contact your Daewoo distributor for available
safety guards and/or recommendations if there
is any danger of getting hit by objects that could
strike the operator's cab. Make sure that all HAOA100L
other work site crew members are kept well Figure 10
away from the excavator and safe from possible
hazards.
For breaker operation, install a front guard and apply a laminated coating sheet to the front glass. Contact
your DAEWOO distributor for recommendations.
When carrying out demolition or cutting operation, install a front guard and top guard, and apply a
laminated coating sheet to the front glass.
When working in mines or quarries where there is danger of falling rock, install FOPS (Falling Objects
Protective Structure) and apply a laminated coating sheet to the front glass.
If any glass on the machine is broken, replace it with new glass immediately.
ATTACHMENT PRECAUTIONS
Option kits are available through your dealer. Contact Daewoo for information on available one-way (single-
acting) and two-way (double-acting) piping / valving / auxiliary control kits. Because Daewoo cannot
anticipate, identify or test all of the attachments that owners may wish to install on their machines, please
contact Daewoo for authorization and approval of attachments, and their compatibility with options kits.
ACCUMULATOR
The pilot control system is equipped with an accumulator. For a brief period of time after the engine has
been shut down, the accumulator will store a pressure charge that may enable hydraulic controls to be
activated. Activation of any controls may enable the selected function to operate under force of gravity.
When performing maintenance on the pilot control system, the hydraulic pressure in the system must be
released as describe in "Handling of Accumulator" in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, so it is extremely dangerous if it is handled in
the wrong way. Always observe the following precautions;
• Do not drill or make any holes in the accumulator or expose it any flame, fire or heat source.
• Do not weld on the accumulator, or try attaching anything to it.
• When carrying out disassembly or maintenance of the accumulator, or when disposing of the
accumulator, the charged gas must be properly released. Contact your Daewoo distributor.
• Wear safety goggles and protective gloves when working on an accumulator. Hydraulic oil under
pressure can penetrate the skin and cause serious injuries.

Page 15
INDOOR VENTILATION
Engine exhaust gases can cause fatal
accidents, and unconsciousness, loss of
alertness, judgement and motor control and
serious injury.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation before
starting the engine in any enclosed area.
You should also be aware of open windows,
doors or ductwork into which exhaust may be
carried, or blown by the wind, exposing others to
danger. ARO1770L
Figure 11
EMERGENCY EXIT
This machine is equipped with a glass breaking
tool. It is behind the operator seat in the upper
right corner of the cab. This tool can be used in
case of an emergency situation that requires the
breaking of glass to exit from the operator’s
cabin. Grip the handle firmly and use the sharp
point to break the glass.
WARNING!
Figure 12
Protect your eyes when breaking the
glass.

Page 16
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
WORK SITE PRECAUTIONS
Before starting operations, thoroughly check the area for any unusual conditions that could be dangerous.
Check the terrain and condition of the ground at the work site, and determine the best and safest method of
operation.
Make the ground surface as hard and horizontal as possible before carrying out operations. If there is a lot
of dust and sand on the work site, spray water before starting operations.
If you need to operate on a street, protect
pedestrians and cars by designating a person
for work site traffic duty or by erecting fences
and posting "No Entry" signs around the work
site.
Erect fences, post "No Entry" signs, and take
other steps to prevent people from coming close
to or entering the work site. If people come
close to a moving machine, they may be hit or
caught by the machine, and this may lead to
serious personal injury or death.
Water lines, gas lines, phone lines and high-
Figure 13
voltage electrical lines may be buried under the
work site. Contact each utility and identify their
locations. Be careful not to damage or cut any of
these lines.
Check the condition of the river bed, and the
depth and flow of the water before operating in
water or crossing a river. NEVER be in water
that is in excess of the permissible water depth.
Any type of object in the vicinity of the boom
could represent a potential hazard, or cause the
operator to react suddenly and cause an
accident. Use a spotter or signal person working
near bridges, phone lines, work site scaffolds, or
other obstructions.
Figure 14

Page 17
Minimum levels of insurance coverage, work permits or certification, physical barriers around the work site
or restricted hours of operation may be mandated by governing authorities. There may also be regulations,
guidelines, standards or restrictions on equipment that may have to be followed for local requirements.
There may also be regulations related to performing certain kinds of work. If there is any question about
whether your machine and work site complies with the applicable standards and regulations contact your
local authorities and agencies.
Avoid entering soft ground. It will be difficult for the machine to escape.
Avoid operating your machine to close to the
edge of cliffs, overhangs, and deep ditches. The
ground may be weak in such areas. If the
ground should collapse, the machine could fall
or tip over and this could result in serious injury
or death.
Remember that the soil after heavy rain,
blasting or after earthquakes, is weakened in
these areas.
Earth laid on the ground and the soil near
ditches is loose. It can collapse under the weight
of vibration of your machine and cause your
Figure 15
machine to tip over.
Install the head guard (FOPS) if working in
areas where there is danger of falling rocks.
CHECKS BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

Every day before starting the engine for the first time, carry out the following checks. If these checks are
not carried out properly, there is danger of serious injury.
Completely remove all wood chips, leaves, grass, paper and other flammable materials accumulated in the
engine compartment and around the battery. They could cause a fire. Remove any dirt from the window
glass, mirrors, handrails, and steps.
Do not leave tools or spare parts laying around in the operator's compartment. The vibration of the
machine when traveling or during operations may cause them to fall and damage or break the control
levers or switches. They may also get caught in the gap of the control levers and cause the work equipment
to malfunction or move dangerously. This may lead to unexpected accidents.
Check the coolant level, fuel level, and hydraulic tank oil level, and check for clogged air cleaner and
damage to the electrical wiring.
Adjust the operator's seat to a position where it is easy to operate the machine, and check the seat belt and
mounts for damage and wear.
Check the operation of the gauges and the angle of the mirrors, and check that the safety lever is in
"LOCKED" position.
If any abnormalities are found in the above checks, carry out repairs immediately.

Page 18
ENGINE STARTING
Walk around your machine before getting in the operator’s cab. Look for evidence of leaking fluid, loose
fasteners, misaligned assemblies or any other indications of possible equipment hazard.
All equipment covers and machinery safety guards must be in place, to protect against injury while the
machine is being operated.
Look around the work site area for potential hazards, people or properly that could be at risk while
operation is in progress.
NEVER start the engine if there is any indication that maintenance or service work is in progress, or if a
warning tag is attached to controls in the cab.
A machine that has not been used recently, or is being operated in extremely cold temperatures, could
require a warm-up or maintenance service before start-up.
Check gauges and monitor displays for normal operation before starting the engine. Listen for unusual
noises and remain alert for other potentially hazardous conditions at the start of the work cycle.
Do not short circuit the starting motor to start the engine. This is not only dangerous, but may also damage
the machine.
When starting the engine, sound the horn as an alert.
Start and operate the machine only while seated.
BEFORE OPERATING MACHINE

If checks are not carried out properly after starting the engine, it may result in a delay in discovering
abnormalities in the machine, and this may lead to personal injury or damage to the machine.
Carry out the checks in an open area where there are no obstructions. Do not let anyone near the machine
when carrying out the checks.
• Check the operating condition of the equipment, and the actuation of the bucket, arm, boom,
travel, and swing systems.
• Check the machine for any abnormal noise, vibration, heat, smell, or abnormality with the
gauges. Check also for leakage of air, oil, and fuel.
• If any abnormality is found, repair the problem immediately. If the machine is used without
repairing the problems, it may lead to unexpected injury or failure.
• Clear all personnel from directly around machine and from the area.
• Clear all obstacles from the machine's path. Beware of hazards.
• Be sure that all windows are clean. Secure the doors and the windows in the open position or in
the shut position.
• Adjust the rear view mirrors for best visibility close to the machine. Make sure that the horn, the
travel alarm (if equipped), and all other warning devices are working properly.
• Fasten the seat belt securely.
• Warm up the engine and hydraulic oil before operating machine.
• Before moving the machine, check the position of undercarriage. The normal travel position is
with the steering axle to the front under the cab and the rigid axle to the rear. When the
undercarriage is in the reversed position, the travel controls must be operated in opposite
directions.

Page 19
MACHINE OPERATION
WHEN SWINGING OR CHANGING
DIRECTION OF TRAVEL
Before operating the machine or the work
equipment, always observe the following
precautions to prevent serious injury or death.
• When changing the direction of travel
from forward to reverse or from
reverse to forward, reduce speed
early and stop the machine before
changing the direction of travel.
• Sound the horn to warn people in the
area.
• Check that there is no one in the area HGB1014L
around the machine. There are blind Figure 16
spots behind the machine, so if
necessary, swing the upper structure
to check that there is no one behind the machine before traveling in reverse.
• When operating in areas that may be hazardous or have poor visibility, designate a person to
direct work site traffic.
• Ensure that no unauthorized person can come within the turning radius or direction of travel.
Be sure to observe the above precautions even if a travel alarm or mirrors are installed.
TRAVEL PRECAUTIONS
Never turn the starting switch to the "O" (OFF) position when traveling. It is dangerous if the engine stops
when the machine is traveling. It will be impossible to operate the steering.
Attachment control levers should not be operated while traveling.
Do not change selected travel mode (FAST/SLOW) while traveling.
Fold in work equipment so that the outer end of the boom is as close to the machine as possible.
Never travel over obstacles or slopes that will cause the machine to tilt severely. Travel around any slope or
obstacle that causes the machine to tilt 10 degrees or more to the right or left, or 30 degrees or more from
front to rear.
Do not operate the steering suddenly. The work equipment may hit the ground and cause the machine to
lose its balance, and this may damage the machine or structures in the area.
When traveling on rough ground, travel at low speed, and avoid sudden changes in direction.
Always keep to the permissible water depth. Permissible water depth is to the centerline of the axles.
When traveling over bridges or structures on private land, check first that the bridge or structure can
withstand the weight of the machine. When traveling on public roads, check with the local authorities and
follow their instructions.

Page 20
TRVEL POSTURE INCORRECT
TWB
BCO0580L
Figure 17
TRAVELING ON SLOPES
Never jump onto a machine that is running away
to stop it. There is danger of serious injury.
Traveling on slopes could result in the machine
tipping over or slipping.
200mm-300mm
On hills, banks or slopes, carry the bucket (8"-12")
approximately 20 - 30 cm (8 - 12 in) above the
ground. In case of an emergency, quickly lower
the bucket to the ground to help stop the
machine.
200mm-300mm
(8"-12")
BCO0700L
Figure 18
Do not travel on grass, fallen leaves, or wet steel
plates. Even slight slopes may cause the
machine to slip to the side, so travel at low
speed and make sure that the machine is
always traveling directly up or down the slope.
Avoid changing the direction of travel on a slope.
This could result in tipping or side slipping of the
machine.
When possible, operate the machine up slopes
and down slopes. Avoid operating the machine
across the slope, when possible.
Figure 19

Page 21
PROHIBITED OPERATIONS
Do not dig the work face under an overhang.
This may cause the overhang to collapse and
fall on top of the machine.
Figure 20
Do not carry out deep digging under the front of
the machine. The ground under the machine
may collapse and cause the machine to fall.
Working heavy loads over loose, soft ground or
uneven, broken terrain can cause dangerous
side load conditions and possible tipover and
injury. Travel without a load or a balanced load
may also be hazardous.
Never relay on lift jacks or other inadequate
supports when work is being done. Block tracks
fore and aft to prevent any movement. BCO0620L
When using the machine, to prevent accidents Figure 21
caused by damage to the work equipment and
overturning because of an excessive load, do
not use the machine in excess of its ability (in
terms of the maximum load and stability
determined by the structure of the machine).
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION

Be careful not to go close to the edge of a cliff
by mistake.
Use the machine only for its main purpose.
Using it for other purposes will cause failures.
To ensure an ample view, do as follows:
• When working in dark areas, attach
working lights and front lights to the
machine. If necessary, set up lighting
at the work site.
• Stop operations when the visibility is Figure 22
poor, such as in fog, mist, snow, and
rain. Wait for the visibility to improve
to a level which causes no problems
for the operation.

Page 22
To avoid hitting the work equipment, always do the following;
• When working in tunnels, on bridges, under electric wires, or when parking the machine or
carrying out other operations in places with limited height, be extremely careful not to hit the
bucket or other parts.
• To prevent collisions, operate the machine at a safe speed when working in confined spaces,
indoors, or in crowded areas.
• Do not pass the bucket over the heads of workers or over the operator's compartment of dump
truck.
AVOID HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLES

Serious injury or death can result from contact
or proximity to high-voltage electric lines. The
bucket does not have to make physical contact
with power lines for current to be transmitted.
Use a spotter and hand signals to stay away
from power lines not clearly visible to the
operator.
Voltage Minimum Safe Distance
6.6 kV 3 m (9’ 10'') HGB1005L

Figure 23
33.0 kV 4 m (13’ 1'')
66.0 kV 5 m (16’ 5'')
154.0 kV 8 m (26’ 3'')
275.0 kV 10 m (32’ 10'')
Use these minimum distances as a guideline only. Depending upon the voltage in the line and atmospheric
conditions, strong current shocks can occur with the boom or bucket as far away as 4 - 6 m (13 - 20 ft) from
the power line. Very high voltage and rainy weather could further decrease that safety margin.
NOTE: Before starting any type of operation near power lines (either above ground or buried
cable-type), you should always contact the power utility directly and work out a safety plan
with them.
OPERATE CAREFULLY ON SNOW, ICE AND IN VERY COLD TEMPERATURES

In icy cold weather avoid sudden travel movements and stay away from even slight slopes. The machine
could skid off to one side very easily.
Snow accumulation could hide or obscure potential hazards. Use care while operating or while using the
machine to clear snow.
Warming up the engine for a short period may be necessary, to avoid operating with sluggish or reduced
working capacity. The jolting shocks and impact loads caused by bumping or bottoming the boom or
attachment are more likely to cause severe stress in very cold temperatures. Reducing work cycle rate and
work load may be necessary.
When the temperature rises, frozen road surfaces become soft, so the machine travel becomes unstable.
In cold weather, do not touch metal surfaces with your bare hands. If you touch a metal surface in
extremely cold weather, your skin may freeze to the metal surface.

Page 23
OPERATIONS ON SLOPES
When working on slopes, there is danger that
the machine may lose its balance and turn over,
when swinging, or when work equipment is
operated. Always carry out these operations
carefully.
Do not swing the work equipment from the uphill
side to the downhill side when the bucket is
loaded. This operation is dangerous.
If the machine has to be used on a slope, pile
the soil to make a platform that will keep the BCO0630L
machine as horizontal as possible. Figure 24
In addition, lower the bucket as far as possible,
keep it pulled into the front, and keep the swing
speed as low as possible.
PARKING MACHINE
Avoid making sudden stops, or parking the machine wherever it happens to be at the end of the work day.
Plan ahead so that the excavator will be on firm, level ground away from traffic and away from high walls,
cliff edges and any area of potential water accumulation or runoff. If parking on inclines is unavoidable,
block the wheels to prevent movement. Lower the bucket or other working attachment completely to the
ground, or to an overnight support saddle. There should be no possibility of unintended or accidental
movement.
When parking on public roads, provide fences, signs, flags, or lights, and put up any other necessary signs
to ensure that passing traffic can see the machine clearly, and park the machine so that the machine, flags,
and fences do not obstruct traffic.
After the front attachment has been lowered to an overnight storage position and all switches and
operating controls are in the "OFF" position, the safety lock lever must be set to the "LOCKED" position.
This will disable all pilot circuit control functions.
Always close the door of the operator’s compartment.
NEVER LET ANYONE RIDE ON

ATTACHMENT
Never let anyone ride on any work attachment,
such as the bucket, crusher, grapple, or
clamshell (grab bucket). There is a danger of the
person falling and suffering serious injury.
ARO1310L
Figure 25

Page 24
MAINTENANCE
WARNING TAG
Alert others that service or maintenance is
being performed and tag operator’s cab controls
– and other machine areas if required – with a
warning notice. OSHA mandated control lever WARNING
lockout can be made with any OSHA certified
lockout device and a length of chain or cable to DO NOT OPERATE
keep the left hand control console in the fully when performing inspection
raised, non active position. or maintenance
Warning tags, for controls are available from 190-00695
Daewoo distributors.
ARO1320L
Figure 26
CLEAN BEFORE INSPECTION OR
MAINTENANCE
Clean the machine before carrying out inspection and maintenance. This prevents dirt from getting into the
machine and also ensures safety during maintenance.
If inspection and maintenance are carried out when the machine is dirty, it will become more difficult to
locate the problems, and also there is danger that you may get dirt or mud in your eyes or that you may slip
and injure yourself.
When washing the machine, do the following;
• Wear shoes with nonslip soles to prevent yourself from slipping and falling on wet places.
• Wear safety glasses and protective clothing when washing the machine with high-pressure
steam.
• Take action to prevent touching high-pressure water and cutting your skin or having mud fly into
your eyes.
• Do not spray water directly on electrical components (sensors, connector) (1, Figure 27). If
water gets into the electrical system, there is danger that it will cause defective operation and
malfunction.
Figure 27
Pick up any tools or hammers that are laying in the work place, wipe up any grease or oil or any other
slippery substances, and clean the area to make it possible to carry out the operation in safety. If the work
place is left untidy, you may trip or slip and suffer injury.

Page 25
PROPER TOOLS
Use only tools suited to the task. Using
damaged, low qualify, faulty, or makeshift tools
could cause personal injury. There is danger
that pieces from, chisels with crushed heads, or
hammers, may get into your eyes and cause
blindness.
HDO1037L
Figure 28
USE OF LIGHTING
When checking fuel, oil, battery electrolyte, or
window washing fluid, always use lighting with
anti-explosion specifications. If such lighting
equipment is not used, there is danger of
explosion.
If work is carried out in dark places without
using lighting, it may lead to injury, so always
use proper lighting.
Even if the place is dark, never use a lighter or
flame instead of lighting. There is danger of fire. HDO1040L
There is also danger that the battery gas may Figure 29
catch fire and cause and explosion.
FIRE PREVENTION AND EXPLOSION PREVENTION

All fuels, most lubricants and some coolant mixtures are flammable. Leaking fuel or fuel that is spilled onto
hot surfaces or onto electrical components can cause a fire.
Store all fuels and all lubricants in properly marked containers and away from all unauthorized persons.
Store oily rags and other flammable material in a protective container.
Do not smoke while you refuel the machine or while you are in a refueling area.
Do not smoke in battery charging areas or in areas the contain flammable material.
Clean all electrical connections and tighten all electrical connections. Check the electrical wires daily for
wires that are loose of frayed. Tighten all lose electrical wires before you operate the machine. Repair all
frayed electrical wires before you operate the machine.
Remove all flammable materials before they accumulate on the machine.
Do not weld on pipes or on tubes that contain flammable fluids. Do not flame cut on pipes or on tubes that
contain flammable fluids. Before you weld on pipes or on tubes or before you flame cut on pipes or on
tubes, clean the pipes or tubes thoroughly with a nonflammable solvent.

Page 26
BURN PREVENTION
When checking the radiator coolant level, shut down engine, let the engine and radiator cool down, then
check the coolant recovery tank. If the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is near the upper limit,
there is enough coolant in the radiator.
Loosen the radiator cap gradually to release the internal pressure before removing the radiator cap.
ARO1360L
Figure 30
If the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is below the lower limit, add coolant.
Cooling system conditioner contains alkali. Alkali can cause personal injury. Do not allow alkali to contact
the skin, the eyes, or the mouth.
Allow cooling system components to cool before you drain the cooling system.
Hot oil and hot components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or hot components to contact
the skin.
Remove the hydraulic tank filter plug only after the engine has been stopped. Make sure that the hydraulic
tank filter plug is cool before you remove it with your bare hand. Remove the hydraulic tank filter plug slowly
to relieve pressure.
Relieve all pressure in the hydraulic oil system, in the fuel system, or in the cooling system before you
disconnect any lines, fittings, or related items.
Batteries give off flammable fumes that can explode.
Do not smoke while you are checking the battery electrolyte levels.
Electrolyte is an acid. Electrolyte can cause personal injury. Do not allow electrolyte to contact the skin or
the eyes.
Always wear protective glasses when you work on batteries.

Page 27
WELDING REPAIRS
When carrying out welding repairs, carry out the welding in a properly equipped place. The welding should
be performed by a qualified worker. During welding operations, there is the danger of, generation of gas,
fire, or electric shock, so never let an unqualified worker do welding.
The qualified welder must do the following;
• To prevent explosion of the battery, disconnect the battery terminals and remove batteries.
• To prevent generation of gas, remove the paint from the location of the weld.
• If hydraulic equipment, piping or places close to them are heated, a flammable gas or mist will
be generated and there is danger of it catching fire. To avoid this, never subject these places to
heat.
• Do not weld on pipes or on tubes that contain flammable fluids. Do not flame cut on pipes or on
tubes that contain flammable fluids. Before you weld on pipes or on tubes or before you flame
cut on pipes or on tubes, clean the pipes or tubes thoroughly with a nonflammable solvent.
• If heat is applied directly to rubber hoses or piping under pressure, they may suddenly break so
cover them with a fireproof covering.
• Wear protective clothing.
• Make sure there is good ventilation.
• Remove all flammable objects and provide a fire extinguisher.
WARNING FOR COUNTERWEIGHT AND FRONT ATTACHMENT REMOVAL
DANGER!
Daewoo warns any user, that the removal
of the counterweight from the machine,
front attachment or any other part, may
X
affect the stability of the machine. This
could cause unexpected movement,
resulting in death or serious injuries.
Daewoo is not liable for any misuse.
Never remove the counterweight or front
attachment unless the upper structure is X
in-line with the lower structure.
Never rotate the upper structure once the
counterweight or front attachment has
been removed.
BCO0890L
Figure 31

Page 28
PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL,
INSTALLATION, AND STORAGE OF
ATTACHMENTS
Before starting removal and installation of
attachments, decide the team leader.
Do not allow anyone except the authorized
workers close to the machine or attachment.
Place attachments that have been removed
from the machine in a safe place so that they do
not fall. Put up a fence around the attachments
and take other measures to prevent HDO1041L
unauthorized persons from entering. Figure 32
PRECAUTIONS WHEN WORKING ON

MACHINE
When carrying out maintenance operations on
the machine, keep the area around your feet
clean and tidy to prevent you from falling.
Always do the following;
• Do not spill oil or grease.
• Do not leave tools laying about.
• Watch your step when walking.
Never jump down from the machine. When ARO1380L
getting on or off the machine, use the steps and Figure 33
handrails, and maintain a three-point contact
(both feet and one hand or both hands and one
foot) to support yourself securely.
If the job requires it, wear protective clothing.
To prevent injury from slipping or falling, when
working on the hood or covers, never use any
part except the inspection passage fitted with
nonslip pads.
LOCK INSPECTION COVERS

When carrying out maintenance with the inspection cover open, lock the cover securely in position with the
lock bar.
If maintenance work is carried out with the inspection cover open but not locked, there is danger that it may
suddenly close and cause injury if there is a gust of wind.
CRUSHING PREVENTION AND CUTTING PREVENTION

You should always have at least two people working together if the engine must be run during service. One
person needs to remain in the operator’s seat, ready to work the controls or stop the machine and shut off
the engine.
Unless you are instructed otherwise, never attempt adjustments while the machine is moving or while the
engine is running.
Stay clear of all rotating parts and moving parts.

Page 29
Keep objects away from moving fan blades. The fan blades will throw objects and the fan blades can cut
objects.
Do not use a wire rope cable that is kinked or flayed. Wear gloves when you handle a wire rope cable.
When you strike a retainer pin, the retainer pin might fly out. The loose retainer pin can injure personnel.
Make sure that the area is clear of people when you strike a retainer pin. To avoid injury to your eyes, wear
protective glasses when you strike a retainer pin.
SUPPORTS AND BLOCKING FOR WORK

EQUIPMENT
Do not allow weight or equipment loads to
remain suspended. Lower everything to the
ground before leaving the operator’s seat. Do
not use hollow, cracked or unsteady, wobbling
weight supports. Do not work under any
equipment supported solely by a lift jack.
HDO1042L
Figure 34

Page 30
ACTION WHEN ABNORMALLY IS FOUND DURING INSPECTION
If any abnormality is found during inspection, always carry out repairs. In particular, if the machine is used
when there are still problems with the brake or work equipment systems, it may lead to serious injury.
If necessary depending on the type of failure, please contact your Daewoo distributor for repairs.
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH PRESSURE LINE, TUBES AND HOSES

When inspecting or replacing high-pressure piping or hoses, check that the pressure has been released
from the circuit. Failure to release the pressure may lead to serious injury. Always do the following;
• Wear protective glasses and leather gloves.
• Fluid leaks from hydraulic hoses or pressurized components can be difficult to see but
pressurized oil has enough force to pierce the skin and cause serious injury. Always use a piece
of wood or cardboard to check for suspected hydraulic leaks. Never use your hands or expose
your fingers.
• Do not bend high pressure lines. Do not strike high pressure lines. Do not install lines, tubes or
hoses that are bent or damaged.
• Make sure that all clamps, guards and heat shields are installed correctly to prevent vibration,
rubbing against other parts, and excessive heat during operation.
– If any of the following conditions are found, replace the part.
– Damage or leakage from hose end.
– Wear, damage, cutting of covering, or exposure of strengthening wire layer.
– Cover portion is swollen in places.
– There is twisting or crushing at movable parts of hose.
– Foreign material is embedded in the covering.
– Hose end is deformed.
NOTE: Refer to "Hose In-service Lifetime Limit (European Standard ISO 8331 and EN982 CEN)"
in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, for additional European regulations.
X X O
HAOA420L
Figure 35

Page 31
WASTE MATERIALS
Physical contact with used motor oil may pose a X
health risk. Wipe oil from your hands promptly
and wash off any remaining residue.
Used motor oil is an environmental contaminant
and may only be disposed of at approved
collection facilities. To prevent pollution of the
environment, always do the following;
• Never dump waste oil in a sewer
system, rivers, etc.
HAOA470L
• Always put oil drained from your
Figure 36
machine in containers. Never drain
oil directly onto the ground.
• Obey appropriate laws and
regulations when disposing of
harmful materials such as oil, fuel,
solvent, filters, and batteries.

Page 32
BATTERY
BATTERY HAZARD PREVENTION
Battery electrolyte contains diluted sulfuric acid and batteries generate hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas is
highly explosive, and mistakes in handling them can cause serious injury or fire. To prevent problems,
always do the following;
• Do not smoke or bring any flame near the battery.
• When working with batteries, ALWAYS wear safety glasses and rubber gloves.
• If you spill battery electrolyte on yourself or your clothes, immediately flush the area with water.
• If battery electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush them immediately with large quantities of water
and see a doctor at once.
• If you accidentally drink battery electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water or milk, raw egg or
vegetable oil. Call a doctor or poison prevention center immediately.
• When cleaning the top surface of the battery, wipe it with a clean, damp cloth. Never use
gasoline, thinner, or any other organic solvent or detergent.
• Tighten the battery caps securely.
• If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with power from
another source. There is danger that the battery may catch fire.
• When charging the battery or starting with power from another source, let the battery electrolyte
melt and check that there is no leakage of battery electrolyte before starting the operation.
• Always remove the battery from the machine before charging.
Figure 37

Page 33
BOOST STARTING OR CHARGING ENGINE
BATTERIES
If any mistake is made in the method of
connecting the booster cables, it may cause an
explosion or fire. Always do the following;
• Turn off all electrical equipment
before connecting leads to the
battery. This includes electrical
switches on the battery charger or
boost starting equipment.
• When boost-starting from another HAOA310L
machine or vehicle do not allow the Figure 38
two machines to touch. Wear safety
glasses or goggles while required
battery connections are made.
• 24 volt battery units consisting of two series-connected twelve volt batteries have a cable
connecting one positive terminal on one of the 12 volt batteries to a negative terminal on the
other battery. Booster or charger cable connections must be made between the non series-
connected positive terminals and between the negative terminal of the booster battery and the
metal frame of the machine being boosted or charged. Refer to the procedure and illustration in
"Starting Engine With a Booster Cable" in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
• Connect positive cable first when installing cables and disconnect the negative cable first when
removing them. The final cable connection, at the metal frame of the machine being charged or
boost-started, should be as far away from the batteries as possible.

Page 34
TOWING
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TOWING
If any mistake is made in the method of selecting or inspecting the towing wire or in the method of towing,
it may lead to serious personal injury. Always do the following;
• Always use the method of towing given in this Operation and Maintenance Manual. Do not use
any other method.
• Use leather gloves when handling the wire rope.
• When carrying out the preparation work for towing with two or more workers, determine the
signals to use and follow these signals correctly.
• If the engine on the problem machine will not start or there is a failure in the brake system.
always contact your Daewoo distributor.
• Never go between the towing machine and the towed machine during the towing operation.
• It is dangerous to carry out towing on slopes, so select a place where the slope is gradual. If
there is no place where the slope is gradual, carry out operations to reduce the angle of the
slope before starting the towing operation.
• When towing a problem machine, always use a wire rope with a sufficient towing capacity.
• Do not use a frayed, kinked rope or a rope with any loss of diameter.

Page 35
SHIPPING AND TRANSPORTATION
OBEY STATE AND LOCAL OVER-THE-ROAD REGULATIONS
Check state and local restrictions regarding weight, width and length of a load before making any other
preparation for transport.
The hauling vehicle, trailer and load must all be in compliance with local regulations governing the intended
shipping route.
Partial disassembly or tear-down of the excavator may be necessary to meet travel restrictions or particular
conditions at the work site. See the Shop Manual for information on partial disassembly.
Refer to the Transportation and Shipping section of this Operation and Maintenance Manual for information
on loading, unloading and towing.
LIFTING WITH SLING
WARNING!
Improper lifting can allow load to shift and cause injury or damage.
1. Refer to Specification section of Operation and Maintenance Manual for information on weight and
dimensions.
2. Use properly rated cables and slings for lifting.
3. Position machine for a level lift.
4. Lifting cables should have a long enough length to prevent contact with the machine. Spreader bars
may be required.
NOTE: If spreader bars are used, be sure that cables are properly secured to them and that the
angle of the cables is factored into the lift strength.

Page 36
1SPECIFICATIONS
S0202055K
1SPECIFICATIONS FOR
S140W-V / 160W-V
CAUTION!
SPECIFICATIONS FOR S140W-V / 160W-VS0202055K


December 2002
Specifications for S140W-V / 160W-V S0202055K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General Description........................................................................................ 4
Component Location ...................................................................................... 5
SOLAR 140W-V ............................................................................................. 7
General Dimensions................................................................................ 7
Working Range ....................................................................................... 8
SOLAR 160W-V ........................................................................................... 10
General Dimensions.............................................................................. 10
Working Range ..................................................................................... 11
Front Linkage Pin Size ................................................................................. 13
Hydraulic Cylinders ...................................................................................... 14
Engine Specifications ................................................................................... 15
Engine Performance Curves (Per DIN 6270 Standard)................................ 17
Approximate Weight of Workload Materials ................................................. 18
General Specifications ................................................................................. 21
Hydraulic System Component Specifications............................................... 23
System Component Specifications............................................................... 24
Drive System......................................................................................... 24
Swing Mechanism ................................................................................. 24
Brake System........................................................................................ 25
Steering System.................................................................................... 26
Chocking System .................................................................................. 26
Performance Tests and Standards ............................................................... 27
Standards.............................................................................................. 27
Tests...................................................................................................... 28
Test Conditions...................................................................................... 28
Travel Speed Tests ................................................................................ 29
Swing Speed Test ................................................................................. 30
Swing Speed Test ................................................................................. 30
Swing Deceleration Force Test.............................................................. 30
Cylinder Performance Tests .................................................................. 31
S0202055K Specifications for S140W-V / 160W-V

Page 2
Boom Cylinders Test ............................................................................. 31
Arm Cylinder Test.................................................................................. 31
Bucket Cylinder Test.............................................................................. 31
Hydraulic Cylinder Natural Drop Test .................................................... 31

Page 3
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The excavator has three main component sections:
• The Upper Turntable
• The Lower Undercarriage and Power Train
• The Excavator Front-end Attachment
The following illustration identifies main components and their locations. (See Figure 1.)

Page 4
COMPONENT LOCATION
2
0 1
0/
8
5 4 3
7 6 07
06
04
05
03
02
01
0
15 14
28 13 08
1/
1
27 16 12 11
26
23 21 17
25 24 22 2/
2 18
BCS0360L
Figure 1

Page 5
Reference Reference
Description Description
Number Number
1 Radiator and Oil Cooler 21 Guide Link
2 Air Cleaner 22 Link
3 Cab 23 Bucket
4 Battery 24 Side Cutter
5 Fuel Tank 25 Bucket Tooth
6 Fuel Tank Fill Cap 26 Fender
7 Hydraulic Oil Tank 27 Ram Cylinder
8 Pumps 28 Front Axle
9 Counterweight 29 Drive Shaft
10 Engine 30 Wheel Chocks
11 Muffler 31 Swing Lock
12 Control Valve 32 Step
13 Precleaner 33 Swing Bearing
14 Swing Motor 34 Travel Motor
15 Center Joint 35 Transmission
16 Boom Cylinder 36 Rear Axle
17 Boom 37 Blade Cylinder
18 Arm Cylinder 38 Dozer Blade
19 Arm 39 Fender
20 Bucket Cylinder

Page 6
SOLAR 140W-V
GENERAL DIMENSIONS
A
I
E
TWB
3596
D
H
G
F
L J K
B
BCS0370L
Figure 2
General Dimensions
Reference Description Dimension
A Shipping Length 7,250 mm (285.4 in)
B Shipping Width 2,493 mm (98.1 in)
C Shipping Height (Boom) 3,640 mm (143.3 in)
D Height Over Cab 3,116 mm (122.7 in)
E Counter Weight Swing Clearance 2,210 mm (87 in)
F Ground Clearance 350 mm (13.8 in)
G Frame Clearance 1,241 mm (48.9 in)
H Engine Cover Height 2,445 mm (96.3 in)
I Upper Housing Width 2,494 mm (98.2 in)
J Wheel Base 2,800 mm (110.2 in)
K, L Tread Width 1,914 mm (75.4 in)

Page 7
WORKING RANGE
WARNING!
The actual value for "Digging Reach," depends on the stability and support provided by
ground conditions. Digging too far underneath the excavator if soil conditions are wet, loose
or unstable can collapse ground support, which could cause injury and/or equipment
damage.
P/N XXXX-XXXX
DAEWOO
DAEWOO
P/N XXXX-XXXX
7
C
P/N
DAEWOO
XXXX-XXXX
D
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
2
B
3
DAEWOO
P/N XXXX-XXXX
A
BCS0380L
Figure 3

Page 8
Reference Description Dimension
A Maximum Digging Radius 7,510 mm (24’ 8")
B Maximum Digging Depth 4,610 mm (15’ 1")
C Maximum Digging Height 8,020 mm (26’ 4")
D Maximum Dump Height 5,630 mm (18’ 6")

Page 9
SOLAR 160W-V
GENERAL DIMENSIONS
A
I E
D
H
G
F
L J K
B
BEO0030L
Figure 4
General Dimensions
Dimension
Reference Description
Standard Option 1 Option 2
A Shipping Length 7,290 mm 7,232 mm 7,239 mm
(23’ 9") (23’ 7") (23’ 8")
B Shipping Width 2,496 mm (8’ 2"
C Shipping Height 3,962 mm 4,124 mm 3,824 mm
(12’ 10") (13’ 5") (12’ 6")
D Height Over Cab 3,116 mm (10" 2")
E Counter Weight Swing Clearance 2,210 mm (7’ 3")
F Ground Clearance 350 mm (1’ 2")
G Frame Clearance 1,241 mm (4’ 1")
H Engine Cover Height 2,403 mm (7’ 9")
I Upper Housing Width 2,494 mm (8’ 2")
J Wheel Base 2,800 mm (9’ 2")
K, L Tread Width 1,914 mm (6’ 3")
* Standard: 4.6 m mono boom, 2.5 m arm and SAE 0.58 m3 (CECE 0.5 m3) bucket.
Option 1: 4.6 m mono boom, 3.0 m arm and SAE 0.51 m3 (CECE 0.45 m3) bucket.
Option 2: 4.952 m articulated boom, 2.5 m arm and SAE 0.51 m3 (CECE 0.45 m3) bucket.

Page 10
WORKING RANGE
WARNING!
The actual value for "Digging Reach," depends on the stability and support provided by
ground conditions. Digging too far underneath the excavator if soil conditions are wet, loose
or unstable can collapse ground support, which could cause injury and/or equipment
damage.
BEO0040L
Figure 5

Page 11
Dimension
Standard Option 1 Option 2
A Maximum Digging Radius 8,208 mm 8,720 mm 8,708 mm

(26’ 9") (28’ 6") (8’ 5")
B Maximum Digging Depth 5,056 mm 5,513 mm 5,483 mm

(16’ 6") (18’ 1) (17’ 10")
C Maximum Digging Height 8,565 mm 9,009 mm 9,481 mm

(28’ 1") (29’ 6") (31’ 1")
D Maximum Dump Height 6,170 mm 6,596 mm 7,044 mm

(20’ 2") (21’ 6") (23’ 1")
* Standard: 4.6 m mono boom, 2.5 m arm and SAE 0.58 m3 (CECE 0.5 m3) bucket.
Option 1: 4.6 m mono boom, 3.0 m arm and SAE 0.51 m3 (CECE 0.45 m3) bucket.
Option 2: 4.952 m articulated boom, 2.5 m arm and SAE 0.51 m3 (CECE 0.45 m3) bucket.

Page 12
FRONT LINKAGE PIN SIZE
E
C
F
D
A
B
G
H
J
K
BCS0390L
Figure 6
Point Diameter Length

A 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 651.0 mm (25.63 in)
B 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 176.0 mm (6.93 in)
C 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 670.0 mm (26.38 in)
D 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 413.0 mm (16.26 in)
E 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 201.0 mm (7.91 in)
F 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 201.0 mm (7.91 in)
G 65.0 mm (2.56 in) 380.0 mm (14.96 in)
H 65.0 mm (2.56 in) 431.0 mm (16.97 in)
I 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 187.0 mm (7.36 in)
J 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 380.0 mm (14.96 in)
K 65.0 mm (2.56 in) 431.0 mm (16.97 in)

Page 13
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
Boom Arm Bucket Blade Stabilizer Chocking
Quantity 2 1 1 2 2 2
Bore 110 mm 110 mm 95 mm 100 mm 110 mm 80 mm
(4.33 in) (4.33 in) (3.74 in) (3.94 in) (4.33 in) (3.15 in)
Stroke 1030 mm 1085 mm 885 mm 197 mm 310 mm 140 mm
(40.55 in) (42.72 in) (34.84 in) (7.75 in) (12.20 in) (5.51 in)
Rod Dia. 75 mm 75 mm 65 mm 60 mm 70 mm 80 mm
(2.95 in) (2.95 in) (2.56 in) (2.36 in) (2.76 in) (3.15 in)
Closed Length 1525 mm 1660 mm 1365 mm 546 mm 800 mm 331 mm
(60.04 in) (65.35 in) (53.74 in) (21.50 in) (31.50 in) (13.03 in)
Retract. Cushion X O X X X X
Extend. Cushion O O O X X X
Maker Dongyang Dongyang Dongyang Dongyang Dongyang Dongyang

Page 14
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Model Daewoo DB58TIS
Type 4 Cycle In-line 6 Cylinder Diesel, Turbo Charged
Engine Block
Combustion Chamber Reentrant
Combustion System Direct Injection
Cylinder Bore and Stroke 102 mm x 118 mm
(4.00 in x 4.60 in)
Engine Displacement 5,785 cm3 (353 in3)
Direction of Rotation Counterclockwise (viewed facing flywheel)
Compression Ratio 19.5: 1
Compression Pressure (Engine 31 kg/cm2 (440 psi) @ 200 rpm
Cylinder No-Load Test Pressure)
Cylinder Firing Order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Engine Valve Cold Lash Adjustment 0.4 mm (0.0157 in), intake and exhaust
Intake Open @ 10° BTDC
Intake Close @ 42° ABDC
Valve Timing
Exhaust Open @ 50° BTDC
Exhaust Close @ 10° ABDC
Rated Flywheel Horsepower 135 PS @ 2,200 rpm, per DIN 6270;
Minimum No-Load rpm 1100 ±25 rpm
500 N•m, or 51 kg•m @ 1,600 rpm
Torque Output
(369 ft lb @ 1,600 rpm)
Mass (Dry) 460 kg (1014 lb)
Fuel System
Fuel Injection Pump in-line T Type
Fuel Injection Opening Pressure 190 kg/cm2 (2,702 psi)
Fuel Injection Timing 9° BTDC
Cooling System
Injector Nozzle Type Multihole (6 hole-ø0.235)
Lubrication System
Fuel Filter Paper, Element Center Bolt
Governor Mechanical (RSV)
Fuel Consumption 175 g per Hp/hr, @ 2,200 rpm, per DIN 6271
Engine Oil Capacity 19 l (20 qt)
Engine Oil Pressure 4 kg/cm2 (56.9 psi)
Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute/SAE Class CC/CD or
better (Class CD-II, CE, CF-4, CG-4)
Coolant Capacity (Engine only) 12 l (12.7 qt)
Engine Coolant Thermostat Wax-Pellet Type
Coolant, Thermostat Opening 71°C (160°F)

Page 15
Model Daewoo DB58TIS
Electrical System
Batteries 2 x 12 V, 100 AH
Charging System Regulator IC Type (Integrated Circuit)
Alternator 60 amp, 24 V (IC Type)
Starter 4.5 Kw, 24 V, Magnet Type

Page 16
ENGINE PERFORMANCE CURVES (PER DIN 6270
STANDARD)
50 (361.56)
45 (325.38)
TORQUE (kg.m)
40 (289.32)
150 (147.95)
POWER OUTPUT (ps)
100 (98.63)
FUEL CONSUMPTION (g/ps.h)

50 (49.3)
180 (6.35)
170 (5.99)
160 (5.64)
150 (5.29)
1000 1400 1800 2200

REVOLUTION (rpm)
BCS4530L
Figure 7
Condition Specification
Barometric Pressure 760 mm Hg [20°C (68°F)]
Cooling Fan Not Installed
Alternator 24V x 50A
Air Cleaner Installed
Muffler Installed
Performance Standard DIN 6270

Power (Max, Rated) 135.0 ps (133.15 hp) / 2200 rpm
Max. Torque 51 kg•m (369 ft lb) / 1400 rpm
Fuel Consumption (Min. Rated) 175.0 g/ps•h (6.17 oz/hp•h)

Page 17
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF WORKLOAD MATERIALS
IMPORTANT
Weights are approximations of estimated average volume and mass. Exposure to rain, snow or
ground water; settling or compaction due to overhead weight, chemical or industrial processing
or changes due to thermal or chemical transformations could all increase the value of weights
listed in the table.
LOW WEIGHT OR MEDIUM WEIGHT OR HIGH WEIGHT OR

DENSITY DENSITY DENSITY
MATERIAL 1,100 KG/M3 1,600 KG/M3 2,000 KG/M3
(1,850 LB/YD3), OR (2,700 LB/YD3), OR (3,370 LB/YD3), OR
LESS LESS LESS
401 kg/m3
Charcoal --------------------- ---------------------
(695 lb/yd3)
Coke, blast furnace 433 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
size (729 lb/yd3)
449 kg/m3
Coke, foundry size --------------------- ---------------------
(756 lb/yd3)
Coal, bituminous slack, 801 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
piled (1,350 lb/yd3)
Coal, bituminous r. of 881 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
m., piled (1,485 lb/yd3)
897 kg/m3
Coal, anthracite --------------------- ---------------------
(1,512 lb/yd3)
Clay, DRY, in broken 1,009 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
lumps (1,701 lb/yd3)
Clay, DAMP, natural 1,746 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
bed (2,943 lb/yd3)
Cement, Portland, DRY 1,506 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
granular (2,583 lb/yd3)
Cement, Portland, DRY 1,362 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
clinkers (2,295 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Dolomite, crushed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
Earth, loamy, DRY, 1,202 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
loose (2,025 lb/yd3)

Page 18
LESS LESS LESS
1,522 kg/m3
Earth, DRY, packed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,762 kg/m3
Earth, WET, muddy --------------------- ---------------------
(2,970 lb/yd3)
Gypsum, calcined, 961 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
(heated, powder) (1,620 lb/yd3)
Gypsum, crushed to 3 1,522 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
inch size (2,565 lb/yd3)
Gravel, DRY, packed 1,810 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
fragments (3,051 lb/yd3)
Gravel, WET, packed 1,922 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
fragments (3,240 lb/yd3)
Limestone, graded 1,282 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
above 2 (2,160 lb/yd3)
Limestone, graded 1,362 kg/m3

--------------------- ---------------------
1-1/2 or 2 (2,295 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Limestone, crushed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,602 kg/m3
Limestone, fine --------------------- ---------------------
(2,705 lb/yd3)
1,282 kg/m3
Phosphate, rock --------------------- ---------------------
(2,160 lb/yd3)
929 kg/m3
Salt --------------------- ---------------------
(1,566 lb/yd3)
529 kg/m3
Snow, light density --------------------- ---------------------
(891 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Sand, DRY, loose --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,922 kg/m3
Sand, WET, packed --------------------- ---------------------
(3,240 lb/yd3)

Page 19
LESS LESS LESS
1,362 kg/m3
Shale, broken --------------------- ---------------------
(2,295 lb/yd3)
529 kg/m3
Sulphur, broken --------------------- ---------------------
(1,620 lb/yd3)

Page 20
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Shipping Weight 12,700.0 kg (27,999 lb), includes 10% fuel, 4,300 mm (14’
1") mono boom, 2,100 mm (6’ 11") arm, 1,050 mm (3’ 5")
backhoe bucket and dozer
Counterweight 1,600 kg (3,527 lb)
Upper Turntable 4,200 kg (9,259 lb)
Lower Turntable (Including Swing 4,750 kg (10,472 lb)
Bearing)
Operating Weight 12,900 kg (28,440 lb) with full fuel tank and operator
Mono Boom 740 kg (1,631 lb)
Long Mono Boom (Opt), 4,600 mm 780 kg (1,720 lb)
Articulated Boom (Lower) 360 kg (794 lb)
Articulated Boom (Upper) 681 kg (1,501 lb)
Boom Cylinders 110 kg (243 lb) each
Arm (Std.), 2,100 mm (6’ 11") 350 kg (772 lb)
Long Arm (Opt), 2,250 mm (7’ 5") 380 kg (838 lb)
Long Arm (Opt), 2,500 mm (7’ 5") 410 kg (904 lb)
Long Arm (Opt), 3,000 mm (7’ 5") 460 kg (1,014 lb)
Short Arm (Opt), 1,900 mm (6’ 3") 320 kg (705 lb)
Arm Cylinder 146 kg (322 lb)
Bucket (Standard) 0.50 m3 (0.65 yd3) 450 kg (992 lb)
Bucket Cylinder 88 kg (194 lb)
Dozer (Standard) 370 kg (816 lb)
Dozer Cylinder 40 kg (88 lb) each
Stabilizer (Option) 560 kg (1,235 lb)
Stabilizer Cylinder (Option) 50 kg (110 lb) each
Digging Forces:
Bucket Cylinder 81.7 KN or 8,336 kg (18,378 lb) (with 2,100 mm [6’ 11"] or
1,900 mm [6’ 3"] arm)
Arm Cylinder 65.2 KN or 6,652 kg (14,665 lb) with 2,100 mm (6’ 11")
standard arm, 69.3 KN or 7,073 kg (15,593 lb) with 1,900
mm (6’ 3") optional short arm, or 62.7 KN or 6,400 kg
(14,110 lb) with 2,250 mm (7’ 5") optional long arm, 60.9 KN
or 6,210 kg (13,691 lb) with 2,500 mm (8’ 2") optional long
arm, or 54.6 KN or 5,570 kg (12,280 lb) with 3,000 mm (8’
10") optional arm.
Fuel Tank Capacity 280.0 liters (74 U.S. gal.)
Hydraulic Reservoir Capacity 168.0 liters (44.35 U.S. gal.)
Bucket Heaped Capacity Range PCSA 0.3 - 0.76 m3 (2/5 - 1 yd3)
IMPORTANT: Refer to the Load Weight, Bucket and Arm
Length Compatibility Table for information on which bucket
sizes may be used safely with which arm length, for load
material weights.

Page 21
Undercarriage:
Ground Clearance 350 mm (13.8")
Wheel Base 2,800 mm (9’ 2")
Overall Width 2,494 mm (8’ 2")
Dozer Blade Width 2,495 mm (8’ 2")
Tire Size (Std. Double) 8 x 9.00 - 20 - 14PR (OTR)
Tire Size (Opt. Double) 8 x 10.00 - 20 - 14PR (OTR)
Tire Size (Opt. Single) 4 x 18.00 - 19.5 - 14PR (OTR)
Transport Dimensions:
Overall Shipping Length 7,250 mm (23’ 9")
(standard boom and arm)
Overall Shipping Width 2,495 mm (8’ 2")
Overall Shipping Height 3,640 mm (11’ 11")
(to top of cylinder hose)
Transport Loading Ramp 15° angle.
Allowable Slope CAUTION: Refer to Transport Procedure for Safe Shipping
Instructions

Page 22
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
Pilot Pump
Type: Gear Pump
Displacement: 10.0 cm3/rev (0.61 in3/rev)
Max Flow Rate: 22 lpm (5.8 gpm) @ 2,200 rpm
Relief Valve:
40 kg/cm2 (569 psi)
Control Valve
Relief Valves (Main): 350 kg/cm2 (4,978 psi) - travel
330 kg/cm2 (4,692 psi) - all other

Left Side Spools:
Dozer/Outrigger
(22 mm [0.87"] diameter)
Swing
Boom 2
Arm 1
Right Side Spools:
Travel
(22 mm [0.87"] diameter)
Option
Bucket
Boom 1
Arm 2
Overload Relief Pressure:
360 kg/cm2 (5,119 psi)
Boom, Arm, Bucket, Dozer
Remote Travel Control Valve
Type: Pilot Control
Pressure/Stroke: 30 kg/cm2 (427 psi) at 30° pedal angle
Remote Implement Control Valve
Type: Pilot Control
Pressure/Stroke: 28 kg/cm2 (398 psi) at 6.5 mm (0.256")
stroke
Pilot Accumulator
PilotNitrogen Charge: 15 kg/kg/cm2 (213 psi)
Volume:
kg/cm3 (19.5 in3)
Transmission Accumulator
Nitrogen Charge: 8 kg/cm2 (114 psi)
Volume:
750 kg/cm3 (45.8 in3)
Brake Accumulator
Nitrogen Charge: 30 kg/cm2 (426 psi)
Volume:
750 kg/cm3 (45.8 in3)

Page 23
SYSTEM COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
DRIVE SYSTEM
Propeller Shaft (Front and Rear)
Max. Allowable Torque 447.5 kg•m (3,237 ft lb)
Max. Joint Angle 22.5°
Max. Rotating Speed 5,000 rpm
Tire and Wheel; Standard
Type Double
Tire 9.00 - 20 - 14PR, OTR, Tube
Rim 7.00T x 20
Disc Offset 162 mm (6.38")
Tire and Wheel; Option
Type Double
Tire 10.00 - 20 - 14PR, OTR, Tube
Rim 7.00T x 20
Tire and Wheel; Option
Type Wide Single
Tire 18 - 19.5 - 14PR, OTR, Tubeless
Rim 14.00 x 19.5
SWING MECHANISM
Swing Reduction Gear
Drive Type 2-Stage Planetary Gear
Reduction Ratio 19.00
Max. Output Speed 102.8 rpm
Max. Output Torque 522.5 kg•m (3,779 ft lb)
Weight 74 kg (163 lb)
Pinion Gear (Built in Reduction Gear)
Type Spur Gear
Gear P.C.D Dia 120 mm (4.72")
No. of Teeth 10
Module 12

Page 24
Swing Bearing
Type Ball Bearing Internal Gear
Gear P.C.D Dia 960 mm (37.79")
No. of Teeth 80
Ball Dia. Dia 28.575 mm (1.125")
Race O.D. Dia 1,200 m (47.24")
Race Height 81 mm (3.19")
Static Thrust Load 364,500 kg (803,584 lb)
Weight 210 kg (463 lb)
Swing Performance
Max Swing Speed 12.5 rpm
Max Swing Torque 4,224 kg•m (30,552 ft lb)
Brake
Control Type Pilot Pressure, Wet Disc
Brake Torque 22 kg•m (159 ft lb)
Brake Release Pressure 22 kg/cm2 (313 psi)
Swing Safety Lock
Type Manual Pin Locking
Motor Accessory
Brake Time Delayer 5 (+3) Sec.
Make Up Valve Characteristic 3 kg/cm2 (43 psi) at 120 lpm (31.7 gpm)
BRAKE SYSTEM
Accumulator
Nitrogen Charge Pressure 30 kg/cm2 (427 psi)
Volume 0.75 l (0.79 qt)
Service Brake Valve
Max Output Pressure 60 kg/cm2 (853 psi)
Brake Filter
Filtration Rating 20 micron
Bypass Valve Pressure 3.5 kg/cm2 (50 psi)
System and Pressure

System Full Hydraulic, Dual Line
Service Brake Pressure 60 kg/cm2 (853 psi)
Digging Brake Pressure
60 kg/cm2 (853 psi)
Brake Distance
5.8 m (19’ 0") at 24 km/h (15 mi/h)

Page 25
STEERING SYSTEM
Steering Cylinder (Built-in Front Axle)
Bore Size 80 mm (3.15")
Rod Size 40 mm (1.57")
Stroke 92 mm (3.62")
Maximum Pressure 180 kg/cm2 (2,560 psi)
CHOCKING SYSTEM
Chocking Valve
Maker and Model HANIL, HIH1246
Maximum Working Pressure 400 kg/cm2 (5,689 psi)
Check Valve Cracking Pressure
2 kg/cm2 (28 psi)
Make-up Pressure
4.5 kg/cm2 (64 psi)
Oscillating Angle ± 7°

Page 26
PERFORMANCE TESTS AND STANDARDS
STANDARDS
1. Main Relief Pressure;
normal operation: 330 bar (4,786 psi);
with high travel "Pressure Up": 350 bar (5,076 psi).
2. Actuator Speeds
Operation Unit Power Mode Standard Mode

Boom Up Seconds 3.0 ±0.4 3.2 ±0.4
Down Seconds 3.0 ±0.4 3.2 ±0.4
Articulated Up Seconds 2.9 ±0.4 3.3 ±0.4
Boom (Lower) Down Seconds 3.3 ±0.4 3.3 ±0.4
Articulated Up Seconds 6.4 ±0.4
Boom (Upper) Down Seconds 8.2 ±0.4
Arm Dump Seconds 2.7 ±0.4 3.0 ±0.4
Crowd Seconds 2.1 ±0.4 2.3 ±0.4
Bucket Dump Seconds 2.0 ±0.4 2.2 ±0.4
Crowd Seconds 3.5 ±0.4 3.7 ±0.4
Dozer Up Seconds 3.0 ±0.4
Down Seconds 2.5 ±0.4
Swing (3 Revolutions) Seconds 13.5 ±1.0 14.8 ±1.0
Stabilizer Up Seconds 2.5 ±0.4
Down Seconds 3.0 ±0.4
Propeller Shaft High rpm (Min.) 2,760 ±50
Low rpm (Min.) 740 ±30
Breaking Distance M 5.8 @ 24 km/h (14.9 MPH)

Page 27
TESTS
Evaluation of equipment performance and operating condition can be made by running the excavator
through a series of different tests, and recording results with a stop watch and tape measure. Compare
results of performance tests against the specifications and standards, which are for equipment in new or
renewed condition.
TEST CONDITIONS
1. All tests should be performed on a flat, level, firmly supporting ground surface.
BCS0400L
Figure 8
2. All recommended, applicable maintenance and adjustment service should be completed before
testing.
3. Hydraulic fluid and engine oil should be of appropriate viscosity for ambient weather conditions.
Warm up hydraulic oil to standard operating temperature, between 45° to 55°C (112° to 135°F).
4. Run all tests with the engine speed control set to maximum rpm.
5. Repeat tests with Power Mode engine control settings at both Standard Mode (standard work mode)
and Power Mode (high speed mode). Travel speed tests should also be repeated at both high and low
speed.

Page 28
TRAVEL SPEED TESTS
Travel Mode Speed

High Speed 37 km/h (23 MPH)
Low Speed 10 km/h (6.21 MPH)
1. Block up all wheels securely.

2. Check that rpm at drive shaft is above;
2,760 rpm at high speed and above;
740 ±50 rpm at low speed.
1 2
3
4
BCS0410L
Figure 9
1. Travel Motor
2. Transmission
3. Propeller Shaft
4. Front Axle
5. Center Joint

Page 29
SWING SPEED TEST
B
BCS0420L
Figure 10
SWING SPEED TEST

Extend the arm cylinder completely and retract the bucket cylinder, as shown, to test swing speed. The
lowest point of the bucket will be approximately 1.5 m (just over 3’) off the ground.
Use paint marks at the same point on the turntable and undercarriage, or select alternate measuring
locations and use a stopwatch to time 3 full 360° rotations. The time required for 3 revolutions is 13.5
seconds in Power Mode and 14.8 seconds in Standard Mode.
SWING DECELERATION FORCE TEST

With the boom, arm and bucket in the same
position as for the swing speed test, rotate the
turntable so that the boom is evenly centered,
pointing straight ahead. Locate the 90°
reference point, perpendicular to the boom.
Mark the turntable and undercarriage with paint
at the 90° point.
Make several attempts to rotate the turntable
exactly 90°, starting from the boom straight
ahead position. Engage the swing lever and
brake at the 90° point, at "swing stop" (4).
Record how far the turntable drifts past the stop
point, measuring the distance between paint Figure 11
marks. Maximum distance should be less than
700 mm (27 1/2") or less, in both Power Mode H
and Standard Mode.

Page 30
CYLINDER PERFORMANCE TESTS
NOTE: All tests are performed with standard boom, arm and bucket configuration. The bucket
should be empty.
BOOM CYLINDERS TEST

The starting points for the test are with the boom and arm extended away from the excavator, and the
bucket curled inward. The arm cylinder should be fully retracted; boom and bucket cylinders must be
extended. Test movement in both directions, several times, and average results for both Standard Mode
and Power Mode.
ARM CYLINDER TEST

Start with the boom up and the arm cylinder fully retracted. Test movement in both directions several times,
between the "crowd" and "dump" positions, and average the results of both tests, in both standard and
extra-duty power modes.
BUCKET CYLINDER TEST

Start with the boom up and the teeth of the bucket hanging vertically, 500 mm (1.5’ - 2’) above the ground.
Dump and crowd the bucket several times, and average results, for both standard and extra-duty power
modes.
Operation Power Mode Standard Mode

Boom up 3.0 ±0.4 Seconds 3.2 ±0.4 Seconds
Boom down 3.0 ±0.4 Seconds 3.2 ±0.4 Seconds
Arm dump 2.7 ±0.4 Seconds 3.0 ±0.4 Seconds
Arm crowd 2.1 ±0.4 Seconds 2.3 ±0.4 Seconds
Bucket dump 2.0 ±0.4 Seconds 2.2 ±0.4 Seconds
Bucket crowd 3.5 ±0.4 Seconds 3.7 ±0.4 Seconds
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER NATURAL DROP TEST

To check boom and arm cylinder tightness against the specified performance standard for new cylinders,
put a full load of dirt in the bucket and move the attachment cylinders so that the arm cylinder is extended
20 - 50 mm (1" - 2") and boom cylinders are retracted the same amount, 20 - 50 mm (1" - 2"). The top of
the bucket should be approximately 2 m (6’ - 7’) off the ground.
Turn off the engine and measure cylinder drop after 5 minutes. Maximum cylinder drops are as follows:
boom and bucket 20 mm (0.787"); arm 40 mm (1.57"); and blade 10 mm (0.39").

Page 31
Page 32
1GENERAL MAINTENANCE
S0302000
R1
1GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CAUTION!
GENERAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURESS0302000

ALL MODELS ALL RANGES

May 2002
General Maintenance Procedures S0302000

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Welding Precautions and Guidelines ............................................................. 3

Hydraulic System - General Precautions ....................................................... 4
Maintenance Service and Repair Procedure ................................................. 5
General Precautions ............................................................................... 5
Hydraulic System Cleanliness and Oil Leaks................................................. 6
Maintenance Precautions for Hydraulic System Service ........................ 6
Oil Leakage Precautions ......................................................................... 6
Cleaning and Inspection................................................................................. 7
General Guidelines ................................................................................. 7
Bearing inspection .................................................................................. 8
S0302000 General Maintenance Procedures

Page 2
WELDING PRECAUTIONS AND GUIDELINES
IMPORTANT
To avoid accidents, personal injury and the possibility of causing damage to the machine or to
components, welding must only be performed by properly trained and qualified personnel, who
possess the correct certification (when required) for the specific welding fabrication or
specialized repair being performed.
WARNING!
Structural elements of the machine may be built from a variety of steels. These could contain
unique alloys or may have been heat treated to obtain particular strength characteristics. It is
extremely important that welding repairs on these types of steel are performed with the proper
procedures and equipment. If repairs are performed incorrectly, structural weakening or other
damage to the machine (that is not always readily visible) could be caused. Always consult
Daewoo After Sales Service before welding on integral components (loader arm, frames, car
body, track frames, turntable, attachment, etc.) of the machine. It is possible that some types of
structurally critical repairs may require Magnetic Particle or Liquid Penetrant testing, to make
sure there are no hidden cracks or damage, before the machine can be returned to service.
CAUTION!
Always perform welding procedures with the proper safety equipment on hand. Adequate
ventilation and a dry work area are absolutely essential. Keep a fire extinguisher nearby and
always wear protective clothing and the recommended type of eye protection.

Page 3
CAUTION!
Observe the following safety precautions:
1. Use extra caution and adequate safety shielding when welding near fuel and oil tanks,
batteries, hydraulic piping lines or other fire hazards.
2. Never weld when the engine is running. Battery cables must be disconnected before the
welding procedure is started.
3. Never weld on a wet or damp surface. The presence of moisture causes hydrogen
embrittlement and structural weakening of the weld.
4. If welding procedures are being performed near cylinder rods, operator’s cab window areas
or any other assemblies that could be damaged by weld spatters, use adequate shielding
protection in front of the assembly.
5. During equipment setup, always attach ground cables directly to the area or component
being welded to prevent arcing through bearings, bushings, or spacers.
6. Always use correct welding rods for the type of weld being performed and observe
recommended precautions and time constraints. AWS Class E7018 welding rods for low
alloy to medium carbon steel must be used within two hours after removal from a freshly
opened container. Class E11018G welding rods for T-1 and other higher strength steel must
be used within 1/2 hour.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

Always maintain oil level in the system at recommended levels. Assemblies that operate under heavy
loads, at high speed, with extremely precise dimensional tolerances between moving parts - pistons and
cylinders, or shoes and swash plates, for example - can be severely damaged if oil supply runs dry.
Assemblies can be run dry and damaged severely in a very short time when piping or hoses are
disconnected to repair leaks and/or replace damaged components. Hoses that are inadvertently switched
during disassembly (inlet for outlet and vice versa), air introduced into the system or assemblies that are
low on oil due to neglect or careless maintenance, could all produce sufficient fluid loss to cause damage.
When starting the engine (particularly after long layoff or storage intervals), make sure that all hydraulic
controls and operating circuits are in neutral, or "OFF." That will prevent pumps or other components that
may be temporarily oil-starved from being run under a load.
Replacement of any hydraulic system component could require thorough cleaning, flushing, and some
amount of pre-filling with fresh, clean oil if the protective seal on replacement parts has obviously been
broken or if seal integrity may have been compromised. When protective seals are removed before
installation and reassembly, inspect all replacement parts carefully, before they are installed. If the
replacement part is bone dry (with no trace of factory pre-lube) or has been contaminated by dirt or by
questionable oils, flushing and pre-filling with clean hydraulic fluid is recommended.
Vibration, irregular or difficult movement or unusual noise from any part of the hydraulic system could be
an indication of air in the system (and many other types of problems). As a general precaution (and to help
minimize the risk of potential long-term damage), allow the engine to run at no-load idle speed immediately
after initial start-up. Hydraulic fluid will circulate, releasing any air that may have been trapped in the
system before load demands are imposed.
A daily walk-around pre-start equipment safety inspection, including a quick visual scan for any exterior
evidence of leaking hydraulic fluid, can help extend the service life of system components.

Page 4
IMPORTANT
Hydraulic system operating conditions (repetitive cycling, heavy work loads, fluid circulating
under high pressure) make it extremely critical that dust, grit or any other type of contamination
be kept out of the system. Observe fluid and filter change maintenance interval
recommendations and always pre-clean any exterior surface of the system before it is exposed
to air. For example, the reservoir filler cap and neck area, hoses that have to be disassembled,
and the covers and external surfaces of filter canisters should all be cleaned before
disassembly.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURE

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Fluid level and condition should always be checked whenever any other type of maintenance service or
repair is being performed.
NOTE: If the unit is being used in an extreme temperature environment (in sub-freezing climates
or in high temperature, high humidity tropical conditions), frequent purging of moisture
condensation from the hydraulic reservoir drain tap should be a regular and frequent part
of the operating routine. In more moderate, temperate climates, draining reservoir
sediment and moisture may not be required more than once or twice every few months.
Inspect drained oil and used filters for signs of abnormal coloring or visible fluid contamination at every oil
change. Abrasive grit or dust particles will cause discoloration and darkening of the fluid. Visible
accumulations of dirt or grit could be an indication that filter elements are overloaded (and will require more
frequent replacement) or that disintegrating bearings or other component failures in the hydraulic circuit
may be imminent or have already occurred. Open the drain plugs on the main pump casings and check
and compare drain oil in the pumps. Look for evidence of grit or metallic particles.
Vibration or unusual noise during operation could be an indication of air leaking into the circuit (Refer to the
appropriate Troubleshooting section for component or unit for procedures.), or it may be evidence of a
defective pump. The gear-type pilot pump could be defective, causing low pilot pressure, or a main pump
broken shoe or piston could be responsible.
NOTE: If equipped, indicated operating pressure, as shown on the multidisplay digital gauge on
the Instrument Panel ("F-Pump" and "R-Pump") will be reduced as a result of a
mechanical problem inside the pump. However, pressure loss could also be due to
cavitation or air leakage, or other faults in the hydraulic system.
Check the exterior case drain oil in the main pumps. If no metallic particles are found, make sure there is
no air in the system. Unbolt and remove the tank return drain line from the top part of the swing motor, both
travel motors and each main pump. If there is air in any one of the drain lines, carefully pre-fill the
assembly before bolting together the drain line piping connections. Run the system at low rpm.

Page 5
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CLEANLINESS AND OIL LEAKS
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS FOR HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SERVICE
Whenever maintenance, repairs or any other type of troubleshooting or service is being performed, it’s
important to remember that the hydraulic system - including both the interior and exterior surfaces of
assemblies, and every drop of operating fluid - must be protected from contamination.
Dust and other foreign contaminants are major contributors to premature wear in hydraulic circuits. The
narrow tolerances, rapidly moving parts and high operating pressures of the system require that fluid be
kept as clean as possible. The performance and dependability of the machine (and the service lift of
individual components) can be noticeably reduced if proper precautions are not observed:
• Use a safe, noncombustible, evaporative-type, low-residue solvent and thoroughly clean
exterior surfaces of assemblies before any part of the circuit is opened up or disassembled.
NOTE: It’s just as important to clean the cap and reservoir top before routine fluid changes or
quick checks as it is before major repairs. (Accumulated dirt attracts moisture, oil and
other fluids - and more dirt.)
• Keep dismantled parts covered during disassembly. Use clean caps, plugs or tape to protect the
disconnected openings of flanges, manifolds and piping.
• Do not allow cleaning solvents or other fluids to mix with the oil in the system. Use clean oil to
flush any traces of solvent or other residue before reassembly.
• If metal or rubber fragments are found in the system, flush and replace all fluid in the system
and troubleshoot the circuit to identify the source of contamination.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that cleaning solvents will be compatible with rubber materials used in the hydraulic
system. Many petroleum based compounds can cause swelling, softening, or other deterioration
of system sealing elements, such as O-rings, caps and other seals.
OIL LEAKAGE PRECAUTIONS

Oil that is visibly seeping from joints or seals should always serve as a "red flag" alarm.
Leaks must alert the machine operator and maintenance crew that air, water and dirt have an open, free
passageway through which to enter the circuit. Harsh, corrosive salt air, freezing and thawing
condensation cycles and working environments that are full of fine dust are especially hazardous. Clogging
of valve spools or external piping (especially pilot circuit piping) can gradually diminish or very suddenly
put a complete stop to normal hydraulic function. You can prevent having to make these types of repairs by
following recommended assembly procedures:
1. Use new O-rings and oil seals whenever hydraulic assemblies are rebuilt.
2. Prepare joint surfaces before assembly by checking alignment and flatness. Clean and repair
corrosion or any other damage.
3. Follow bolt torque recommendations and all other assembly requirements.

Page 6
NOTE: Grease lip seals before
assembly.
Figure 1
CLEANING AND INSPECTION

GENERAL GUIDELINES
All parts must be clean to permit an effective inspection. During assembly, it is very important that no dirt or
foreign material enters unit being assembled. Even minute particles can cause malfunction of close fitting
parts such as thrust bearing, matched parts, etc.
WARNING!
Care should be exercised to avoid inhalation of vapors, exposure to skin and creating fire
hazards when using solvent type cleaners.
1. Clean all metal parts thoroughly using a suitable cleaning fluid. It is recommended that parts be
immersed in cleaning fluid and moved up and down slowly until all oils, lubricants, and/or foreign
materials are dissolved and parts are thoroughly clean.
2. For bearings that can be removed, soak them in a suitable cleaning fluid for a minute or two, then
remove bearings from cleaning fluid and strike flat against a block of wood to dislodge solidified
particles of lubricant. Immerse again in cleaning fluid to flush out particles. Repeat above operation
until bearings are thoroughly clean. To dry bearings, use moisture-free compressed air. Be careful to
direct air stream across bearing to avoid spinning bearings that are not lubricated. DO NOT SPIN
BEARINGS WHEN DRYING; bearings may be rotated slowly by hand to facilitate drying process.
3. Carefully inspect all bearing rollers, cages and cups for wear, chipping or nicks to determine
condition. Do not replace a bearing cone or cup individually without replacing mating cup or cone at
the same time. After inspection, dip bearings in light weight oil and wrap in clean lintless cloth or
paper to protect them until installation.
For those bearings that are to be inspected in place; inspect bearings for roughness of rotation,
scoring, pitting, cracked or chipped races. If any of these defects are found, replace bearings. Also
inspect defective bearing housing and/or shaft for grooved, galled or burred conditions that indicate
bearing has been turning in its housing or on its shaft.
4. It is more economical to replace oil seals, O-rings, sealing rings, gaskets and snap rings when unit is
disassembled than waiting for premature failures; refer to latest Micro Fiche and/or Parts Book for
replacement items. Be extremely careful when installing sealing members, to avoid cutting or

Page 7
scratching. Curling under of any seal lip will seriously impair its efficiency. Apply a thin coat of Loctite
#120 to outer diameter, of metal casing, on oil seals to assure an oil tight fit into retainer. Use extreme
care not to get Loctite on lips of oil seals. If this happens, that portion of the seal will become brittle
and allow leakage.
When replacing lip type seals, make sure spring loaded side is towards oil to be sealed.
5. If available, use magna-flux or similar process for checking for cracks that are not visible to the eye.
Examine teeth on all gears carefully for wear, pitting, chipping, nicks, cracks or scores. Replace all
gears showing cracks or spots where case hardening has worn through. Small nicks may be
removed with suitable hone. Inspect shafts and quills to make certain they have not been sprung,
bent, or splines twisted, and that shafts are true.
NOTE: Spline wear is not considered detrimental except where it affects tightness of splined
parts.
Inspect thrust washers for distortion, scores, burs, and wear. Replace thrust washer if defective or
worn.
6. Inspect bores and bearing surfaces of cast parts and machined surfaces for scratches, wear, grooves
and dirt. Remove any scratches and burrs with crocus cloth. Remove foreign material. Replace any
parts that are deeply grooved or scratched which would affect their operation.
BEARING INSPECTION
The conditions of the bearing are vital to the smooth and efficient operation of the machinery. When any
component containing bearings is disassembled, always carefully examine the condition of the bearings
and all of its components for wear and damage.
Once the bearing is removed, clean all parts thoroughly using a suitable cleaning solution. If the bearing is
excessively dirty soak the bearing assembly in a light solution and move the bearing around until all
lubricants and or foreign materials are dissolved and the parts are thoroughly clean.
When drying bearings, moisture free compressed air can be used. Be careful not to direct the air in a
direction which will force the bearing to dry spin while not being properly lubricated.
After the bearings have been cleaned and dried, carefully inspect all bearing rollers, cages and cups for
wear, chipping or nicks. If the bearing cannot be removed and is to be inspected in place, check foe
roughness of rotation, scoring, pitting, cracked or chipped races. If any of these defects are found replace
the whole bearing assembly. NEVER replace the bearing alone without replacing the mating cup or the
cone at the same time.
After inspection lightly coat the bearing and related parts with oil and wrap in a clean lintless cloth or paper
and protect them from moisture and other foreign materials until installation.
It is also important to inspect the bearing housing and/or shaft for grooved, galled or burred conditions that
indicate that the bearing has been turning in its housing or on its shaft.
If available, use magna-flux or similar process for checking for cracks that are not visible to the naked eye.
The following illustrations will aid in identifying and diagnosing some of the bearing related problems.
NOTE: The illustrations will only show tapered roller bearings, but the principles of identifying,
diagnosing and remedying the defects are common to all styles and types of bearings.

Page 8
Normal Bearing
Smooth even surfaces with no discoloration or
marks.
Figure 2
Bent Cage
Cage damage due to improper handling or tool
usage.
Replace bearing.
Figure 3
Figure 4
Galling
Metal smears on roller ends due to overheat,
lubricant failure or overload.
Replace bearing - check seals and check for
proper lubrication.
Figure 5

Page 9
Abrasive Step Wear
Pattern on roller ends caused by fine abrasives.
Clean all parts and housings, check all parts
and housings, check seals and bearings and
replace if leaking, rough or noisy.
Figure 6
Etching
Bearing surfaces appear gray or grayish black
in color with related etching away of material
usually at roller spacing.
Replace bearings - check seals and check for
proper lubrication.
Figure 7
Misalignment
Outer race misalignment due to foreign object.
Clean related parts and replace bearing. Make
sure races are properly seated.
Figure 8
Indentations
Surface depressions on race and rollers caused
by hard particles of foreign materials.
Clean all parts and housings, check seals and
replace bearings if rough or noisy.
Figure 9

Page 10
Fatigue Spalling
Flaking of surface metal resulting from fatigue.
Replace bearing - clean all related parts.
Figure 10
Brinelling
Surface indentations in raceway caused by
rollers either under impact loading or vibration
while the bearing is not rotating.
Replace bearing if rough or noisy.
Figure 11
Cage Wear
Wear around outside diameter of cage and roller
pockets caused by abrasive material and
inefficient lubrication.
Replace bearings - check seals.
Figure 12
Abrasive Roller Wear
Pattern on races and rollers caused by fine
abrasives.
Clean all parts and housings, check seals and
bearings and replace if leaking, rough or noisy.
Figure 13

Page 11
Cracked Inner Race
Race cracked due to improper fit, cocking or
poor bearing seat.
Replace all parts and housings, check seals and
bearings and replace if leaking.
Figure 14
Smears
Smearing of metal due to slippage caused by
poor fitting, lubrication, overheating, overloads
or handling damage.
Replace bearings, clean related parts and check
for proper fit and lubrication.
Replace shaft if damaged.
Figure 15
Frettage
Corrosion set up by small relative movement of
parts with no lubrication.
Replace bearing. Clean all related parts. Check
seals and check for proper lubrication.
Figure 16

Page 12
Heat Discoloration
Heat discoloration can range from faint yellow to
dark blue resulting from overload or incorrect
lubrication.
Excessive heat can cause softening of races or
rollers.
To check for loss of temper on races or rollers, a
simple file test may be made. A file drawn over a
tempered part will grab and cut metal, whereas
a file drawn over a hard part will glide readily
with no metal cutting.
Figure 17
Replace bearing if over heating damage is
indicated. Check seals and other related parts
for damage.
Stain Discoloration
Discoloration can range from light brown to
black caused by incorrect lubrication or
moisture.
if the stain can be removed by light polishing or
if no evidence of overheating is visible, the
bearing can be reused.
Check seals and other related parts for damage.
Figure 18

Page 13
Page 14
S0309000
R1
1STANDARD TORQUES
CAUTION!
STANDARD TORQUESS0309000
ALL MODELS ALL RANGES

May 2002
Standard Torques S0309000

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Torque Values for Standard Metric Fasteners ................................................ 3

Torque Values for Standard U.S. Fasteners ................................................... 4
Type 8 Phosphate Coated Hardware ............................................................. 6
Torque Values for Hose Clamps ..................................................................... 7
Torque Values for Split Flanges...................................................................... 8
Torque Wrench Extension Tools..................................................................... 9
Torque Multiplication ............................................................................... 9
Other Uses for Torque Wrench Extension Tools ................................... 10
Tightening Torque Specifications (Metric) ............................................. 10
S0309000 Standard Torques

Page 2
TORQUE VALUES FOR STANDARD METRIC
FASTENERS
NOTE: The units for the torque values are kg•m (ft lb).
Grade
Dia. x
Pitch (mm)
3.6 4.6 4.8 5.6 5.8 6.6 6.8 6.9 8.8 10.9 12.9
(4A) (4D) (4S) (5D) (5S) (6D) (6S) (6G) (8G) (10K) (12K)
0.15 0.16 0.25 0.22 0.31 0.28 0.43 0.48 0.50 0.75 0.90
M5 x Std.
(1.08) (1.15) (1.80) (1.59) (2.24) (2.02) (3.11) (3.47) (3.61) (5.42) (6.50)
0.28 0.30 0.45 0.40 0.55 0.47 0.77 0.85 0.90 1.25 1.50
M6 x Std.
(2.02) (2.16) (3.25) (2.89) (3.97) (3.39) (5.56) (6.14) (6.50) (9.04) (10.84)
0.43 0.46 0.70 0.63 0.83 0.78 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.95 2.35
M7 x Std.
(3.11) (3.32) (5.06) (4.55) (6.00) (5.64) (8.67) (9.40) (10.12) (14.10) (16.99)
0.70 0.75 1.10 1.00 1.40 1.25 1.90 2.10 2.20 3.10 3.80
M8 x Std.
(5.06) (5.42) (7.95) (7.23) (10.12) (9.04) (13.74) (15.18) (15.91) (22.42) (27.48)
0.73 0.80 1.20 1.00 1.50 1.35 2.10 2.30 2.40 3.35 4.10
M8 x 1
(5.28) (5.78) (8.67) (7.23) (10.84) (9.76) (15.18) (16.63) (17.35) (24.23) (29.65)
1.35 1.40 2.20 1.90 2.70 2.35 3.70 4.20 4.40 6.20 7.20
M10 x Std.
(9.76) (10.12) (15.91) (13.74) (19.52) (19.99) (26.76) (30.37) (31.18) (44.84) (52.07)
1.50 1.60 2.50 2.10 3.10 2.80 4.30 4.90 5.00 7.00 8.40
M10 x 1
(10.84) (11.57) (18.08) (15.18) (22.42) (20.25) (31.10) (35.44) (36.16) (50.63) (60.75)
2.40 2.50 3.70 3.30 4.70 4.20 6.30 7.20 7.50 10.50 12.50
M12 x Std.
(17.35) (18.08) (26.76) (23.86) (33.99) (30.37) (45.56) (52.07) (54.24) (75.94) (90.41)
2.55 2.70 4.00 3.50 5.00 4.50 6.80 7.70 8.00 11.20 13.40
M12 x 1.5
(18.44) (19.52) (28.93) (25.31) (36.16) (32.54) (49.18) (55.69) (57.86) (81.00) (96.92)
3.70 3.90 6.00 5.20 7.50 7.00 10.00 11.50 12.00 17.00 20.00
M14 x Std.
(26.76) (28.20) (13.23) (37.61) (54.24) (50.63) (72.33) (83.17) (86.79) (122.96) (144.66)
4.10 4.30 6.60 5.70 8.30 7.50 11.10 12.50 13.00 18.50 22.00
M14 x 1.5
(29.65) (31.10) (47.73) (41.22) (60.03) (54.24) (80.28) (90.41) (94.02) (11.26) (158.12)
5.60 6.00 9.00 8.00 11.50 10.50 15.50 17.90 18.50 26.00 31.00
M16 x Std.
(40.50) (43.39) (65.09) (57.86) (83.17) (75.94) (112.11) (129.47) (133.81) (188.05) (224.22)
6.20 6.50 9.70 8.60 12.50 11.30 17.00 19.50 20.00 28.00 35.50
M16 x 1.5
(44.84) (47.01) (70.16) (62.20) (90.41) (81.73) (122.96) (141.04) (144.66) (202.52) (256.77)
7.80 8.30 12.50 11.00 16.00 14.50 21.00 27.50 28.50 41.00 43.00
M18 x Std.
(56.41) (60.03) (90.41) (79.56) (115.72) (104.87) (151.89) (198.90) (206.14) (296.55) (311.01)
9.10 9.50 14.40 12.50 18.50 16.70 24.50 27.50 28.50 41.00 49.00
M18 x 1.5
(65.82) (68.71) (104.15) (90.41) (133.81) (120.79) (177.20) (198.90) (206.14) (296.55) (354.41)
11.50 12.00 18.00 16.00 22.00 19.00 31.50 35.00 36.00 51.00 60.00
M20 x Std.
(83.17) (86.79) (130.19) (115.72) (159.12) (137.42) (227.83) (253.15) (260.38) (368.88) (433.98)
12.80 13.50 20.50 18.00 25.00 22.50 35.00 39.50 41.00 58.00 68.00
M20 x 1.5
(92.58) (97.64) (148.27) (130.19) (180.82) (162.74) (253.15) (285.70) (296.55) (419.51) (491.84)
15.50 16.00 24.50 21.00 30.00 26.00 42.00 46.00 49.00 67.00 75.00
M22 x Std.
(112.11) (115.72) (177.20) (151.89) (216.99) (188.05) (303.78) (332.71) (354.41) (484.61) (542.47)
17.00 18.50 28.00 24.00 34.00 29.00 47.00 52.00 56.00 75.00 85.00
M22 x 1.5
(122.96) (133.81) (202.52) (173.59) (245.92) (209.75) (339.95) (44.76) (405.04) (542.47) (614.80)
20.50 21.50 33.00 27.00 40.00 34.00 55.00 58.00 63.00 82.00 92.00
M24 x Std.
(148.27) (155.50) (238.68) (195.29) (289.32) (245.92) (397.81) (419.51) (455.67) (593.10) (655.43)
23.00 35.00 37.00 31.00 45.00 38.00 61.00 67.00 74.00 93.00 103.00
M24 x 1.5
(166.35) (253.15) (267.62) (224.22) (325.48) (202.52) (441.21) (484.61) (535.24) (672.66) (744.99)

Page 3
TORQUE VALUES FOR STANDARD U.S. FASTENERS
S.A.E. BOLT HEAD
TYPE DESCRIPTION
GRADE MARKING
WILL HAVE NO MARKINGS IN THE CENTER OF THE

HEAD.
1 1 OR 2
Low or Medium Carbon Steel Not Heat Treated.
WILL HAVE THREE RADIAL LINES.

5 5
Quenched and Tempered Medium Carbon Steel.
WILL HAVE 6 RADIAL LINES.

8 8
Quenched and Tempered Special Carbon or Alloy Steel.
Recommended torque, in foot pounds, for all Standard Application Nuts and Bolts, provided:
1. All thread surfaces are clean and lubricated with SAE-30 engine oil. (See Note.)
2. Joints are rigid, that is, no gaskets or compressible materials are used.
3. When reusing nuts or bolts, use minimum torque values.
NOTE: Multiply the standard torque by:
0.65 when finished jam nuts are used.
0.70 when Molykote, white lead or similar mixtures are used as lubricants.
0.75 when parkerized bolts or nuts are used.
0.85 when cadmium plated bolts or nuts and zinc bolts w/waxed zinc nuts are used.
0.90 when hardened surfaces are used under the nut or bolt head.
NOTE: When reusing bolts and nuts in service, use minimum torque values.

Page 4
The following General Torque Values must be used in all cases where SPECIAL TORQUE VALUES are
not given
NOTE: TORQUE VALUES LISTED THROUGHOUT THIS MANUAL ARE LUBRICATED

(WET) THREADS; VALUES SHOULD BE INCREASED 1/3 FOR NONLUBRICATED
(DRY) THREADS.
HEAT TREATED MATERIAL GRADE 5 AND GRADE 8
GRADE 5 GRADE 8
THREAD SIZE
(3 RADIAL DASHES ON HEAD) (6 RADIAL DASHES ON HEAD)
NEWTON
FOOT POUNDS FOOT POUNDS NEWTON METER
METER
(ft lb) (ft lb) (N•m)
(N•m)
1/4" - 20 6 8 9 12
1/4" - 28 7 9 11 15
5/16" - 18 13 18 18 24
5/16" - 24 15 20 21 28
3/8" - 16 24 33 34 46
3/8" - 24 27 37 38 52
7/16" - 14 38 52 54 73
7/16" - 20 42 57 60 81
1/2" - 13 58 79 82 111
1/2" - 20 65 88 90 122
9/16" - 12 84 114 120 163
9/16" - 18 93 126 132 179
5/8" - 11 115 156 165 224
5/8" - 18 130 176 185 251
3/4" - 10 205 278 290 393
3/4" - 16 240 312 320 434
7/8" - 9 305 414 455 617
7/8" - 14 334 454 515 698
1" - 8 455 617 695 942
1" - 14 510 691 785 1064
1 1/8" - 7 610 827 990 1342
1 1/8" - 12 685 929 1110 1505
1 1/4" - 7 860 1166 1400 1898
1 1/4" - 12 955 1295 1550 2102
1 3/8" - 6 1130 1532 1830 2481
1 3/8" - 12 1290 1749 2085 2827
1 1/2" - 6 1400 2034 2430 3295
1 1/2" - 12 1690 2291 2730 3701
1 3/4" - 5 2370 3213 3810 5166
2" - 4 1/2 3550 4813 5760 7810
NOTE: If any bolts and nuts are found loose or at values less than what the chart states, it is
recommended that the loose bolt and/or nut be replaced with a new one.

Page 5
TYPE 8 PHOSPHATE COATED HARDWARE
This chart provides tightening torque for general purpose applications using original equipment standard
hardware as listed in the Parts Manual for the machine involved. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE. In most cases,
original equipment standard hardware is defined as Type 8, coarse thread bolts and nuts and thru
hardened flat washers (Rockwell "C" 38 - 45), all phosphate coated and assembled without supplemental
lubrication (as received) condition.
The torques shown below also apply to the following:
1. Phosphate coated bolts used in tapped holes in steel or gray iron.
2. Phosphate coated bolts used with phosphate coated prevailing torque nuts (nuts with distorted
threads or plastic inserts).
3. Phosphate coated bolts used with copper plated weld nuts.
Markings on bolt heads or nuts indicate material grade ONLY and are NOT to be used to determine
required torque.
STANDARD TORQUE ±10%

NOMINAL THREAD
DIAMETER
KILOGRAM METER FOOT POUNDS
(kg•m) (ft lb)
1/4" 1.1 8
5/16" 2.2 16
3/8" 3.9 28
7/16" 6.2 45
1/2" 9.7 70
9/16" 13.8 100
5/8" 19.4 140
3/4" 33.2 240
7/8" 53.9 390
1" 80.2 580
1 - 1/8" 113.4 820
1 - 1/4" 160.4 1160
1 - 3/8" 210.2 1520
1 - 1/2" 279.4 2020
1 - 3/4" 347.1 2510
2 522.8 3780

Page 6
TORQUE VALUES FOR HOSE CLAMPS
The following chart provides the tightening torques for hose clamps used in all rubber applications
(radiator, air cleaner, operating lever boots, hydraulic system, etc.).
TORQUE
RADIATOR, AIR CLEANER,

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
BOOTS, ETC.
CLAMP TYPE AND SIZE
KILOGRAM KILOGRAM
INCH POUNDS INCH POUNDS
METER METER
(in lb) (in lb)
(kg•m) (kg•m)
"T" Bolt (Any Diameter) 0.68 - 0.72 59 - 63 ------- ------
Worm Drive - Under 0.2 - 0.3 20 - 30 0.5 - 0.6 40 - 50

44 mm (1-3/4 in) Open
Diameter
Worm Drive - Over 44 mm 0.5 - 0.6 40 - 50 ------- ------

(1-3/4 in) Open Diameter
Worm Drive - All "Ultra- 0.6 - 0.7 50 - 60 0.5 - 0.6 40 - 50

Tite"

Page 7
TORQUE VALUES FOR SPLIT FLANGES
The following chart provides the tightening torques for split flange connections used in hydraulic systems.
Split flanges and fitting shoulders should fit squarely. Install all bolts, finger tight and then torque evenly.
NOTE: Over torquing bolts will damage the flanges and/or bolts, which may cause leakage.
BOLT TORQUE
FLANGE BOLT
SIZE (*) SIZE KILOGRAM METER FOOT POUNDS
(kg•m) (ft lb)
1/2" 5/16" 2.1 - 2.5 15 - 18

3/4" 3/8" 3.0 - 3.7 22 - 27
1" 3/8" 3.7 - 4.8 27 - 35
1 - 1/4" 7/16" 4.8 - 6.2 35 - 45
1 - 1/2" 1/2" 6.4 - 8.0 46 - 58
2" 1/2" 7.6 - 9.0 55 - 65
2 - 1/2" 1/2" 10.9 - 12.6 79 - 91
3" 5/8" 19.1 - 20.7 138 - 150
3 - 1/2" 5/8" 16.2 - 18.4 117 - 133
(*) - Inside diameter of flange on end of hydraulic tube or hose fitting.

NOTE: Values stated in chart are for Standard Pressure Series (Code 61) Split Flanges.

Page 8
TORQUE WRENCH EXTENSION TOOLS
Very large diameter, high grade fasteners (nuts, bolts, cap screws, etc.) require a great deal of turning
force to achieve recommended tightening torque values.
Common problems that could occur as a result are:
• Recommended torque exceeds the measuring capacity of the torque wrench.
• Specialized sockets do not fit the adapter on the front end (nose) of the torque wrench.
• Generating adequate force on the back end (handle) of the wrench is difficult or impossible.
• Restricted access or an obstruction may make use of the torque wrench impossible.
• A unique application requires fabrication of an adapter or other special extension.
Most standard torque wrenches can be adapted to suit any one of the proceeding needs or situations, if
the right extension tool is used or fabricated.
TORQUE MULTIPLICATION
A wrench extension tool can be used to
increase the tightening force on a high capacity
nut or bolt.
For example, doubling the distance between the
bolt and the back (handle) end of the torque
wrench doubles the tightening force on the bolt.
It also halves the indicated reading on the scale
or dial of the torque wrench. To accurately
adjust or convert indicated scale or dial
readings, use the following formula:
I = A x T / A + B where:
I = Indicated force shown on the torque wrench Figure 1
scale or dial.
T = Tightening force applied to the nut or bolt (actual Torque).
A = Length of the torque wrench (between the center of the nut or bolt and the center of the handle).
B = Length of the extension.
As an example, if a 12" extension is added to a 12" torque wrench, and the indicated torque on the dial
reads "150 ft lb," the real force applied to the bolt is 300 ft lb:
AxT 12 x 300 3600

I= = = = 150
A+B 12 + 12 24
NOTE: The formula assumes that there is no added deflection or "give" in the joint between the
extension and torque wrench. Readings may also be inaccurate:
• If the extension itself absorbs some of the tightening force and starts to bend or bow out.
• If an extension has to be fabricated that is not perfectly straight (for example, an extension
made to go around an obstruction, to allow access to a difficult to tighten fastener), the
materials and methods used must be solid enough to transmit full tightening torque.

Page 9
OTHER USES FOR TORQUE WRENCH EXTENSION TOOLS
Torque wrench extensions are sometimes made up for reasons other than increasing leverage on a
fastener.
For example, a torque wrench and extension can be used to measure adjustment "tightness" of a linkage
or assembly. Specially fabricated extensions can be used to make very precise checks of the force
required to engage or disengage a clutch mechanism, release a spring-applied brake assembly, or "take
up" free play in most any movable linkage.
Once the value of the adjustment force is established, repeated checks at regular intervals can help to
monitor and maintain peak operating efficiency. These types of adjustment checks are especially useful if
physical measurements of linkage travel are difficult to make or will not provide the needed degree of
precision and accuracy.
To allow the assembly or mechanism to accept a torque wrench, welding a nut or other adapter on the end
of a linkage shaft or other leverage point will allow turning the shaft or assembly manually.
TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (METRIC)

(For coated threads, prelubricated assemblies.)
CAUTION!
Disassembly, overhaul and replacement of components on the machine, installation of new or
replacement parts and/or other service-related maintenance may require the use of thread or
flange sealing assembly compound.
Use the information on this page as a general guide in selecting specific formulas that will meet
the particular requirements of individual assembly installations. Daewoo does not specifically
endorse a specific manufacturer or brand name but the following table of "Loctite" applications
is included for which cross-references to other makers’ products should also be widely
available.
IMPORTANT
Use primer "T" or "N" for all cold weather assembly of fastener adhesives, with Thread locker
sealers 222, 242/243, 262, 271, 272, or 277.

Page 10
I. "Loctite" Fastener Adhesives
Break-away
Cure Strength
Product Application Color Removal
(in lb) of Sealer
Alone
Low strength for 6 mm (1/4") or
222 Purple Hand tools 45
smaller fasteners.
242 or Medium strength for 6 mm (1/4") and
Blue Hand tools 80
243 larger fasteners.
High strength for high grade Heat/260°C (500°F)
262 fasteners subject to shock, stress Red Remove HOT 160
and vibration. (NO solvent)
Extra high strength for fine thread Heat/260°C (500°F)
271 Red 160
fasteners up to 25 mm (1") diameter. Remove HOT
High temperature/high strength for
Heat/316°C (600°F)
272 hostile environments to 232°C Red 180
Remove HOT
(450°F).
Extra high strength for coarse thread
Heat/260°C (500°F)
277 fasteners 25 mm (1") diameter and Red 210
Remove HOT
larger.
II. "Loctite" Pipe Thread Sealant
Product Application Color Removal Required Setup

"No-filler/non-clog" formula for high-
4 Hours (or 1/2 hour
pressure hydraulic systems. Over-
545 Purple Hand tools with Locquic "T"
application will not restrict or foul system
Primer)
components.
4 Hours (or 1/2 hour
Solvent-resistant, higher viscosity tapered
656 White Hand tools with Locquic "T"
thread sealer.
Primer)
III. "Loctite" gasket/flange sealer
Product Application Color Notes

Gasket eliminator specifically made for Use Locquic "N" primer for fast
518 aluminum flanges/surfaces. For hydraulic Red (1/2 - 4 hours) setup. Unprimed
systems to 34,475 kPa (5,000 psi). setup 4 - 24 hours.
Low pressure/wide-gap gasket eliminator Use Locquic "N" primer for
504 compound. Fills gaps to 0.0012 mm (0.030"), Orange faster (1/2 - 4 hours) setup.
cures to rigid seal. Unprimed setup 4 - 24 hours.
General purpose, fast setup, flexible-cure Use Locquic "N" primer for
515 gasket eliminator. For nonrigid assemblies Purple faster (1/4 - 2 hours) setup.
subject to shock, vibration or deflection. Unprimed setup 1 - 12 hours.

Page 11
IV. "Loctite" retaining compounds

For bushings, sleeves, press-fit bearings, Use Locquic "N" primer for
609 splines and collars. For gaps to 0.0002 mm Green increased bond strength and all
(0.005"), temperatures to 121°C (250°F). cold temperature applications.
620 For high temperatures to 232°C (450°F). Green Same as 609, above.
For high strength bonds and tight clearance
680 Green Same as 609, above.
gaps, to 0.00008 mm (0.002").
V. "Loctite" Adhesives

Black Max instant adhesive for shock and May take 120 hours to reach full
380 Black
vibration-resistant bonds. cure strength.
454 Adhesive for porous surfaces. Clear Full strength in 24 hours.
Increased strength (+50%), shock and
480 Black Full strength in 24 hours.
vibration-resistant.

Page 12
1UPPER STRUCTURE
S0402040K
1CAB
CAUTION!
CAB S0402040K
Solar 225LC-V 1001 and Up
Solar 225NLC-V 1001 and Up
Solar 300LL 1001 and Up

November 2002
Cab S0402040K
Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Removal ......................................................................................................... 3
Installation ...................................................................................................... 6
S0402040K Cab
Page 2
REMOVAL
CAUTION!
Avoid disassembling cab if there are strong wind gusts, which could catch large surface area of
cab shell and push it sideways during lift.
1. Park on firm and level ground.

2. Lower front attachment (bucket) to the
ground.
3. Shut down engine.
4. Set safety lever on "RELEASED" position.
5. Turn starter switch "ON."
WARNING!
If engine must be run while Figure 1
performing maintenance, use
extreme care. Always have one
person in the cab at all times. Never
leave the cab with the engine
running.
6. Fully stroke work levers (joysticks) in all

directions to relieve pressure from
accumulators.
7. Set safety lever on "LOCK" position.
8. Turn key to "OFF" position and remove from starter switch.
9. Hang maintenance warning tag on controls.
10. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable leading to frame from battery.
11. Prepare cab shell for removal by disconnecting wiring connectors for:
A. Cab interior lighting.
B. External light wiring.
C. Radio antenna and connections.
D. Wiper/washer connections.
NOTE: Control console wiring harnesses and hydraulic piping lines that pass through the floor of
the cab do not need to be disassembled.
NOTE: If unit is equipped with a cab protective structure (for forestry, or hazardous working
conditions), it must be removed.
Cab S0402040K
Page 3
12. Remove floor mat.
13. Remove operator’s seat (1, Figure 2).
1
NOTE: Be careful not to damage seat
covering. 4 5
14. Remove duct covers (2, 3 and 4, Figure 2).

6
When removing cover (2) disconnect hour
meter connector and cigar lighter
connector. Disconnect main harness
connector before removing cover (4).
15. Remove pocket (5, Figure 2) before
removing side panel (6, Figure 2). 2 7
3
BCS0720L
Figure 2
16. Remove air duct (1, 2 and 3, Figure 3)
located at right side of cab. Disconnect
duct wiring connector before removing
3
duct (2).
17. Disconnect washer hose located at floor 1
plate bottom.
2
ARS1520L
Figure 3
18. Remove cover (5, Figure 4) on left side
dash cover (3) and bolts (1, Figure 5).
NOTE: When removing cover
disconnect speaker wire. 2 1 2
19. Remove two rubber stops (2, Figure 4) 3

used in storing the front lower glass.
Remove bolts (1) from the rear left and 4
5
right dash covers. Remove left side cover
(3).
20. Lift right side dash cover (4, Figure 4) and
disconnect speaker wire. Remove cover. ARS1530L
Figure 4
S0402040K Cab
Page 4
21. Remove three bolts (2, Figure 5) after
disconnect speaker wire and antenna wire.
Remove stereo assembly.
22. Disconnect cab lamp wiring connector. 2
23. Disconnect cabin ground cable (7, Figure

2).
1
ARS1540L
Figure 5
24. Remove four mounting nuts from four
corners of cabin floor (2, Figure 6). 1
25. Remove four hex bolts (3, Figure 6) from
door side of cabin floor.
26. Remove two hex bolts (1, Figure 6) from 2
right side of cabin floor and one bolt (4)
from front of cab floor. 4
Quantity Description
4 16 mm hex nuts at each
corner of the cab
4 10 mm x 1.5 hex bolts at
the door side of the cab 3
3 10 mm x 1.5 mm hex HAOF270L
head bolts, 2 on the right Figure 6
side of the cab and 1
under the front window.
27. Using a suitable lifting device, attach slings

to four lift points on top of cab (Figure 7).
NOTE: Cab weighs approximately 290
kg (639 lb).
28. Lift cab from 25 - 50 mm (1" - 2") above
deck height. Check that all electrical
connections have been disconnected and
all other items unbolted.
29. Continue lifting with the assist crane to
remove the cab shell. Lower the shell to a
pre-prepared safe blocking support.
Figure 7
Cab S0402040K
Page 5
INSTALLATION
1. Using a suitable lifting device, attach slings
to four lift points on top of cab (Figure 7).
NOTE: Cab weighs approximately 290
kg (639 lb).
2. Lower cab into position on cab floor
Figure 8
3. Install four mounting nuts on four corners
of cabin floor (2, Figure 9). 1
NOTE: Mounting nut torque 20.2 kg•m
(146 ft lb)
4. Install four hex bolts (3, Figure 9) in door 2
side of cabin floor.
5. Install two hex bolts (1, Figure 9) in right 4
side of cabin floor and one bolt (4) in front
of cab floor.
Quantity Description
4 16 mm hex nuts at each
corner of the cab 3
HAOF270L
4 10 mm x 1.5 hex bolts at
the door side of the cab Figure 9
3 10 mm x 1.5 mm hex
head bolts, 2 on the right
side of the cab and 1
under the front window.
6. Once cab is mounted to floor, unhook

lifting device
7. Connect cabin ground cable (7, Figure 2).
8. Connect cab light wiring connector.
S0402040K Cab
Page 6
9. Install stereo assembly with bolts (2,
Figure 10) after connect speaker wire and
antenna wire.
2
ARS1540L
Figure 10
10. Install right side dash cover (4, Figure 11)
with bolts (1, Figure 10).
11. Install left side dash cover (3, Figure 11)
with bolts (1, Figure 10). Install two 2 1 2
rubbers (2, Figure 11).
3
12. Install cover (5, Figure 11) on left side
dash cover (3). 4
5
NOTE: Connect speaker wire before
installing cover.
13. Connect washer hose located at floor plate
ARS1530L
bottom.
Figure 11
14. Install air duct (3, 2 and 1, Figure 12)
located at right side of cab.
NOTE: Connect wire connector of duct 3
(2, Figure 12).
1
2
ARS1520L
Figure 12
Cab S0402040K
Page 7
15. Install side panel (6, Figure 13) and pocket
(5).
1
16. Install cover (4, Figure 13) and connect
main harness. Install cover (3). Connect 4 5
hour meter connector and cigar lighter
connect of cover (2). 6
17. Install cover (2, Figure 13).
18. Install operator’s seat (1, Figure 13).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage seat
covering.
2 7
19. Install floor mat.
20. Connect negative (-) battery cable leading
3
to frame from battery. BCS0720L
Figure 13
S0402040K Cab
Page 8
S0403015K
1COUNTERWEIGHT
CAUTION!
COUNTERWEIGHT S0403015K

October 2002
Counterweight S0403015K
Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General........................................................................................................... 3
Removal ......................................................................................................... 5
Installation ...................................................................................................... 7
S0403015K Counterweight
Page 2
GENERAL
DANGER!
Daewoo warns any user, that the removal of
the counterweight from the machine, front
attachment or any other part, may affect X
the stability of the machine. This could
cause unexpected movement, resulting in
death or serious injuries. Daewoo is not
liable for any misuse.
attachment unless the upper structure is
X
been removed.
BCS0830L
Figure 1
Before any attempt is made to begin removal or installation of the counterweight, the excavator must be
parked on a firm and level supporting surface, with no sloping surfaces or soft or muddy ground in the area
where the assist lift crane will be working. Position all accessories in the overnight storage position.
WARNING!
The weigh of counterweight is given in the following table. Use only rated and approved slings
and hardware when removal or installation lifts are being made. Lifting slings, shackles and all
other hardware must be rigged safely. An assist crane that is rated above weight capacity is
required.
Model Weight of Counterweight
Solar 140W-V 1,600 kg (3,530 lb)
Solar 160W-V 2,200 kg (4,850 lb)
Solar 180W-V 2,700 kg (5,950 lb)
Solar 210W-V 3,500 kg (7,720 lb)
Responsibility should be assigned to one person to be in charge of the lifting crew, and to verify that
required safe lifting precautions have been taken before each part of the procedure has been started.
All members of the working crew should know and understand the signals that will be used between the
lifting leader, the assist crane operator and the remainder of the work crew.
Page 3
WARNING!
If the turntable deck has been unbalanced by removal of weight from one end only, traveling the
excavator, swinging the turntable, movement over bumps or sloping and uneven surfaces could
cause loss of control and possible accidents or injuries.
To maintain stability the counterweight should

be removed whenever the front attachment is
taken off the machine.
90 ~ 110
15 BCS0430L
Figure 1
When loading an excavator on a trailer for
transport after the front attachment has been
removed, secure the swing lock (if equipped) to
hold the deck in place and always go backwards
up the loading ramp. The counterweight end of
the deck has to get on the trailer first, while the
cab is still going up the ramp (Figure 1).
15
BCS0440L
Figure 2
Page 4
REMOVAL
ground.
WARNING!
running.

accumulators.
11. Raise engine compartment cover.
12. Remove two caps (A, B, Figure 4) from counter weight (1).
13. Install two lifting eyes in lifting holes (A, B, Figure 4).
Model Lifting Eye Size
Solar 140W-V
Solar 160W-V
M36x4.0
Solar 180W-V
Solar 210W-V
Page 5
14. Using a suitable lifting device capable of
handling load partially support
counterweight (1) before beginning to
loosen four bolts (2). Stop lifting with assist
crane as soon as lifting slings are taut.
15. Remove four bolts (2, Figure 4) and
washers (3) from counterweight (1).
NOTE: Heat bolts if necessary, to free
them.
16. When bolts (2, Figure 4) and washers (3)
have been removed, lift counterweight (1)
a very short distance above support frame
(4) and stop. Check slings and make sure
counterweight is being supported evenly.
Once checked, continue to remove
counterweight.
17. Remove shims (5) from frame (4) if they
exist.
Figure 4
Page 6
INSTALLATION
1. Raise engine compartment cover.
2. Using suitable lifting device capable of
handling load raise counterweight (1,
Figure 5) into position just above support
frame (4) leaving counterweight
suspended. Verify that counterweight is
level and even.
NOTE: Leave counterweight (1, Figure
5) suspended 3 mm (0.125")
above support frame (4) until all
four mounting bolts (2) are
started in counterweight
mounting holes.
3. Install four bolts (2, Figure 5) with washers
(3) into counterweight until washers
contact support frame. Fully lower
counterweight onto plates and support
frame.
4. Using a feeler gauge, check for a gap
between counterweight (1, Figure 5) and
frame (4). Use an appropriate amount of
shims (5) for each bolt location.
5. Remove four bolts (2, Figure 5) and
washers (3).
6. Raise counterweight (1, Figure 5) so that
shims (5) can be set into position on frame
(4).
7. Lower counterweight (1, Figure 5) until it is
3 mm (0.125") above the shims (5) and
install four bolts and washers. Apply
Loctite #242 to mounting bolt threads.
8. Fully lower counterweight (1, Figure 5)
onto shims (5), frame (4) and support
frame (4) and finish tightening bolts (2). Figure 5
NOTE: Tighten bolts (2, Figure 5) to
values shown in following table.
Model Bolt Torque
Solar 140W-V
115 kg•m (830 ft lb)
Solar 160W-V
Solar 180W-V
150 kg•m (1,080 ft lb)
Solar 210W-V
Page 7
9. Remove lifting device and lifting hooks from counterweight (1, Figure 5).
10. Install two caps in lifting holes (A, 13, Figure 5).
11. Connect negative (-) battery cable to battery.
Page 8
S0405045K
1FUEL TANK
CAUTION!
FUEL TANK S0405045K


July 2002
Fuel Tank S0405045K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Parts List ................................................................................................. 4
Specifications .......................................................................................... 5
Removal ......................................................................................................... 6
Installation .................................................................................................... 10
Start-up Procedures ..................................................................................... 12
S0405045K Fuel Tank

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
WARNING!
Engine fuel is highly flammable and potentially explosive. To prevent possible injury and/or
damage to equipment, extinguish or move to a safe distance all potential fire hazards.
Fuel Tank S0405045K

Page 3
PARTS LIST
Figure 1
S0405045K Fuel Tank

Page 4
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Fuel Tank 14 Level Gauge
3 O-ring 14a Bolt
4 Cover 14b Block
5 Bolt 14d O-ring
6 Spring Washer 14g Washer
7 Cock 18 Plug
8 Bolt 19 O-ring
9 Shim 23 Hard Washer
10 Shim 24 Bolt
11 Fuel Filter 25 Vinyl Hose
12 Cap 26 Hose Clamp
13 Plug
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Fuel Tank Capacity

140W-V
280 liters (74 gal)
160W-V
Fuel Tank S0405045K

Page 5
REMOVAL
1. Look at fuel level display (Figure 2) on
instrument panel in operator’s cab to see
what it displays. The display is divided into GREEN
ten separated segments, each F
representing 10 percent of total fuel
supply. Also look at level gauge on side of RED
tank to estimate volume of fuel left in tank.
NOTE: If possible, work excavator until
available fuel supply in tank has E
been run down as far as
possible.
ARO0150L
Figure 2
2. Park on firm and level ground and swing
turntable to approximately a 180° with
respect to wheels. See Figure 3.
BCS0480L
Figure 3
ground.
4. Stop the engine.
WARNING!
If engine must be run while
Figure 4
running.
7. Fully stroke work levers (joysticks) in all directions to relieve pressure from accumulators.
S0405045K Fuel Tank

Page 6
12. Clean area around fuel tank fill cap (Figure
5). Open fuel cap.
Figure 5
13. Place a large enough container under the
tank to collect remaining fuel. Open the
drain valve (Figure 6) at the bottom of the
tank and empty the tank.
NOTE: Refer to “Specifications” on
page 5, for fuel tank capacity.
Figure 6
14. Tag and disconnect fuel supply line (1,
Figure 7) and fuel return line (2) from the
tank (3) and carefully drain remaining fuel
from the lines.
15. Remove clamp (4, Figure 7) holding fuel
return line (2) to tank (3).
Figure 7
Fuel Tank S0405045K

Page 7
16. Tag and disconnect wires leading to fuel
sensor (1, Figure 8) on side of fuel tank
(2).
17. If equipped, remove components from the
fuel filler pump port (3, Figure 8) on side of
fuel tank (2).
Figure 8
18. Remove eight bolts and washers (1, Figure
9), and handrail (2) from fuel tank (3) and
frame (4). 1
2
19. Remove four bolts, washers and cover (5, 3
Figure 9) from fuel tank (3).
1
5
4
BCS0570L
Figure 9
S0405045K Fuel Tank

Page 8
20. Remove four bolts and washers (1, Figure
10) and cover (2) from fuel tank (3) and
support (4).
Figure 10
21. Install two 12 mm eye bolts in threaded
holes at top surface of tank (1 and 2,
Figure 11). Using a suitable lifting device,
sling eye bolts.
11) holding tank (3) to frame. Lift tank 25
mm (1") and make sure it is balanced.
Make sure that there are no other
electrical wires or hoses connected to
tank. Completely remove tank after
inspection.
NOTE: The clear level gauge on the
side of the tank is easily
damaged. Be careful of
obstacles and wind gusts.
23. Remove shims (5, Figure 11).
NOTE: If tank is to be reused note
position and amount of shims
used for each mounting bolt
location.
Figure 11
Fuel Tank S0405045K

Page 9
INSTALLATION
1. Install two 12 mm eye bolts in threaded
holes at top surface of tank (1 and 2,
Figure 12). Using a suitable lifting device,
sling eye bolts.
2. Set fuel tank (3, Figure 12) into position.
Install four bolts and washers (4) finger
tight, to secure tank (3) to frame.
NOTE: The clear level gauge on the
side of the tank is easily
damaged. Be careful of
obstacles and wind gusts.
3. Install shims (5, Figure 12) as needed to
prevent tank (3) from rocking or stress
from mounting bolts (4).
4. Tighten mounting bolts (4, Figure 12) after
shims are installed.
Figure 12
5. Install cover (2, Figure 13) on fuel tank (3)
and support (4) with four bolts and
washers (1).
Figure 13
S0405045K Fuel Tank

Page 10
6. Install eight bolts and washers (1, Figure
14), and handrail (2) on fuel tank (3) and
frame (4). 1
2
7. Install four bolts, washers and cover (5, 3
Figure 14) on fuel tank (3).
1
5
4
BCS0570L
Figure 14
8. Connect wires as tagged to fuel sensor (1,
Figure 15) on side of fuel tank (2).
9. If equipped, connect components to the
fuel filler pump port (3, Figure 15) on side
of fuel tank (2).
Figure 15
Fuel Tank S0405045K

Page 11
10. Connect as tagged, fuel supply line (1,
Figure 16) and fuel return line (2) to fuel
tank (3).
11. Install clamp (4, Figure 16) to hold fuel
return line (2) to tank (3).
Figure 16
12. Make sure fuel tank drain valve (Figure 17)
on bottom of tank is closed.
13. Fill fuel tank and check for signs of leaks.
Correct any problems found.
14. Connect negative (-) battery cable to
battery.
Figure 17
START-UP
PROCEDURES
1. Loosen plug on top of fuel filter head.
2. Unscrew and pump the hand operated primer pump by the fuel injection pump. Pump primer until fuel
is present at plug hole in fuel filter head.
3. Tighten plug in fuel filter head.
4. Continue to pump primer pump until a strong resistance is felt. Screw the primer pump knob back into
housing.
5. Start engine and look for signs of leaks.
6. Repeat procedure if necessary
S0405045K Fuel Tank

Page 12
S0405500
1FUEL TRANSFER PUMP
CAUTION!
FUEL TRANSFER PUMPS0405500

Mega 130 0001 and Up
Mega 160 0001 and Up
Mega 200-III 1001 and Up
Mega 200-V (Tier I & II) 1001 and Up
Mega 250-III 1001 and Up
Mega 250-V (Tier I) 1001 thru 2000
Mega 250-V (Tier II) 2001 and Up
Mega 300-V (Tier I) 1001 thru 2000
Mega 400-III PLUS 1001 and Up
Mega 400-V 1001 and Up
Mega 500-V 1001 thru 2000
Solar 75-V 1001 and Up
Models continued on back of cover.

December 2002
Fuel Transfer Pump S0405500

Page 1
Solar 220N-V 1001 and Up
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Theory of Operation ................................................................................ 3
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 4
Replacement of Rotor and Vane .................................................................... 4
Replacement of Rear Cover ........................................................................... 5
Replacement of Armature .............................................................................. 6
S0405500 Fuel Transfer Pump

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
THEORY OF OPERATION
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Motor 3 Inlet Hose
2 Pump 4 Outlet Hose
2-1 Pump Cover 5 Check Valve
2-2 Rotor and Vane 6 Strainer Cap
Fuel pump consists of motor, pump, switch and

hose assembly.
Figure 2

Page 3
TROUBLESHOOTING
On some pumps the ON-OFF switch is installed separately at a remote location.
A thermal limiter, built into the motor, will automatically shut off power if motor is overheating to protect it
from damage.
NOTE: OPEN TEMP: 150 ±5°C (302 ±41°F). After circuit is automatically shut off due to
overheating the pump will stop running. When temperature drops below 143°C (289°F) the
circuit will reactivate allowing the pump to restart.
Figure 3 WITH TOGGLE SWITCH Figure 4 WITHOUT TOGGLE SWITCH
Check resistance at connectors "A." If reading is zero, or very close to zero, the motor is bad and must be
replaced.
On units equipped with a toggle switch, check the resistance through the toggle switch, while the switch is
in the "ON" position. If continuity is not present, the switch is bad. Be sure to check resistance through the
motor.
REPLACEMENT OF ROTOR AND VANE

If dirt or other foreign materials enter pump
during operation, it can become lodged between
the rotor and/or vanes and generate heat which
can cause pump damage.
Remove the pump cover and check the rotor
and vane. If any pump parts or components
become lost, damaged or inoperable,
immediately replace them with a new ones.
Figure 5 WITHOUT TOGGLE SWITCH

Page 4
Insert vane, with the circled edge of vane facing
in the counterclockwise direction. (Detail A)
Insert O-ring again at reassembly of pump
cover.
Figure 6
REPLACEMENT OF
REAR COVER
Brush assembly and a thermal limiter are
installed in the rear cover. If you find any
damage, replace them with new ones.
Remove the switch cover and screw (M5 x L95)
from the rear cover.
Remove cover.
At reassembly of rear cover, widen the space of
brush and insert it to the armature. Then fit the Figure 7
hole of screw in the housing.
Be careful when installing screw. The cover
screw may be attracted by the motor magnet.

Page 5
REPLACEMENT OF
ARMATURE
You can replace only the armature in case motor
was damaged by a short circuit.
Remove the switch cover and rear cover, than
remove the armature from the housing.
Remove the pump cover and remove the rotor
and vane.
Insert a new armature into the housing.
Figure 8
Refer to “Replacement of Rear Cover” on page
5, for installation of rear cover.
Fit the rotor in the shaft flute of armature. Insert
vane to the rotor being careful for the direction.
Refer to “Replacement of Rotor and Vane” on
page 4.

Page 6
S0407010
R1
1SWING BEARING
CAUTION!
SWING BEARING S0407010


January 2001
Swing Bearing S0407010

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Swing Bearing Maintenance .......................................................................... 3

Operating Recommendation ................................................................... 3
Measuring Swing Bearing Axial Play ...................................................... 3
Measuring Bearing Lateral Play .............................................................. 3
Swing Bearing Basic Operation .............................................................. 4
Rebuilding Swing Bearing ....................................................................... 4
S0407010 Swing Bearing

Page 2
SWING BEARING MAINTENANCE
OPERATING RECOMMENDATION
The service life of the swing bearing may be extended if a conscious, daily effort is made to equalize usage
over both ends of the excavator. If the excavator is used in the same operating configuration day in and
day out (for example, with the travel motors always under the counterweight, or with the attachment over
one side of the machine more than the other), the bearing’s service life could be reduced. Taking a few
minutes in the middle of each work shift to reposition the excavator, to work the opposite end of the
bearing, will provide a payoff in terms of more even, gradual rate of wear and extended service life.
MEASURING SWING BEARING AXIAL PLAY

Periodic, regular checks of bearing
displacement should be made at least twice a
year. Use a dial indicator. Push the attachment
against the ground to lift the excavator off the
ground and take measurements at 4 points, 90°
apart, around the circumference of the bearing
(Figure 1).
Record and keep all measurements. Play in the
bearing should increase minimally from one
inspection to the next. Eventually, however, as
the bearing begins to approach the limit of its
service life, clearance increases become much
more pronounced and the actual measured play
in the bearing could exceed twice the value that
was measured when the machine was new.
MEASURING BEARING LATERAL PLAY

When vertical checks are made, the side-to-side
play in the bearing can be checked by fully
retracting the arm and bucket cylinders and
extending the tip of the bucket as far forward as
it will go. With the excavator parked on a flat,
level surface and the bucket tip just off the
ground, push against the bucket sideways to
take up all of the lateral clearance in the
bearing. (Less than 100 lb of force should be
required to move the bucket over all the way.)
Check lateral play in both directions and record Figure 1
the values. When the bearing is beginning to
approach the end of its service life, measured
lateral clearance should start to show larger and
larger increases.

Page 3
SWING BEARING BASIC OPERATION
The swing bearing, which connects the upper
structure with the lower structure, consists of a
inner ring, outer ring and ball bearings. During
swing movement, power from the swing motor is
transferred to the pinion by planetary gears
connected to gears on the inner ring, which is
fixed in the undercarriage. Ball bearings turn the
outer ring.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Ball
2 Seal A
3 Seal B
4 Retainer
5 Retainer
6 Outer Ring
7 Inner Ring
8 Tapered Pin
9 Plug
Figure 2
REBUILDING SWING BEARING
1. Remove tip of tapered pin (1, Figure 3)
using grinder and tap lightly to remove
debris.
Figure 3
2. Remove plug (1, Figure 4) using a M10 x
1.25 bolt (2).
Figure 4

Page 4
3. Lift outer ring and check that inner ring can
move freely. See Figure 5, if not, replace
seal (3, Figure 4) and/or seal (4, Figure 4).
Figure 5
4. Turn inner ring and use magnet bar (1,
Figure 6) to remove steel balls (2).
Figure 6
5. Turn inner ring and use wire (1, Figure 7)
to remove retainers (2).
Figure 7
6. Assemble in reverse order of disassembly
and then adjust the gap between the steel
balls and retainers using the following
guidelines: Assemble steel ball, retainer
(A) and retainer (B) to bearing; if gap is too
wide, adjust by moving steel balls or by
replacing one of the retainers.
Figure 8

Page 5
Page 6
S0408025K
1SWING REDUCTION
GEARBOX
CAUTION!
SWING REDUCTION GEARBOXS0408025K


October 2002
Swing Reduction Gearbox S0408025K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Parts List ................................................................................................. 4
Special Tools and Materials............................................................................ 6
Special Tools ........................................................................................... 6
Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjustment....................................................... 7
Removal ......................................................................................................... 8
Disassembly ................................................................................................. 10
Reassembly.................................................................................................. 12
Installation .................................................................................................... 14
S0408025K Swing Reduction Gearbox

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
THEORY OF OPERATION
The swing motor final drive is a two-step planetary gearbox with two planet gears, two sun gears and two-
step output reduction. The planetary gear engages with the ring gear. The pinion gear is connected with
the output shaft and spline.
The final drive reduces swing motor rpm to increase swing motor output torque. The available maximum
swing speed (12.5 rpm) provides a fast turning rate for efficient, rapid work cycling with more than
adequate power for good acceleration.
Sun Gear Planetary Gear Ring Gear Reduction Ratio

1st Stage 22 25 74 i1 = 4.36
2nd Stage 25 25 74 i2 = 4.36

Total i1Xi2 = 19.0

Page 3
PARTS LIST
19
24
3 12
12
24 11
7 6
13 12
14 13
9
5 23
15
10
8
4
25
12
18
27
20
16
22
1
21
22
17
28
29
2
26
BCS0840S
Figure 1

Page 4
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Casing 16 Knock Pin
2 Shaft; Drive 17 Roller Bearing
3 Gear; Ring 18 Roller Bearing
4 Gear; Planet 19 Hex Bolt
5 Gear; Sun 20 Oil Seal
6 Gear; Planet 21 Plug
7 Gear; Sun 22 Plug
8 Carrier 23 Spring Pin
9 Carrier 24 Ring; Retainer
10 Pin Assembly 25 Ring; Retainer
11 Pin Assembly 26 Ring
12 Washer; Thrust 27 Spring Pin
13 Washer; Thrust 28 Plate; Support
14 Level Bar 29 Bolt; Screw
15 Pipe; Level Gauge
NOTE: The inner and outer cylinder roller bearing must be changed at the same time.

Page 5
SPECIAL TOOLS AND MATERIALS
SPECIAL TOOLS
O 93
125
118
138
O 10
8
12
O
O 140
O 74
HIA3012L
Figure 2

Page 6
TROUBLESHOOTING, TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
Symptoms Possible Causes Remedies

1. No rotation and –
a. Pressure at swing motor inlet Swing brake not releasing Check brake engagement
increases and disengagement,
check release pressure
Internal damage to gearbox Replace broken gears,
drive train drive train assemblies
Overload Reduce load weight
b. Pressure at swing motor inlet Swing motor drive shaft damage Replace swing motor
shows no increase, and the swing
motor is making irregular noises Internal damage to gearbox Repair/replace broken or
drive train faulty assemblies
c. Pressure at swing motor inlet shows Hydraulic pump or valve broken Troubleshoot hydraulic
no increase, but without irregular system
noises from the swing motor
2. Oil leakage
a. From drive shaft Oil seal damaged Replace oil seal
b. From bolted connections or other Assembly compound (joint sealer) Disassemble and check
assembled surfaces old and not sealing, bolt not tight mating surfaces. Reapply
or flange warped Loctite, torque bolts to
specifications
3. Excess heat
Gearbox casing becomes excessively Low oil level Replace oil, refill to
hot, with or without irregular noise(s) specified level
during operation
Bearings or gear worn but not Repair or replace
completely inoperative gearbox
HAOE960L

Page 7
REMOVAL
ground.
3. Stop the engine.
WARNING!
running.

accumulators.

Page 8
11. Tag and disconnect hoses from swing
motor (1, Figure 4). Plug and cap hoses
and port to prevent contamination from
entering hydraulic system or component.
12. Disconnect tube (2) from drain valve (3)
13. Remove eleven bolts and washers (4,
Figure 4) holding swing reduction gearbox
(5) to frame.
14. Using a suitable lifting device, sling swing
motor (1, Figure 4) and remove swing
motor and reduction gearbox (5) as an
assembly from unit.
NOTE: A drain valve (3, Figure 4) and
tube are on side of gearbox. Be
careful not to damage valve or
tube.
NOTE: There is one alignment pin (6,
Figure 4), on side of reduction
gearbox flange.
Figure 4

Page 9
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION!
1. Place the disassembled parts in a safe location so they do not get damaged.
2. Prior to reassembly, inspect each part for any damages.
3. Clean and dry each part before reassembly.
4. Clean all surface of sealing compound.
5. Torque all bolts according to specifications.
1. Remove swing motor assembly from the equipment and drain gear oil from housing by opening drain
plug.
CAUTION!
Please take out gear oil with clean container and check for wearing out part.
2. Remove mounting bolts (19) and separate motor from reduction gear.
3. Remove No. 1 sun gear (7)
4. Remove No. 1 carrier assembly with No. 1 planetary gear (6).
5. Disassembling No. 1 carrier assembly.
A. Remove stopper ring (24) and separate thrust washers on the upper part.
CAUTION!
Mark on each planetary gear and pin so that they can be replaced to their proper location
during reassembly.
B. Remove planetary gear (6).

C. Remove thrust washers from lower section of planetary gear (6).
If the No. 1 pin (11) is not defective, do not remove it from the No. 1 carrier (9). If it must be
replaced, tap on the inner side of the pin to remove.
6. Remove No. 2 sun gear (5).
7. Remove No. 2 carrier assembly.
8. Disassembling No. 2 carrier assemble.
If there are no visible defects after inspection, do not disassemble the No. 2 carrier assembly.
A. Place a dowel at the opposite end of No. 2 pin (10) and tap it with a hammer to cut off the spring
pin (27) and remove No. 2 pin (10).
B. Remove No. 2 planetary gear (4) and thrust washer (12).

Page 10
CAUTION!
Do not reuse No. 2 pin (10) once it is removed.
9. Remove ring gear (3).

NOTE: Install two M12 bolts in the threaded holes and lift out.
10. Remove lock pin (16).
CAUTION!
Do not remove lock pin if it is not necessary.
11. Remove stop ring (25) from shaft (2).

12. Place the reduction gear so that axle is
facing the ground. Tap the axle shaft using
a hammer to remove from housing.
13. To remove ring (26), support plate (28) and
roller bearing (17), secure axle shaft into a
vise and press out using appropriate
equipment.
14. Remove oil seal (20) from casing (1).
CAUTION!
Do not reuse oil seal and bearing
once it is removed.
Figure 5

Page 11
REASSEMBLY
Reassembly of the motor is basically accomplished by reversing disassembly steps.
Use a torque wrench to make sure that all bolts are tightened to specified values. Always begin a bolt
tightening sequence from the innermost part of the assembly, working outward toward the ends in careful,
even rotations.
1. Assembling shaft.
A. Insert ring (26) and support plate (28) into shaft.
B. Spread grease on inner side of roller bearing (17) then install completely using a press. Apply
grease to the bearing (2, Figure 5).
CAUTION!
The bearing must be installed completely perpendicular to the shaft. Do not force bearing
onto shaft.
2. Place the housing on a flat working area.

3. Assemble roller bearing into housing by placing it vertically using a screw at the bottom of the axle.
Insert it by lightly tapping until it is completely horizontal to the housing.
NOTE: Use roller bearing installing tool listed in the section “Special Tools and Materials” on page
6.
4. Position the housing so that the axle shaft is facing down.
5. Insert oil seal into housing (1).
6. Use bearing installing tool listed in the section “Special Tools and Materials” on page 6 and a press.
7. Install stop ring (25).
8. Insert grease into bearing and seal area. Wrap sealing tape on plug and tighten into hole.
9. Assembling No. 2 carrier assembly.
A. Place thrust washer (12) into the location of pin hole.
B. Insert the No. 2 planetary carrier (8) into place.
C. Check the location of hole and insert No. 2 pin (10) with tapping which from direction which is
same as No. 1 carrier hole to spring pin fixed at a hole direction as seen at the top.
D. Insert spring pin (27) using jig and use a punch and hammer to secure the spring from moving.
10. Drive in locking pin (16) into two holes of the casing (1).
11. Spread sealing compound on the mating surface between casing (1) and ring gear (3).
12. Locate the marks that were made during disassembly and assemble ring gear (3) into casing (1).
Install 4 bolts temporarily to hold it in place. Install all bolts with flat washers and tighten to 8 kg•m.
13. Assemble No. 2 carrier assembler into ring gear.
14. Install No. 2 sun gear (5).
15. Assembling No. 1 carrier assembly.
A. Place No. 1 carrier (9) on flat working area.

Page 12
B. Align the spring pin (23) hole of the No. 1 pin (11) and the No. 1 carrier (9) and insert pin by
lightly tapping.
C. Use the spring pin installing jig to install the spring pin (910) and punch 2 areas with a hammer
and punch to secure into place.
D. Install the thrust washer (12).
E. Install thrust washer (13) in the center.
F. Install planetary gear (6).
G. Install two thrust washer (12) on the upper section and install stop ring (24).
16. Assemble No. 1 carrier assembly. Check that the thrust washer (286) in the center is properly aligned
with No. 2 sun gear.
17. Assemble No. 1 sun gear (7).
18. Remove the temporarily bolts and apply sealant on motor mating surface area on ring gear (3).
19. Lower the motor shaft vertically placing stop ring (24) into it then assemble motor comparing with the
location of thrust washer then tighten it with hex. socket bolt (19).
20. Wrap seal tape onto the plug and place it into the casing.
21. Fill with gear oil.

Page 13
INSTALLATION
1. Coat pinion gear with grease. Refer to
operation manual for specifications.
2. Make sure alignment pin (6) is installed in
flange of swing reduction gearbox (5).
3. Using a suitable lifting device, sling swing
motor (1, Figure 6) and position swing
motor and reduction gearbox (5) as an
assembly on unit.
4. Install eleven bolts and washers (4, Figure
6) to secure swing reduction gearbox (5) to
frame.
NOTE: Apply Loctite #262 to bolt
threads.
5. Connect tube (2) to drain valve (3)
6. Connect hoses as tagged during removal
to swing motor (1, Figure 6).
7. Fill swing reduction gearbox with oil. Refer
to operation manual for specifications.
Figure 6

Page 14
1LOWER STRUCTURE AND CHASSIS
S0503000
R1
1RAM LOCK VALVE

OPERATION
CAUTION!
RAM LOCK VALVE OPERATIONS0503000


November 2000
Ram Lock Valve Operation S0503000

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Theory of Operation ....................................................................................... 3
S0503000 Ram Lock Valve Operation

Page 2
THEORY OF OPERATION
The ram lock valve absorbs vibration of the front axle and helps adjust the front axle, according to the type
of work being done. When the ram lock solenoid valve is off, port P’s pressure is the same as the tank
pressure and spring pressure moves the check valve to the left and blocks passage between the ram
cylinders. When the ram lock solenoid valve is on, pressurized oil flows into port P, pushes the spool,
moves the check valve to the right and opens the passage between the ram cylinders. The stroke is
adjusted according to the load applied to the ram cylinder.
Figure 1
Ram Lock Valve Operation S0503000

Page 3
S0503000 Ram Lock Valve Operation
Page 4
1ENGINE AND DRIVE TRAIN
S0602055K
1FRONT AXLE
(DANA)
CAUTION!
FRONT AXLE (DANA)S0602055K


October 2002
Front Axle (Dana) S0602055K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction..................................................................................................... 4
Introductory Remarks.............................................................................. 4
Maintenance and Lubricant ............................................................................ 5
Definition of Viewpoints........................................................................... 5
Data Plate ............................................................................................... 5
Maintenance Points................................................................................. 6
Maintenance Intervals ............................................................................. 7
Adjustment and Checks .......................................................................... 7
Tightening Torques.................................................................................. 8
Screw-locking, Sealing and Lubricating Materials................................... 9
Notes on Safety Precautions........................................................................ 11
Checking Wear and Replacing Brake Disks................................................. 12
Disassembly of Brake Units .................................................................. 12
Assembly of Brake Units ....................................................................... 16
Steering Case .............................................................................................. 19
Removal and Disassembly.................................................................... 19
Assembly and Installation ..................................................................... 23
U-Joint .......................................................................................................... 25
Notes on Safety Precautions................................................................. 25
Assembly and Installation ..................................................................... 30
Planetary Reduction..................................................................................... 33
Disassembly.......................................................................................... 33
Assembly............................................................................................... 39
Steering Cylinder.......................................................................................... 45
Removal ................................................................................................ 45
Installation ............................................................................................. 48
Disassembly.......................................................................................... 52
Assembly............................................................................................... 55
Differential Unit............................................................................................. 58
S0602055K Front Axle (Dana)

Page 2
Assembly, Adjusting and Installation ..................................................... 64
Bevel Pinion.................................................................................................. 71
Removal ................................................................................................ 71
Adjusting and Installation ...................................................................... 75
Special Tools ................................................................................................ 83
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 89

Page 3
INTRODUCTION
The efficiency and continued operation of mechanical units depend on constant, correct maintenance and
also on efficient repair work, should there be a break-down or malfunction. The instructions contained in
this manual have been based on a complete overhaul of the unit.
However, it is up to the mechanic to decide whether or not it is necessary to assemble only individual
components, when partial repair work is needed. The manual provides a quick and sure guide which, with
the use of photographs and diagrams illustrating the various phases of the operations, allows accurate
work to be performed.
All the information needed for correct disassembly, checks and assembly of each individual component is
set out below. In order to remove the differential unit from the vehicle, the manuals provided by the vehicle
manufacturer should be consulted. In describing the following operations it is presumed that the unit has
already been removed from the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
In order to facilitate work and protect both working surfaces and operators, it is advisable to use
proper equipment such as: trestles or supporting benches, plastic or copper hammers,
appropriate levers, pullers and specific spanners or wrenches.
Before going on to disassemble the parts and drain the oil, it is best to thoroughly clean the unit,
removing any encrusted or accumulated grease.
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS
All the disassembled mechanical units should be thoroughly cleaned with appropriate products and
restored or replaced if damage, wear, cracking or seizing have occurred.
In particular, thoroughly check the condition of all moving parts (bearings, gears, crown wheel and pinion,
shafts) and sealing parts (O-rings, oil shields) which are subject to major stress and wear. In any case, it is
advisable to replace the seals every time a component is overhauled or repaired. During assembly, the
sealing rings must be lubricated on the sealing edge. In the case of the crown wheel and pinion,
replacement of one component requires the replacement of the other one. During assembly, the prescribed
pre-loading, backlash and torque of parts must be maintained.

Page 4
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICANT
DEFINITION OF VIEWPOINTS
BCS0910L
Figure 1
DATA PLATE
Reference
Description
Number
1 Type and model unit
2 Serial number 1 2
3 Lubricant 3
MFG. BY CLARK-HURTH COMPONENTS S.P.A.
38062 Arco (Trento)
MADE IN ITALY
BCS0920L
Figure 2

Page 5
MAINTENANCE POINTS
3 1 2 4
3
2 2
4
1 3
2
BCS0930L
Figure 3
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Oil Filling Plug 3 Check Level Plug
2 Oil Draining Plug 4 Grease Nipples

Page 6
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Operation Frequency Lubricants

• Check levels: Differential Monthly • SAE85W90 (API GL4 - MIL L-2105)
Planetary Every 200 hours With additives for oil-bath brakes
reduction • SAE85W90 (API GL5 - MIL 2105-B)
• Oil change: Differential Every 800 hours * With additives for oil-bath brakes, for
units presenting hypoid crown wheel
Planetary Every 1000 hours * and pinion and /or self-locking
reduction differential gear.
Self-locking Every 700 hours * °„
differential
gear
* Initially after 100 working hours

°„ When it starts sounding noisy
Operation Member Conditions Frequency Lubricants

Normal work Monthly MOLIKOTE
Greasing Articulations
Awkward work Weekly
ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKS
Unit Operation Frequency Service Brake Circuit

Negative brake Adjustment Every 1000 hours * Only for mineral oil use e.g. ATF Dexron
II. Make sure that master cylinder seals
Service brake Adjustment Every 500 hours are suitable for mineral oil.
Wheel nuts Tightening Every 200 hours

Page 7
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Unit: Nm (ft lb)
Type of Bolt
8.8 10.9 12.9
Size of Bolt
Loctite Loctite
Loctite 242 Loctite 242 Loctite 242 Loctite 242
242 242
9,5-10,5 10,5-11,5 14,3-15,7 15,2-16,8 16,2-17,8 18,1-20,0
M6 x 1
(7-8) (8-9) (11-12) (11-12) (12-13) (13-15)
23,8-26,2 25,6-28,4 34,2-37,8 36,7-40,5 39,0-43,0 43,7-48,3
M8 x 1,25
(18-19) (19-21) (25-28) (27-30) (29-32) (32-36)
48-58 52-58 68-75 73-81 80-88 88-97
M10 x 1,5
(35-43) (38-43) (50-55) (54-59) (59-64) (64-71)
82-91 90-100 116-128 126-139 139-153 152-168
M12 x 1,75
(61-67) (66-74) (86-94) (93-102) (103-112) (112-123)
129-143 143-158 182-202 200-221 221-244 238-263
M14 x 2
(95-105) (106-116) (134-148) (148-163) (163-179) (176-193)
200-221 219-242 283-312 309-341 337-373 371-410
Coarse Pitch
M16 x 2
(148-163) (162-178) (209-230) (228-251) (249-275) (274-302)
276-305 299-331 390-431 428-473 466-515 509-562
M18x 2,5
(204-225) (221-244) (288-317) (316-348) (344-379) (376-414)
390-431 428-473 553-611 603-667 660-730 722-798
M20 x 2,5
(228-318) (316-348) (408-450) (445-491) (487-538) (533-588)
523-578 575-635 746-824 817-903 893-987 974-1076
M22 x 2,5
(386-426) (424-468) (550-607) (603-666) (659-727) (718-793)
675-746 732-809 950-1050 1040-1150 1140-1260 1240-1370
M24 x 3
(498-550) (540-596) (701-774) (767-848) (841-929) (915-1010)
1411-1559 1539-1701 1710-1890 1838-2032
998-1103 1088-1202
M27 x 3 (1041- (1135- (1261- (1356-
(736-813) (803-886)
1149) 1254) 1393) 1498)
1914-2115 2085-2305 2280-2520 2494-2757
1378-1523 1473-1628
M30 x 3,5 (1412- (1538- (1682- (1840-
(1016-1123) (1086-1200)
1559) 1700) 1859) 2033)

Page 8
Type of Bolt
8.8 10.9 12.9
Size of Bolt
Loctite Loctite
242 242
25,7-28,3 27,5-30,5 36,2-39,8 40,0-44,0 42,8-47,2 47,5-52,5
M8 x 1
(19-21) (20-22) (27-29) (30-32) (32-34) (35-38)
49,4-54,6 55,2-61,0 71,5-78,5 78,0-86,0 86,0-94,0 93,0-103,0
M10 x 1,25
(36-40) (41-45) (53-57) (58-63) (63-69) (69-75)
90-100 98-109 128-142 139-154 152-168 166-184
M12 x 1,25
(66-74) (72-80) (95-104) (103-113) (112-123) (123-135)
86-95 94-104 120-132 133-147 143-158 159-175
M12 x 1,5
(63-70) (69-76) (89-97) (98-108) (106-116) (117-129)
143-158 157-173 200-222 219-242 238-263 261-289
M14 x 1,5
(106-116) (116-127) (148-163) (162-178) (176-193) (193-213)
214-236 233-257 302-334 333-368 361-399 394-436
M16 x 1,5
Coarse Pitch
(158-174) (172-189) (223-246) (246-271) (266-294) (291-321)

312-345 342-378 442-489 485-536 527-583 580-641
M18 x 1,5
(230-254) (252-278) (326-360) (358-395) (389-430) (428-472)
437-483 475-525 613-677 674-745 736-814 808-893
M20 x 1,5
(322-356) (350-387) (452-499) (497-549) (543-600) (596-658)
581-642 637-704 822-908 903-998 998-1103 1078-1191
M22 x 1,5
(429-473) (470-519) (606-669) (666-736) (736-813) (795-878)
1363-1507
741-819 808-893 1045-1155 1140-1260 1235-1365
M24 x 2 (1005-
(547-604) (596-658) (771-851) (841-929) (911-1006)
1111)
1520-1680 1672-1848 1834-2027 2000-2210
1083-1197 1178-1302
M27 x 2 (1121- (1233- (1353- (1475-
(799-883) (869-960)
1239) 1363) 1495) 1630)
2138-2363 2332-2577 2565-2835 2788-3082
1511-1670 1648-1822
M30 x 2 (1577- (1720- (1892- (2056-
(1115-1231) (1216-1343)
1742) 1900) 2090) 2273)
SCREW-LOCKING, SEALING AND LUBRICATING MATERIALS
IMPORTANT
1. Locking, sealing and lubricating materials referred to in this manual are the same used in
the shop-floor.
2. The table below gives an account of the typical applications of each single material, in
order to facilitate replacement with similar products marketed by different brand names
with different trade marks.

Page 9
Denomination Application
Loctite 242 Anaerobic product apt to prevent the loosening of screws, nuts and plugs. Used
for medium-strength locking. Before using it, completely remove any lubricant
by using the specific activator.
Loctite 243 The oleocompatible alternative to 242. Does not require the activation of
lubricated surfaces.
Loctite 270 Anaerobic product for very-high strength locking of screws and nuts. Before
using it, completely remove any lubricant by using the specific activator. To
remove parts, it may be necessary to heat them at 80° C (176° F) approx.
Loctite 275 Anaerobic product suitable for high-strength locking and sealing of large
threaded parts, bolts and stud bolts, for pipe sealing and for protecting parts
against tampering; suitable for sealing coupling surfaces with a max.
diametrical clearance of 0.25 mm.
Loctite 510 Anaerobic product for the hermetic sealing of flanged units and screw holes
communicating with fluids. Can seal clearances between flanges up to 0.2 mm.
Loctite 577 Quick anaerobic sealant for sealing threaded portions of conical or cylindrical
unions up to M80. Before using it, remove any lubricant with the specific
activator. After polymerisation, disassembly may result rather difficult, so
heating may be necessary for larger diameters.
Loctite 638 Anaerobic adhesive for fast and high-strength gluing of cylindrical metal joints
(hub on shaft). Can glue together parts with clearance ranging between 0.1 and
0.25 mm.
Loctite 648 Anaerobic adhesive for fast and medium-strength gluing of cylindrical metal
joints (hub on shaft). Can glue together parts with radial clearance below 0.1
mm.
(AREXONS) Solvent-based sealing compound for elastic seals, drying through evaporation.
Repositionable Used for sealing the outer diameter of sealing rings for rotating shafts with outer
jointing compound metal reinforcement.
for seals
Silicone Semi-fluid adhesive material used for sealing and filling and to protect
components from environmental and physical elements. Polymerises with non-
corrosive dampness.
(TECNO LUPE/101) Highly adhesive synthetic grease, with silicone compounds added.
Silicone-based Applied to adjustment screws with hole communicating with oil-type fluids.
grease Used when frequent adjusting is required.
Molikote Lubricating compound containing molybdenum disulphide, used to lubricate
(DOW CORNING) articulation pins and to prevent sticking and oxidation of parts that are not
lubricated on a regular basis.
(Lithium-based) Applied to bearings, sliding parts and used to lubricate seals or parts during
Grease assembly.

Page 10
NOTES ON SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. During all operations described in this manual, the axle should be fastened onto a trestle, while the
other parts mentioned should rest on supporting benches.
2. When removing one of the arms, an anti-tilting safety trestle should be placed under the other arm.
3. When working on an arm that is fitted on the machine, make sure that the supporting trestles are
correctly positioned and that the machine is locked lengthways.
4. Do not admit any other person inside the work area; mark off the area, hang warning signs and
remove the ignition key from the machine.
5. Use only clean, quality tools; discard all worn, damaged, low-quality or improvised wrenches and
tools. Ensure that all dynamometric wrenches have been checked and calibrated.
6. Always wear gloves and non-slip rubber shoes when performing repair work.
7. Should you stain a surface with oil, remove marks straight away.
8. Dispose of all lubricants, seals, rags and solvents once work has been completed. Treat them as
special waste and dispose of them according to the relative law provisions obtaining in the country
where the axles are being overhauled.
9. Make sure that only weak solvents are used for cleaning purposes; avoid using turpentine, dilutants
and toluol-, xylol-based or similar solvents; use light solvents such as Kerosene, mineral spirits or
water-based, environment friendly solvents.
10. For the sake of clarity, the parts that do not normally need to be removed have not been reproduced
in some of the diagrams.
11. The terms RIGHT and LEFT in this manual refer to the position of the operator facing the axle from
the side opposite the drive.
12. After repair work has been completed, accurately touch up any coated part that may have been
damaged.

Page 11
CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING BRAKE DISKS
DISASSEMBLY OF BRAKE UNITS
NOTE: Perform all operations on both
arms.
1. Remove the oil-level plug (1).
Figure 4
2. Apply the brakes and, keeping them under
pressure, check the linings "S" between
the disks using tool T1. Minimum "S": 4.5
mm (0.18 in)
NOTE: Replace the braking disks and
the intermediate disks on both
sides if necessary.
Figure 5
3. Remove the swinging support (2) on the
side opposite the drive.
NOTE: If the bushing (17) is worn and
needs replacing, note down the
assembly side of the
connection notch " A".
Figure 6

Page 12
4. Disconnect the pins of the steering bars
from the steering case (See “Steering
Cylinder” on page 45).
5. Sling the arm (3) to be removed and put
the rod under slight tension.
Figure 7
6. Unloose and remove the screws (4) and
the washers (5) that fix the arm (3) to the
central body (6).
Figure 8
7. Remove the arm (3) together with the pack
of the braking disks (7).
8. Place the arm on a bench.
Figure 9
9. Remove the braking disks (7) and note
down their order of assembly.
NOTE: 1) If the disks do not need
replacing, avoid switching their
position.
2) Extract the u-joint (18).
Figure 10

Page 13
10. Remove the reversal springs (8) from the
piston (9).
NOTE: If the springs (8) are weak or
deformed they must be
replaced.
Figure 11
11. Remove the pin screws (10) guiding the
piston (9).
NOTE: If the screws are to be replaced,
note down the different colors
for the different brake gap. (See
“Assembly of Brake Units” on
page 16.)
Figure 12
12. Slowly introduce compressed air through
the connection of the braking circuit in
order to extract the entire piston.
NOTE: Hold on to the piston as it may
be suddenly ejected and
damaged.
Figure 13

Page 14
10
15
17
9
17 8
11
14 MAX 10˚
16
2
1
3
13
12
6 18
7
5
4
BCS1040L
Figure 14

Page 15
ASSEMBLY OF BRAKE UNITS
1. Accurately clean the piston (9) and the
seats of slide and seal.
2. Replace the O-rings (11) and (12) and the
anti-extrusion rings (13) and (14); make
sure that the assembly side is correct.
NOTE: Accurately check the
positioning of the anti-extrusion
rings (13) and (14).
Figure 15
3. Insert the stroke automatic regulation
springs (15); place them in line with the
piston (9).
Figure 16
4. Lubricate the seals (11) and (12) and fit
the piston (9) into the arm (3).
NOTE: Make sure that the piston seat
fits into the stop pin (A) inside
the arm.
Figure 17
5. Assist the insertion of the piston (9) by
lightly hammering around the edge with a
plastic hammer.
Figure 18

Page 16
6. Fit the pin screws (10) making sure that
they are all of the same color.
White: 1 mm (0.04 in) gap
Yellow: 0.75 mm (0.03 in) gap
Blue: 0.50 mm (0.02 in) gap
7. Torque wrench setting: 5-7 Nm (4-5 ft lb).
Figure 19
8. Fit the reversal springs (8) on the piston
(9).
NOTE: Pay due attention not to deform
the connections of the springs.
Figure 20
9. Slightly lubricate the braking disks (7) and
fit them in the arm following the correct
sequence; orient them so that the oil
circulation holes and the marks "B" are
perfectly lined up.
NOTE: When installing the steel discs,
the slot corresponding to the oil
level cap should always be kept
free.
Figure 21
10. Check that the positioning of the sealing
ring (16) on the arm is intact; install the
complete arm. Lock it into position using
two facing screws (4) and washers (5).
Figure 22

Page 17
11. Check the flatness of the arms using tool
T2 and finally lock the arms with the
screws (4) and the washer (5) using the
cross-tightening method.
Torque wrench setting: 298 Nm (220 ft lb).
Figure 23

Page 18
STEERING CASE
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the guard (1) and disconnect the
articulation pin (2).
Figure 24
2. Sling the entire unit (7) and connect it to
the hoist, putting the rod under light
tension.
Figure 25
3. Unloose and remove the fitting screws (3)
from the bottom articulation pin (4).
NOTE: Screws cannot be re-used.
Figure 26

Page 19
4. Remove the bottom articulation pin (4)
complete with front sealing ring (5).
Figure 27
5. Unloose and remove the fitting screws (3)
from the top articulation pin (6).
Figure 28
6. Using two levers, remove the top
articulation pin (6) complete with front seal
(5).
7. Pay attention not to damage the surfaces.
Figure 29
8. Remove the complete steering case (7).
Figure 30

Page 20
9. Using a puller for inner parts, remove the
top bush (8) and the bottom ball-bush (9).
Figure 31
10. Remove the articulation pins (4) and (6)
and the front sealing rings (5).
NOTE: Note down the side for
assembly.
Figure 32
11. If the ball cover (11) needs replacing,
remove it from the bottom articulation pin
(4).
Figure 33

Page 21
1
3
6
10
5
2
8
5
3
4
BCS1240L
Figure 34

Page 22
ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
1. If the bottom articulation pin (4) has been
extracted, position the pin under a press
and fit the ball cover (11).
Figure 35
2. Fit the front sealing rings (5) onto the
articulation pins (4) and (6).
NOTE: Carefully check that the rings
are properly oriented (5).
Figure 36
3. Lubricate the top bush (8) or the bottom
ball bush (9) and fit them into the fulcrum
holes of the arm.
4. Use tools T3 and T4.
Figure 37
5. Lubricate the terminal of the u-joint (10)
and install the steering case (7).
6. Pay due attention not to damage the dust
cover rings and the sealing rings.
Figure 38

Page 23
7. Fit a new seal (5) onto the top articulation
pin (6). Lubricate and install the unit in the
steering case. Position the screws (3) and
lightly tighten.
8. Check the correct assembly side of the
seal (5).
Figure 39
9. Fit a new seal (5) onto the bottom
articulation pin (4). Lubricate and fit the
unit in the steering case. Position the
screws (3) and lightly tighten.
10. Check for the correct assembly side of the
seal (5).
Figure 40
11. Tighten the new fitting screws (3) of top
and bottom articulation pins in sequence
using the cross tightening method.
Torque wrench setting: 128-142 Nm (95-
104 ft lb).
Figure 41
12. Connect the articulation pin (2).
13. Lubricate articulations with Molikote and fit
the dust cover (1).
Figure 42

Page 24
U-JOINT
The u-joint can only be removed after extraction of the steering case has been performed (See: “Steering
Case” on page 19). Different procedures need to be followed depending on the kind of repair operation
needed and the type of axle:
1. Axle without parking brakes: compressed air (7 bar approx.) should be introduced in the braking
circuit in order to hold the braking disks in position.
2. Axle with negative brake: does not require any preparation as the disks are mechanically locked in
position.
3. Axle with mechanical brake: requires that the external control levers are put under tension in relation
to each other.
4. Disassembly to be carried out with the arm resting on the bench.
The explanations reported herewith refer to removal operations carried out on the bench; the different
stages of u-joint removal also apply to all other solutions or versions.

Page 25
1. Unloose and remove the top and bottom
check nuts (2) from the dowels (3).
Figure 43
2. Remove top and bottom check dowels (3)
from the flange (5) or bush (13).
NOTE: The u-joint can only be
removed after extraction of the
steering case has been
performed (See: “Steering
Case” on page 19). Different
procedures need to be followed
depending on the kind of repair
operation needed and the type
of axle:
1) Axle without parking brakes:
Figure 44
compressed air (7 bar approx.)
should be introduced in the
braking circuit in order to hold
the braking disks in position.
2) Axle with negative brake: does not require any preparation as the disks are
mechanically locked in position.
3) Axle with mechanical brake: requires that the external control levers are put under
tension in relation to each other.
4) Disassembly to be carried out with the arm resting on the bench.
The explanations reported herewith refer to removal operations carried out on the bench;
the different stages of u-joint removal also apply to all other solutions or versions.
Flanged Version
1. Remove the u-joint (4).
NOTE: To remove the u-joint use, if
necessary, a plastic hammer or
a lever.
Figure 45

Page 26
2. Remove the snap ring (9) from the bearing
as well as the packing ring (5).
Figure 46
3. Position the entire u-joint (4) under a press
and remove the bearing (8) and the ring
(5) simultaneously.
Figure 47
4. Extract the sealing ring of the shaft from
the flange (5).
NOTE: Note down the assembly side of
the ring.
Figure 48
Coupling Version
1. Remove the entire u-joint (4).
NOTE: To remove the u-joint use, if
necessary, a plastic hammer or
a lever.
Figure 49

Page 27
2. Remove the snap ring (9) from the bushing
unit (13).
Figure 50
3. Position the entire u-joint (4) under a press
and remove the complete bush (13).
Figure 51
4. Remove the snap ring (10) from the
bearing (11). Use a puller to remove the
bearing (11), the sealing ring (12) and the
O-ring (14).
the ring (12).
Figure 52

Page 28
1 3
2
FLANGED VERSION
9
8
7
6
5
4
2
3 9
10
11
12
13
COUPLING VERSION 14
BCS1430L
Figure 53

Page 29
ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Flanged Version
1. Insert the sealing ring (7) of the shaft in the
flange (5), using tool T5.
NOTE: Carefully check the assembly
side. Also replace the outer O-
ring (6).
Figure 54
2. Fit the flange (5) onto the u-joint (4).
3. Heat the bearing (8) at an approx.
temperature of 100° C (212° F), fit it on the
u-joint and fasten.
Figure 55
4. Fit the snap ring (9) on the bearing (8).
Figure 56
Coupling Version
1. Using tools T5 and T6, insert the sealing
ring (12) and the bearing (11) in the bush
(13).
NOTE: Carefully check the assembly
side of the seal (12).
Figure 57

Page 30
2. Fit the snap ring (10) on the bearing (11).
Figure 58
3. Heat the bearing in oil at an approx.
temperature of 100° C (212° F) and fit the
entire bush (13) on the u-joint (4).
Figure 59
4. Fit the check ring (9) on the bushing unit
(13); also put the O-ring (14) into position.
Figure 60
5. Insert the u-joint and tighten the top and
bottom dowels (2).
Torque wrench setting: Max. 15 Nm.
NOTE: For u-joint coming with a bush,
centre the point of the check
dowels in the slot.
Figure 61

Page 31
6. Apply Loctite 242 to the jutting parts of the
dowels (2).
Figure 62
7. Screw the check nuts (3) of the dowels (2)
and lock them using a dynamometric
wrench.
Torque wrench setting: 122 Nm (90 ft lb)
.
Figure 63
3 2 3 2
BCS1550L
Figure 64

Page 32
PLANETARY REDUCTION
DISASSEMBLY
1. Disconnect the steering bars from the
steering case (3).
NOTE: For details, see “Steering Case”
on page 19.
2. Remove the securing screws (1) from the
planetary carrier cover (2).
Figure 65
3. Disjoint the planetary carrier cover (2) from
the steering case (3) by alternatively
forcing a screwdriver into the appropriate
slots.
Figure 66
4. Remove the complete planetary carrier
cover (2).
Figure 67

Page 33
5. Unloose and remove the tightening nuts
(4) from the crown flange (5).
Figure 68
6. Remove the safety flange (6).
Figure 69
7. Using a puller, remove the complete crown
flange (5) by acting on the stud bolts.
Figure 70
8. Partially extract the hub (7) using a plastic
hammer.
NOTE: Alternately hammer on several
equidistant points.
Figure 71

Page 34
9. Remove the external bearing (8).
Figure 72
10. By hand remove the complete hub (7).
Figure 73
1) Remove the pins and remove
the steering case (3).
on page 19.
Figure 74
11. Remove the snap rings (9).
Figure 75

Page 35
12. With the help of a puller, remove the planet
wheel gears (10).
planet wheels.
Figure 76
13. Remove the snap ring (12) from the crown
(13).
Figure 77
14. Remove the crown flange (5).
Figure 78
15. Remove the sealing ring from the hub (14).
Figure 79

Page 36
16. Remove the internal bearing (15).
Figure 80
17. Remove the external thrust blocks from the
bearings (8) and (15) forcing a pin-driver
into the appropriate slots on the hub (7).
NOTE: Hammer in an alternate way so
as to avoid crawling or
deformation of the thrust
blocks.
Figure 81
18. Use a puller to remove the centring ring
(16), the sealing ring (17) and the bearing
(18) from the steering case (3).
NOTE: Note down the orientation of
both centring ring (16) and
sealing ring (17).
Figure 82

Page 37
19
16
18
3
17
14 12
15
5
9
10
8
20
13 11
6
4
9
10
1
2
BCS1740L
Figure 83

Page 38
ASSEMBLY
1. Lubricate the bushing (18) and the seat of
the steering case (3).
2. Install the bushing (18), using tool T7.
Figure 84
3. Lubricate the outer surface of the sealing
ring (17) and centring ring (16); fit them
into their seat using tool T8.
Figure 85
4. Position the lower part of tool T9A and the
thrust block of the external bearing (8)
under the press.
Figure 86
5. Lubricate the seats of the bearings and
position the hub (7) on tool T9A; position
the thrust block of the internal bearing
(15).
NOTE: Check that the thrust block is
correctly oriented.
Figure 87

Page 39
6. Position the upper part of tool T9B and
press the thrust blocks into the hub (7) all
the way down.
Figure 88
7. Fit the bearing (15) into the internal thrust
block.
Figure 89
8. Apply a repositionable jointing compound
for seals to the outer surface of the sealing
ring (14). Position the sealing ring (14) in
the hub (7).
NOTE: Check that the ring (14) is
correctly oriented.
Figure 90
9. Position tool T10 and press the sealing
ring (14) into its seat.
Figure 91

Page 40
10. Insert the flange (5) in the crown (13).
Figure 92
11. Insert the snap ring (12) in order to fix the
flange (5) in the crown (13).
NOTE: Carefully check that ring (12) is
properly inserted in the slot of
the crown (13)
Figure 93
12. With the help of tool T11, insert the planet
wheel gears (10) into the cover (2).
13. Accurately check the orientation.
Figure 94
14. Lock the gears (10) into position by fitting
the snap rings (9).
Figure 95

Page 41
15. Fit the steering case (3) onto the U-joint
(19) and install the articulation pins.
NOTE: For pin assembly details, see
“Steering Case” on page 19.
Figure 96
16. Connect the steering bars.
on page 19.
Figure 97
17. Install the hub (7).
Figure 98
18. Install the external bearing (8).
NOTE: Using a plastic hammer, drive
the bearing to the limit stop by
lightly hammering around the
edge.
Figure 99

Page 42
19. Fit the complete crown flange (5).
NOTE: In order to fasten the flange (5),
use a plastic hammer and
alternately hammer on several
equidistant points.
Figure 100
20. Apply Tecnolube Seal 101 grease to the
surface of the safety flange (6) which
touches the crown flange (5).
21. Fit the safety flange (6).
Figure 101
22. Apply Loctite 242 to the studs and fit in the
nuts (4).
Figure 102
23. Cross tighten the nuts (4) in two stages.
Initial torque wrench setting: 120 Nm (89 ft
lb).
Final torque wrench setting: 255-285 Nm
(188-210 ft lb)
Figure 103

Page 43
24. Fit the planetary carrier cover (2) onto the
hub (3).
NOTE: Check that the O-ring (20) is in
good condition and in position.
Figure 104
25. Lock the planetary carrier cover (2) by
tightening the screws (1).
Torque wrench setting for screws: 40-50
Nm (29-36 ft lb).
Figure 105

Page 44
STEERING CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the centring sensor (1) of the
steering piston (2), if supplied.
Figure 106
2. Remove the safety cotter pins (3) from the
articulation pins (4) of the steering bars
(5).
NOTE: Dispose of used cotter pins.
Figure 107
3. Remove the castellated nuts (6) that lock
the articulation pins (4).
Figure 108

Page 45
4. Disconnect the tapered pins of the
articulation (4) from the steering case (7)
by means of a puller.
Figure 109
5. If the connection of the steering bars
includes a safety collar (13), raise the
border.
Figure 110
6. Disconnect left and right steering bars (5)
from the piston (2).
Figure 111
steering cylinder (9).
Figure 112

Page 46
8. Extract the cylinder (9) using a plastic
hammer.
NOTE: For cylinder disassembly, refer
to “Steering Cylinder” on page
45.
Figure 113
7
15
5 9
11
1 10 2
15
4
6 8
3
14 7
12
4
12
14
6 13
3
13
6
3
6
3
BCS2050L
Figure 114

Page 47
INSTALLATION
1. Check that the O-rings (15) of the axle unit
are in good condition; lubricate the seats
of the seals (15) and fit the steering
cylinder (9) into its seat.
Figure 115
2. Lock the cylinder by cross-tightening the
screws (8).
94 ft lb).
Figure 116
3. Apply Loctite 242 to the thread and
connect the steering bars by screwing the
terminals onto the piston stem.
199 ft lb).
NOTE: Versions with coupling require
that the rim of the articulation
(13) is riveted onto the surfaces
of the piston stem.
Figure 117
4. Insert the pins (4) in the steering case (7)
and lock into position using a torque
wrench setting of 260-290 Nm (192-213 ft
lb).
5. Find the position of the notching in relation
to the hole of the cotter pins and tighten
the nut (6) further.
NOTE: Check that rubber guards (A)
are intact.
Figure 118

Page 48
6. Insert the cotter pins (3) and bend the
safety stems.
NOTE: Use new cotter pins.
Figure 119
7. Install the proximity (1) for checking piston
centring - if applicable - and tighten the
screws (10).
Torque wrench setting: 5-6 Nm (4 ft lb).
Figure 120
NOTE: Eliminate the action of the
negative brake, if fitted.
8. Apply tools T12 to the hubs and lock them.
9. Using a level "B", check that tools are
perfectly flat and parallel to each other.
Figure 121
10. Connect the sensor (1) to the inspection
device according to either diagram.
Figure 122

Page 49
11. Sensor connection card, STANDARD
version. I max = 0,80A
BLACK
CONNECTOR
2
1 3 --
4 BLUE
BATTERY
+
BROWN 2A
BCS2140L
Figure 123
12. Sensor connection card, OPTIONAL
version. I max = 0,80A
BLACK
CONNECTOR
2 BATTERY
1 3 --
4 BLUE
+
BROWN 2A
BCS2150L
Figure 124
13. Centre the piston by slowly moving it first
in one direction then in the other and
position it half way on the stroke, which is
determined by the switching on and off of
the signal lamp of the inspection device in
the reversal stage.
Figure 125
14. Inspect nut "C" on one side of the piston
and note down the size for checking later
adjustments.
NOTE: If cylinders come without a
sensor, the centring of the
piston must be carried out on
the basis of the maximum
stroke.
Figure 126

Page 50
15. Without moving the piston, check front and
rear size at the edge of tools T12.
Max. difference: 0.6-0.7 mm (0.02-0.03 in).
NOTE: In order to check the rear size,
rotate the bevel pinion and
check that tools T12 are flat.
Figure 127
16. If necessary, adjust convergency without
moving the centring of the piston and
adjust the length of the steering bars (5) or
(14).
NOTE: With a half turn of screw, the
front size is reduced by about 3
mm, whereas the rear one is
increased by about 3 mm.
Figure 128
17. Unloose the nuts on the collars (12).
Figure 129 CONVERGENCY ADJUSTMENT

ON UNITS WITH COLLAR
18. Rotate the ball-and-socket joints (16) until
convergency has been obtained.
19. Check that articulations move easily and
lock the collars (12).
Torque wrench setting for nuts: 42-52 Nm
(31-38 ft lb).
Figure 130

Page 51
20. Unloose the nuts (11) and screw them
onto the ball-and-socket joints (15).
Figure 131 CONVERGENCY ADJUSTMENT

ON ALTERNATIVE VERSIONS
21. Hold the articulations still and rotate the
ball-and-socket joints (15).
22. Once the convergency has been adjusted,
lock the nuts (11).
Torque wrench setting for nuts: 298-328
Nm (219-241 ft lb).
Figure 132
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the snap ring (1) from the cylinder
head (2).
Figure 133

Page 52
2. With the help of a plastic hammer, push
the head (2) inside the cylinder (3).
NOTE: The head should line up with
the edge of the cylinder.
Figure 134
3. With the help of a drift, apply pressure to
the stop ring (4) that is placed inside the
cylinder (3) and extract the ring using a
screwdriver.
Figure 135
4. Hammer the piston (5) on the rear of the
head (2) using a plastic hammer.
5. Continue hammering until the head (2) is
ejected from the cylinder (3).
Figure 136

Page 53
6. Disassemble the cylinder unit (3) by
extracting first the head (2), then the piston
(5).
the piston (5). The bevelled part
"A" of the piston is oriented
towards the head (2).
7. Remove all seals, anti-extrusion rings and
scraper rings from head (2), cylinder (3)
and piston (5).
NOTE: 1) All seals must be replaced
every time the unit is Figure 137
disassembled.
2) Particular attention must be
paid not to damage the seats of
both seals and piston slide.
9
10
2
11
6
7
8
4
5 1
8
7
6
12
3
13
BCS2290L
Figure 138

Page 54
ASSEMBLY
1. After applying grease, install the sealing
6 7 8
ring (6) of the shaft, the anti-extrusion ring
(7) and the scraper ring (8) inside the
cylinder (3).
NOTE: Thoroughly check that
ring (7) is correct.
BCS2300L
Figure 139
(7) and the scraper ring (8) in the head (2). 6 7 8
(7) ring is correct.
BCS2300L
Figure 140
(7) and the scraper ring (8) in the head (2). 8 7 6
(7) ring is correct.
BCS2310L
Figure 141
4. Fit the seal (9) onto the outside of the head
(2).
9
NOTE: 1) In order to facilitate
assembly, apply grease to the
outer surface of the piston.
2) Do not roll the seal (9) up.
BCS2320L
Figure 142

Page 55
5. Prepare the piston (5) by fitting it with the
guide ring (10), the magnetic ring (11), the
O-ring (12) and the seal (13). 11
13 10
NOTE: 1) In order to facilitate
assembly, apply grease.
2) If a centring sensor is not 12 5
fitted, then the magnetic ring
(11)
BCS2330L
Figure 143
6. Apply tool T18 to the shaft on the opposite
side of the head (2) and centre it on the
cylinder (3) so that it fits into the piston (5).
NOTE: Apply a little grease to seals
and cylinder.
Figure 144
7. Push the piston (5) into the cylinder for 100
mm using a plastic hammer.
Figure 145
8. Remove tool T18 and apply it to the
opposite side of the piston (5).
Figure 146

Page 56
9. Apply grease to head (2) seals, fit the head
onto the piston and push it into the cylinder
(3) using a plastic hammer.
NOTE: Insert the head as to line it up
with the edge of the cylinder.
Figure 147
10. Insert the stop ring (4) ensuring that it fits
into the seat of the cylinder (3).
Figure 148
11. Apply pressure to the head using two
screwdrivers or levers until the head is
fastened onto the stop ring (4).
Figure 149
12. Fit the snap ring (1) on the head (2).
NOTE: Make sure that the snap ring (1)
is securely fastened in its seat.
13. If necessary, force it into its seat using a
drift and a hammer.
Figure 150

Page 57
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT
Removing
1. Remove the complete arms.
NOTE: For details, see “Checking
Wear and Replacing Brake
Disks” on page 12.
Figure 151
2. Mark the position of the ring nuts (1).
Remove the fitting screws (3) from the ring
nuts (1).
Figure 152
3. Uniformly heat the ring nuts (1) up to a
temperature of 80° C (176° F).
Figure 153

Page 58
4. Apply tool T13 and remove the ring nuts.
NOTE: Accurately clean the threaded
portions on ring nuts of body
and cover.
Figure 154
5. Remove the fitting screws (4) from the
middle cover (5).
Figure 155
6. Insert a screw-driver in the opposing slots
then force and remove the middle cover (5)
and the complete differential unit (6).
NOTE: Support the pieces using a rod.
Figure 156
7. If the bearings need replacing, extract the
external thrust blocks of the bearings (7)
and (8) from middle cover (5) and central
body (2).
NOTE: Accurately check the O-ring (9).
Figure 157

Page 59
8. Remove the top plug (10).
Figure 158
Disassembling
1. Remove the fitting screws (11) from the
crown (12).
Figure 159
2. If the bearing need replacing, extract the
bearing (7) and remove the crown (12).
Figure 160
3. Remove the shim washer (13) and the
planetary gear (14).
Figure 161

Page 60
4. If the bearing need replacing, extract the
bearing (8) from the differential carrier
(15).
Figure 162
5. Remove the snap rings (16) from the two
pins (17) of the planet wheel gears (18).
Figure 163
6. Insert tool T14 between the planet wheel
gears (18).
Figure 164
7. Force tool T14 in-between the planet
wheel gears (18) using two pin-drivers.
NOTE: Make sure that tool T14 is
perfectly lined up with the pins
(17) when locked.
Figure 165

Page 61
8. Place the differential carrier (15) under a
press, position bush T15 and insert
gudgeon T16A. Press T16A pin to limit
position.
Figure 166
9. Remove gudgeon T16A and bush T15.
NOTE: In this condition the tool T14
contains pin (17).
Figure 167
10. Remove tool T14 together with the pin (17)
of the planet wheel.
Figure 168
11. Leave the released planetary gear in
position and again lock tool T14.
12. Repeat the operations for the extraction of
the pin of the 2 nd planet wheel (17).
13. Repeat the operations for all other pins.
Figure 169

Page 62
14. Remove tool T14 and remove the last two
planet wheel gears (18), the 2 nd
differential unit gear (14) and the relative
shim washer (13) from the differential
carrier.
Figure 170
4
3 5 16
1
20
9 11
17
19
20
17 16
19
18
13
14
7 13
15 10
12 18 8
2
19
17
20 19
16
17
20
6
16
3
1
BCS2610L
Figure 171

Page 63
ASSEMBLY, ADJUSTING AND
INSTALLATION
Assembling
1. Insert the shim washer (13) and the
planetary gear (14) in the differential
carrier (15).
Figure 172
2. Position the shim washer (19) and the first
planet wheel gear (18).
3. Hold them in position using bar T16C.
Figure 173
4. With the help of gudgeon T16A, position
the second planet wheel gear (18) and the
relative shim washer (19).
Figure 174
5. Insert tool T14 between the two planetary
gears (18). Line up the entire unit by
pushing bar T16C all the way down until
gudgeon T16A is ejected.
Figure 175

Page 64
6. Lock tool T14 behind the planet wheel
gears (18).
7. After locking, remove bar T16C.
Figure 176
8. Fit the snap rings (20) onto the pins (17).
Figure 177
9. Place the differential carrier (15) under the
press, position bush T15 and insert the
planet wheel pin (17).
Figure 178
10. Put gudgeon T16B on top of the planet
wheel pin (17).
Figure 179

Page 65
11. Press T16B pin all the way down.
Figure 180
12. Remove gudgeon T16B, bush T15 and fit
the snap ring (16) on the pin (17).
NOTE: Make sure that the snap ring
centres the seat and that it
rests on the surface of the
differential carrier.
13. Repeat the operations on the other planet
wheel pin or planet wheel axle.
Figure 181
14. Position the second planetary gear (14) in
the differential carrier (15).
Figure 182
15. Position the shim washer (13) on the
crown (12).
NOTE: In order to hold the shim
washer (13) in position, apply
grease to it.
Figure 183

Page 66
16. Position the crown (12) on the differential
carrier (15) and lock it with screws (11)
applied with Loctite 242.
Nm (95-104 ft lb).
NOTE: Secure the screws using the
Figure 184
17. Install the bearings (7) and (8) using tool
T17.
Figure 185
18. If the bearings are replaced, insert the
external thrust blocks in the middle cover
(5) and in the central body (2).
Figure 186
Installing
1. Position the differential unit (6) in the
central body (2) with the help of a bar and
fit the middle cover (5).
NOTE: Thoroughly check the state of
the O-ring (9) and make sure
that the cover is fitted with the
oil discharge in the lower
position.
Figure 187

Page 67
2. Lock the middle cover (5) with screws (4).
Torque wrench setting for screw: 23.8-26.2
Nm (18-19 ft lb).
Figure 188
NOTE: If the ring nuts (1) are removed,
spread them with Loctite 242.
3. Tighten ring nuts on the crown side until
clearance between pinion and crown is
zero, then lock the crown; go back 1/4 -
1/2 turn.
Figure 189
4. Pre-set the bearings by means of the ring
nut situated on the opposite side of the
crown, so as to increase pinion torque up
to 140 - 210 Ncm.
NOTE: If bearings are not new, check
the static torque; if bearings are
new, check the continuous
torque.
Figure 190
5. Introduce a comparator with rotary key "A"
through the top plug hole (10). Position the
comparator on the centre of one of the
teeth of the crown (12), pre-set it to 1mm
and reset it.
Figure 191

Page 68
6. Manually move the crown (12) in both
directions in order to check the existing
backlash between the pinion and the
crown.
Figure 192
7. Adjust the backlash between the pinion
and the crown by unloosing one of the ring
nuts (1) and tightening the opposite to
compensate.
8. Normal backlash: see table.
Clearance
Ratio
Min. Max.
9:34 0.18 0.23
9:35 0.13 0.18
11:31 0.20 0.28
11:35 0.13 0.18 Figure 193
12:35 0.13 0.18
12:41 0.15 0.20
14:32 0.18 0.23
14:36 0.15 0.20
14:41 0.15 0.20
15:32 0.18 0.23
15:47 0.13 0.18
9. Apply Loctite 242 to the screws (3), fit

them into one of the two holes and tighten.
Torque wrench setting: 23.8-26.2 Nm (18-
19 ft lb)
.
10. Fit the top plug (10) after applying
repositionable jointing compound for seals
to the rims.
Figure 194

Page 69
11. Re-install the complete arms.
Figure 195

Page 70
BEVEL PINION
REMOVAL
1. Remove the complete arms and the
differential unit.
Disks” on page 12 and
“Differential Unit” on page 58.
Figure 196
2. If disassembly is awkward, heat the check
nut (1) of the flange (2) at 80° C (176° F).
NOTE: Heating is meant to unloose the
setting of Loctite on the nut (1).
Figure 197
3. Position tool T20A (or T20B), so as to
avoid pinion rotation.
4. Unloose and remove the nut (1); also
remove the O-ring (3).
Figure 198

Page 71
5. Remove the flange (2) complete with
guard (4) by means of a puller.
Figure 199
6. Remove the swinging support (5).
Figure 200
7. Remove the sealing ring (6).
Figure 201
8. Position wrench T22 onto the ring nut (7)
and apply bar hold T21 to the pinion (8).
9. Stop wrench T22 and rotate the pinion so
as to release and remove the ring nut (7).
NOTE: If disassembly proves awkward,
weld the ring nut at approx. 80°
C (176° F).
Figure 202

Page 72
10. Apply blocks T23 and, with the help of a
puller, extract the pinion (8) complete with
the internal bearing (9), the distance piece
(10) and shims (11).
NOTE: The thrust blocks of the
bearings remain in the central
body (12).
Figure 203
11. Remove the pinion (8), shims (11) and
distance piece (10).
Figure 204
12. Using a puller and a press, remove the
inner bearing (9) from the pinion (8).
Figure 205
13. Remove the thrust block of the external
bearing (13).
Figure 206

Page 73
14. Insert a drift in the appropriate holes and
remove the thrust block of the internal
bearing (9) as well as the shim washers
(14).
Figure 207
14
12
10
13
6
5
11
7
3
1 4
2
BCS3070L
Figure 208

Page 74
ADJUSTING AND INSTALLATION
1. Using a surface plate, reset a centesimal
comparator "DG" and place it on the
measurement ring T24 (with a thickness of
30.2 mm).
2. Preset the comparator to approx. 2 mm
(0.08 in).
Figure 209
3. Bring the internal bearing (9), complete
with its thrust block, under the comparator
"DG".
4. Determine overall thickness "D" of the
bearing checking the discrepancy between
this size and the size of the measurement
ring.
NOTE: Press the thrust block in the
centre and take several
measurements while rotating
the thrust block.
Figure 210
5. Partially insert the thrust block of the
external bearing (13).
Figure 211
6. Install tension rod T25C, measurement
ring T24 and front guide tool T25A on the
thrust block of the external bearing (13).
Figure 212

Page 75
7. Connect the tension rod to the press and
move the thrust block of the external
bearing (13) into its seat.
8. Disconnect the press and remove the
tension rod.
NOTE: Before starting the next stage,
make sure that the thrust block
has been completely inserted
into its seat.
Figure 213
9. Insert tool T26B complete with external
bearing (13), measurement ring T24 and
gauged ring nut T26C.
10. Manually tighten.
Figure 214
11. Fit a centesimal comparator "DG1" with
long stem into bar T26A; when the bar
rests on two size- blocks "GB" of 57 mm
(2.24 in), reset the comparator.
(0.08 in) and reset.
Figure 215
13. Lay bar T26A on gauged nut T26C and
take the size "A" at about 57 mm (2.24 in)
corresponding to the maximum diameter
of arms centring.
Figure 216

Page 76
14. Calculate size "B" which will be the first
useful value for calculating the size of the
T24
shims (14) that are to be inserted under T26C
the thrust block of the internal bearing (9).
R115
T26B
A
30.2 61
(61-A)+115+30.2=B B
BCS3160L
Figure 217
15. Check the nominal size (X) marked on the
pinion and add or subtract the indicated
variation (Y) so as to obtain size "Z".
e.g.: Z = 118 + 0.1 = 118.1
Z = 118 - 0.2 = 117.8
Figure 218
16. Calculate size "C" which represents the
second value for calculating the size of the
shims "S" that are to be placed under the
thrust block of the internal bearing (9).
(14) S
D Z
C=Z+D C
BCS3180L
Figure 219
17. Calculate the difference between sizes "B"
and "C" so as to obtain the size "S" of the
shim (14) that will go under the thrust block
of the internal bearing (9).
Figure 220

Page 77
18. Insert shim "S" (14) and the thrust block of
the internal bearing (9) in the central body.
NOTE: To hold shim "S" (14) in
position, apply grease.
Figure 221
19. Position tool T25A and tension rod T25C.
20. Connect the tension rod to the press,
fasten the thrust block and then remove
the tools.
NOTE: Before going on to the next
stage, make sure that the thrust
block has been completely
inserted.
Figure 222
21. Position tools T26C and T26B complete
with tapered bearings (9) and (13);
manually tighten until a rolling torque has
been obtained.
Figure 223
22. Insert the stem of a depth comparator
"DDG" in either side hole of tool T26C;
reset the comparator with a presetting of
approx. 3 mm (0.12 in).
Figure 224

Page 78
23. Remove the comparator and release tools
and bearings from the central body.
24. Re-install all and insert the distance piece
(10) between bearings (9) and (13);
manually tighten the whole pack.
Figure 225
25. Insert depth comparator "DDG" into tool
T26B-T26C and measure variation "H" in
relation to the zero setting performed back
at point d.
Figure 226
26. The variation is to be added to a set value
of 0.12-0.13 mm (0.01 in), so as to obtain
the size of shim "S1" (11) which will be
inserted between the external bearing (13)
and the distance piece (10) and
subsequently, to determine the preload for
the bearings.
Figure 227
27. Position the internal bearing (9) and the
pinion (8) under a press; force the bearing
onto the pinion.
Figure 228

Page 79
28. Fit the pinion (8), shim "S1" (11) and
distance piece (10) in the main body (12).
NOTE: The finer shims must be placed
in- between the thicker ones
Figure 229
29. Insert the external bearing (13) in the
central body in order to complete the pack
arranged as in the figure.
Figure 230
30. Connect the pinion (8) to the tie rod T28A
and T28B; connect the tie rod T28C (see
special tools) to the press and block.
Figure 231
31. Apply Loctite 242 to the thread of the ring
nut (7) and screw the nut onto the pinion
(8).
Figure 232

Page 80
32. Apply special wrench T22 to the ring nut
(7) and bar-hold T21 to the pinion (8).
33. Lock the wrench T22 and rotate the pinion
using a dynamometric wrench, up to a
minimum required torque setting of 500
Nm (369 ft lb).
Figure 233
34. Apply onto the pinion (8) the bar-hold and
with the help of a torque metre, check the
torque of the pinion (8).
Torque: 120-170 Nm (89-125 ft lb)
NOTE: If torque exceeds the maximum
value, then size of shim "S1"
(11) between bearing (13) and
distance piece (10) needs to be
increased. If torque does not
reach the set value, increase
the torque setting of ring nut (7)
in different stages to obtain a
Figure 234
maximum value of 570 Nm (420
ft lb).
NOTE: If torque does not reach the minimum value, then size of shim "S1" (11) needs to be
reduced.
NOTE: When calculating the increase or decrease in size of shim "S1", bear in mind that a
variation of shim (11) of 0.01 mm corresponds to a variation of 60 Nm (44 ft lb) in the
torque of pinion (8).
35. Lubricate the outer surface of the new
sealing ring (6) and fit it onto the central
body (12) using tool T27.
Figure 235

Page 81
36. Install the swinging support (5).
NOTE: Make sure it is properly
oriented.
Figure 236
37. Fit flange (2) complete with guard (4) and
fasten it.
38. For keying flange (2), use a plastic
hammer if necessary.
NOTE: Make sure that guard (4) is
securely fastened onto the
flange and that it is not
deformed.
Figure 237
39. Apply Loctite 242 to the threaded part of
pinion (8).
40. Position tool T20A (or T20B) and fasten it
in order to avoid rotation.
41. Insert O-ring (3), nut (1) and tighten it
using a dynamometric wrench.
228 ft lb).
Figure 238
42. Remove blocks T23 (used for extracting
the pinion) and re-install the arms.
Figure 239

Page 82
SPECIAL TOOLS
Figure 240

Page 83
Figure 241

Page 84
Figure 242

Page 85
Figure 243

Page 86
Figure 244

Page 87
Figure 245

Page 88
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Correction
Insufficient braking 1. Incorrect adjustment Inspect disc thickness and if discs are
usable read just brakes to the
specifications in the vehicle's manual.
2. Brake discs worn out Inspect disc thickness and replace if
necessary.
3. Incorrect brake fluid Replace all seals in axle and master
cylinder that have made contact with the
incorrect fluid and all brake hoses. If
incorrect fluid leaked into axle oil, seals
and o-rings in axle must be replaced.
4. Loss of brake fluid Inspect for and repair any leaks in outside
circuit or master cylinder. If caused by
incorrect brake fluid see correction N. 3. If
leak is to the outside replace the o-rings
between the center and intermediate
housings. If leak is to the inside replace
above o-rings and brake piston o-rings.
5. Overheated axle causing See «overheating» problem.
brake fluid to vaporize.
(Brake return when axle
cools)
Soft brake pedal 6. Air in brake circuit Bleed brakes as described in the vehicle's
service manual.
Ineffective safety 7. Incorrect adjustment See correction N. 1.
brake 8. Brake disc worn out See correction N. 2.
Overheating 9. Oil level wrong Drain, flush and refill oil to proper level.
10. Too small of a brake gap Readjust brakes to the specifications in the
vehicle's service manual.
11. Park brake dragging Unlock the brake and adjust the correct
gap.
12. Incorrect brake fluid in See correction N. 3.
system
13. No free-pedal at master Readjust brake pedal as described in the
cylinder vehicle's service manual.
14. Restriction in brake lines Inspect for and replace damage lines.
15. Restriction in return line of Inspect for and replace damaged return
brake Servo system line. Inspect for and remove any filter, tee'd
in line or any other source of back pressure
from the return line.
16. Incorrect lubricant Change the retaining rings of the brake
circuit and brake pump.

Page 89
Diff-lock inoperative 17. If manual control, loose or Inspect and correct linkage and readjust as
misadjusted linkage indicated in vehicle's service manual.
18. If hydraulic control, Refer to the service manual for the vehicle.
problems in the hydraulic
or electrical circuits of the
vehicle
19. If hydraulic control: Rebuilt cylinder.
problems in actuating
cylinder (noteable through
loss of hydraulic oil or
increase of the oil level in
axle)
20. If with lim. slip differential, Replace discs.
worn discs
Oil coming out of 21. Leak in internal brake See correction N. 2 and 3.
breather system
22. Leak in diff-lock actuating See correction N. 19.
cylinder
NoSpin indexing 23. Unequal tire pressure left Inflate tires to the recommended pressure
noise when driving anal right in the service manual, or until the rolling
straight radius is equal.
NOTE: With NoSpin, 24. Different style, size or Change tires to make the rolling radius
fatigue damage can brand of tires between left equal. Vary the tire pressure within the
occur on the side with and right hand side specifications until the rolling radius is
the larger tire. equal.
Noise during coast 25. Wheel bearings damaged Replace and adjust.
and under power the
same
Noise under power 26. Low oil level Refill oil to proper level.
greater than during 27. Incorrect lubricant See correction N. 16.
coast
28. Ring and pinion worn Inspect through top cover. Replace and
adjust.
29. Worn ring and pinion Replace and adjust.
bearings
30. Worn planetary gears or Replace.
bearings
Noise during coast 31. Loose pinion nut Inspect ring, pinion and pinion bearings. If
greater than under undamaged, retighten nut.
power 32. Only pinion bearing See correction N. 29.
damaged
Noise during turn 33. Worn spider and/or side Replace.
(without NoSpin) gears

Page 90
A «Stick slip» noise 34. Worn or damaged Inspect and replace as described in
when going from cardanshaft vehicle's service manual.
forward to reverse 35. Loose wheel Inspect for wheel and wheel stud damage.
Replace if needed and retorque lug nuts.
36. Articulation box joint and Inspect and replace.
achsel shaft damaged
37. Spider pins loose in diff- Inspect through top cover. Replace.
carrier
38. Damaged or missing See correction N. 33.
spider and/or side gear
washers

Page 91
Page 92
S0602056K
1REAR AXLE
(DANA)
CAUTION!
REAR AXLE (DANA) S0602056K


October 2002
Rear Axle (Dana) S0602056K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction..................................................................................................... 3
Introductory Remarks.............................................................................. 3
Maintenance and Lubricant ............................................................................ 4
Definition of Viewpoints........................................................................... 4
Data Plate ............................................................................................... 4
Maintenance Points................................................................................. 5
Maintenance Intervals ............................................................................. 6
Adjustment and Checks .......................................................................... 6
Tightening Torques.................................................................................. 8
Screw-locking, Sealing and Lubricating Materials................................... 9
Notes on Safety Precautions........................................................................ 11
Checking Wear and Replacing
Brake Disks .................................................................................................. 12
Disassembly of Brake Units .................................................................. 12
Assembly of Brake Units ....................................................................... 15
Planetary Reduction and Axle Shaft ............................................................ 18
Notes on Safety Precautions................................................................. 18
Disassembly.......................................................................................... 19
Assembly............................................................................................... 24
Bevel Pinion.................................................................................................. 30
Removal ................................................................................................ 30
Adjusting and Installation ...................................................................... 35
Special Tools ................................................................................................ 44
S0602056K Rear Axle (Dana)

Page 2
INTRODUCTION
The efficiency and continued operation of mechanical units depend on constant, correct maintenance and
also on efficient repair work, should there be a break-down or malfunction. The instructions contained in
this manual have been based on a complete overhaul of the unit.
However, it is up to the mechanic to decide whether or not it is necessary to assemble only individual
components, when partial repair work is needed. The manual provides a quick and sure guide which, with
the use of photographs and diagrams illustrating the various phases of the operations, allows accurate
work to be performed.
All the information needed for correct disassembly, checks and assembly of each individual component is
set out below. In order to remove the differential unit from the vehicle, the manuals provided by the vehicle
manufacturer should be consulted. In describing the following operations it is presumed that the unit has
already been removed from the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
In order to facilitate work and protect both working surfaces and operators, it is advisable to use
proper equipment such as: trestles or supporting benches, plastic or copper hammers,
appropriate levers, pullers and specific spanners or wrenches.
Before going on to disassemble the parts and drain the oil, it is best to thoroughly clean the unit,
removing any encrusted or accumulated grease.
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS
All the disassembled mechanical units should be thoroughly cleaned with appropriate products and
restored or replaced if damage, wear, cracking or seizing have occurred.
In particular, thoroughly check the condition of all moving parts (bearings, gears, crown wheel and pinion,
shafts) and sealing parts (O-rings, oil shields) which are subject to major stress and wear. In any case, it is
advisable to replace the seals every time a component is overhauled or repaired. During assembly, the
sealing rings must be lubricated on the sealing edge. In the case of the crown wheel and pinion,
replacement of one component requires the replacement of the other one. During assembly, the prescribed
pre-loading, backlash and torque of parts must be maintained.

Page 3
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICANT
DEFINITION OF VIEWPOINTS
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
BCS2960L
Figure 1
DATA PLATE
Reference
Description
Number
1 Type and model unit -
modification index 1 2
2 Serial number
3
3 Lubricant
MFG. BY CLARK-HURTH COMPONENTS S.P.A.
38062 Arco (Trento)
MADE IN ITALY
BCS2970L
Figure 2

Page 4
MAINTENANCE POINTS
3 1 2 3
2 2
1 3
2
BCS2980L
Figure 3
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Oil Filling Plug 3 Check Level Plug
2 Oil Draining Plug

Page 5
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
Operation Frequency Lubricants

• Check levels: Differential Monthly • SAE85W90 (API GL4 - MIL L-2105)
Planetary Every 200 hours With additives for oil-bath brakes
reduction • SAE85W90 (API GL5 - MIL 2105-B)
• Oil change: Differential Every 800 hours * With additives for oil-bath brakes, for
units presenting hypoid crown wheel
Planetary Every 1000 hours * and pinion and /or self-locking
reduction differential gear.
Self-locking Every 700 hours * °„
differential
gear

°„ When it starts sounding noisy
Operation Member Conditions Frequency Lubricants

Normal work Monthly MOLIKOTE
Greasing Articulations
Awkward work Weekly
ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKS
Unit Operation Frequency Service Brake Circuit

Negative brake Adjustment Every 1000 hours * Only for mineral oil use e.g. ATF Dexron
II. Make sure that master cylinder seals
Service brake Adjustment Every 500 hours are suitable for mineral oil.
Wheel nuts Tightening Every 200 hours

Page 6
Page 7
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Unit: Nm (ft lb)
Type of Bolt
8.8 10.9 12.9
Size of Bolt
Loctite Loctite
242 242
9,5-10,5 10,5-11,5 14,3-15,7 15,2-16,8 16,2-17,8 18,1-20,0
M6 x 1
(7-8) (8-9) (11-12) (11-12) (12-13) (13-15)
23,8-26,2 25,6-28,4 34,2-37,8 36,7-40,5 39,0-43,0 43,7-48,3
M8 x 1,25
(18-19) (19-21) (25-28) (27-30) (29-32) (32-36)
48-58 52-58 68-75 73-81 80-88 88-97
M10 x 1,5
(35-43) (38-43) (50-55) (54-59) (59-64) (64-71)
82-91 90-100 116-128 126-139 139-153 152-168
M12 x 1,75
(61-67) (66-74) (86-94) (93-102) (103-112) (112-123)
129-143 143-158 182-202 200-221 221-244 238-263
M14 x 2
(95-105) (106-116) (134-148) (148-163) (163-179) (176-193)
200-221 219-242 283-312 309-341 337-373 371-410
Coarse Pitch
M16 x 2
(148-163) (162-178) (209-230) (228-251) (249-275) (274-302)
276-305 299-331 390-431 428-473 466-515 509-562
M18x 2,5
(204-225) (221-244) (288-317) (316-348) (344-379) (376-414)
390-431 428-473 553-611 603-667 660-730 722-798
M20 x 2,5
(228-318) (316-348) (408-450) (445-491) (487-538) (533-588)
523-578 575-635 746-824 817-903 893-987 974-1076
M22 x 2,5
(386-426) (424-468) (550-607) (603-666) (659-727) (718-793)
675-746 732-809 950-1050 1040-1150 1140-1260 1240-1370
M24 x 3
(498-550) (540-596) (701-774) (767-848) (841-929) (915-1010)
1411-1559 1539-1701 1710-1890 1838-2032
998-1103 1088-1202
M27 x 3 (1041- (1135- (1261- (1356-
(736-813) (803-886)
1149) 1254) 1393) 1498)
1914-2115 2085-2305 2280-2520 2494-2757
1378-1523 1473-1628
M30 x 3,5 (1412- (1538- (1682- (1840-
(1016-1123) (1086-1200)
1559) 1700) 1859) 2033)

Page 8
Type of Bolt
8.8 10.9 12.9
Size of Bolt
Loctite Loctite
242 242
25,7-28,3 27,5-30,5 36,2-39,8 40,0-44,0 42,8-47,2 47,5-52,5
M8 x 1
(19-21) (20-22) (27-29) (30-32) (32-34) (35-38)
49,4-54,6 55,2-61,0 71,5-78,5 78,0-86,0 86,0-94,0 93,0-103,0
M10 x 1,25
(36-40) (41-45) (53-57) (58-63) (63-69) (69-75)
90-100 98-109 128-142 139-154 152-168 166-184
M12 x 1,25
(66-74) (72-80) (95-104) (103-113) (112-123) (123-135)
86-95 94-104 120-132 133-147 143-158 159-175
M12 x 1,5
(63-70) (69-76) (89-97) (98-108) (106-116) (117-129)
143-158 157-173 200-222 219-242 238-263 261-289
M14 x 1,5
(106-116) (116-127) (148-163) (162-178) (176-193) (193-213)
214-236 233-257 302-334 333-368 361-399 394-436
M16 x 1,5
Coarse Pitch
(158-174) (172-189) (223-246) (246-271) (266-294) (291-321)

312-345 342-378 442-489 485-536 527-583 580-641
M18 x 1,5
(230-254) (252-278) (326-360) (358-395) (389-430) (428-472)
437-483 475-525 613-677 674-745 736-814 808-893
M20 x 1,5
(322-356) (350-387) (452-499) (497-549) (543-600) (596-658)
581-642 637-704 822-908 903-998 998-1103 1078-1191
M22 x 1,5
(429-473) (470-519) (606-669) (666-736) (736-813) (795-878)
1363-1507
741-819 808-893 1045-1155 1140-1260 1235-1365
M24 x 2 (1005-
(547-604) (596-658) (771-851) (841-929) (911-1006)
1111)
1520-1680 1672-1848 1834-2027 2000-2210
1083-1197 1178-1302
M27 x 2 (1121- (1233- (1353- (1475-
(799-883) (869-960)
1239) 1363) 1495) 1630)
2138-2363 2332-2577 2565-2835 2788-3082
1511-1670 1648-1822
M30 x 2 (1577- (1720- (1892- (2056-
(1115-1231) (1216-1343)
1742) 1900) 2090) 2273)
SCREW-LOCKING, SEALING AND LUBRICATING MATERIALS
IMPORTANT
1. Locking, sealing and lubricating materials referred to in this manual are the same used in
the shop-floor.
2. The table below gives an account of the typical applications of each single material, in
order to facilitate replacement with similar products marketed by different brand names
with different trade marks.

Page 9
Denomination Application
Loctite 242 Anaerobic product apt to prevent the loosening of screws, nuts and plugs. Used
for medium-strength locking. Before using it, completely remove any lubricant
by using the specific activator.
Loctite 243 The oleocompatible alternative to 242. Does not require the activation of
lubricated surfaces.
Loctite 270 Anaerobic product for very-high strength locking of screws and nuts. Before
using it, completely remove any lubricant by using the specific activator. To
remove parts, it may be necessary to heat them at 80° C (176° F) approx.
Loctite 275 Anaerobic product suitable for high-strength locking and sealing of large
threaded parts, bolts and stud bolts, for pipe sealing and for protecting parts
against tampering; suitable for sealing coupling surfaces with a max.
diametrical clearance of 0.25 mm.
Loctite 510 Anaerobic product for the hermetic sealing of flanged units and screw holes
communicating with fluids. Can seal clearances between flanges up to 0.2 mm.
Loctite 577 Quick anaerobic sealant for sealing threaded portions of conical or cylindrical
unions up to M80. Before using it, remove any lubricant with the specific
activator. After polymerisation, disassembly may result rather difficult, so
heating may be necessary for larger diameters.
Loctite 638 Anaerobic adhesive for fast and high-strength gluing of cylindrical metal joints
(hub on shaft). Can glue together parts with clearance ranging between 0.1 and
0.25 mm.
Loctite 648 Anaerobic adhesive for fast and medium-strength gluing of cylindrical metal
joints (hub on shaft). Can glue together parts with radial clearance below 0.1
mm.
(AREXONS) Solvent-based sealing compound for elastic seals, drying through evaporation.
Repositionable Used for sealing the outer diameter of sealing rings for rotating shafts with outer
jointing compound metal reinforcement.
for seals
Silicone Semi-fluid adhesive material used for sealing and filling and to protect
components from environmental and physical elements. Polymerises with non-
corrosive dampness.
(TECNO LUPE/101) Highly adhesive synthetic grease, with silicone compounds added.
Silicone-based Applied to adjustment screws with hole communicating with oil-type fluids.
grease Used when frequent adjusting is required.
Molikote Lubricating compound containing molybdenum disulphide, used to lubricate
(DOW CORNING) articulation pins and to prevent sticking and oxidation of parts that are not
lubricated on a regular basis.
(Lithium-based) Applied to bearings, sliding parts and used to lubricate seals or parts during
Grease assembly.

Page 10
1. During all operations described in this manual, the axle should be fastened onto a trestle, while the
other parts mentioned should rest on supporting benches.
2. When removing one of the arms, an anti-tilting safety trestle should be placed under the other arm.
3. When working on an arm that is fitted on the machine, make sure that the supporting trestles are
correctly positioned and that the machine is locked lengthways.
4. Do not admit any other person inside the work area; mark off the area, hang warning signs and
remove the ignition key from the machine.
5. Use only clean, quality tools; discard all worn, damaged, low-quality or improvised wrenches and
tools. Ensure that all dynamometric wrenches have been checked and calibrated.
6. Always wear gloves and non-slip rubber shoes when performing repair work.
7. Should you stain a surface with oil, remove marks straight away.
8. Dispose of all lubricants, seals, rags and solvents once work has been completed. Treat them as
special waste and dispose of them according to the relative law provisions obtaining in the country
where the axles are being overhauled.
9. Make sure that only weak solvents are used for cleaning purposes; avoid using turpentine, dilutants
and toluol-, xylol-based or similar solvents; use light solvents such as Kerosene, mineral spirits or
water-based, environment friendly solvents.
10. For the sake of clarity, the parts that do not normally need to be removed have not been reproduced
in some of the diagrams.
11. The terms RIGHT and LEFT in this manual refer to the position of the operator facing the axle from
the side opposite the drive.
12. After repair work has been completed, accurately touch up any coated part that may have been
damaged.

Page 11
CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING
BRAKE DISKS
DISASSEMBLY OF BRAKE UNITS
NOTE: Perform all operations on both
arms.
1. Remove the oil-level plug (1).
Figure 4
2. Apply the brakes and, keeping them under
pressure, check the linings "S" between
the disks using tool T1.
Minimum "S": 4.5 mm (0.18 in)
NOTE: Replace the braking disks and
the intermediate disks on both
sides if necessary.
Figure 5
3. Unloose and remove the screws (3) and
the washers (4) that fix the arm (2) to the
central body (5).
Figure 6

Page 12
4. Remove the arm (2) together with the pack
of the braking disks (6).
5. Place the arm on a bench.
Figure 7
6. Remove the braking disks (6) and note
down their order of assembly.
NOTE: 1) If the disks do not need
replacing, avoid switching their
position.
2) Extract the axle shaft (9).
Figure 8
7. Remove the reversal springs (7) from the
piston (8).
NOTE: If the springs (7) are weak or
deformed they must be
replaced.
Figure 9
8. Remove the pin screws (10) guiding the
piston (8).
NOTE: If the screws are to be replaced,
note down the different colors
for the different brake gaps.
(See “Assembly of Brake Units”
on page 15.
Figure 10

Page 13
9. Slowly introduce compressed air through
the connection of the braking circuit in
order to extract the entire piston.
NOTE: Hold on to the piston as it may
be suddenly ejected and
damaged.
Figure 11
10
15
8
7
1 11
14 16
2
13
12
5 9
6
4
3
BCS3470L
Figure 12

Page 14
ASSEMBLY OF BRAKE UNITS
1. Accurately clean the piston (8) and the
seats of slide and seal.
2. Replace the O-rings (11) and (12) and the
anti-extrusion rings (13) and (14); make
sure that the assembly side is correct.
NOTE: Accurately check the
rings (13) and (14).
Figure 13
3. Insert the stroke automatic regulation
springs (15); place them in line with the
piston (8).
Figure 14
4. Lubricate the seals (11) and (12) and fit
the piston (8) into the arm (2).
NOTE: Make sure that the piston seat
fits into the stop pin "A" inside
the arm.
Figure 15
5. Assist the insertion of the piston (8) by
lightly hammering around the edge with a
plastic hammer.
Figure 16

Page 15
6. Fit the pin screws (10) making sure that
they are all of the same color.
White: 1 mm (0.04 in) gap
Yellow: 0.75 mm (0.03 in) gap
Blue: 0.50 mm (0.02 in) gap
Apply Loctite 270 to the thread.
Torque wrench setting: 5-7 Nm (4-5 ft lb).
Figure 17
7. Fit the reversal springs (7) on the piston
(8).
NOTE: Pay due attention not to deform
the connections of the springs.
Figure 18
8. Slightly lubricate the braking disks (6) and
fit them in the arm following the correct
sequence; orient them so that the oil
circulation holes and the marks "B" are
perfectly lined up.
Figure 19
9. Check that the positioning of the sealing
ring (16) on the arm is intact; install the
complete arm (2). Lock it into position
using two facing screws (3) and washers
(4).
Figure 20

Page 16
10. Check the flatness of the arms using tool
T2 and finally lock the arms with the
screws (3) and the washer (4) using the
Torque wrench setting: 298 Nm (220 ft lb).
Figure 21

Page 17
PLANETARY REDUCTION AND AXLE SHAFT
The axle shafts can only be removed after extraction has been performed. Different procedures need to be
followed depending on the kind of repair operation needed and the type of axle:
1. Axle without parking brakes: compressed air (7 bar approx.) should be introduced in the braking
circuit in order to hold the braking disks in position.
2. Axle with negative brake: does not require any preparation as the disks are mechanically locked in
position.
3. Axle with mechanical brake: requires that the external control levers are put under tension in relation
to each other.
4. Disassembly to be carried out with the arm resting on the bench.
The explanations reported herewith refer to removal operations carried out on the bench; the different
stages of axle shaft removal also apply to all other solutions or versions.

Page 18
DISASSEMBLY
4
10 16
13
17
3
7 11
8
12
14
2
15
5
11
12
1
BCS3570L
Figure 22

spider cover (2).
Figure 23

Page 19
2. Disjoin the spider cover (2) from the hub
(3) by alternatively forcing a screwdriver
into the appropriate slots.
Figure 24
3. Remove the complete planetary carrier
cover (2).
Figure 25
4. Remove the complete axle-shaft (4).
Figure 26
5. Unloose and remove the tightening nuts
(5) from the crown flange (6).
Figure 27

Page 20
6. Remove the safety flange (7).
Figure 28
7. Using and puller, remove the complete
crown flange (6) by acting on the stud
bolts.
Figure 29
8. Partially extract the hub (3) using a plastic
hammer.
NOTE: Alternately hammer on several
equidistant points.
Figure 30
9. Remove the external bearing (8).
Figure 31

Page 21
10. Extract the hub (3).
Figure 32
11. Remove snap ring (10) from the arm (9).
Figure 33
12. Remove the snap rings (11).
Figure 34
13. With the help of an puller, remove the
planet wheel gears (12).
planet wheels.
Figure 35

Page 22
14. Using a puller for inner parts, remove shim
washer (13) from planetary cover (2).
Figure 36
15. Remove the snap ring (14) from the crown
(15).
Figure 37
16. Remove the crown flange (6).
Figure 38
17. Remove the sealing ring (16) from the hub
(3).
Figure 39

Page 23
18. Remove the internal bearing (15).
Figure 40
19. Remove the external thrust blocks from the
bearings (8) and (17) forcing a pin-driver
into the appropriate slots on the hub (3).
NOTE: Hammer in an alternate way so
as to avoid crawling or
deformation of the thrust
blocks.
Figure 41
ASSEMBLY
1. Position the lower part of tool T9A and the
thrust block of the external bearing (8)
under the press.
Figure 42
2. Lubricate the seats of the bearings and
position the hub (3) on tool T9A; position
the thrust block of the internal bearing
(17).
NOTE: Check that the thrust block is
correctly oriented.
Figure 43

Page 24
3. Position the upper part of tool T9B and
press the thrust blocks into the hub (3) all
the way down.
Figure 44
4. Fit the bearing (15) into the internal thrust
block.
Figure 45
5. Apply a sealant for removable seals to the
outer surface of the sealing ring (16).
Position the sealing ring (16) in the hub
(3).
NOTE: Check that the ring (16) is
correctly oriented.
Figure 46
6. Position tool T10 and press the sealing
ring (16) into its seat.
Figure 47

Page 25
7. Insert the flange (6) in the crown (15).
Figure 48
8. Insert the snap ring (14) in order to fix the
flange (6) in the crown (15).
NOTE: Carefully check that ring (14) is
properly inserted in the slot of
the crown (15).
Figure 49
9. Using tool T33, fit shim washer (13) into
planetary cover (2).
Figure 50
10. With the help of tool T11, insert the planet
wheel gears (12) into the cover (2).
11. Accurately check the orientation.
Figure 51

Page 26
12. Lock the gears (12) into position by fitting
the snap rings (11).
Figure 52
13. Lubricate the outer face of the sealing ring
(10) and, with the help of tool T34, fit it in
the arm.
NOTE: Accurately check direction of
assembly.
Figure 53
14. Lubricate with grease the sealing ring (16)
and the hub of the arm (9).
15. Install the hub (3).
Figure 54
16. Install the external bearing (8).
NOTE: Using a plastic hammer, drive
the bearing to the limit stop by
lightly hammering around the
edge.
Figure 55

Page 27
17. Fit the complete crown flange (6).
NOTE: In order to fasten the flange (6),
use a plastic hammer and
alternately hammer on several
equidistant points.
Figure 56
18. Apply Tecnolube Seal 101 grease to the
surface of the safety flange (7) which
touches the crown flange (6).
19. Fit the safety flange (7).
Figure 57
20. Apply Loctite 242 to the studs and fit in the
nuts (5).
Figure 58
21. Cross tighten the nuts (5) in two stages.
Initial torque wrench setting: 130 Nm (96 ft
lb)
Final torque wrench setting: 255-285 Nm
(188-210 ft lb)
Figure 59

Page 28
22. Grease snap ring (10) and sealing face of
axle-shaft (4).
23. Install the axle shaft (4) making sure it is
properly engaged in the braking disks and
in the differential unit.
NOTE: Be very careful not to damage
the snap ring (10).
Figure 60
24. Fit the planetary carrier cover (2) onto the
hub (3).
NOTE: Check that the O-ring (18) is in
good condition and in position.
Figure 61
25. Lock the planetary carrier cover (2) by
tightening the screws (1).
Nm (30-37 ft lb)
Figure 62

Page 29
BEVEL PINION
REMOVAL
NOTE: Though the photos in this
manual refer to a steering and
oscillating axle, the operations
described apply anyway.
1. Remove the complete arms and the
differential unit.
Figure 63
2. If disassembly is awkward, heat the check
nut (1) of the flange (2) at 80° C (176° F).
NOTE: Heating is meant to unloose the
setting of Loctite on the nut (1).
Figure 64
3. Position tool T20A (or T20B), so as to
avoid pinion rotation.
4. Unloose and remove the nut (1); also
remove the O-ring (3).
Figure 65

Page 30
5. Remove the flange (2) complete with
guard (4) by means of a puller.
Figure 66
NOTE: This operation does not apply
to the fixed axle.
6. Remove the swinging support (5).
Figure 67
7. Remove the sealing ring (6).
Figure 68
8. Position wrench T22 onto the ring nut (7)
and apply bar hold T21 to the pinion (8).
9. Stop wrench T22 and rotate the pinion so
as to release and remove the ring nut (7).
NOTE: If disassembly proves awkward,
weld the ring nut at approx. 80°
C (176° F).
Figure 69

Page 31
10. Apply blocks T23 and, with the help of a
puller, extract the pinion (8) complete with
the internal bearing (9), the distance piece
(10) and shims (11).
NOTE: The thrust blocks of the
bearings remain in the central
body (12).
Figure 70
11. Remove the pinion (8), shims (11) and
distance piece (10).
Figure 71
12. Using a puller and a press, remove the
inner bearing (9) from the pinion (8).
Figure 72
13. Remove the thrust block of the external
bearing (13).
Figure 73

Page 32
14. Insert a drift in the appropriate holes and
remove the thrust block of the internal
bearing (9) as well as the shim washers
(14).
Figure 74
15. Unloose and remove the screws (15)
locking the support (16); remove the whole
support.
Figure 75

Page 33
8
15
9
20 14
11
16
13
7
6
4
2
3 10
1
BCS4110L
Figure 76

Page 34
ADJUSTING AND INSTALLATION
1. Fit support (16), including O-ring (20), onto
the intermediate body.
NOTE: 1) The cavity located on the
outer diameter must face
upwards.
2) Check and lubricate the O-
ring (20).
Figure 77 ONLY IF HAS BEEN REMOVED

2. Fasten support with screws (15) previously
coated with Loctite 270.
3. Tighten using the criss-cross method to a
tightening torque of 90-100 Nm (66-74 ft
lb)
Figure 78
4. Using a surface plate, reset a centesimal
comparator "DG" and place it on the
measurement ring T24 (with a thickness of
30.2 mm).
(0.08 in).
Figure 79
6. Bring the internal bearing (9), complete
with its thrust block, under the comparator
"DG".
7. Determine overall thickness "D" of the
bearing checking the discrepancy between
this size and the size of the measurement
ring.
NOTE: Press the thrust block in the
centre and take several
measurements while rotating
the thrust block.
Figure 80

Page 35
8. Partially insert the thrust block of the
external bearing (13).
Figure 81
9. Install tension rod T25C, measurement
ring T24 and front guide tool T25A on the
thrust block of the external bearing (13).
Figure 82
10. Connect the tension rod to the press and
move the thrust block of the external
bearing (13) into its seat.
11. Disconnect the press and remove the
tension rod.
NOTE: Before starting the next stage,
make sure that the thrust block
has been completely inserted
into its seat.
Figure 83
12. Insert tool T26B complete with external
bearing (13), measurement ring T24 and
gauged ring nut T26C.
13. Manually tighten.
Figure 84

Page 36
14. Fit a centesimal comparator "DG1" with
long stem into bar T26A; when the bar
rests on two size- blocks "GB" of 57 mm
(2.24 in).
15. Reset the comparator.
(0.08 in) and reset.
Figure 85
17. Lay bar T26A on gauged nut T26C and
take the size "A" at about 57 mm (2.24 in)
corresponding to the maximum diameter
of arms centring.
Figure 86
18. Calculate size "B" which will be the first
useful value for calculating the size of the
T24
shims (14) that are to be inserted under T26C
the thrust block of the internal bearing (9).
R115
T26B
A
30.2 61
(61-A)+115+30.2=B B
BCS4220L
Figure 87
19. Check the nominal size (X) marked on the
pinion and add or subtract the indicated
variation (Y) so as to obtain size "Z".
e.g.: Z= 118 + 0.1 = 118.1
Z= 118 - 0.2 = 117.8
Figure 88

Page 37
20. Calculate size "C" which represents the
second value for calculating the size of the
shims "S" that are to be placed under the
thrust block of the internal bearing (9).
(14) S
D Z
C=Z+D C
BCS4240L
Figure 89
21. Calculate the difference between sizes "B"
and "C" so as to obtain the size "S" of the
shim (14) that will go under the thrust block
of the internal bearing (9).
Figure 90
22. Insert shim "S" (14) and the thrust block of
the internal bearing (9) in the central body.
NOTE: To hold shim "S" (14) in
position, apply grease.
Figure 91
23. Position tool T25A and tension rod T25C.
24. Connect the tension rod to the press,
fasten the thrust block and then remove
the tools.
NOTE: Before going on to the next
stage, make sure that the thrust
block has been completely
inserted.
Figure 92

Page 38
25. Position tools T26C and T26B complete
with tapered bearings (9) and (13);
manually tighten until a rolling torque has
been obtained.
Figure 93
26. Insert the stem of a depth comparator
"DDG" in either side hole of tool T26C;
reset the comparator with a presetting of
approx. 3 mm (0.12 in).
Figure 94
27. Remove the comparator and release tools
and bearings from the central body.
28. Re-install all and insert the distance piece
(10) between bearings (9) and (13);
manually tighten the whole pack.
Figure 95
29. Insert depth comparator "DDG" into tool
T26B-T26C and measure variation "H" in
relation to the zero setting performed back
at point d.
Figure 96

Page 39
30. The variation is to be added to a set value
of 0.12-0.13 mm (0.01 in), so as to obtain
the size of shim "S1" (11) which will be
inserted between the external bearing (13)
and the distance piece (10) and
subsequently, to determine the preload for
the bearings.
Figure 97
31. Position the internal bearing (9) and the
pinion (8) under a press; force the bearing
onto the pinion.
Figure 98
32. Fit the pinion (8), shim "S1" (11) and
distance piece (10) in the main body (12).
NOTE: The finer shims must be placed
in- between the thicker ones
Figure 99
33. Insert the external bearing (13) in the
central body in order to complete the pack
arranged as in the figure.
Figure 100

Page 40
34. Connect the pinion (8) to the tie rod T28A
and T28B; connect the tie rod T28C (see
special tools) to the press and block.
Figure 101
35. Apply Loctite 242 to the thread of the ring
nut (7) and screw the nut onto the pinion
(8).
Figure 102
36. Apply special wrench T22 to the ring nut
(7) and bar-hold T21 to the pinion (8).
37. Lock the wrench T22 and rotate the pinion
using a dynamometric wrench, up to a
minimum required torque setting of 500
Nm (369 ft lb).
Figure 103

Page 41
38. Apply onto the pinion (8) the bar-hold and
with the help of a torque metre, check the
torque of the pinion (8).
Torque: 120-170 Nm (89-125 ft lb)
NOTE: If torque exceeds the maximum
value, then the size of shim
"S1" (11) between the bearing
(13) and the distance piece (10)
needs to be increased. If torque
does not reach the set value,
increase the torque setting of
the ring nut (7) in different
Figure 104
stages to obtain a maximum
value of 570 Nm (420 ft lb).
NOTE: If torque does not reach the
minimum value, then the size of
shim "S1" (11) needs to be
reduced.
NOTE: When calculating the increase
or decrease in size of shim
"S1", bear in mind that a
variation of shim (11) of 0.01
mm corresponds to a variation
of 60 Nm (44 ft lb) in the torque
of the pinion (8).
39. Lubricate the outer surface of the new
sealing ring (6) and fit it onto the central
body (12) using tool T27.
Figure 105
NOTE: This operation does not apply
to the fixed axle.
NOTE: Check that it is properly
oriented.
Figure 106

Page 42
40. Fit the flange (2) complete with the guard
(4) and fasten it.
41. For keying the flange (2), use a plastic
hammer if necessary.
NOTE: Make sure that the guard (4) is
securely fastened onto the
flange and that it is not
deformed.
Figure 107
42. Apply Loctite 242 to the threaded part of
the pinion (8).
43. Position tool T20A (or T20B) and fasten it
in order to avoid rotation.
44. Insert O-ring (3) the nut (1) and tighten it
using a dynamometric wrench.
228 ft lb).
Figure 108
45. Remove blocks T23 (used for extracting
the pinion) and re-install the arms.
Figure 109

Page 43
SPECIAL TOOLS
Figure 110

Page 44
Figure 111

Page 45
Figure 112

Page 46
Figure 113

Page 47
Figure 114

Page 48
Figure 115

Page 49
Figure 116
TROUBLESHOOTING
Insufficient braking 1. Incorrect adjustment Inspect disc thickness and if discs are
usable read just brakes to the
specifications in the vehicle's manual.
2. Brake discs worn out Inspect disc thickness and replace if
necessary.
3. Incorrect brake fluid Replace all seals in axle and master
cylinder that have made contact with the
incorrect fluid and all brake hoses. If
incorrect fluid leaked into axle oil, seals
and o-rings in axle must be replaced.
4. Loss of brake fluid Inspect for and repair any leaks in outside
circuit or master cylinder. If caused by
incorrect brake fluid see correction N. 3. If
leak is to the outside replace the o-rings
between the center and intermediate
housings. If leak is to the inside replace
above o-rings and brake piston o-rings.
5. Overheated axle causing See «overheating» problem.
brake fluid to vaporize.
(Brake return when axle
cools)

Page 50
Soft brake pedal 6. Air in brake circuit Bleed brakes as described in the vehicle's
service manual.
Ineffective safety 7. Incorrect adjustment See correction N. 1.
brake 8. Brake disc worn out See correction N. 2.
Overheating 9. Oil level wrong Drain, flush and refill oil to proper level.
10. Too small of a brake gap Readjust brakes to the specifications in the
vehicle's service manual.
11. Park brake dragging Unlock the brake and adjust the correct
gap.
12. Incorrect brake fluid in See correction N. 3.
system
13. No free-pedal at master Readjust brake pedal as described in the
cylinder vehicle's service manual.
14. Restriction in brake lines Inspect for and replace damage lines.
15. Restriction in return line of Inspect for and replace damaged return
brake Servo system line. Inspect for and remove any filter, tee'd
in line or any other source of back pressure
from the return line.
16. Incorrect lubricant Change the retaining rings of the brake
circuit and brake pump.
Diff-lock inoperative 17. If manual control, loose or Inspect and correct linkage and readjust as
misadjusted linkage indicated in vehicle's service manual.
18. If hydraulic control, Refer to the service manual for the vehicle.
problems in the hydraulic
or electrical circuits of the
vehicle
19. If hydraulic control: Rebuilt cylinder.
problems in actuating
cylinder (noteable through
loss of hydraulic oil or
increase of the oil level in
axle)
20. If with lim. slip differential, Replace discs.
worn discs
Oil coming out of 21. Leak in internal brake See correction N. 2 and 3.
breather system
22. Leak in diff-lock actuating See correction N. 19.
cylinder
NoSpin indexing 23. Unequal tire pressure left Inflate tires to the recommended pressure
noise when driving anal right in the service manual, or until the rolling
straight radius is equal.
NOTE: With NoSpin, 24. Different style, size or Change tires to make the rolling radius
fatigue damage can brand of tires between left equal.
occur on the side with and right hand side Vary the tire pressure within the
the larger tire. specifications until the rolling radius is
equal.

Page 51
Noise during coast 25. Wheel bearings damaged Replace and adjust.
and under power the
same
Noise under power 26. Low oil level Refill oil to proper level.
greater than during 27. Incorrect lubricant See correction N. 16.
coast
28. Ring and pinion worn Inspect through top cover. Replace and
adjust.
29. Worn ring and pinion Replace and adjust.
bearings
30. Worn planetary gears or Replace.
bearings
Noise during coast 31. Loose pinion nut Inspect ring, pinion and pinion bearings. If
greater than under undamaged, retighten nut.
power 32. Only pinion bearing See correction N. 29.
damaged
Noise during turn 33. Worn spider and/or side Replace.
(without NoSpin) gears
A «Stick slip» noise 34. Worn or damaged Inspect and replace as described in
when going from cardanshaft vehicle's service manual.
forward to reverse 35. Loose wheel Inspect for wheel and wheel stud damage.
Replace if needed and retorque lug nuts.
36. Articulation box joint and Inspect and replace.
achsel shaft damaged
37. Spider pins loose in diff- Inspect through top cover. Replace.
carrier
38. Damaged or missing See correction N. 33.
spider and/or side gear
washers

Page 52
S0605060K
1AIR-CONDITIONER
CAUTION!
AIR-CONDITIONER S0605060K

November 2002
Air-Conditioner S0605060K
Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Refrigerant Circulation.................................................................................... 5
Control Panel.................................................................................................. 7
Control Specifications..................................................................................... 8
Temperature Level Control and Display.......................................................... 9
Air Discharge According to Path Selection................................................... 10
Air-conditioning System Circuit Diagram...................................................... 12
Weight of R134a Gas Used In Machines ..................................................... 17
Refrigerant System Repairs ......................................................................... 19
Refrigerant Safe Handling Procedures ................................................. 19
Repair and Replacement Procedure..................................................... 20
Refrigerant Recovery ............................................................................ 22
Vacuuming Refrigerant System............................................................. 22
Leakage Check ..................................................................................... 23
Refrigerant Charging............................................................................. 24
Inspecting System For Leakage............................................................ 26
S0605060K Air-Conditioner
Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ARO0550L
Figure 1
The heater and air-conditioner are combined into one unit in the rear cover behind the operator's seat. If
necessary, the operator can control inner temperature using the operation panel installed in the right hand
control stand.
The unit is equipped with an air filtration system which filters out dirt and dust particles from air being
circulated into operator’s cab. This filter should be cleaned out every 500 hours.
NOTE: In the event that the unit is being operated in a dusty environment, the cleaning and
replacement should be performed more frequently. If filter element is damaged, replace
damaged filter by a new one.
WARNING!
All service and inspection of air conditioning system should be performed with the starter
switch in the "O" (OFF) position.
Page 3
WARNING!
If using compressed air to clean the element, make sure that proper eye protection is worn.
NOTE: All right and left call outs are based on the operator being seated in the operator’s seat
facing the front.
1. Turn the key cylinder (1, Figure 2) to open
cover (2, Figure 2) behind operator’s seat.
2. Disconnect speaker harness.
3. Remove cover (2, Figure 2) from the rear
box. 1
4. Remove filter cover (3, Figure 2) from air
2 3
conditioning unit.
HAAD3860
Figure 2
5. Remove filter element (1, Figure 3) and
inspect for any damage.
6. Use compressed air to clean filter element. 1
If filter element is very dirty use a mild
soap or detergent and water to clean it.
NOTE: If water was used to clean filter,
be certain it is completely dry
before installing.
NOTE: When assembling the filter
again, install so that the arrow
on top of filter is facing the
inside of the cab.
NOTE: Refer to appropriate Operation
and Maintenance Manual for HAOO790L
latest service intervals.
Figure 3
Page 4
REFRIGERANT CIRCULATION
3 HDA6046L
Figure 4
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Evaporator 5 Compressor
2 Expansion Valve 6 Blower Fan
3 Condenser 7 Receiver Dryer
4 Condenser Fan
Page 5
Shading Temperature Refrigerant State
High High Pressure Gas
High High Pressure Liquid
Low Low Pressure Liquid
High High Pressure Gas/Liquid
Low Low Pressure Gas
• Refrigerant (R134a) is compressed to approximately 15.0 kg/cm2 (213 psi) within the
compressor.
• The compressed refrigerant flows into the condenser at high temperature (approximately 80°C
(176°F)).
• The refrigerant in the condenser is cooled to approximately 60° by the condenser fan. At this
time the refrigerant changes from the gas to the liquid state, even though the temperature has
only been reduced 20°C (68°F). (From 80° - 60°C (176° - 140°F)).
• The refrigerant in its liquid form is injected into the evaporator through the expansion valve. At
this time the pressure is reduced by approximately 2.0 kg/cm2 (28 psi) and the temperature is
also reduced. As a result, the refrigerant absorbs the heat from the air surrounding the
evaporator creating a cooling effect and changes from the gas to the liquid state.
• The refrigerant once again flows into the compressor in the gaseous state and the process is
repeated.
WARNING!
Refrigerant gas is pressurized and sealed in the air conditioning system. Special
precautions are required for the proper recharging or release of refrigerant. Release of
refrigerant into the atmosphere is strictly regulated by law. Make sure that you are in
compliance with all mandated federal, state and municipality requirements, before starting
any service or repair of the air conditioner. Refrigerant gas used in the system must meet or
exceed specifications for R134a refrigerant, or any subsequently issued environmentally-
mandated standard.
Page 6
CONTROL PANEL
ARO0501L
Figure 5
INPUT CONTROL OUTPUT

PANEL
DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
LOW SPEED RELAY
OFF SW MID SPEED RELAY BLOWER

MOTOR
A / C SW
VENT SW HIGH SPEED RELAY
DEF. SW
HEAT SW A/C TEMP. CONTROL MIX DOOR
ACTUATOR
FRE SW CONTROL
REC SW PANEL VENT ACTUATOR VENT CONTROL
LOW SW
MID SW DEF. ACTUATOR FOOT / DEF.
HI SW
COOL SW INTAKE RECYCLE/FRESH
ACTUATOR AIR CONTROL
WARM SW
TEMPERATURE COMP. RELAY COMPRESSOR
CONTROL ACTUATOR
CONDENSER CONDENSER
FAN RELAY FAN
HDA6048L
Figure 6
Page 7
CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS
Control Item Control Switch Control Specifications

Temperature "COOL" Switch
MAX COOL
Control
"WARM" Switch 100%
50%
MAX HOT
0%
HDA6049L
Figure 7
Temperature control switch consists of a 24 step

variable selector. The display uses 7, Green / Red two-
color LEDs to display the selected temperature.
Blower Fan "OFF" Switch
Speed Control
"LOW" Switch
"MID" Switch HI RELAY
"HI" Switch MID RELAY
LOW RELAY
OFF LOW MID HI
HDA6050L
Figure 8
Compressor Temperature Sensor

Control
COMP ON
COMP OFF
1.5 C 4.0 C
HDA6051L
Figure 9
Page 8
TEMPERATURE LEVEL CONTROL AND DISPLAY
Position
Step LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 Sensor Remark
Voltage
0 Green Green Green Green Green Green Green 4.50 V ±0.2 MAX. COOL
1 Green Green Green Green Green Green Green 4.33 V ±0.2
2 Green Green Green Green Green Green Green 4.15 V ±0.2
3 Red Green Green Green Green Green Green 3.98 V ±0.2
6 Red Red Green Green Green Green Green 3.46 V ±0.2
9 Red Red Red Green Green Green Green 2.93 V ±0.2
12 Red Red Red Red Green Green Green 2.41 V ±0.2
15 Red Red Red Red Red Green Green 1.89 V ±0.2
18 Red Red Red Red Red Red Green 1.37 V ±0.2
21 Red Red Red Red Red Red Red 0.85 V ±0.2
22 Red Red Red Red Red Red Red 0.67 V ±0.2
23 Red Red Red Red Red Red Red 0.50 V ±0.2 MAX. HOT
Page 9
AIR DISCHARGE ACCORDING TO PATH SELECTION
Face, Rear, and Defroster
ARS1280L
Figure 10
Foot
ARS1290L
Figure 11
Page 10
Face and Defroster
ARS1300L
Figure 12
Page 11
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
3 2
5
B A
10A 20A 30A

BR
4 E
6 1
0
6 I 2
3 II
10 9
15
15-1 15-2
+ -
M
14
22
15-3 15-4 15-5
11 13
LED 1~12
7
8 87a
30
3
5
11
12
HIGH
MID
- + 87
M 8 13 LOW
85 86 18 9 REC
19 10 FRE
10 M
15-6
MODE SELECT
23 7 VENT
9 AIR MODE
RECIRCLE/FRESH
21
20
17
8
DEF
FOOT 15-7
87a
BLOWER SPEED
30
M
87 TEMP. CONTROL
85 86 14 3 (WARM)
15 2 (COOL) M
9
2
16
4
5
15-8
4 1
DEF 2 7 1 6
10 M FOOT
3 6
26 16
15-9
CN6 HRS 26P
CN5 AMP MIC 13P + 250 4P
14
11 15
HRS NO.GT7A-26PD-DS 26P AMP MIC 13P
13 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
13 12 11 10 9 8 7
(CN6) (CN5)
ARS1310L
Figure 13
Page 12
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 13 Compressor
2 Battery Relay 14 A/C Control Panel
3 Fusible Link 15 A/C Unit
4 Circuit Breaker 15-1 Blower Motor
5 Fuse 15-2 Resister
6 Lamp Switch 15-3 High Speed Relay
7 Condenser Fan Relay 15-4 Mid Speed Relay
8 Condenser Fan Motor 15-5 Low Speed Relay
9 Compressor Relay 15-6 Recirculate / Fresh Air
10 Foot / Defrost Control Control Actuator
Actuator 15-7 Vent Actuator
11 Receiver Dryer (Low / High 15-8 Temperature Control
Pressure Cut Off Switch) Actuator
12 Diode 15-9 Temperature Sensor
(Evaporator)
Page 13
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refrigerant Pressure Check
LO HI
HDA6074L
Figure 14
1. Open all doors and windows.

2. Install manifold gauge set.
3. Start engine and maintain engine speed at 1,800 - 2,000 rpm.
4. Check high / low pressure of refrigerant.
High Pressure: 8.0 - 10.0 kg/cm2 (114 - 142 psi)

1
Low Pressure: Approximately 1.0 kg/cm2 (14 psi)
Possible Cause: Low Refrigerant Level
Step Inspection Item Remedy
Reassemble using correct
Yes
1 Check for traces of refrigerant oil. tightening torque.
No Go to next step.
Using a leak detection device or soapy water Yes Repair leaking component.
2 check for refrigerant leakage at all major No Recharge system to correct
components and joints. pressure.
High Pressure: Over 23 kg/cm2 (327 psi)

2
Low Pressure: Approximately 2.5 - 3.0 kg/cm2 (36 - 43 psi)
Possible Cause: Overcharge, Frost on condenser
Check for condenser pin damage or Yes Clean, repair or replace condenser.
1
contamination. No Refrigerant overcharge.
Page 14
High Pressure: Approximately 20 - 25 kg/cm2 (285 - 356 psi)
3
Low Pressure: Approximately 2.5 - 3.5 kg/cm2 (36 - 50 psi)
Possible Cause: Air in system.
1. Recover any remaining refrigerant.
2. Vacuum out system.
3. Recharge system.
NOTE: If the system has been exposed to the air for a long period of time, replace the receiver
dryer.
High Pressure: Over 6 kg/cm2 (85 psi)

4
Low Pressure: Approximately 760 mmHg (Negative Pressure)
Possible Cause: Refrigerant does not circulate
1. Connect manifold gauge and start engine.
2. Turn on air-conditioner. Moisture in system, replace
Yes
receiver dryer.
3. Set blower switch to HIGH position.
4. Turn air-conditioner OFF and wait 10
1 minutes.
5. Recheck high / low pressure readings. Contaminated system, replace
expansion valve.
High Pressure: 13.0 - 19.0 kg/cm2 (185 - 270 No
(Replace evaporator core
psi) assembly.)
Low Pressure: 1.5 - 3.3 kg/cm2 (21.3 - 46.9 psi)
High Pressure: Over 6 - 18 kg/cm2 (85 - 256 psi)

5
Low Pressure: 500 mmHg (Negative Pressure) - Dial indicator needle unstable.
Possible Cause: Moisture in system has iced up the expansion valve.
NOTE: When the absorbed moisture freezes the pressure readings may look normal. Careful
readings should be made to determine whether pressure is in normal range.
1. Recover any remaining refrigerant.
2. Vacuum out system.
3. Recharge system.
NOTE: If the system has been exposed to the air for a long period of time, replace the receiver
dryer.
High Pressure: Over 22.0 - 23 kg/cm2 (313 - 327 psi)

6
Low Pressure: 2.5 kg/cm2 (36 psi)
Possible Cause: Refrigerant pressure problem due to defective expansion valve or temperature sensor.
Inspect whether the temperature sensor is Yes Replace expansion valve.
1
installed properly. No Exchange duct sensor.
Page 15
High Pressure: Over 7.0 - 11.0 kg/cm2 (100 - 156 psi)
7
Low Pressure: 4.0 - 6.0 kg/cm2 (57 - 85 psi)
Possible Cause: Low refrigerant pressure due to poor compressor compression
Inspect and replace compressor if necessary.
Page 16
WEIGHT OF R134A GAS USED IN MACHINES
Model Weight of Gas
Mega 130 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 160 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 200-III 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 200-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 250-III 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 250-V (Tier I) 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 250-V (Tier II) 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 300-III 950 ±20 grams (33 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 300-V (Tier I) 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 300-V (Tier II) 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 400-III 950 ±20 grams (33 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 400-III PLUS 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 400-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Mega 500-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 55 750 ±20 grams (26 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 55-V PLUS 750 ±20 grams (26 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 70-III 800 ±20 grams (28 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 75-V 750 ±20 grams (26 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 130LC-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 130W-III 950 ±20 grams (33 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 130W-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 140W-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 160W-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 180W-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 200W-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 210W-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 220LC-III 950 ±20 grams (33 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 220LL 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 225NLC-V 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Solar 290LL 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Page 17
Model Weight of Gas
Solar 300LL 850 ±20 grams (30 ±0.7 oz.)
Page 18
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM REPAIRS
WARNING!
Always wear protective glasses and gloves when handling refrigerant. If refrigerant comes in
contact with the skin or eyes, immediately flush with clean, running water and consult a
physician.
Select a clean and well ventilated area to work.
The refrigerant container is under high pressure and should be stored below 40°C (104°F). Be
careful not to drop the container from a high location
The contents are under high pressure and should not be used with compressed air or near an
open flame.
REFRIGERANT SAFE HANDLING PROCEDURES
UNION NUT
TORQUE WRENCH
CORRECT WRONG
WRONG
WRONG
CORRECT
O - RING POSITION
CAP & PLUG CORRECT WRONG WRONG
HDA6066L
Figure 15
The following procedures should be observed for safe handling of refrigerant during vacuum and charging
process.
1. Use an approved recovery / charging device which can safely perform vacuum and charge work
simultaneously.
2. The new refrigerant has improved cooling characteristics than the old type and care should be used
not to overcharge the system.
3. Do not over tighten connections when working on refrigerant system.
4. The new refrigerant system standards require new tools, equipment and parts. DO NOT attempt to
use equipment use in servicing the old refrigerant system.
Page 19
5. The new refrigerant oil (PAG type) has a high moisture absorption characteristic. When the
refrigerant system vacuum seal has been broken, immediately plug up all openings to prevent
moisture from entering into the system.
6. When joining unions which use O-ring seals, lightly coat O-rings with refrigerant oil. Be careful not to
drip oil on the threads of the nut.
7. Be certain the O-rings are seated properly on the refrigerant line lip. Always use new O-rings when
reassembling parts. Do not reuse old O-rings.
8. Use a vacuum pump to evacuate refrigerant system of air.
9. When charging the refrigerant system with the engine running, do not open the high pressure valve
on the manifold gauge as the reverse flow of high pressure refrigerant will rupture the hose.
10. When releasing the high pressure hose after completing the charging process, quickly disconnect the
hose to minimize refrigerant released to the air.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1. Work Procedure
A. Before repairing or replacing any refrigerant components first, return all refrigerant oil to the
compressor and perform recovery procedures.
2. Operating Condition
A. Run engine at maximum engine speed.
B. Select "HI" blower fan speed and select A/C switch to "ON".
C. Set the temperature control switch for maximum cooling and leave running for approximately 20
minutes.
NOTE: The manifold gauge dial pointer can vary depending on the outdoor temperatures.
Page 20
INSTALL REPAIR TOOL
RECOVER REFRIGERANT
REPAIR / REPLACE DEFECTIVE PARTS
VACUUM SYSTEM (OVER 5 MINUTES)
CHECK SYSTEM FOR AIR LEAKAGE REPAIR
VACUUM SYSTEM (OVER 20 MINUTES)
CHARGE SYSTEM (APPROXIMATELY 100 g)
CHECK SYSTEM FOR REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE
CHARGE SYSTEM TO PROPER LEVEL

(Standard Capacity less Initial Charge)
CHECK SYSTEM FOR REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE
CHECK FOR PROPER REFRIGERANT LEVEL
RUN SYSTEM
RECOVER REFRIGERANT IN CHARGING HOSE
REMOVE REPAIR TOOLS

HDA6067L
Figure 16
Page 21
REFRIGERANT RECOVERY
Reference
Description 2 3
Number
1 To Compressor 1 4
2 Low Pressure Side
3 High Pressure Side
4 From Receiver
5 Refrigerant Recovery Tank
1. Attach the manifold gauges and the

refrigerant recovery unit to the refrigerant 5
lines as shown. HDA6067L
Figure 17
NOTE: Be careful not to switch the
connections for the low and
high pressure valves.
2. Open the high pressure valve slowly to release the refrigerant to the recovery unit.
NOTE: Open the valve slowly, while checking to see that refrigerant is not leaking out.
3. When the manifold gauge dial falls below 3.5 kg/cm2 (50 psi), slowly open the low pressure valve.
4. Open both the high and low pressure valves slowly until the manifold gauge dials indicates 0 kg/cm2
(0 psi).
VACUUMING REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
Reference 2 3
Description
Number 1 4
1 To Compressor
2 Low Pressure Side
4 From Receiver
5 Vacuum Pump
1. Vacuuming Procedure 5
HDA6068L
NOTE: When the A/C system has been Figure 18
exposed to the air, it must be
vacuumed out. Perform vacuum
process for 30 minutes for
complete moisture and air
evacuation.
A. Attach the manifold gauges and vacuum pump to the refrigerant system as shown.
B. Turn on the vacuum pump and open both valves.
C. When the low pressure gauge shows approximately 710 mmHg, close both valves and turn off
vacuum pump.
Page 22
2. Check system for vacuum leak.
Allow system to sit for 10 minutes and
check whether the system is holding the
pressure. If the pressure has dropped, it
must be repaired before proceeding to the
next step.
3. Vacuuming Procedure
If the system is holding the pressure and it
has not changed for 10 minutes, vacuum
out the system for an additional 20
minutes. HDA6069L
Figure 19
A. Turn on the vacuum pump and
slowly open both valves.
B. Allow vacuum pump to run for
additional 20 minutes until the low
pressure gauge dial reads
approximately 750 mmHg.
C. Close both valves and stop the
vacuum pump.
4. Installation of Refrigerant Container
Reference 1
Description
Number
1 Handle
2 Hose Connection
3 Mounting Disk 2
A. Before mounting valve on the 3

container, make sure the handle is in
the counter clockwise most position,
with the puncture pin retracted and HDA6070L
the mounting disk is in the raised Figure 20
position.
B. Attach the manifold gauge center
hose to the valve assembly.
C. Turn the disc in the clockwise direction and securely mount valve onto refrigerant container.
D. Turn the valve handle in the clockwise direction and puncture the container seal with the pin.
E. Once the can has been punctured, turn the handle in the counter clockwise direction so the
refrigerant can flow into the manifold gauge center hose. At this time, do not open the low and
high pressure valves of the manifold gauge.
F. Press the manifold gauge low side valve to eliminate the trapped air in the hose.
LEAKAGE CHECK
NOTE: Perform the leakage check after completing vacuuming process.
1. After attaching the manifold gauge, open the high side valve.
Page 23
2. Charge system until the low side gauge dial indicates a pressure of 1 kg/cm2 (14 psi) and close the
high side valve.
3. Using a refrigerant leak detector or soapy
water check each joint for leakage.
1
Reference
Description
Number
Refrigerant Leak
1
Detection Device
4. If a leak is detected, check for O-ring

damage or correct tightening torque and
replace or repair as necessary.
5. If no leaks are detected, proceed with the HDA6071L
charging process. Figure 21
WARNING!
For accurate refrigerant leak
detection, perform leak detection
procedure in a well ventilated area.
REFRIGERANT CHARGING
1. Perform the vacuuming procedure, vacuum holding and leaking tests as described in the proceeding
headings.
NOTE: First charge the refrigerant system with 100g (3.5 ounces) of refrigerant with the engine
off. Then using the manifold gauges as a guide fully charge the system with the engine
running.
When exchanging refrigerant containers, press the manifold gauge low side valve to
eliminate air from the charging hose.
Page 24
Reference
Description 2 3
Number
1 To Compressor 1 4
2 Low Pressure Side
4 From Receiver
5 Refrigerant Supply
Container
2. Charge the system by opening the manifold 5

gauge low side valve. HDA6072L
Figure 22
Initial charge amount: 100 g (3.5 ounces).
3. If refrigerant does not flow freely into
system, try starting engine first before
operating air-conditioner.
• Temperature control switch setting:
Maximum Cooling
Blower Speed Setting: Hi (3 step)
Engine Speed: 1,300 - 1,500 rpm
WARNING!
When charging refrigerant system with the engine running;
• Always keep refrigerant supply container in the upright position.
• Never open the high side pressure valve.
4. Open the manifold gauge low side valve and charge system to standard capacity.
Gauge Dial Standard Reading
High Side Gauge 13 - 20 kg/cm2

(185 - 285 psi)
Low Side Gauge 1.5 - 3.5 kg/cm2

(22 - 50 psi)
NOTE: These standards are for outside temperatures between 30° - 35°C (86° - 95°F). The
gauge readings may vary for extreme temperature conditions.
WARNING!
• When outside temperature is low, warm the refrigerant supply container with
warm water not exceeding 40°C (104°F). Do not allow water to come in contact
with the charging adapter valve handle.
• When outside temperature is high, cool off refrigerant supply container and
condenser to aid the refrigerant charging process.
5. Close low pressure side valve.
Page 25
6. Shut off engine and close refrigerant supply container adapter valve. Disconnect manifold gauge
hoses from vehicle.
INSPECTING SYSTEM FOR LEAKAGE

After completing charging procedures, clean all
joints and connections with a clean dry cloth.
Using a refrigerant leak detecting device or
soapy water, inspect system for leaks starting 2
from the high pressure side. 1
NOTE: When the refrigerant circulation
has been stopped the high
pressure will start to decrease
and the low pressure will start 3
to increase until they are
equalized. Starting the
inspection from the high side 4
HDA6073L
will result in a accurate test. Figure 23
Reference
Description
Number
1 Pressure
2 High Pressure
3 Low Pressure
4 Compressor Stop
Inspection Procedure
1. High Pressure Side
Compressor outlet →condenser inlet →receiver dryer inlet →air-conditioner unit inlet
2. Low pressure side
Compressor inlet →air-conditioner unit outlet
3. Compressor
Compressor shaft area, bolt hole area and magnetic clutch area.
4. Receiver dryer
Pressure switch and plug area.
5. Connection valve area
Inspect all valve areas.
Verify all valves are capped to prevent leaking.
Check for foreign material inside of valve cap.
6. Interior of air-conditioning unit.
After stopping engine, insert detector probe into drain hose. (Leave inserted for 10 seconds
minimum.)
NOTE: When inspecting leakage from the air-conditioning unit, perform the inspection in a well
ventilated area.
Page 26
S0607055K
1TRANSMISSION
(ZF 2HL-100)
CAUTION!
TRANSMISSION (ZF 2HL-100)S0607055K


October 2002
Transmission (ZF 2HL-100) S0607055K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Specifications ................................................................................................. 4
Transmission Operation.................................................................................. 5
Transmission Disassembly ............................................................................. 6
Detaching Drive (Input) Housing ............................................................. 6
Disassembling Input Shaft Assembly...................................................... 7
Disassembling Planetary Drive ............................................................. 14
Disassembling Clutch and Spur Gear ................................................... 15
Disassembling Shift Lock ...................................................................... 20
Final Drive, Drive Shaft and Differential Disassembly........................... 22
Transmission Reassembly............................................................................ 27
Shimming Drive Pinion.......................................................................... 27
Reassembling Drive Pinion ................................................................... 28
Adjusting Rolling Resistance of Drive Pinion Bearing........................... 32
Installing Differential.............................................................................. 34
Adjusting Backlash and Bearing Preload .............................................. 38
Installing Helical Gear and Clutch ......................................................... 39
Installing Planetary Carrier.................................................................... 43
Adjusting Shift Lever ............................................................................. 44
Preassembling and Installing Clutch ..................................................... 45
Checking Clutch .................................................................................... 52
Installing Brake...................................................................................... 53
Installing Drive Casing .......................................................................... 57
Drive Pinion / Crown Wheel
Contact Pattern ............................................................................................ 61
Correct Pattern...................................................................................... 61
Increase Pinion Distance ...................................................................... 61
Decrease Pinion Distance..................................................................... 62
Transmission Governor ................................................................................ 63
Parts List ............................................................................................... 63
Disassembly of Governor...................................................................... 65
S0607055K Transmission (ZF 2HL-100)

Page 2
Reassembly of Governor ...................................................................... 66

Page 3
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission
Type 2 Speed, Power-Shift
Reduction Ratio 5.35 / 1.39
Power Shift Control Pressure 30 - 35 kg/cm2 (427 - 498 psi)
Max. Input Torque 78 kg•m (564 ft lb)
Max. Rotating Speed 4,500 rpm

Page 4
TRANSMISSION OPERATION
The transmission is a two-speed, powershift transmission of planetary design with helically cut spur gear
and dual countershaft construction. The powershift stage includes an integrated multidisc brake and a
rotating multidisc clutch. Both are actuated by plate springs and hydraulically released. A mechanically
operated dog clutch, between the planetary and spur gears, allows interruption of power and towing of the
unit.
The shift control is hydraulic for open hydraulic circuitry and electro-hydraulic for closed loop circuitry. Both
types of control provide overspeed protection by preventing downshifting until speed is reduced to a point
where damage to the hydraulic motor will not occur.
Figure 1
Power Flow 5. Planetary Stage

a = 1st Gear 6. Manual Disconnect Clutch
b = 2nd Gear 7. Inductive Speed Sensor for Electro-
c = Braking -hydraulic Overspeed Protection
1. Drive Housing with Integrated Shifting Valves 8. Hydraulic Overspeed Protection
2. Hydraulically Released Plate Springs 9. Emergency Steering Pump
3. Multidisc Brake 10. Direct Axle Mounting
4. Multidisc Clutch

Page 5
TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY
DETACHING DRIVE (INPUT) HOUSING
1. Secure gear box; then loosen plug and

drain oil.
Figure 2
2. Remove two oil lines.
Figure 3
3. Remove screw.
Figure 4

Page 6
4. Remove snap ring.
Figure 5
CAUTION!
Drive housing is spring loaded -
Work carefully in next step.
5. Loosen hex socket bolts and detach drive

housing from gearbox using two adjusting
bolts.
Figure 6
DISASSEMBLING INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
1. Remove two cup springs.
Figure 7
2. Block supply line and use compressed air
or press piston out of bore in housing.
Figure 8

Page 7
3. Remove plug and breather.
Figure 9
4. Remove seal ring and backup ring from
ring groove in housing.
Figure 10
Figure 11
6. Pull gasket from housing, using an L-type
driver or offset screwdriver.
Figure 12

Page 8
7. Remove O-ring.
Figure 13
8. Remove clutch plate pack and backing
plate.
Figure 14
Figure 15
10. Remove clutch.
Figure 16

Page 9
11. Secure sun gear shaft so that it will not
turn. Remove snap ring and cup spring
pack.
Figure 17
12. Remove disc and sun gear.
Figure 18
13. Remove ring gear from drive shaft.
Figure 19
14. Remove snap ring and centering disc.
Figure 20

Page 10
15. Remove plate pack.
Figure 21
16. Remove plate.
Figure 22
17. Pry inner plate carrier out of piston.
Figure 23
18. Remove piston from drive shaft.
Figure 24

Page 11
19. Remove cup spring pack.
Figure 25
20. Remove seal ring and O-ring. Remove
disc.
NOTE: Seal rings have to be replaced.
Figure 26
Figure 27
22. Remove snap ring from 85 mm (3.35 in)
ring groove of guide bushing.
Figure 28

Page 12
23. Separate guide bushing from drive shaft.
Figure 29
24. Remove snap ring and shaft seal.
Figure 30
25. Remove snap ring and press bearing off
shaft.
Figure 31
26. Remove throttle valve.
Figure 32

Page 13
DISASSEMBLING PLANETARY DRIVE
Figure 33
2. Turn housing so that it faces up, and
remove the planetary gear carrier from the
helical gear using an internal puller.
Figure 34
Figure 35
4. Remove planetary gear from gear shaft
using an L-type driver.
Figure 36

Page 14
5. Remove inner race of bearing using puller.
Figure 37
6. Remove snap ring and ball bearing.
Figure 38
DISASSEMBLING CLUTCH AND SPUR
GEAR
1. Loosen hex bolts and remove sliding collar
and block.
Figure 39
2. Loosen plug.
Figure 40

Page 15
3. Drive out roll pin.
Figure 41
4. Pry shift lever out of bore in housing and
detach shift fork.
Figure 42
5. Remove suction line.
Figure 43
6. Loosen four hex socket bolts and remove
shift lock from housing.
Figure 44

Page 16
7. Pull rotor set from shaft and remove drive
ball.
Figure 45
8. Pry pump cover out of housing.
Figure 46
Figure 47
10. Remove pump shaft.
Figure 48

Page 17
Figure 49
12. Pry off helical gear and lift from housing.
Figure 50
Figure 51
13. Remove snap ring and shim.
Figure 52

Page 18
14. Remove shift dog and, on some models,
remove spacer.
Figure 53
15. Pull needle bearing from bore of housing
using an internal puller.
Figure 54
16. Press helical gear from bearing cup.
Figure 55
17. Remove snap ring and press ball bearing
out of bearing cup.
Figure 56

Page 19
Figure 57
19. Pry ball bearing off collar of helical gear.
Figure 58
DISASSEMBLING SHIFT LOCK
NOTE: If oil pump rotor or valve body is
damaged, replace entire shift
lock.
1. Remove control spool.
Figure 59
2. Heat and remove set screw; disassemble
control spool.
Figure 60

Page 20
3. Remove pilot spool.
Figure 61
4. Remove shuttle valve.
Figure 62
5. Disassemble shuttle valve using special
tool to remove bushing.
Figure 63
6. Remove diaphragm, which is secured in
place with Loctite.
Figure 64

Page 21
FINAL DRIVE, DRIVE SHAFT AND
DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY
1. Loosen hex bolts and remove flange.
Figure 65
2. Pry out shaft seal.
Figure 66
3. Turn housing so that it faces up, loosen
hex bolts and remove drive shaft, (using
adjusting screws), and taking care not to
damage inner bearing race or shim.
Figure 67
4. Remove output gear from drive pinion.
Figure 68

Page 22
5. Remove baffle plate.
Figure 69
6. Drive bearing outer race out of housing.
Figure 70
7. Remove shaft seal from housing.
Figure 71
8. Secure axle carrier, using an assembly
type fixture. Drive out roll pins.
Figure 72

Page 23
9. Remove differential bearing preload by
loosening adjusting nut.
Figure 73
10. Loosen hex head screws and remove
bearing caps and adjusting nuts.
NOTE: Mark position of bearing caps
and position of crown wheel.
Figure 74
11. Lift differential assembly out of axle carrier.
Figure 76
75
12. Remove inner bearing races, using puller.
Figure 77

Page 24
13. Loosen socket head screws.
Figure 78
14. Separate halves of differential case and
remove loose components.
Figure 79
15. Press crown wheel from differential case.
Figure 80
16. Remove drive pinion.
Figure 81

Page 25
17. Remove O-ring and bushing.
Figure 82
18. Pull tapered roller bearing from drive
pinion.
Figure 83
19. Pull bearing outer race from housing bore,
using internal puller.
Figure 84
20. Remove shim.
Figure 85

Page 26
TRANSMISSION REASSEMBLY
NOTE: Replace all seals and damaged components.
NOTE: Crown wheel and drive must be replaced as a matched assembly.
NOTE: Use oil to protect seal lips and other compounds such as Loctite and silicon as directed in
reassembly.
SHIMMING DRIVE PINION

1. Install shims, two bearing caps, pin, and
measuring shaft.
Figure 86
2. Measure gap between pin and shaft using
feeler gauge.
Example:
Dimension A (pin) 134 mm (5.275 in)
Dimension B (gap) +0.85 mm (0.33 in)
Dimension C +15.00 mm (0.590 in)
(1/2 dia of shaft) _______________
Dimension X = 149.85 mm (5.899 in)
Figure 87
3. Measure bearing width.
Example:
Bearing Width: 36.5 mm (1.437 in)
Figure 88

Page 27
4. Measure pinion.
Example:
Bearing width 36.5 mm (1.437 in)
Pinion +111.85 mm (4.404
dimension in)
(112 - 0.15
mm)
gives = 148.35 mm (5.840
Dimension X1 in)
5. Subtract X1 from X to find shim thickness.

Figure 89
Example:
Dimension X 149.85 mm (5.899 in)
Dimension X1 - 148.35 mm (5.840
in)
Gives Shim = 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
Thickness
REASSEMBLING DRIVE PINION

1. Remove bearing caps, shims and
measuring shaft.
2. Insert shim, determined according to
Steps 2 through 4 above, in housing bore.
Figure 90
3. Chill bearing outer race and seat firmly
against shoulder.
Figure 91

Page 28
4. Insert second outer race in housing bore.
Figure 92
5. Install new seal using Loctite #586 and
install adapter.
Figure 93
6. Install oil pipe, using hex head screws
secured with Loctite #586. Torque to
maximum of 23 N•m (5 ft lb).
Figure 94
7. Note installation position (Figure 95) and
install baffle plate firmly against shoulder.
Figure 95

Page 29
8. Lubricate outer diameter and grease
sealing lip of shaft seal. Install shaft seal,
open side up, firmly against shoulder.
Install O-ring.
Figure 96
9. Install output gear as shown.
Figure 97
10. Install two adjusting screws, assemble
housing as shown. Secure housing with
two hex head screws and torque to 79 N•m
(18 ft lb).
Figure 98
11. Heat and install tapered roller bearing.
Figure 99

Page 30
12. Install bushing. Grease O-ring and install
in ring groove.
Figure 100
13. Install drive pinion.
Figure 101
14. Secure drive pinion so that it will not turn,
using puller.
Figure 102
15. Turn housing 180°, place output gear
firmly over O-ring, and install shim and
bearing inner race.
Figure 103

Page 31
ADJUSTING ROLLING RESISTANCE OF
DRIVE PINION BEARING
1. Install 2.60 mm (0.10 in) shim.
Figure 104
2. Heat and install bearing inner race.
Figure 105
3. Place output flange in position.
Figure 106
4. Secure output flange with disk and hex
head screws, turning drive pinion several
times while tightening. Torque to 46 N•m
(10 ft lb).
Figure 107

Page 32
5. Check movement of drive pinion bearing. If
rolling resistance does not fall between 2.5
N•m (0.56 ft lb) to 3.5 N•m (0.78 ft lb),
adjust thickness of shim(s).
Figure 108
6. Lubricate outer diameter and grease
sealing lip of shaft seal. Install shaft seal to
a depth of exactly 2.1 mm (0.0827") using
driver.
Figure 109
7. Install output flange, tightening hex head
screws evenly to allow mounting of dust
shield.
Figure 110
8. Press plate against collar of output flange.
Figure 111

Page 33
9. Install output flange. Grease and install O-
ring.
Figure 112
10. Secure output flange using washers and
hex head screws. Torque to 46 N•m
(10 ft lb).
Figure 113
11. Secure output flange screws with lock
plate.
Figure 114
INSTALLING DIFFERENTIAL
NOTE: Oil all differential components
using DA 85W/90 before
reassembly.
1. Drive in two roll pins per bore, spaced 180°
apart, in differential case half.
Figure 115

Page 34
2. Press crown wheel onto roll pins.
Figure 116
3. Install thrust washer.
Figure 117
4. Install side gear.
Figure 118
5. Install spider assembly and second side
gear, making sure thrust washer lobes
face up.
Figure 119

Page 35
6. Use grease so that thrust washers will
adhere to differential, and install
differential.
Figure 120
7. Secure differential in a fixture. Install
segments and torque socket head screws
to 145 N•m (33 ft lb).
Figure 121
8. Press both inner races of differential
bearing firmly against shoulder.
Figure 122
9. Install bearing outer races and insert
differential into axle carrier, noting position
of crown wheel in next step.
Figure 123

Page 36
10. Note crown wheel position: arrow shows
direction of Forward Drive.
Figure 124
11. Screw two adjusting nuts into bearing
bores.
Figure 125
12. Using Loctite #242, drive straight pins fully
into bores of bearing caps.
Figure 126
13. Note correct installation position and install
two bearing caps with hex head screws.
Torque to 195 N•m (44 ft lb).
Figure 127

Page 37
ADJUSTING BACKLASH AND BEARING
PRELOAD
NOTE: Note backlash value marked on
crown wheel. Bearing pre-load
is 1 - 4 N•m (0.22 - 0.89 ft lb).
1. Install dial indicator at right angle to side of
tooth.
2. Adjust adjusting nut on crown wheel side
until backlash is correct.
3. Screw in second adjusting nut, on side
opposite to crown wheel, until there is no
play in differential bearing. Figure 128
4. Tighten adjusting nut two more notches to

obtain differential bearing preload.
5. Check backlash again while rotating
differential several times, correct if
necessary.
6. Check that dimension is 216 ±0.05 mm
(8.5 ±0.002"); correct if necessary by
repeating last step of differential
installation and Steps 1 - 5 in this
adjustment procedure.
Figure 129
7. Install dial indicator on back side of crown
wheel and make one full rotation to
determine run out. Maximum run-out is
0.08 mm (0.003 in).
Figure 130

Page 38
8. Cover several crown wheel teeth with gear
marking compound, roll crown wheel back
and forth over drive pinion, and compare
contact pattern with samples in Figure 217
thru Figure 222 at the end of this section.
NOTE: If contact pattern is incorrect,
unit must be reshimmed.
Figure 131
9. When adjustment is correct, secure
position of adjusting nuts using straight
pins.
Figure 132
INSTALLING HELICAL GEAR AND CLUTCH
1. Install ball bearing in bearing cover and
secure with retaining ring.
Figure 133
2. Press ball bearing over collar of helical
gear and secure with retaining ring.
Figure 134

Page 39
3. Press bearing cover, retaining ring up,
firmly onto shoulder.
Figure 135
4. Install spacer, on some models, and shift
dog.
Figure 136
5. Secure shift dog with shim and retaining
ring; maximum end play is 0.1 mm (0.0039
in).
Figure 137
6. Check installation position in illustration
and press needle bearing firmly against
shoulder.
Figure 138

Page 40
7. Insert preassembled helical gear into
housing bore.
Figure 139
8. Secure bearing cover with retaining ring.
Figure 140
NOTE: Shift Dog Assembly is shown.
Figure 141
9. Install retaining ring (1) and O-ring (2).
Figure 142

Page 41
10. Insert shift fork and sliding collar.
Figure 143
11. Install shift shaft so that it is tight.
Figure 144
12. Align shift shaft radially and secure by
driving in roll pin until it is flush.
Figure 145
13. Install new O-ring and install screw plug,
torque to 60 N•m (13.5 ft lb).
Figure 146

Page 42
INSTALLING PLANETARY CARRIER
1. Grease cylindrical rollers and preassemble
planetary gear.
Figure 147
2. Press planetary gear firmly against
shoulder.
Figure 148
3. Install collar shim and retaining ring.
Figure 149
4. Install ball bearing firmly on shoulder and
secure with retaining ring.
Figure 150

Page 43
5. Heat ball bearing and install planetary
carrier.
Figure 151
6. Secure planetary carrier with retaining
ring.
Figure 152
ADJUSTING SHIFT LEVER
1. Install shift lever and secure temporarily in
"OFF" Position with hex screw.
Figure 153
2. Turn shift shaft clockwise to stop, using
(temporary) screw, and secure shift lever
using socket head screw and flat washer.
Torque to 46 N•m (10 ft lb).
Figure 154

Page 44
3. Turn shift lever to "ON" position and fasten
with hex head screw. Torque to 46 N•m
(10 ft lb).
Figure 155
PREASSEMBLING AND INSTALLING
CLUTCH
1. Press ball bearing firmly against shoulder
and secure with retaining ring.
Figure 156
2. Install two rings (rectangular cross
section).
Figure 157
3. Wet outer diameter of shaft seal and
grease sealing lip. Install to correct depth
by using special driver.
Figure 158

Page 45
4. Secure shaft seal with retaining ring.
Figure 159
5. Grease two rings (with rectangular cross
section), align vertically and press drive
shaft into guide sleeve until seated.
Figure 160
6. Secure drive sleeve with retaining ring.
Figure 161
7. Install retaining ring (one only). Install back
plate with bevel facing up.
Figure 162

Page 46
8. Determine value B from table and adjust if
necessary, following Steps 9 - 13.
Number of
Value B
Plate Pairs
10 10.6 + 0.2 mm (0.417
±0.0079")
11 7.8 + 0.2 mm (0.307
±0.0079")
Figure 163
9. Install piston.
Figure 164
10. Install plate carrier and tap against
shoulder until seated. See Figure 165 and
Figure 166.
Figure 165
Figure 166

Page 47
11. Install plate.
Figure 167
12. Determine number of plate pairs, using
Parts List, and assemble the plate pack
starting with an inner plate and using no
oil.
Figure 168
13. Determine dimension B, the distance from
face of inner plate carrier to outer plate
and correct distance to 10.6 ±0.2 mm
(0.417 ±0.0079 in) or 7.8 ±0.2 mm (0.3071
±0.0079 in) using shims of 1.0, 1.2, 1.4, or
1.8 mm.
Figure 169
14. Determine end play of plate carrier, ball
bearing and sun gear. Adjust to maximum
end play of 0.1 mm (0.0039 in), using
shim(s) in next Step. Install ball bearing
and sun gear.
Figure 170

Page 48
15. Assemble shim(s) of 3.0 - 3.9 mm (0.1181
- 0.1535 in), secure with retaining ring and
check end play again. Remove all
components including the piston
assembled in Steps 9 - 15.
Figure 171
16. Grease lip of sealing ring and install, lip up,
using driver.
Figure 172
17. Grease and install O-ring.
Figure 173
18. Install cup springs according to illustration.
Figure 174

Page 49
19. Install piston.
Figure 175
20. Grease seal ring and install lip down.
Install inner plate carrier against shoulder.
Figure 176
21. Install plate.
Figure 177
22. Oil and assemble plate pack.
Figure 178

Page 50
23. Install ball bearing into centering disc and
secure with snap ring.
Figure 179
24. Install centering disc in internal gear bore
and secure with retaining ring.
Figure 180
25. Align outer plates radially and install
internal gear.
Figure 181
26. Install sun gear.
Figure 182

Page 51
27. Install end play shims determined in Steps
14 and 15.
Figure 183
28. Preload plate pack using an assembly type
fixture and secure with retaining ring (one
only).
Figure 184
CHECKING CLUTCH
1. Install hydraulic connection.
Figure 185
NOTE: Test medium in following test
should be TE-M107 or TEML12
2. Clean piston by blowing compressed air
into it several times. Set test pressure to
35 bar (507 psi); use shut off valve to shut
off pump, and check that pressure holds
for 3 minutes.
Figure 186

Page 52
3. Remove pressure connection, install
throttle valve and new O-rings.
Figure 187
4. Install preassembled clutch.
Figure 188
5. Install 190 x 4 retaining ring.
Figure 189
INSTALLING BRAKE
1. Install backing plate.
Figure 190

Page 53
2. Determine number of plate pairs, using
Parts List; oil and assemble the plate pack
starting with an inner plate.
Figure 191
3. Seat piston firmly on shoulder.
Figure 192
4. Install two cup springs, centering them
carefully.
Figure 193
5. Install measuring cover and draw it down
evenly against shoulder using socket head
screws. Torque to 79 N•m (17.8 ft lb).
Figure 194

Page 54
6. Measure distance from cover to piston
(Dimension 1). Subtract manufacturing
dimension engraved on cover (20 mm)
from Dimension 1 to get Dimension X.
Dimension 1 32.60 mm (1.28 in)

Manufacturing - 20.00 mm (0.787 in)
Dimension
Dimension X = 12.60 mm (0.499 in)
Figure 195
7. Measure distance from drive casing to
flange (Dimension "Y"). Subtract Y from X
to get Adjustment Value (A).
Dimension X 12.60 mm (0.496 in)

Dimension Y -11.10 mm (0.437 in)
Adjustment = 1.50 mm (0.059 in)
Value (A)
Figure 196
8. Correct adjustment, using 3.0, 3.2 and 3.5
mm shims. Remove measuring cover and
piston.
9. Install O-ring in ring groove, making sure
O-ring makes good contact.
Figure 197

Page 55
10. Note position of disc, piston, and seals.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Drive Casing
2 Clutch Disc Housing
3 Gasket, Backup
4 Gasket, U-section
5 Retaining Ring
6 O-ring
7 Disc
8 Gasket, Backup Figure 198
9 Gasket, U-section
10 Piston
11 Cup Springs
12 O-ring
11. Install Backup and U-section rings in ring

groove. Oil rings. Check installation
position and install disc.
Figure 199
12. Secure disc with snap ring.
Figure 200

Page 56
13. Install backup ring and seal ring in ring
groove of housing; oil the rings. Install
piston evenly against shoulder using
measuring cover and socket head screws,
then remove measuring cover. See Figure
201 and Figure 202.
Figure 201
Figure 202
14. Install two cup springs and center them
(noting installation position in Figure 198).
Figure 203
INSTALLING DRIVE CASING
1. Insert O-ring (1) in bore and insert O-rings
in ring grooves of guide sleeve. Grease
O-rings.
Figure 204

Page 57
2. Insert O-ring into groove of drive casing.
Grease O-ring.
Figure 205
3. Align guide bushing radially.
Figure 206
4. Install drive casing, being careful to align it
radially.
Figure 207
5. Pull drive casing evenly against shoulder
using socket head screws. Torque to 79
N•m (18 ft lb).
Figure 208

Page 58
6. Pull guide bushing out of housing using
internal puller until snap ring (95 mm) can
be installed.
Figure 209
7. Secure guide bushing radially, using screw
plug. Install new U-ring.
Figure 210
8. Heat turcon ring in oil bath. Insert gasket
(O-ring and turcon ring) into ring groove of
piston, using installer. Grease gasket.
Figure 211
9. Install new O-ring on screw plug. Insert
pre-assembled piston and spring into
housing bore and secure with screw plug.
Figure 212

Page 59
10. Install new O-ring on screw plug. Install
breather (1) and screw plug (2).
Figure 213
11. Install two screw plugs (1) and shear plug
(S). Install hydraulic connection (2).
Figure 214
12. Ventilate piston chamber by filling it several
times with air. Build up test pressure of 35
bar (507 psi), close off HP-pump using
shut-off valve and check that there is no
pressure drop during a period of three
minutes.
NOTE: Use ZF lubricants TE ML 07 or
TE ML 12 for testing.
Figure 215
13. Remove hydraulic connection. Install
throttle valve and install new O-ring.
Figure 216

Page 60
DRIVE PINION / CROWN WHEEL
CONTACT PATTERN
CORRECT PATTERN
Drive Side.
Figure 217
Neutral Side.
Figure 218
INCREASE PINION DISTANCE
Drive Side.
Figure 219

Page 61
Neutral Side.
Figure 220
DECREASE PINION DISTANCE
Drive Side.
Figure 221
Neutral Side.
Figure 222

Page 62
TRANSMISSION GOVERNOR
PARTS LIST
Figure 223

Page 63
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Screw, Socket Head 19 Spring, Compression
2 Screw, Socket Head 20 Orifice
3 Screw, Hex Head 21 Ring, Retaining
4 Cover, Valve 22 Spring
5 Gasket, Cover 23 Ball
6 Cover, Pump 24 Bearing, Ball
7 Rotor Assembly 25 Ring, Retaining
8 Valve, Check 26 Shaft, Drive
9 Valve, Check 27 Shaft, Extension
10 Valve, Check 28 O-ring, Cover
11 Valve, Pressure Limiting 29 Housing, Valve
12 Spool, Control 30 Screw, Hex Head
13 Bearing, Needle 31 Adapter, Hose
14 Ring, Plastic 32 O-ring
15 O-ring 33 Ring, Rotor
16 Reducer 34 Housing, Rotor
17 Ring, Sealing 35 Ball, Drive Shaft
18 Plug, Threaded

Page 64
DISASSEMBLY OF GOVERNOR
(Refer to Figure 223)
1. Remove any oil lines and hoses connected to governor housing (29).
2. Remove four socket head bolts (1) and (2), and remove governor assembly from transmission.
3. Remove hex bolts (3) that hold cover (4) to housing (29). Remove cover (4) and gasket (5).
NOTE: In the following steps, be prepared to catch four balls and three springs that will be
released when cover (4) is removed.
4. Remove three hex bolts (30) that hold pump cover (6) to housing (29). Remove cover (6) using
caution to catch three springs (22) and four balls (23).
5. Remove rotor gear (7), rotor ring (33), and ball (35) from end of drive shaft (26).
6. Remove retaining ring (21) from groove in drive shaft (26).
7. Remove rotor housing (34) from drive shaft (26).
8. Slide drive shaft (26) and shaft extension (27) out of pump cover (6).
9. Use an internal puller to remove needle bearing (13) from housing (29).
10. Remove retaining ring (25) and bearing (24) from pump cover (6).
11. Match mark the position and remove check valves (8), (9), and (10) from housing (29).
12. Match mark position and remove pressure limiting valve (11) from housing (29).
13. Unthread reducer (16) and remove control spool (12) and spring (19) from housing (29).

Page 65
REASSEMBLY OF GOVERNOR
(Refer to Figure 223)
NOTE: It is recommended that new O-rings and sealing rings are used when reassembling the
governor.
1. Coat a new orifice (20) with Loctite #242. Install orifice with a flat tipped punch until the orifice
bottoms in its bore. Use compressed air to clean orifice passage and remove any excess Loctite.
2. Use a press to install needle bearing (13) into its bore. Install the bearing to a depth of 0.2 - 0.5 mm
(0.0078 - 0.0196 in).
3. Slide new O-ring (15) into its groove on control spool (12). Use a installing sleeve to slide plastic ring
(14) into position on O-ring (15).
NOTE: To properly size plastic ring (14), slide a calibrating ring over plastic ring.
4. Lubricate check valves (8), (9), (10), and pressure limiting valve (11) with transmission fluid, and
install. Torque these valves to 10 N•m (7 ft lb). Use a center punch to stake each valve in 2 places.
5. Lubricate the control spool components (12) and (19) with transmission fluid and install them into
housing (29). Torque reducer (16) to 50 N•m (36.8 ft lb). Torque threaded plug (18) to 20 N•m
(15 ft lb).
6. Install bearing (24) into cover (6). Install retaining (25) to hold bearing in place.
7. Slide drive shaft (26) through bearing (24). Install retaining ring (21) onto drive shaft (26) to hold shaft
in place.
8. Install springs (22) into bores in pump cover (6). Coat balls (23) with grease and place them into
bores, on top of springs.
9. Slide rotor housing (34) over drive shaft (26). Install ball (35) into drive shaft (26). Slide rotor gear (7)
onto drive shaft (26). Be certain that ball (35) properly engages inside of rotor gear (7). Slide rotor
ring (33) over rotor gear (7). Lubricate rotor components before installing cover (6) onto housing (29).
10. Insert assembled pump cover (6) into bore of housing (29). Install bolts (30) and torque to 9.5 N•m
(7 ft lb).
11. Place gasket (5) on cover (4). Place cover (4) on housing (29). Install bolts (3) through cover (4) and
torque to 20 N•m (15 ft lb).
12. Grease O-ring (28) and place around bore on housing (29).
13. Slide shaft extension (27) into transmission. Engage splines on shaft extension (27) with splines in
transmission.
14. Thread two aligning studs into transmission, slide governor assembly over studs until flush against
transmission. Be certain that splines on drive shaft (26) are fully engaged with splines on shaft
extension (27).
15. Install bolts (1) and (2) and torque to 23 N•m (17 ft lb).
16. Attach all oil lines and hoses that were originally attached to the governor. Before operating check
and fill transmission with the recommended fluid.

Page 66
S0609000
DRIVE COUPLING
(MAIN PUMP)
CAUTION!
DRIVE COUPLING (MAIN PUMP)S0609000

DD80L 0001 and Up
Solar 130LC-III 0001 and Up
Solar 130W-III 0001 and Up
Solar 220N-V 1001 and Up
Models continued on back of cover.

November 2002
Drive Coupling (Main Pump) S0609000

Page 1
Solar 450-III 0001 and Up
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Drive Coupling................................................................................................ 3
Special Tools .................................................................................................. 4
Kawasaki / Tong Myung Pump Tool ........................................................ 4
Uchida Pump Tool ................................................................................... 7
Drive Coupling Installation.............................................................................. 8
Installation Procedure ........................................................................... 13
S0609000 Drive Coupling (Main Pump)

Page 2
DRIVE COUPLING
When installing the main pump on the engine, it is very important to properly adjust clearance between the
face of the coupling hub and end of pump drive shaft ("Measurement H" shown in the following procedure)
to a specific value.
Figure 1 thru Figure 3, show typical drive coupling installations.
Figure 1 KAWASAKI (OR TONG MYUNG)
Figure 2 UCHIDA
Figure 3 SAUER SUNDSTRAND

Page 3
SPECIAL TOOLS
KAWASAKI / TONG MYUNG PUMP TOOL
NOTE: This tool is also used for the
Sauer Sundstrand Pump for the
DD80L.
This tool is used to control the distance between
the end of the pump drive shaft and the front
face of the drive coupling hub (Figure 4 and
Figure 9). This distance will be referred to as
"Measurement H" in the installation instructions
that follow.
NOTE: In manufacturing drawings
(Figure 5 and Figure 6),
dimension "A" and "B" equal
the "Measurement H." The two
tools shown are designed to be Figure 4
used on various models of
equipment. Only one end of the
tool is used for a specific model
of equipment.

Page 4
A C
B
D
E
G
F
RELIEF H
RELIEF
KNURL
HAAA8350
Figure 5
Dimensional Details for Figure 5

Dimension Measurement Models
A 18 ±0.1 mm DD80L
(0.7087 ±0.0039 in)
B 5.5 ±0.1 mm S330LC-III, S330LC-V, S400LC-III, S400LC-V,
(0.2165 ±0.0039 in) S450LC-V
C 20.0 mm (0.787 in)
D 7.0 mm (0.275 in)
E 11.0 mm (0.433 in) Radius
F 18.0 mm (0.708 in) Radius
G 30.0 mm (1.181 in) Radius
H 1.0 mm (0.039 in) x 45° Chamfer

Page 5
A C
B
D
E G
F
H
RELIEF RELIEF
KNURL
HAAA8360
Figure 6

S170LC-III, S200W-V, S220LC-III, S220LC-V,
10.5 ±0.1 mm
S220LL, S220N-V, S225LC-V, S225NLC-V,
(0.4134 ±0.0039 in)
S250LC-V, S255LC-V
A 2.0 ±0.1 mm
S170LC-V, S170W-V
(0.0787 ±0.0039 in)
1.0 ±0.1 mm
S140W-V, S160W-V
(0.0394 ±0.0039 in)
5.0 ±0.1 mm
B S280LC-III, S290LC-V, S290LL
(0.1969 ±0.0039 in)
C 20.0 mm (0.787 in)
D 7.0 mm (0.275 in)
E 12.0 mm (0.472 in) Radius
F 14.50 mm (0.570 in) Radius
H 1.0 mm (0.039 in) x 45° Chamfer

Page 6
UCHIDA PUMP TOOL
This tool is used to control the distance between
the shoulder on the pump drive shaft and the
rear face of the drive coupling hub (Figure 7 and
Figure 10). This distance will be referred to as
"Measurement H" in the installation instructions
that follow.
NOTE: In manufacturing drawing
(Figure 8), dimension "A"
equals "Measurement H."
Figure 7
C
G D
A
B
H
E G
F
G
HAAA8370
Figure 8

A 16 ±0.1 mm S130W-III, S130W-V
(0.6299 ±0.0039 in)
B 8 mm (0.315 in)
C 60 mm (2.362 in)
D 40 mm (1.575 in)
E 55 mm (2.165 in)
F 40 mm (1.575 in)
H TAP M10X1.5

Page 7
DRIVE COUPLING INSTALLATION
Whenever the drive coupling for main pump is installed, the following mounting dimensions and installation
procedures must be observed.
NOTE: If these procedures are not followed, noise will occur and/or the service life of drive
coupling or main pump will be reduced.
Figure 9 DRIVE COUPLING INSTALLATION (KAWASAKI / TONG MYUNG PUMP)

Page 8
Figure 10 DRIVE COUPLING INSTALLATION (UCHIDA PUMP)

Page 9
Table 1 Parts Information and Torque for Figure 9 and Figure 10
Reference Torque
Description Qty.
Number (See Table 2 and 3)
1 Spring Pin 4
2 Insert 4
3 Bolt 4 Ta
4 Flywheel 1
5 Spring Pin 8
6 Insert 4
7 Hub 1
8 Bolt 4 Ta
9 Pump Shaft 1
10 Clamping Screw 2 Tb
11 Element 1

Page 10
Specification for "Measurement H," from front hub face to pump shaft end, and TIGHTENING TORQUE of
bolts and screws written in the "Table 2" must be observed.
Table 2 Specification for "Measurement H" and Torque (Refer to Figure 9)

Coupling Part Torque Value for Torque Value for
Model "Measurement H"
Number "Ta" "Tb"
17.5 - 18.5 mm 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
DD80L 2414-9009A
(0.689 - 0.728 in) (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)
S130LC-III 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
2414-9009A Note 1
S130LC-V (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)
S130W-III
See Table 3.
S130W-V
S140W-V 0.5 - 1.5 mm 21 - 23 kg•m 12 kg•m
2414-9042
S160W-V (0.020 - 0.059 in) (152 - 166 ft lb) (87 ft lb)
10.0 - 11.0 mm 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
S170LC-III 2414-9008A
(0.394 - 0.433 in) (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)
2.5 - 3.5 mm 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
S170LC-V 2414-9042
(0.098 - 0.138 in) (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)
S170W-III 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
2414-9025 Note 2
S200W-III (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)
S220LC-III
S220LC-V
S220N-V 10.0 - 11.0 mm 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
2414-9008A
S220LL (0.394 - 0.433 in) (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)
S225LC-V
S225NLC-V
S200W-V
S210W-V 10.0 - 11.0 mm 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
2414-9041
S250LC-V (0.394 - 0.433 in) (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)
S255LC-V
S280LC-III
4.5 - 5.5 mm 44 - 49 kg•m 20 - 22 kg•m
S290LC-V 2414-9034
(0.177 - 0.216 in) (318 - 354 ft lb) (145 - 159 ft lb)
S290LL
S330LC-III
S330LC-V 5.0 - 6.0 mm 44 - 49 kg•m 20 - 22 kg•m
2414-9040
S400LC-III (0.196 - 0.236 in) (318 - 354 ft lb) (145 - 159 ft lb)
S400LC-V
S450-III 44 - 49 kg•m 20 - 22 kg•m
2414-9040 Note 2
S450LC-V (318 - 354 ft lb) (145 - 159 ft lb)
NOTE: 1) S130LC-III and S130LC-V has reverse dimension, that is, pump shaft must protrude
outwards by 5.5 - 6.5 mm (0.216 - 0.255 in)
NOTE: 2) Push the hub toward the pump until it stops on S170W-III, S200W-III and S450-III.

Page 11
Table 3 Specification for "Measurement H" for Wheel Excavator (Refer to Figure 10)
Model Coupling part Height (H) Ta Tb
number (mm) (kg•m) (kg•m)
S130W-III 15.5 - 16.5 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
2414-9021
S130W-V (0.610 - 0.650 in) (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)

Page 12
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: Refer to Figure 9 and Figure 10
while using following procedure.
1. Install spring pin (1) and attach insert (2)
with bolt (3) to engine flywheel (4).
NOTE: Tighten bolts to value "Ta" in
the tables.
2. Install two spring pins (5) and attach insert
(6) to hub (7) bolts (8).
NOTE: Tighten bolts to value "Ta" in
the tables.
3. Attach flywheel cover to the main pump
with bolts. (Kawasaki pump only.)
4. Slide hub (7) into place on pump shaft (9)
as specified in the "Table 2" or "Table 3" for
"Measurement H" and secure it in position
with clamping screws (10).
NOTE: Tighten clamping screws to
value "Tb" in the tables.
NOTE: Coat clamping screws (10) with
Loctite #262. Figure 11 DRIVE COUPLING INSTALLA-
TION (KAWASAKI / TONG MYUNG PUMP)
5. Install element (11) between inserts (2) on
engine flywheel (4).
6. Install main pump and hub (7) by pushing
it softly into element (11).
7. Attach flywheel cover / pump housing to
flywheel housing with bolts.
CAUTION!
1. Bolts (3 and 8) are coated against
loosening with a bonding compound.
Do not use any additional bonding
compounds, oils or cleaning solvents
on them.
2. Element (11) is nonresistant to
bonding compounds, oil or grease.
Be careful not to expose it to them.
3. Remove oil or dirt from flywheel
cover and pump shaft before
assembly.
Figure 12 DRIVE COUPLING INSTALLA-
4. Misalignment between pump and TION (UCHIDA PUMP)
engine should be controlled to less
than 0.6 mm (0.023 in).

Page 13
Page 14
1HYDRAULICS
S0702065K
1HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING,
TESTING AND
ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION!
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING, TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT

S0702065K

October 2002
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting, Testing and S0702065K

Adjustment Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Hydraulic System - General Notes ................................................................. 4

Hydraulic Schematic....................................................................................... 6
General Notes ......................................................................................... 6
Operation of Working Components ................................................................ 7
Boom Operating Circuit........................................................................... 7
Boom Up Circuit ...................................................................................... 7
Boom Down Circuit ................................................................................. 7
Arm Operating Circuit ............................................................................. 8
Arm Crowd Circuit ................................................................................... 8
Arm Dump Circuit.................................................................................... 9
Bucket Operating Circuit ......................................................................... 9
Bucket Crowd Circuit............................................................................... 9
Bucket Dump Circuit ............................................................................. 10
Swing Operating Circuit ........................................................................ 10
Right Swing Operating Circuit ............................................................... 10
Left Swing Operating Circuit ................................................................. 11
Swing Relief Valve and Make-up Valve ................................................. 11
Procedural Troubleshooting Baseline Recommendations............................ 12
Initial Checks and Tests to Establish Operating
Condition of the Excavator .................................................................... 12
Pilot Pressure ............................................................................................... 13
Adjustment and Testing......................................................................... 13
Power Mode Valve........................................................................................ 14
Current Signal and Hydraulic Pressure Adjustments ............................ 14
Swing Priority Valve...................................................................................... 15
Control Valve Pressure and Current Adjustments................................. 15
Pressure Up Valve........................................................................................ 16
Checks and Adjustments ...................................................................... 16
Pump Input Power Control ........................................................................... 18
Pump Regulator Adjustment ................................................................. 18
S0702065K Hydraulic System Troubleshooting, Testing and

Page 2 Adjustment
Flow Meter and Flow Meter Kit Installation and Testing ............................... 22
Swing System Troubleshooting .................................................................... 24
Precautions/Initial Checks..................................................................... 24
Swing Relief Valve Checking and Adjustment....................................... 24
Troubleshooting - Swing Gearbox ................................................................ 26
Troubleshooting - Hydraulic Problems.......................................................... 28
Troubleshooting - Control Valve.................................................................... 30
Troubleshooting - Travel Pedal Valve............................................................ 32
Troubleshooting - Joystick Control Valve ...................................................... 33

Adjustment Page 3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - GENERAL NOTES
BCS0340S
Figure 1

Page 4 Adjustment
The hydraulic system has several improvements over conventional hydraulic systems - including cross-
sensing total horsepower control - to maximize output efficiency.
The system features an electronically controlled output optimization system, which allows the operator to
choose between two, distinctly different power modes: high-output/rapid cycling maximum-speed power
mode, and a standard power mode for most types of general operation.
Electronic management of hydraulic control valves assists in optimizing the application speed and overall
operator control of hydraulic actuators and functions.

Adjustment Page 5
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
The hydraulic schematic(s) is available in the "Hydraulic and Electrical Schematic Shop Manual." This
Manual is a collection of diagrams and schematics for a number of models.
GENERAL NOTES
When referring to the schematic, refer to the following items:
• As shown in the schematic, the main pump assembly is driven by the engine. Mechanical
energy is converted to hydraulic power, generating the required hydraulic flow which drives the
system. Two main pumps (a right side pump and a left side pump) make up the main pump
assembly.
• Hydraulic output from the right side pump is transmitted to the left side of the control valve.
Output from the left side pump is transmitted to the valve spools on the right side of the control
valve. Hydraulic output from the pilot pump is used to control the pump and to operate pilot and
solenoid valves.
• The right half of the hydraulic control valve, supplied by the left pump in the pump assembly,
operates valve spools for right travel, boom, bucket and arm functions. The amount of oil flow to
the actuators at the output end of each of those circuits is regulated through the movement of
each individual valve spool.
• The left half of the hydraulic control valve, fed by the right pump in the pump assembly, has
control spools for dozer, swing, boom up and arm operation.
• Two-stage operation is a feature of boom, arm and bucket function. All three of these circuits
can be operated using the output of only one half of the hydraulic pump assembly (one pump or
the other), or - since both halves of the control valve have a spool and available circuit of these
functions - the output of both pumps can be combined, allowing higher speed operation. Boom
up, arm crowd and dumping functions can operate in any one of the three available power
modes - the standard or general duty mode, the high speed/rapid cycling mode.
• Whenever the travel control spools are shifted, output from the main pump assembly passes
through the center joint to the axial piston motors driving the wheel.
• The hydraulic reservoir return line and the pilot circuit both have 10 micron full flow filters. the
disposable elements in these two canister-type filters trap and remove impurities from the oil in
the system. An 80 mesh, 177 micron reservoir intake strainer also helps maintain system
cleanliness and should be cleaned each time hydraulic fluid is drained and replaced. An oil
cooler in the hydraulic system helps maintain the operating temperature of the system at
approximately 50°C. (122°F).
• The arm cylinder operating circuit includes anti-vacuum valves which protect the hydraulic
system from vacuum that could result from external shocks or other unusual conditions. The
arm cylinder circuit is also protected by overload relief valves. Whenever high pressure is
generated as a result of a shock or overload, excess pressure is dumped to the reservoir return
circuit through the relief valve.

Page 6 Adjustment
OPERATION OF WORKING COMPONENTS
BOOM OPERATING CIRCUIT
The boom operating circuit includes the right and left main hydraulic pumps (both halves of the main pump
assembly), both sides of the control valve and the boom cylinder. The circuit operates in boom down mode
through the first shift position and through the second shift position in boom up mode. Overload relief
valves set at 360 kg/cm2 (5,112 psi) protect the hydraulic system from damage as a result of overloads or
shocks to the boom.
BOOM UP CIRCUIT
When you pull the boom control lever backward,
the right side pilot valve generates secondary
boom up pilot pressure that is transmitted to the
right and left sides of the control valve
simultaneously. When secondary pilot pressure
reaches 7 - 9 kg/cm2 (100 - 128 psi), boom
control valve spools open and oil from both
pumps goes to the boom cylinder.
Figure 2
BOOM DOWN CIRCUIT
When the boom control lever is pushed forward,
the right side pilot valve generates secondary
boom down pilot pressure that is transmitted
only to the right side of the control valve. When
secondary pilot pressure reaches 7 - 9 kg/cm2
(100 - 128 psi), the valve spool on the right side
of the control valve opens so that oil from only
one half of the pump assembly goes to the
boom cylinder for boom lowering.
Figure 3

Adjustment Page 7
ARM OPERATING CIRCUIT
The arm operating circuit includes both the right and left hydraulic main pumps, the right and left halves of
the control valve, a slow return orifice, and the arm cylinder. The circuit can be operated in the two-stage
speed control mode which works through both halves of the control valve and doubles the volume of oil
flowing to the cylinder.
Overload relief valves set at 360 kg/cm2 (5,112 psi) have been installed at the AC 1 and AD 1 ports on the
left side of the control valve to protect the circuit and system components from possible damage caused by
shocks and/or overload pressure. Additional protection - to prevent cavitation of the cylinder - is provided
by a make-up valve and reservoir return circuit, which ensures that the volume of oil going to the cylinder
will not exceed the volume of oil coming out.
ARM CROWD CIRCUIT

When the arm control lever is put in the crowd
mode, the left side pilot valve generates
secondary pressure that is transmitted to the
right and left sides of the control valve
simultaneously.
When secondary pilot pressure reaches 7 - 9
kg/cm2 (100 - 128 psi), the arm control valve
spool on the right and left sides of the control
valve opens. Output flow from both halves of the
pump assembly is directed to the arm cylinder.
When working in the arm crowd mode, under
certain conditions, oil in the cylinder could
suddenly be forced out by the weight of the arm
and bucket itself. Insufficient oil flow to the
cylinder could lead to cavitation in the cylinder
and/or surging or irregular movement. This is
prevented by a regeneration valve attached to Figure 4
the control valve which maintains the balance
between oil flowing into the cylinder and oil
flowing out.

Page 8 Adjustment
ARM DUMP CIRCUIT
When the arm control lever is put in "dump"
mode, the left side pilot valve generates
secondary pilot pressure that goes to both
halves of the control valve simultaneously.
When pilot pressure reaches 7 - 9 kg/cm2 (100 -

128 psi), the control spools open on both sides
allowing oil from the right and left pumps to flow
to the arm cylinder.
BUCKET OPERATING CIRCUIT

The bucket operating circuit includes the right
and left main pumps, the right and left halves of
the control valve and the bucket cylinder. 360
kg/cm2 (5,112 psi) overload relief valves at BKC
and BKD 1 ports of the control valve protect the Figure 5
circuit and its components from damage.
BUCKET CROWD CIRCUIT

When the bucket control lever is placed in the
crowd position, the bucket control valve spool on
the right side of the control valve opens and oil
from left main pump flows to the bucket cylinder.
Figure 6

Adjustment Page 9
BUCKET DUMP CIRCUIT
When the bucket control lever is put in the dump
mode, the bucket control valve spool in the right
half of the control valve opens to supply oil from
the left main pump to the cylinder.
SWING OPERATING CIRCUIT

The swing operating circuit consists of the right
main pump in the pump assembly, the left half of
Figure 7
the control valve and the swing motor. To keep
the upper works from coasting when the swing
control is in neutral, an electrical sensor in the
control circuit activates a valve to automatically
engage a mechanical brake.
RIGHT SWING OPERATING CIRCUIT

When the swing control lever is pushed to the
right swing position, pilot pressure from the left
side pilot valve is directed to the right side pump
regulator and right half of the control valve.
Output flow from the left pump is then directed
through the PSR and SR ports of the control
valve to the SR port of the swing motor.
Figure 8

Page 10 Adjustment
LEFT SWING OPERATING CIRCUIT
When the swing control lever is pushed to the
left swing position, the control valve spool at the
left side of the control valve moves in the
opposite direction and output flow from the right
pump is directed through the PSL and SL ports
of the control valve to the SL port of the swing
motor.
SWING RELIEF VALVE AND MAKE-UP

Figure 9
VALVE
Whenever the spool is shifted to the neutral
mode during swing operation, the possibility
exists that surge pressure in the circuit - caused
by inertial momentum of the upper works and
correspondingly reduced pressure at the
opposite motor port - could produce cavitation in
the circuit. To keep that from happening, a 270
kg/cm2 (3,840 psi) relief valve is installed in the
swing motor and a large-capacity make-up valve
is connected to the entrance port of the
hydraulic reservoir, helping maintain acceptable
pressures on both sides of the circuit.

Adjustment Page 11
PROCEDURAL TROUBLESHOOTING BASELINE
RECOMMENDATIONS
INITIAL CHECKS AND TESTS TO ESTABLISH OPERATING
CONDITION OF THE EXCAVATOR
Triage Summary
An excavator that fails to deliver designed performance should be checked for the following:
• Hydraulic flow, first, and,
• Hydraulic pressure, afterwards, in a specified order of priority through different points of the
system.
To verify adequate available hydraulic flow, before any other tests are performed through the circuit:
Check engine operation -
• at 2,250 rpm with no load.
• at 2,250 rpm stall load.
If engine rpm drops excessively with a load or fails to surpass rated speed (2,200 rpm), performance
problems may be due to inadequate hydraulic flow caused by lagging rotational speed.
NOTE: Verify actual flow on the excavator against rated performance, with a flow meter.
If engine tests meet specifications and adequate torque and horsepower are available at the pump drive
flex coupling, pull out the electrical tray under the operator’s seat to inspect the self-diagnostic display.
If the EPOS trouble code display is clear, check hydraulic functions in the following sequence:
• Pilot pressure.
• Negacon, negative control pressure.
• Main relief pressure (front and rear pump).
• Swing pressure.
• Port relief pressure (individual control functions; boom, arm, bucket, swing, and travel).
• Power boost circuit.
• Standard performance tests; cylinder speed, hydraulic motor (travel and swing) speed, cylinder
oil-tightness "permissible drift" test.
NOTE: System specification performance tests of individual activator function are determined by
flow rate through the component or circuit, not the control pressure or system pressure
available to the actuator. Poor flow through the individual circuit may indicate that the
component is worn beyond tolerance limits, while all other hydraulic functions are
adequate.
IMPORTANT
It is suggested that the troubleshooter maintain the testing sequence of the preceding list.
Checks and adjustments nearer the middle or the end of the list may depend on adequate
functioning of systems tested nearer the top of the list.

Page 12 Adjustment
PILOT PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT AND TESTING
WARNING!
This procedure should be done with two people. To reduce the chance of accident or unintended
start-up, one person should remain at the operator’s control stand while checks and
adjustments are made.
Vent hydraulic pressure from the reservoir before breaking the seal on fittings to install two in-line "t-style"
adapters and test gauges (60 bar/1,000 psi) at the gear pump outlet port, and at the joystick control valve
pilot line.
Start the engine and turn the engine speed control dial to the maximum setting. After the excavator has
been operated long enough to reach normal operating temperature, back off the engine control dial to
minimum rated rpm speed. With all controls in neutral, make sure the left console control stand is locked in
the down (operating) position and check pressure at the gear pump outlet port and at the joystick.
If gear pump pressure is outside the tolerance specified in the table, adjust gear pump relief pressure by
loosening the lock nut and turning the set screw in (clockwise) to increase pressure, or turning it out to
decrease it.
NOTE: Be aware that serial number changes and variation in the joystick assemblies used on
different excavators could produce slight change in actual performance characteristics.
Comparison of part numbers to serial numbers stamped on your assembly may be
required, if questions or doubt exists.
IMPORTANT
Top off the hydraulic fluid reservoir if there is any measurable loss of hydraulic oil during test
gauge and adapter fitting installation.
Engine RPM Pilot Pressure @ Pump Pilot Pressure - Joystick

Minimum Speed Setting (full 40 ±5 bar 23.5 ±1.5 bar
left) on Speed Control Dial (580 ±73 psi) (341 ±22 psi)

Adjustment Page 13
POWER MODE VALVE
CURRENT SIGNAL AND HYDRAULIC PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS
WARNING!
The electromagnetic pressure proportioning control (EPPR) "power mode" valve is on the underside of the
pumps (not visible in the harness connections drawing, because it is underneath the assembly), near the
engine/pump flexible coupling, adjacent to the pump return line. To test and adjust power shift current and
pressure through the power mode valve a multilead jumper harness is required. The jumper harness
(which is available through Daewoo After Sales Service, or could be spliced together from commonly
available, purchased parts) has extra leads so that a VOM meter can be connected to the circuit.
To set up the testing equipment, turn off the engine and disconnect the single electrical lead from the
power mode valve. Attach the jumper harness to the terminal on the valve, connect the test leads of the
multimeter to the extra leads on the harness and reconnect the valve electrical lead.
Vent the lever on top of the hydraulic tank to relieve pressure and connect an in-line "t-style" adapter to the
valve pressure port. Install a 60 bar/870 psi (1,000 psi) test gauge in the adapter.
Restart the engine and increase engine rpm by turning the speed control to the maximum speed setting.
Warm up the engine and hydraulic system until hydraulic oil temperature is at least 45°C (113°F). Select
Power Mode III on the Instrument Panel. Check current readings (in milliamps) on the VOM meter and
hydraulic pressure gauge readings and make sure both conform to the values in the table below.
NOTE: If recorded values do not conform to the specified current or pressure in the table, back off
the lock nut on the end of the valve, turn the adjusting screw 1/4 turn and re-check current
and pressure. Repeat adjustment as required to obtain specified performance and
retighten the valve lock nut.
Mode Engine RPM Current Pressure

600 ±20 mA
Mid-range value corresponding 4 ±2 bar
Power Mode High Idle: 1,900 rpm
to engine rpm for both current (58 ±29 psi)
and hydraulic pressure readings.
36 ±6 bar
Standard Mode "S" 1,750 rpm 0 mA
(522 ±87 psi)

Page 14 Adjustment
SWING PRIORITY VALVE
CONTROL VALVE PRESSURE AND CURRENT ADJUSTMENTS
WARNING!
The swing priority control valve is located inside the compartment behind the cabin.
The same jumper harness used for testing the power mode (EPOS) control valve is used to test this valve.
Turn off the engine, disconnect either of the electrical leads and connect the test equipment to that side of
the valve. An in-line "t-style" gauge adapter can be used to connect a 60 bar/870 psi (1,000 psi) test gauge
to the outlet (pressure) side of the valve. Set the engine control speed dial to maximum and warm up the
engine to at least 45°C (113°F) before making any tests.
NOTE: Vent air from the hydraulic system before installing test equipment. Use the lever on the
reservoir, while the engine is running. Pour clean replacement fluid back into the system if
excessive fluid was lost.
To verify operation of the swing priority solenoid valve, connect test equipment and begin testing with the
work mode switch set to "digging" (the state turning off the "trenching" lamp) and the engine speed control
dial at the maximum RPM position.
Operate the swing motor in both directions. Measure signal current and hydraulic pressure through the
valve and record the highest and lowest values as the swing motor rotate clockwise and counter clockwise
several times. Reset the work mode control to "trenching" mode and repeat the same tests.
Valve Function / Work Mode Signal Voltage Hydraulic Pressure

Swing Priority / Digging 0V 0 bar (0 psi)
Swing Priority / Trenching 20 - 30 V 20 - 40 bar (290 - 580 psi)
NOTE: If recorded values do not conform to the specified current or pressure in the table, readjust
as required.

Adjustment Page 15
PRESSURE UP VALVE
CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
WARNING!
Vent hydraulic pressure from the reservoir to install an in-line "t-style" adapter and test gauge (60 bar/1,000
psi) at the pilot pump signal port relief valve outlet.
Start the engine and turn the engine speed dial to maximum. When normal operating temperature is
reached.
• Check pilot pressure and readjust it, if required;
• Select the Instrument Panel rear pump "pressure display";
• Select Power Mode;
• Stall the boom cylinder (towards the extend side);
• Read rear pump pressure on the Instrument Panel display.
Repeat all tests with and without "pressure up" selected through the console rocker switch and joystick
button.
If the 2-stage main relief valve was not set correctly and main relief high-stage pressure ("pressure up") is
outside the tolerance range, begin valve adjustment by loosening the outside (widest diameter) lock nut on
the relief valve. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise to increase pressure, or counterclockwise to decrease
it. Pressure must be 350 bars (5075 psi), or up to 10 bars (145 psi) higher.
Because one adjustment can affect the other, check low-stage main relief pressure by repeating the
cylinder stall test without "pressure up." Readjust standard relief pressure by turning the inner-most
(smallest diameter) screw clockwise to increase the setting, or counterclockwise to decrease it. Pressure
should be at least 330 bars (4,785 psi), but less than 335 bars (4,858 psi).
IMPORTANT
Pressure adjustments and checks cannot be made if pilot pressure is outside the specified
range. Refer to the pilot pump adjustment procedure if required, then proceed with any
necessary adjustments to main relief pressure settings.
Main Pressure and Pilot Pressure and

Power Mode Operation
Tolerance Tolerance
20 - 40 Bar 30 Bar + 10 Bar
Power Mode Neutral, No Operation
(290 - 580 Psi) (435 Psi + 145 Psi)
330 Bar + 5 Bar 30 Bar + 10 Bar
Power Mode Cylinder Stall
(4,785 Psi + 75 Psi) (435 Psi + 145 Psi)
Power Mode W/ 350 Bar + 10 Bar 30 Bar + 10 Bar
Cylinder Stall
pressure Up 5,075 Psi + 145 Psi (435 Psi + 145 Psi)

Page 16 Adjustment
NOTE: The electrical pressure up (power boost) solenoid valve alongside the swing priority
solenoid and arm speed control solenoid, in compartment rear of the operator’s cab, must
be operating correctly, or pressure tests and further adjustments cannot be made.

Adjustment Page 17
PUMP INPUT POWER CONTROL
PUMP REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT
WARNING!
To perform these adjustments accurately the use of a flow meter is strongly recommended, as is consulting
the factory (before starting work) to validate the need for making regulator adjustments. Vent hydraulic
pressure from the reservoir before breaking the seal on fittings to install the flow meter kit. (Refer to the
"Flow meter Installation and Testing" procedure.)
IMPORTANT
Before starting this procedure or going onto make any changes of adjustment settings.
• Verify engine output to the rated speed - 2,200 ±50 rpm.
• Permanently mark setscrew positions at the current regulator control setting.
Use a scribe or other permanent marker to identify a reference point on adjusting screws with a
corresponding reference on the body of the valve. The adjustment process affects a complex balance and
could require some time to complete. If adjustment has to be interrupted or postponed, reference marks at
the adjustment point allow immediate restoration of original performance.
This adjustment procedure is normally performed:
• If the engine is being consistently overloaded (and engine troubleshooting shows engine
performance to be at or above rated output);
• If reduced cylinder speed and diminished work performance provide an indication that rated,
maximum pump flow may not be available (and all other troubleshooting gives no indication of
other flaws or hydraulic system defects);
• If pump output is out of balance and one pump is failing to keep up with the output flow of the
other.
To check pump imbalance without a flow meter, travel the excavator forward on flat, level terrain. If the
machine veers off despite neutral control input and even, balanced track adjustment, the pump which
supplies output to the track frame toward which the excavator is veering is weak.

Page 18 Adjustment
Figure 10
Refer to the illustration of the pump regulator control valve (Figure 10) for the location of adjustment screws
(1, 2 and 3). There are two different adjustments, along with the Negacon, negative control, adjustment
screw (3, directly below 1 and 2). Each one of the adjustment procedures could affect the setting of the
others.
Check and record the arm dump speed performance test before and after input power adjustment, whether
or not a flow meter is used.
NOTE: Regulator adjustments affect total cumulative horsepower, since each regulator
compensates for the output of the other. It is not necessary to adjust both regulators at the
same time, but after checking or adjusting one of them, the remaining unit should also be
checked.

Adjustment Page 19
Start the engine and turn the engine speed dial
to maximum. When normal operating
temperature is reached, loosen the largest
diameter lock nut around the adjustment screw
(2) for the outer regulator spring. Tightening the
screw shifts the P/Q (Pressure/Flow) control
curve to the right, and increases compensating
control pressure.
On the other hand, if the persistent cause of
performance problems is engine overloading,
decreasing the adjustment by turning the larger
diameter adjusting screw (2) out will decrease
pump input horsepower. 1/4 turn on the Figure 11
adjusting screw is equal to approximately 17
horsepower.
IMPORTANT
Because changing the position of adjusting screw (2) also affects the setting of the adjustment
for the inner spring, the smaller diameter adjusting screw (1), turn in the inner screw 198°
(slightly more than 1/2 turn, 180°) before screw (2) is backed out 1/4 turn (90°).
NOTE: For each full turn of adjustment on the larger diameter screw (2), the square-tipped
adjusting screw should be turned in the opposite direction 2.2 turns to avoid changing
inner spring adjustment.
Pump input power adjustments are normally
made in small increments, 1/4 turn (90°) or less,
each time.
Turning the square-tipped, smaller diameter
screw (1) clockwise moves the flow curve up,
increasing flow and then input horsepower.
Figure 12

Page 20 Adjustment
The adjusting screw (1, Figure 14) affects the
delivery rate (Q) of the pump. Tightening the
adjusting screw decreases the maximum cut
flow (as shown in Figure 13) while backing out
the screw increases cut flow delivery rate.
Balance both pumps for equal output. Q
P
HDA3008L
Figure 13
Figure 14

Adjustment Page 21
FLOW METER AND FLOW METER KIT INSTALLATION
AND TESTING
Checking regulator and pump output, to assess the output balance between the front and rear pumps and
to verify operating adjustment of each regulator, will require installation of a flow meter.
The After Sales Service department of the nearest local Daewoo dealer can assist you with these tests or,
if you prefer carrying out your own testing, they should be able to help in putting together a hose and fitting
kit (or the required dimensions and specifications for hoses and fittings) to allow you to install a flow meter
downstream from the main pump assembly.
Installation and Testing Procedure

• Turn off the engine and operate controls to release hydraulic pressure from the accumulator.
• Vent the reservoir to release all pressure from the hydraulic system.
• Remove guard panels from around the main pump assembly.
• Disconnect the main pump discharge output line. Install the input flange of the flow meter on the
pump end of the output line.
• Cap off the unused (input) end of the pump discharge line with a blocking flange.
• Bolt up a pre-measured length of hydraulic hose, between the output end of the flow meter
assembly and the top of the reservoir. Use appropriate fittings and adapter flanges to guarantee
a pressure tight seal.
NOTE: Be sure to maintain even tightening torque on all flange fittings. Use Loctite brand "PST
545" (or an alternate manufacturer’s hydraulic system joint seal) if required, to give an
airtight seal.
• An assistant - who must remain at the operator’s control station at all times - should restart the
engine and run it long enough (at minimum rpm) to de-aerate the system and warm up the
engine and hydraulic system to operating temperature.
Record the values of all test results in three columns, comparing 1) pump pressure (from the instrument
panel display) with 2) measured flow, in gallons or liters per minute, from the installed flow.
meter. The third column of test results should provide a record of engine rpm measured during each of the
following tests - with the engine speed control dial set at maximum, the power mode selector at Power
Mode III and the work mode selector at digging mode:
• Unloaded maximum engine speed baseline test (all controls in neutral).
• Front pump test - operate "bucket cylinder out" lever. Record values at all specified pressures.
• Rear pump test - operate "swing" lever. Record values at all specified pressures.
Record the values for each of the three tests (neutral, travel right and travel left) at the following pump
pressure levels, with travel speed control set at "high speed."
Engine RPM Pressure Flow

2
100 kg/cm (1,422 psi)
135 kg/cm2 (1,930 psi)
180 kg/cm2 (2,560 psi)
240 kg/cm2 (3,413 psi)
330 kg/cm2 (4,785 psi)*
*See Note, below

Page 22 Adjustment
Compare recorded values with output shown in the P-Q curve in the specifications section of this book.
NOTE: When testing bucket and swing functions, read maximum flow tests at 330 kg/cm2 (4,785
psi), not 350 kg/cm2 (5075 psi).

Adjustment Page 23
SWING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
PRECAUTIONS/INITIAL CHECKS
1. Stop work. Release all weight or any type of load safely before proceeding. Avoid risking injury or
adding to damage.
2. Turn off engine and disengage control functions until initial tests are ready to be made.
WARNING
Prevent possible injury and/or loss of operating control. Stop work and park the excavator at the
first indication of:
1. Equipment breakdown.
2. Inadequate control response.
3. Erratic performance.
Stop the machine, put the boom and arm in the inoperative (overnight park) position and begin by making
the fastest, simplest checks first:
• Check oil level.
• Check for overheating, oil leaks, external oil cooler clogging or broken fan belt. Consult service
record for prior repair/service work.
• Drain some tank oil to a clean, clear container. Look for metal shavings/grit, cloudiness/water or
foam/air bubbles in the oil.
• Check for wobble through the engine/pump flex coupling. Run engine with the pump input
hydraulic power control nut turned to the lowest power to check the engine.
• Investigate unusual operating noises or vibration. Check for loose bolts, connections.
SWING RELIEF VALVE CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT

Make a check of operating pressures through the swing relief valve if:
• The swing motor fails to turn.
• Swings in one direction only.
• Swings but continues to coast.
• There is drifting on a slope.
1. Check operation by connecting:
A. Two 600 bar (8,700 psi) pressure gauges to the inlet and outlet measuring ports on top of the
swing motor.
Pressure should be between 265 and 285 bar (3,843.56 psi and 4,133.64 psi), with both swing
locks engaged. With swing locks released, during full acceleration and deceleration, pressure
should approach 275 bar (3,988.60 psi) in each direction.
B. Connect a 60 bar (870 psi) pressure gauge at the "SH" port of the hydraulic brake.
Pressure should always stay at or above 4 bar (58 psi) when operating swing, boom or arm.
C. Connect a 10 bar (145 psi) gauge at the motor makeup valve.

Page 24 Adjustment
Pressure should stay consistently above 2.5 bar (36 psi). If pressure falls below the
recommended minimum level, forceful acceleration of the swing motor could lead to cavitation
of the circuit and stalling, slowed rotation, noise and possible damage.
2. If main inlet and outlet pressures were off in the preceding tests in Step 1, adjust swing relief valve
pressure.
Following adjustment, repeat the operating pressure tests (with gauges connected to the inlet and
outlet test ports on top of the swing motor) and check pressures with the swing locks engaged and
released.
If pressure adjustment fails to restore adequate performance, proceed to the Troubleshooting - Swing
table.
3. If pressure tests were at recommended levels through the main inlet and outlet ports, and through the
"SH" port of the swing brake, the causes of poor swing performance could include a faulty swing
motor, drive train overloading or gearbox defect, or a problem in the brake assembly or swing control
valve. Proceed to the troubleshooting information in the next procedure.
If pressure through the "SH" port was tested below the minimum 13 bar (189 psi) level, check the
shuttle valve in the rear compartment behind cabin. When pressure through the port is at the
recommended level, the brake release valve should disengage the swing brake, allowing the swing
motor to rotate the excavator. If pressure adjustment to the valve has been restored but the brake still
fails to release, the brake piston or friction plate may be frozen, requiring disassembly of the motor
and parts repair/replacement.
4. If pressure tested at the motor makeup valve falls below recommended minimum level, and
consequent problems with cavitation, stalling and surging are observed, check the restriction valve. If
pressure adjustment to the valve has been restored but if problems with cavitation continues,
disassemble the upper swing motor housing and clean or replace assembly components as required.
NOTE: If all tested pressures are at or above recommended levels, and there are no mechanical
problems in the drive train or in the motor/brake assembly, the problem will require further
hydraulic troubleshooting. It’s also possible that a defective joystick, an intermittent short in
an electrical control circuit or a problem in the e-EPOS circuit is causing diminished swing
performance. Pull out the e-EPOS indicator panel from underneath the operator’s seat
and perform the self-diagnosis test. If the display panel reads code "0.2," it is reporting
that the swing priority proportional valve is not functioning, except in the minimum "fail-
safe" mode. Refer to the Electrical section of this book for more information.

Adjustment Page 25
TROUBLESHOOTING - SWING GEARBOX
Problem Possible Causes Remedies
Swing motor fails to operate and:
Swing relief valve defective Adjust pressure to
Brake release valve defective recommended range in affected
Motor makeup valve defective. valve.
Three pressure tests at motor,
brake or makeup valve show low OR
reading(s).
Disassemble and clean valve
assembly. Replace all valve
components that show damage.
If swing and left travel are
All three pressure checks are Exchange front and rear pump
restored but right travel stops
OK but left travel also fails to inlet and outlet hoses to test
working, replace or repair P1
run. pump function.
pump.
Brake assembly or motor friction Check for binding. Disassemble
plate failing to release. and repair.
Disassemble / Repair pilot
Pilot (control) pressure low or
pressure swing spool (305) and /
All three pressure tests are OK, swing control valve stuck.
or swing control valve.
but machine fails to swing at all.
Test motor drain rate. Replace /
Swing motor defective.
Repair motor.
Refer to "Swing Gear
Gear train defective.
Troubleshooting" procedure.
Check above list; then replace
Causes listed above could also
Swing functions but only at oil, test motor drain rate and
produce dragging swing, OR hot
reduced rpm. check for "02" reading (e-EPOS
or wrong oil OR worn-out parts.
self-test).
Low output at P1 pump or
Left travel speed is also Clean and repair piping or repair
external pilot piping leaks/is
reduced. or replace pump P1.
clogged.
Swing control movement is
Inlet / outlet piping reversed. Reset controls or reverse piping.
reversed.
Swing control valve spool not Replace return spring; clean/
centered. repair valve piston and spool.
Pilot pressure may be outside Disassemble, clean or replace
range. pilot relief valve or pilot valve.
Machine swings but continues
Swing relief valve may be faulty. Repair/Replace swing relief
coasting on past stopping point.
valve.

Page 26 Adjustment
If pilot pressure is unequal,
Check to see that pilot pressure
clean or repair piping or repair/
is the same right and left.
replace valve.
Swing movement is in one
Swing control valve spool may Repair/Replace the swing
direction only.
be stuck. control valve.
Repair/Replace the swing relief
Swing relief valve may be faulty.
valve.
No rotation and:
Swing brake not releasing. Check brake engagement and
disengagement; check release
Pressure at swing motor inlet pressure.
increases. Internal damage to gearbox Replace broken gears and drive
drive train. train assemblies.
Overload. Reduce load weight.
Pressure at swing motor inlet Swing motor drive shaft
Replace swing motor.
shows no increase, and the damage.
swing motor is making irregular Internal damage to gearbox Repair/Replace broken or faulty
noises. drive train. assemblies.
Pressure at swing motor inlet
shown no increase, but without Hydraulic pump or valve
Troubleshoot hydraulic system.
irregular noises from the swing problem.
motor.
Oil Leakage:
Oil seal damaged Assembly Replace oil seal Disassemble
From drive shaft From bolted
compound (joint sealer) old and and check mating surfaces.
connections or other assembled
not sealing, bolt not tight or Reapply Loctite; torque bolts to
surfaces.
flange warped. specifications.
Excess heat:
Gearbox casing becomes Replace oil; refill to specified
Low oil level.
excessively hot, with or without level.
irregular noises, during Bearings or gears worn but not
operation. Repair or replace gearbox.
completely inoperative.

Adjustment Page 27
TROUBLESHOOTING - HYDRAULIC PROBLEMS
Attachment cylinders, swing and Main pump(s) malfunction Repair or replace
travel motors are all inoperable. Low oil level in hydraulic system Refill
Loud noises are heard from Main pump inlet (oil supply)
main pump assembly. Repair or replace
piping or hose damaged
Pilot pump malfunction Repair or replace
Attachment cylinders, swing and Pilot cutoff solenoid stuck Repair or replace
travel motors are all inoperable.
No usual or loud noises can be Pilot cutoff switch faulty Repair or replace
heard. Engine/pump flex coupling
Replace flex coupling
damaged
Main pump(s) damaged or worn Repair or replace
Main relief valve pressure off Readjust pressure
Low oil level in hydraulic system Refill
Sluggish performance of all
hydraulic functions - attachment, Hydraulic reservoir intake
Clean
swing and travel. strainer clogged
Pump inlet (supply side) piping
or hose allowing air into Tighten connection
hydraulic system
Oil cooler clogged or air
Clean
circulation to cooler blocked
Cooling fan belt tension too
Readjust belt tension
loose
Oil temperature abnormally
Relief valve set too low Readjust valve
high.
Reduce or slow work load or
Relief valve in constant use
cycling rate
Hydraulic oil severely neglected
Replace oil
or incorrect for application
Overload relief valve
Readjust or replace
malfunction
Oil leak at make-up valve Clean, repair
Control valve spool damaged Repair or replace
Dirt in control valve spool Clean or replace
One circuit in hydraulic system Actuator (joystick, foot pedal)
Repair or replace
inoperable. damaged or worn
Internal seal leak in cylinder Repair or replace
Cylinder rod damaged Repair or replace
Pilot valve or piping malfunction Repair or replace
Mechanical linkage frozen,
Repair or replace
loose or damaged
Center joint damaged. Repair or replace.
Travel motors inoperable. Parking brake not releasing. Repair or replace.
Travel motor worn or damaged. Repair or replace.

Page 28 Adjustment
Swing brake not releasing. Repair or replace
Swing motor inoperable. Relief valve malfunction. Repair or replace
Pilot piping damaged. Repair or replace
Swing gear, bearing or mounting
Repair or replace
loose or worn.
Lubricant worn away,
Swing motor operates unevenly. Grease
inadequate.
Repair/Replace the swing relief
Swing relief valve may be faulty.
valve.

Adjustment Page 29
TROUBLESHOOTING - CONTROL VALVE
Check control valve problems only after other hydraulic circuit operational tests have been made. Refer to
the "Troubleshooting Baseline Recommendations" procedure. Pump flow, pilot pressure, Negacon
pressure, main relief pressure, and port relief pressure should all be checked before starting to work on the
control valve. Make sure the hydraulic system is topped up to the required level and free of oil leaks or air
in the system that could cause cavitation problems.

Disassemble, clean main
Particulate contamination.
poppet.
Broken or damaged spring. Replace
Main Relief Valve Adjusting screw loose. Readjust
Main poppet sticking. Repair/replace
Clogged orifice in pilot passage
Clean/replace
to control valve.
Excessive clearance between
Replace spool or casing.
casing and spool.
Spool does not return to neutral/
Check secondary pilot pressure.
sticking spool.
Spool does not return to neutral
Cylinder goes down in spool because of dirt or other Clean
neutral. contaminants.
Main relief or port relief not
See above
operating properly.
Impurities in pilot circuit. Clean
Rod check valve damaged or
Clean/replace
Cylinder drops before start at clogged.
boom up operation Poppet sticking. Clean/replace
Broken or damaged spring Replace
Excessive clearance between Check pilot pressure and/or
spool or casing. replace spool or casing.
Sticking spool. Clean/replace
Slow operation or response
Main or port relief valve
Check pressure/replace
damaged.
Swing priority not operating Sticking spool. Clean/replace
correctly Solenoid valve faulty. Replace
Priority valve faulty or spool
Check pilot pressure.
sticking.
Boom and arm cylinders do not Broken or deformed spring. Replace
perform normally in combined
operation Excess clearance between right
Clean/replace
and left casing and valve spool.
Clogged spool passage. Clean/replace, replace filter.
Relief valve malfunctions:
Pressure does not increase at Main poppet or pilot poppet
Clean/replace
all. stuck open.

Page 30 Adjustment
Poppet seat damaged or pilot
Clean/replace
piston sticking to main poppet.
Loose lock nut and adjusting
Irregular or uneven pressure. Readjust
screw.
Components worn out, past
Replace
wear limits.

Adjustment Page 31
TROUBLESHOOTING - TRAVEL PEDAL VALVE

Low primary pressure Check primary pressure
Broken spring Replace spring
Spool sticking Clean, repair or replace
Secondary pressure does not
increase Excess spool to casing Replace spool casing
clearance
Worn or loose universal joint Repair or replace handle
(handle) subassembly subassembly
Dirt, other interference between Clean, repair or replace
Secondary pressure too high valve parts
Return line pressure too high Redirect return line
valve parts, or worn spool
sticking intermittently
Interference or binding on spool Clean, repair or replace
Secondary pressure does not return spring
hold steady Interference, restriction or Redirect return line
unsteady pressure in tank return
line
Air bubbles in piping (temporary) Vent air, or repair leak
or air leak
NOTE: Look for evidence of leaking oil.

Page 32 Adjustment
TROUBLESHOOTING - JOYSTICK CONTROL VALVE
Low primary pressure Check primary pressure
Broken spring Replace spring
Spool sticking Clean, repair or replace
Secondary pressure does not
increase Excess spool to casing Replace spool casing
clearance
Worn or loose handle Repair or replace handle
subassembly subassembly
Secondary pressure too high valve parts
Return line pressure too high Redirect return line
valve parts, or worn spool
sticking intermittently
Interference or binding on spool Clean, repair or replace
Secondary pressure does not return spring
hold steady
Unsteady pressure in tank Redirect return line
return line
Air bubbles in piping (temporary) Vent air, or repair leak
or air leak
NOTE: Look for evidence of leaking oil to help locate damaged seals or gaskets that could be
the cause of air leaks.

Adjustment Page 33
Page 34 Adjustment
S0703010K
1ACCUMULATOR
CAUTION!
ACCUMULATOR S0703010K
Mega 200-V (Tier I & II) 1001 and Up
Solar 55 0001 and Up
Solar 55-V Plus 1001 and Up

December 2002
Accumulator S0703010K
Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Specifications .......................................................................................... 4
S0703010K Accumulator
Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The accumulator is a gas-charged storage
device designed to hold a reserve quantity of 1
hydraulic fluid under pressure. Accumulators are
used in hydraulic circuits in much the same way 2
that condensers (or capacitors) are used to
collect, store and maintain electrical charge in a
circuit.
In a hydraulic circuit, minor variations or lags in
pump output that might otherwise cause
unsteady or irregular operation are made up
from the supply of pressurized oil in the 3
accumulator.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Screw Plug
2 Steel Pressure Vessel
4
3 Diaphragm ARS1790L
4 Fluid Valve Figure 1
Accumulators are solidly constructed to resist the high operating pressures of the fluids they contain. There
are only three main moving parts: a plug at the top allows pre-charging or expelling gas from the
compressible, pre-charged upper chamber; a valve assembly at the bottom of the accumulator for passing
hydraulic fluid in and out, and an elastic diaphragm to separate the two chambers. The flexible diaphragm
changes shape to conform to the changing pressures and volumes of the two fluids in the upper and lower
chambers.
There are six possible positions the diaphragm
can be in and they are as follows: Pressure Fluid Nitrogen
1. With no gas charge in the upper chamber

0 bar (0 psi, empty) and no oil in the
bottom 0 bar (0 psi, dry) the elastic
diaphragm hangs loosely.
2. When the pre-pressure charge of gas
(usually nitrogen) is introduced through the
port at the top of the accumulator, the 1 2 3
diaphragm expands to maximum size. The
valve button in the center of the diaphragm
pushes into the fluid opening in the bottom
chamber, sealing off the lower valve. If the
pressure of the gas charge exceeds
system oil pressure, no fluid enters the
accumulator. The button also keeps the
diaphragm from protruding into the lower
4 5 6
valve opening. ARS1800L
Figure 2
Page 3
NOTE: Pre-charge pressure is referred to as the "P1" pressure. The accumulator manufacturer’s
"P1" rated pressure should be stamped or marked on the accumulator’s rating plate.
Annual checks of actual pre-charge pressure should be made by tapping a hydraulic
pressure gauge (and 3-way adapter coupling) into the valve on the bottom of the
accumulator. When hydraulic fluid is pushed out the lower valve opening by the pressure
of the gas charge on the other side of the diaphragm - and there is no counter-pressure
from system oil - the valve button on the bottom of the diaphragm eventually seals off the
lower oil passage. Just after the needle on the gauge reaches its highest point (when there
is 0 bar (0 psi) resistance from hydraulic system pressure) pressure on the gauge will drop
sharply to zero, as the accumulator is completely emptied of oil and the diaphragm button
closes.
Record the highest gauge reading and compare to the "P1" rated pre-charge pressure on the
accumulator manufacturer’s data label. Repeat this test at least once a year to verify proper
functioning of the accumulator.
3. As hydraulic system pressure overcomes accumulator pre-charge pressure, the flexible diaphragm
begins to retract upward.
4. When system oil is at highest working pressure and the accumulator fills to maximum reserve
capacity, the flexible diaphragm is pushed up into the top of the upper chamber.
The highest working pressure is sometimes referred to as the "P3" pressure and can also be
referenced on the manufacturer’s data label on the exterior of the accumulator.
5. If system oil pressure begins to fall off or is momentarily checked or interrupted, the energy stored on
the other side of the diaphragm, in the form of compressed gas, pushes oil back out of the lower
chamber, maintaining oil pressure of the circuit.
6. With minimal system pressure, an equilibrium point may be reached in which accumulator pre-charge
pressure and hydraulic system oil pressure achieve a rough balance. In this condition a minimal
amount of oil is stored in the accumulator.
SPECIFICATIONS
Charge
Model Serial Number System Volume
Pressure
Mega 200-V (Tier I 30 kg/cm² 750 cc
S/N 1001 and Up Brake System
& II) (427 psi) (45.77 in3)
Mega 200-V (Tier I 15 kg/cm² 320 cc
S/N 1001 and Up Pilot
& II) (213 psi) (19.53 in3)
30 kg/cm² 750 cc
Mega 250-V (Tier I) S/N 1001 thru 2000 Brake System
(427 psi) (45.77 in3)
15 kg/cm² 320 cc
Mega 250-V (Tier I) S/N 1001 thru 2000 Pilot
(213 psi) (19.53 in3)
30 kg/cm² 750 cc
Mega 250-V (Tier II) S/N 2001 and Up Brake System
(427 psi) (45.77 in3)
15 kg/cm² 320 cc
Mega 250-V (Tier II) S/N 2001 and Up Pilot
(213 psi) (19.53 in3)
10 kg/cm2 320 cc
Solar 55-V S/N 0001 and Up Pilot
(140 psi) (19.53 in3)
10 kg/cm2 320 cc
Solar 55-V Plus S/N 1001 and Up Pilot
(140 psi) (19.53 in3)
Page 4
Charge
Pressure
10 kg/cm2 320 cc
Solar 75-V S/N 1001 and Up Pilot
(140 psi) (19.53 in3)
Solar 140W-V 30 kg/cm² 750 cc
S/N 1000 and Up Brake System
/160W-V (427 psi) (45.77 in3)
S/N 1000 and Up Pilot
/160W-V (213 psi) (19.53 in3)
S/N 1000 and Up Transmission
/160W-V (114 psi) (45.77 in3)
30 kg/cm² 750 cc
Solar 180W-V S/N 1001 and Up Brake System
(427 psi) (45.77 in3)
15 kg/cm² 320 cc
Solar 180W-V S/N 1001 and Up Pilot
(213 psi) (19.53 in3)
8 kg/cm² 750 cc
Solar 180W-V S/N 1001 and Up Transmission
(114 psi) (45.77 in3)
30 kg/cm² 750 cc
Solar 210W-V S/N 0001 and Up Brake System
(427 psi) (45.77 in3)
15 kg/cm² 320 cc
Solar 210W-V S/N 0001 and Up Pilot
(213 psi) (19.53 in3)
8 kg/cm² 750 cc
Solar 210W-V S/N 0001 and Up Transmission
(114 psi) (45.77 in3)
10 kg/cm² 750 cc
Solar 225LC-V S/N 1001 and Up Pilot / Travel
(142 psi) (45.77 in3)
10 kg/cm² 750 cc
Solar 225NLC-V S/N 1001 and Up Pilot / Travel
(142 psi) (45.77 in3)
10 kg/cm² 320 cc
Solar 255LC-V S/N 1001 thru 1002 Pilot / Travel
(142 psi)) (19.53 in3)
10 kg/cm² 750 cc
(142 psi) (45.77 in3)
10 kg/cm² 320 cc
(142 psi) (19.53 in3)
10 kg/cm² 750 cc
(142 psi) (45.77 in3)
10 kg/cm² 750 cc
Solar 300LL S/N 1100 and Up Pilot / Travel
(142 psi)) (45.77 in3)
10 kg/cm² 320 cc
(142 psi) (19.53 in3)
10 kg/cm² 750 cc
(142 psi)) (45.77 in3)
10 kg/cm² 320 cc
(142 psi) (19.53 in3)
10 kg/cm² 750 cc
(142 psi)) (45.77 in3)
Page 5
Charge
Pressure
10 kg/cm² 320 cc
(142 psi) (19.53 in3)
10 kg/cm² 750 cc
(142 psi)) (45.77 in3)
Page 6
S0704070
1CENTER JOINT
(SWIVEL)
CAUTION!
CENTER JOINT (SWIVEL)S0704070


January 2001
Center Joint (Swivel) S0704070

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Parts List ................................................................................................. 4
Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjustment....................................................... 6
Inspection................................................................................................ 6
Testing..................................................................................................... 6
Disassembly ................................................................................................... 7
Reassembly.................................................................................................... 8
S0704070 Center Joint (Swivel)

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The center joint (swivel) is designed to allow hydraulic oil from the upper structure to flow to components in
the lower structure.
It is capable of allowing continuous 360° rotation of the upper structure in relationship to the lower
structure.

Page 3
PARTS LIST
Figure 1

Page 4
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Main Hub 17 Hex Bolt
2 Shaft Assembly 18 Spring Washer
3 O-ring 19 Plug
4 Slipper Seal 20 Plug
5 O-ring 21 Plug
6 Top Hub 22 O-ring
7 Top Shaft 23 Pin
8 O-ring 24 Adapter
9 Backup Ring 25 Bolt
10 Spacer 26 Hex Bolt
11 Retaining Ring 27 Spring Washer
12 O-ring 28 Plate
13 Dust Seal 29 Shim
14 Top Cover 30 O-ring
15 Bolt 31 Wear Ring
16 Main Cover

Page 5
TROUBLESHOOTING, TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT

INSPECTION
The center joint should be checked for evidence of external oil leakage every 2,000 operating hours.
Leaking or defective O-rings are an indication that dirt and other contaminants could be getting inside the
assembly, which will promote accelerated, abnormal wear and may cause early failure of the assembly.
If internal seals or other sliding surface components are worn and there is internal fluid leakage, complete
overhaul and repair or replacement of the center joint may be required.
TESTING
To check pressure through the center joint, Pressure
Gauge
make up a test kit from the following equipment

list:
• 700 bar (10,000 psi) pressure gauge.
Swivel Joint
• Adapters, connectors, piping and Body (Outer)
flange block-off plates conforming to Swivel Joint

Stem (Inner)
those used in high pressure piping
connections of the excavator.
• A high pressure relief valve with a
setting pressure 1.5 times maximum
Stop
system pressure. Valve
• A stop valve.
Manually-Operated
• A manually operated, in-line change- Changeover Valve
over valve.
Install the change over valve upstream from one Relief
Valve
of the stem high-pressure ports. Connect the (1.5x)
pressure gauge downstream from one of the High Pressure

body ports. Install the stop valve between the Tank
Pump
change-over valve and the stem of the center 0370

joint. Other components should be installed Figure 2
according to the layout in the block diagram. The
test kit is used to pressurize the center swivel
above normal working pressure and lock in the
higher pressure (as the stop valve is closed
manually) for a leak down test.
NOTE: The same type of kit can also
be made up for the drain port
(return line) side of the center
joint. Use appropriate piping,
connectors, test gauges, etc.,
and follow the same block
diagram general layout (Figure
2).

Page 6
DISASSEMBLY
Refer to the assembly drawing of the swivel joint for component references (Figure 1).
IMPORTANT
Do not unbolt the center joint from the lower car body until an adequate number of piping block-
off plates are available, for disconnected piping lines. Be sure that system pressure has been
vented - including the hydraulic accumulator and tank reserve pressure - before disassembly is
started.
1. Clean off the exterior of the swivel joint after it has been removed.
2. Scribe or otherwise mark a line across the cover and the body of the center joint, to allow reassembly
in the same configuration.
3. Unbolt the four 12 mm fasteners holding the cover. Use a vise or v-block to hold the assembly in
place.
4. Remove the cover, withdraw the O-ring and unbolt the fasteners holding the thrust plate, taking care
to support the stem (inner) assembly, so that it will not separate and fall out when bolts are
disconnected.
5. If the stem assembly doesn’t separate easily when the thrust plate and fastener bolts are removed,
use a wooden block and hammer to drive it out of the housing.
6. O-rings and seals should be replaced whenever the assembly is being overhauled or rebuilt. For
repair procedures or emergency tear down, use a thin but rounded-tip, smooth-edge scraper or
spatula to remove O-rings or seals, to avoid causing damage to those that must be reused.
NOTE: The "backup ring" shown in the assembly drawing (above the swivel joint stem lower
seals) should not be overlooked. It is tucked behind the top slip ring, doubled up inside the
same groove in the body of the stem.
7. Before reassembling the center swivel, inspect ball bearing surfaces for visible signs of wear, damage
or discoloration and replace any worn component.
Check clearance between the cover and thrust plate, and between the stem and thrust plate.
Replace any component that shows more than 0.5 mm (0.020") of visible wear.
Clearance between the stem and body of the center swivel must be tight. Replace or repair either
component if there is more than 0.1 mm (0.0039") of measurable wear.

Page 7
REASSEMBLY
1. Pre-lubricate O-rings with hydraulic oil, white grease, or petroleum jelly.
CAUTION!
Apply a very light film of white grease or petroleum jelly to the lower rim of the stem and
inner surface of the center swivel body. Apply slow, even-handed pressure, using both
hands, to slowly push the stem into the body. Seals may be damaged if the stem is pushed
in too quickly.
2. Thoroughly clean all other component surfaces of dirt or grease before reassembly.
3. Reverse disassembly steps for reassembly.
4. Clean threads of fasteners before pre-applying Loctite #243 to the threads, and before torquing the
thrust plate and cover bolts.
5. Pre-fill the center swivel with clean hydraulic fluid before reassembly of high-pressure and drain line
piping. Clean and pre-fill piping line ends to reduce the amount of air in the system. Bleed air from the
hydraulic system and verify hydraulic tank fluid level before returning the excavator to service.

Page 8
S0705000
R5
1CYLINDERS
CAUTION!
CYLINDERS S0705000

December 2002
Cylinders S0705000
Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Parts List ................................................................................................. 4
Piston Nut................................................................................................ 6
Piston Jig............................................................................................... 10
Steel bush Jig........................................................................................ 14
Dust Wiper Jig....................................................................................... 18
Slipper Seal Jig ..................................................................................... 24
Slipper Seal Straightening Jig ............................................................... 28
Disassembly ................................................................................................. 31
Assembly...................................................................................................... 37
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Two essentially similar types of hydraulic cylinders are used on the excavator. The cylinder that is used to
operate the excavator boom or bucket is equipped with a rod stopper, which acts as a cushion only when
the cylinder rod is fully retracted (and the bucket is pulled close to the arm). This type of cylinder is shown
in the lower drawing.
Arm cylinders have a cushion or stopper for operation in both directions. This type of cylinder is shown in
the upper drawing.
THEORY OF OPERATION
1. Piston
2. Oil Path A
3. Oil Path B
Cylinder piston rods are extended or retracted

by oil flow to the back side of the cylinder
(shown as ("oil path A") or to the front of the
cylinder ("oil path B").
The cylinder rod is extended as oil flow is
pumped through the circuit to the back side of
the piston. The force (F1) of the piston stroke
can be expressed by the formula below, where
P = circuit oil pressure and the inside diameter
of the cylinder is expressed by B (Figure 1).
Figure 1
F1 = P x πB2
4
(P: Pressure, p = 3.14, B: Cylinder Inside

Diameter)
1. Cylinder Inside Diameter - B

2. Oil Path A
3. Oil Path B
4. Rod Diameter
When the cylinder rod is retracted, oil flow

through the circuit from the pump to the front
side of the cylinder generates a force (F2) that Figure 2
can be expressed by the formula in which the
diameter of the piston rod is expressed by R,
and the other two terms are the same as in the
preceding expression.
F2 = P x π(B2-R2)
4
Cylinders S0705000
Page 3
Because the volume of oil needed to lengthen
the cylinder rod (Q1) is greater than the volume
of oil required to retract the cylinder rod, it takes
more time to decrease cylinder stroke length
than it does to lengthen it.
Q1 = S x π(B2)
4
Figure 3
Q2 = S x π(B2-R2)
4
Q1 > Q2
PARTS LIST
The following parts list is a partial listing only; for full and complete parts list information, refer to the
Hydraulic Equipment Component Parts List
Cross section in Figure 4 shows an arm cylinder.
Cross section in Figure 5 shows a boom cylinder.
The bucket and boom cylinders are identical and differ only in the attached pipes.
Figure 4
Figure 5
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 4
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Bushing 16 Piston
2 Dust Wiper 17 Slide Ring
3 Retaining Ring 18 Wear Ring
4 U-Packing 19 Slipper Seal
5 Buffer Seal 20 O-ring
6 Rod Bushing 21 Backup Ring
7 Bolt 22 Piston Nut
8 Retaining Ring 23 Set Screw
9 Rod Cover 24 Cushion Plunger
10 O-ring 25 Bushing
11 O-ring 26 Check Valve
12 Backup Ring 27 Spring Support
13 Piston Rod 28 Spring
14 Cylinder Tube 29 Plug
15 Cushion Ring 30 Stop Ring
Cylinders S0705000
Page 5
PISTON NUT
( )
15
-0.1
-0.2
C
(C3~C5)
D +0.1
+0.2
A
35
B
∅8 Through Hole
5
0.
R
R(R15 ~ R20)
4-
350
ARS4730L
Figure 6
Material SM45C (AISI 1045)
Rockwell Harden from 22 - 27
Oil Quench
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 6
MODEL CYLINDER øA øB C D MODEL (CYLINDER)
S55-V (BOOM, BOOM {OPT})
110 mm 69 mm 12 mm 5 mm
ARM S55-V PLUS (SWING)
(4.33 in) (2.72 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
S75-V (BUCKET)
100 mm 58 mm 12 mm 5 mm
S55-V SWING
(3.94 in) (2.23 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
S55-V PLUS (BUCKET)
110 mm 69 mm 10 mm 5 mm
BUCKET S80W-II (DOZER)
(4.33 in) (2.72 in) (0.39 in) (0.20 in)
MEGA 400 (P/S)
S130W-V (ARM (EURO))
S160W-V (ARM)
S170LC-V (BOOM)
S170W-V (BOOM)
S180W-V (BOOM)
130 mm 90 mm 12 mm 5 mm S200W-V (BOOM)
ARM
(5.12 in) (3.54 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in) S200LC-V (BOOM)
S200N-V (BUCKET) (OPTION)
S210W-V (BOOM)
S220LC-V (BOOM)
S225LC-V (BOOM)
S225NLC-V (BOOM)
S225NLC-V (BUCKET) (OPTION)
S130LC-V S130W-V (ARM)
S130W-V (NEW BOOM)
S130LC-V (SHORT ARM)
S140W-V (ARM)
S140W-V (BOOM)
S140W-V (OUTRIGGER)
125 mm 85 mm 12 mm 5 mm
BOOM (OP) S160W-V (BOOM)
(4.92 in) (3.35 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
S160W-V (OUTRIGGER)
S170W-V (BUCKET)
S220LC-V (BUCKET)
S220LL (BUCKET)
S225LC-V (BUCKET)
S225NLC-V (BUCKET)
115 mm 75 mm 12 mm 5 mm S140W-V (BUCKET)
BUCKET
(4.53 in) (2.95 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in) S160W-V (BUCKET)
S330LC-V (ARM)
S340LC-V (ARM)
S370LC-V (ARM)
147 mm 107 mm 12 mm 5 mm
ARM S400LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
(5.79 in) (4.21 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
S420LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
S200N-V (ARM (OP))
S225NLC-V (ARM (OP))
S220LL
S210W-V (ARM)
142 mm 102 mm 12 mm 5 mm S220LC-V (ARM)
BOOM
(5.59 in) (4.02 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in) S225LC-V (ARM)
S225NLC-V (ARM)
S290LC-V (BOOM)
S300LC-V (BOOM)
S170LC-V (BOOM)
125 mm 102 mm 11 mm 4.5 mm
BUCKET S200W-V (BUCKET)
(4.92 in) (4.02 in) (0.43 in) (0.18 in)
S210W-V (BUCKET)
Cylinders S0705000
Page 7
MODEL CYLINDER øA øB C D MODEL (CYLINDER)
S255LC-V (ARM)
S290LL (BOOM, BUCKET)
S330LC-V (BUCKET (OP),
BOOM, BUCKET)
145 mm 105 mm 12 mm 5 mm
S250LC-V ARM S340LC-V (BUCKET (OP),
(5.71 in) (4.13 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
BOOM, BUCKET)
S370LC-V (BUCKET (OP),
BUCKET)
S290LC-V (ARM)
147 mm 107 mm 12 mm 5 mm
S290LC-V S/ARM S300LC-V (ARM, S/ARM)
(5.79 in) (4.21 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
S370LC-V (BOOM)
S140W-V (ARTI.)
155 mm 115 mm 12 mm 5 mm S160W-V (ARTI.)
S290LL ARM
(6.10 in) (4.53 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in) S400LC-V (ARM)
S420LC-V (ARM)
170 mm 129 mm 12 mm 5 mm
S450LC-V ARM S470LC-V (ARM)
(6.69 in) (5.08 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
106 mm 66 mm 12 mm 5 mm
ARM
(4.17 in) (2.60 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
S55W-V
112 mm 72 mm 12 mm 5 mm S55-V PLUS (ARM, BOOM)
BOOM
(4.41 in) (2.84 in) (0.46 in) (0.20 in) S75-V (ARM, SWIVNG)
S70-III (ARM)
S80W-II (BOOM)
120 mm 79 mm 10 mm 5 mm
ARM MEGA 130-III (LIFT)
(4.72 in) (3.11 in) (0.39 in) (0.20 in)
S140W-V (DOZER)
S160W-V (DOZER)
S70-III (BOOM, DOZER)
S80W-II
S75-V (DOZER)
120 mm 79 mm 10 mm 5 mm
BOOM S130LC-V (DOZER)
(4.72 in) (3.11 in) (0.39 in) (0.20 in)
MEGA 200-III TC (BUCKET)
MEGA 130-III (BUCKET)
110 mm 69 mm 10 mm 5 mm
BUCKET S70-III (BUCKET)
(4.33 in) (2.72 in) (0.39 in) (0.20 in)
120 mm 80 mm 12 mm 5 mm
S130W-V BOOM S75-V (BOOM)
(4.72 in) (3.15 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
S170LC-V (ARM)
S180W-V (ARM)
140 mm 98 mm 12 mm 5 mm S250LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
S170W-V ARM
(5.52 in) (3.86 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in) S255LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
S290LC-V (S/BUCKET, BUCKET)
S300LC-V (S/ BUCKET, BUCKET)
S180W-V (DOZER)
132 mm 92 mm 12 mm 5 mm
S210W-V DOZER S180W-V (OUTRIGGER)
(5.20 in) (3.62 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
S210W-V (OUTRIGGER)
P/S: Power Steering
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 8
Cylinders S0705000
Page 9
PISTON JIG
( )
15
2-∅"B"
)
F/2
∅8 Through Hole
R(
"
"D
∅
"A"
∅"
C"
35
R(R15~20)
R5
4-
30
ARS4740L
Figure 7
Material SM45C (AISI 1045)
Rockwell Harden from 22 - 27
Oil Quench
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 10
MODEL CYLINDER A (±0.1) øB øC øD MODEL (CYLINDER)
S55 BOOM 80.0 mm 11.0 mm 45.0 mm 110.0 mm S55 (BOOM (OP))
(3.15 in) (0.43 in) (1.77 in) (4.33 in) S55W-V (BOOM)
SWING 58.0 mm 11.0 mm 38.0 mm 80.0 mm MEGA 300 (P/S)
(2.28 in) (0.43 in) (1.50 in) (3.15 in)
S55-V ARM 65.0 mm 11.0 mm 49.0 mm 90.0 mm MEGA 130-III (LIFT)
PLUS (2.56 in) (0.43 in) (1.93 in) (3.54 in) MEGA 160TC (BUCKET)
MEGA 400 (P/S)
70 mm 11 mm 51 mm 95 mm
ARM S80W-II (ARM)
(2.76 in) (0.43 in) (2.01 in) (3.74 in)
60 mm 11 mm 43 mm 85 mm S80W-II (BUCKET, DOZER)
BUCKET
(2.36 in) (0.43 in) (1.69 in) (3.35 in) S75-V (BUCKET)
S70-III
S75-V (ARM, DOZER)
70 mm 11 mm 53 mm 95 mm S130LC-V (DOZER)
DOZER
(2.76 in) (0.43 in) (2.09 in) (3.74 in) S140W-V (DOZER)
S160W-V (DOZER)
S210W-V (ARM)
S220LC-V (BOOM)
S220N-V (ARM (OP))
S225NLC-V (BOOM)
110 mm 13 mm 76 mm 140 mm
ARM S225NLC-V (ARM (OP))
(4.33 in) (0.51 in) (2.99 in) (5.51 in)
S250LC-V (ARM)
S255LC-V (ARM)
S70-III (BOOM)
S75-V (SWING)
S220LC-V S80W-II (BOOM)
S130LC-V (S/ARM, BOOM
(OP), ARM)
S160W-V (ARM)
90 mm 11 mm 63 mm 115 mm
BUCKET S170LC-V (BOOM)
(3.54 in) (0.43 in) (2.48 in) (4.53 in)
S170W-V (BUCKET, BOOM)
S180W-V (BOOM)
S210W-V (BUCKET)
S220LC-V (BUCKET)
S225LC-V (BUCKET)
S225NLC-V (BUCKET)
MEGA 200-III (LIFT)
S290LL (BUCKET, BOOM)
S300LC-V (ARM, S/ARM)
ARM 120 mm 13 mm 85 mm 150 mm
S290LC-V S340LC-V (BUCKET, BOOM,
S/ARM (4.72 in) (0.51 in) (3.35 in) (5.91 in)
BUCKET (OP))
S370LC-V (BUKCET, BUCKET
(OP))
S140W-V (ARTI)
S160W-V (ARTI)
S340LC-V (ARM)
130 mm 13 mm 93 mm 165 mm S400LC-V (ARM, BOOM)
S330LC-V ARM
(5.12 in) (0.51 in) (3.66 in) (6.50 in) S420LC-V (ARM, BOOM,
BUCKET)
Cylinders S0705000
Page 11
MODEL CYLINDER A (±0.1) øB øC øD MODEL (CYLINDER)
150 mm 13 mm 103 mm 180 mm
(5.91 in) (0.51 in) (4.06 in) (7.09 in)
S55-V (ARM, BUCEKT)
63 mm 11 mm 43 mm 90 mm
S55W-V ARM S55W-V (BUCKET)
(2.48 in) (0.43 in) (1.69 in) (3.54 in)
S55-V PLUS (BUCKET)
75 mm 11 mm 53 mm 100 mm S75-V (BOOM)
S130W-V BOOM
70 mm 11 mm 46 mm 95 mm
S140W-V BUCKET S160W-V (BUCKET)
(2.76 in) (0.43 in) (1.81 in) (3.74 in)
S170LC-V (ARM)
S180W-V (ARM)
S180W-V (O/R, DOZER)
96 mm 13 mm 69 mm 130 mm
ARM S200W-V (O/R, DOZER)
(3.78 in) (0.51 in) (2.72 in) (5.12 in)
S210W-V (O/R, DOZER)
S250LC-V (BUCKET, BOOM)
S255LC-V (BUCKET, BOOM)
S55-V PLUS (BOOM, SWING)
S70-III (BOOM)
S170W-V S80W-II (BOOM)
S130W-V (ARM)
S130LC-V (S/ARM, BOOM
80 mm 11 mm 58 mm 110 mm {OP})
BUCKET
(3.15 in) (0.43 in) (2.28 in) (4.33 in) S140W-V (ARM)
S140W-V (BOOM)
S140W-V (O/R)
S160W-V (ARM)
S160W-V (O/R)
S180W-V (BUCKET)
S220LC-V (BOOM)
S220N-V (BUCKET) (OP)
90 mm 13 mm 63 mm 115 mm
S200W-V BOOM S225LC-V (BOOM)
(3.54 in) (0.51 in) (2.48 in) (4.53 in)
S225NLC-V (BOOM)
S225NLC-V (BOOM) (OP)
P/S: Power Steering
O/R: Out Rigger
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 12
Cylinders S0705000
Page 13
STEEL BUSH JIG
(5)
"A" - 20
"B" + 40
∅"B"
∅"A"
(∅20)
15 F E
ARS4750L
Figure 8
Material: SM45C which is done thermal refining <QT> Hrc 22 - 28
Undefined Chamfer C/R = 0.5 Max.
1 Place: Finally work to used DNMG Tip <Nose R0.4>
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 14
MODEL CYLINDER øA -0.05
-0.15
øB (±0.1) E F +0.05
0
Part MODEL (CYLINDER)
50 mm 65 mm 30 mm S55W-V (BOOM)
BOOM -
(1.97 in) (2.56 in) (1.18 in) S55-V PLUS (SWING)
40 mm 50 mm 20 mm
S55-V SWING -
(1.58 in) (1.97 in) (0.79 in)
65 mm 70 mm 30 mm
DOZER -
(2.56 in) (2.76 in) (1.18 in)
50 mm 60 mm 40 mm
DOZER 0 S75-V (DOZER)
(1.97 in) (2.36 in) (1.58 in)
S55-V (ARM)
50 mm 60 mm 25 mm 5 mm S55- V PLUS (ARM,
S70-III BUCKET H/C
(1.97 in) (2.36 in) (0.98 in) (0.20 in) BOOM, BUCKET)
S75-V (BUCKET)
55 mm 68 mm 30 mm 5.5 mm
BUCKET K/C S80W-II BUCKET (K/C)
(2.17 in) (2.68 in) (1.18 in) (0.22 in)
60 mm 70 mm 30 mm S140W-V (DOZER)
DOZER -
(2.36 in) (2.76 in) (1.18 in) S160W-V (DOZER)
S70-III (ARM, BOOM)
S75-V (ARM, BOOM,
S130LC-V SWING)
65 mm 80 mm 30 mm 6 mm
(2.56 in) (3.15 in) (1.18 in) (0.24 in)
S160W-V (BUCKET)
MEGA 200-III (LIFT)
MEGA 200-III TC (H/C)
Cylinders S0705000
Page 15
-0.15
øB (±0.1) E F +0.05
0
S210W-V (ARM)
S290LC-V (S/ARM, ARM)
90 mm 105 mm 40 mm 6.5 mm
ARM MEGA 250-III (BUCKET)
(3.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.58 in) (0.26 in)
MEGA 400 (LIFT (H/C),
BUCKET)
MEGA 400-V (LIFT (H/C))
MEGA 500-III
S180W-V (DOZER, O/R)
S200W-V (BOOM, DOZER,
O/R)
S210W-V (BOOM, DOZER,
O/R)
S220N-V (ARM (OP),
BUCKET (OP))
S220LL S220LC-V (ARM, BOOM,
BUCKET)
S225LC-V (ARM, BOOM,
80 mm 95 mm 35 mm 6.5 mm BUCKET)
BOOM
(3.15 in) (3.74 in) (1.38 in) (0.26 in) S225NLC-V (ARM (OP),
BUCKET (OP))
S225NLC-V (ARM, BOOM,
BUCKET)
S250LC-V (ARM, BUCKET)
S255LC-V (ARM, BUCKET)
MEGA 160 (BUCKET)
MEGA 200 (BUCKET)
MEGA 300 (BUCKET)
MEGA 300-V (LIFT)
65 mm 80 mm 35 mm 6.5 mm
(2.56 in) (3.15 in) (1.38 in) (0.26 in)
S255LC-V (BOOM)
S290LC-V (S/BUCKET,
90 mm 105 mm 40 mm 7 mm
S250LC-V BOOM BOOM, BUCKET)
(3.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.58 in) (0.28 in)
S300LC-V (S/BUCKET,
BOOM, BUCKET)
ARM 100 mm 115 mm 70 mm 6.5 mm
S290LL
(STICK) (3.94 in) (4.53 in) (2.76 in) (0.26 in)
BUCKET)
BUCKET)
BUCKET 100 mm 115 mm 45 mm 7.5 mm
S330LC-V S370LC-V (ARM, BOOM,
(OP) (3.94 in) (4.53 in) (1.77 in) (0.30 in)
BUCKET)
MEGA 300-V (BUCKET)
MEGA 400-V (BUCKET)
MEGA 500-III (LIFT (H/C))
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 16
-0.15
øB (±0.1) E F +0.05
0
120 mm 140 m 75 mm 11 mm
ARM S470LC-V (ARM)
(4.72 in) (5.51 in) (2.95 in) (0.43 in)
S400LC-V (ARM, BOOM
(H/C), BUCKET)
S420LC-V (ARM, BOOM
110 mm 130 mm 70 mm 11 mm
S450LC-V BOOM H/C (H/C), BUCKET)
(4.33 in) (5.12 in) (2.76 in) (0.43 in)
S450LC-V (BUCKET)
S470LC-V (BOOM,
BUCKET)
120 mm 140 m 70 mm 11 mm S420LC-V (BOOM (K/C))
BOOM K/C
(4.72 in) (5.51 in) (2.76 in) (0.43 in) S400LC-V (BOOM (K/C))
50 mm 60 mm 30 mm S55-V (ARM, BOOM (OP),
BUCKET -
(1.97 in) (2.36 in) (1.18 in) BUCKET)
S55W-V
65 mm 75 mm 30 mm
DOZER - S55-V PLUS (DOZER)
(2.56 in) (2.95 in) (1.18 in)
50 mm 60 mm 25 mm 5.5 mm
S80W-II BUCKET H/C
(1.97 in) (2.36 in) (0.98 in) (0.22 in)
S130LC-V (BOOM, BOOM
71 mm 86 mm 40 mm 6.5 mm (OP))
BOOM
S160W-V (BOOM)
S130W-V S130W-V (ARM)
ARM 71 mm 86 mm 40 mm 7 mm S140W-V (ARM)
(EURO) (2.80 in) (3.39 in) (1.58 in) (0.28 in) S160W-V (ARM)
S180W-V (ARM, BOOM,
BUCKET)
60 mm 75 mm 30 mm 6.5 mm
S140W-V O/R S160W-V (O/R)
(2.36 in) (2.95 in) (1.18 in) (0.26 in)
90 mm 105 mm 40 mm 6 mm
S140W-V ARTI. S160W-V (ARTI.)
(3.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.58 in) (0.24 in)
S170W-V (BOOM,
71 mm 86 mm 50 mm 6 mm
S170W-V ARM BUCKET)
(2.80 in) (3.39 in) (1.97 in) (0.24 in)
S170LC-V (ARM, BOOM)
H/C: Head Cover
K/C: Knuckle Cover
Cylinders S0705000
Page 17
DUST WIPER JIG
1.5
3-C
R0.2
1
DIA. (B+40)
DIA. (A-20)
DIA. A
DIA. B
15 C D
ARS4760L
Figure 9
Material: SM45C which is done thermal refining <QT> Hrc 22 - 28
Undefined Chamfer C/R = 0.5 Max.
1 Place: Finally work to used DNMG Tip <Nose R0.4>
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 18
-0.3 øB -0.2
-0.3 C 0
-0.1
D MODEL (CYLINDER)
35 mm 47 mm 6 mm
TILT 0
(1.38 in) (1.85 in) (0.24 in)
45 mm 57 mm 0.5 mm 6 mm
DD80L DOZER DD80L (ANGLE)
(1.77 in) (2.24 in) (0.02 in) (0.24 in)
45 mm 57 mm 0.5 mm 6 mm
ANGLE
(1.77 in) (2.24 in) (0.02 in) (0.24 in)
55 mm 69 mm 5 mm 6 mm
ARM
(2.17 in) (2.72 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
55 mm 69 mm 5 mm 6 mm
BOOM
(2.17 in) (2.72 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
55 mm 69 mm 5 mm 6 mm
BOOM (OP)
(2.17 in) (2.72 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
S55-V
55 mm 69 mm 5 mm 6 mm
BUCKET
(2.17 in) (2.72 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
40 mm 52 mm 3.5 mm 6 mm
SWING S55W-V (SWING)
(1.58 in) (2.05 in) (0.14 in) (0.24 in)
60 mm 74 mm 7 mm 6 mm
DOZER
(2.36 in) (2.91 in) (0.28 in) (0.24 in)
65 mm 79 mm 5.5 mm 6 mm
ARM S80W-III (ARM)
(2.56 in) (3.11 in) (0.22 in) (0.24 in)
S80W-III (BOOM)
70 mm 84 mm 5.5 mm 6 mm S130W-V (BOOM)
BOOM
S55-V (ARM, BOOM, BOOM (OP),
BUCKET)
S55-V PLUS (BUCKET, SWING)
55 mm 69 mm 5 mm 6 mm
BUCKET S55W-V (ARM)
S70-III (2.17 in) (2.72 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
S75-V (BUCKET)
S80W-III (BUCKET)
MEGA 130-III (LIFT)
S55W-V (BOOM)
S55-V PLUS (ARM, BOOM)
S75-V (ARM, SWING DOZER)
60 mm 74 mm 5 mm 6 mm S140W-V (DOZER)
DOZER
(2.36 in) (2.91 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in) S160W-V (DOZER)
MEGA 160-III (LIFT)
MEGA 200-III TC (BUCKET)
70 mm 84 mm 5 mm 6 mm
S75-V BOOM
(2.76 in) (3.31 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
S55-V (DOZER)
60 mm 74 mm 7 mm 6 mm
S80-III DOZER S55-V PLUS (DOZER)
(2.36 in) (2.91 in) (2.28 in) (0.24 in)
S55W-V (DOZER)
S160W-V (ARM)
ARM
(3.15 in) (3.70 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in) S220N-V (BOOM (OP))
S225NLC-V (BOOM (OP))
S130LC-V
70 mm 84 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BOOM
(2.76 in) (3.31 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
75 mm 89 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BOOM (OP)
(2.95 in) (3.50 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
Cylinders S0705000
Page 19
-0.3 øB -0.2
-0.3 C 0
-0.1
D MODEL (CYLINDER)
S210W-V (ARM)
S220N-V (ARM (OP))
ARM
(3.74 in) (4.29 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in) S225NLC-V (ARM)
S290LC-V (BOOM)
S220LC-V S300LC-V (BOOM)
85 mm 99 mm 6 mm 7 mm S225LC-V (BOOM)
BOOM
(3.35 in) (3.90 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in) S225NLC-V (BOOM)
S210W-V (BUCKET)
75 mm 89 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BUCKET S225LC-V (BUCKET)
(2.95 in) (3.50 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S225NLC-V (BUCKET)
S340LC-V (ARM)
S420LC-V (BOOM)
115 mm 131 mm 6 mm 7 mm
ARM (STICK) S370LC-V (ARM)
(4.53 in) (5.16 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S360LC-V (ARM)
S220LL S400LC-V (BOOM)
BOOM 90 mm 104 mm 6 mm 7 mm
(HOIST) (3.54 in) (4.10 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
BUCKET 75 mm 89 mm 6 mm 7 mm
(HEEL) (2.95 in) (3.50 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
95 mm 109 mm 6 mm 7 mm
ARM (OP) S225NLC-V (ARM (OP))
(3.74 in) (4.29 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S220N-V
80 mm 94 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BOOM (OP) S225NLC-V (BOOM (OP))
(3.15 in) (3.70 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S255LC-V (ARM)
S360LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET,
BUCKET (OP))
S340LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET,
100 mm 114 mm 6 mm 7 mm
ARM BUCKET (OP))
(3.94 in) (4.49 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S370LC-V (BUCKET, BUCKET
S250LC-V (OP))
S290LL (BOOM (HOIST), BUCKET
(HEEL))
90 mm 104 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BOOM
(3.54 in) (4.10 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
90 mm 104 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BUCKET
(3.54 in) (4.10 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S290LC-V (S/ARM)
105 mm 121 mm 6 mm 7 mm
ARM S300LC-V (ARM, S/ARM)
(4.13 in) (4.76 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S370LC-V (BOOM)
105 mm 121 mm 6 mm 7 mm
S/ARM
(4.13 in) (4.76 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S290LC-V 95 mm 109 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BOOM
(3.74 in) (4.29 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
90 mm 104 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BUCKET
(3.54 in) (4.10 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
90 mm 104 mm 6 mm 7 mm
S/BUCKET
(3.54 in) (4.10 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 20
-0.3 øB -0.2
-0.3 C 0
-0.1
D MODEL (CYLINDER)
120 mm 136 mm 9 mm 7 mm
ARM (STICK)
(4.72 in) (5.35 in) (0.35 in) (2.28 in)
BOOM 100 mm 114 mm 6 mm 7 mm
S290LL
(HOIST) (3.94 in) (4.49 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
(HEEL) (3.94 in) (4.49 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
115 mm 131 mm 6 mm 7 mm
ARM
(4.53 in) (5.16 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
100 mm 114 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BOOM
(3.94 in) (4.49 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S360LC-V
100 mm 114 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BUCKET
(3.94 in) (4.49 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
(OP) (3.94 in) (4.49 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
ARM
(4.72 in) (5.35 in) (0.35 in) (2.28 in) S290LL (ARM (STICK))
115 mm 131 mm 6 mm 7 mm
S400LC-V BOOM
(4.53 in) (5.16 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
110 mm 126 mm 6 mm 7 mm
(4.33 in) (4.96 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
130 mm 146 mm 6.5 mm 7 mm
ARM S470LC-V (ARM)
(5.12 in) (5.75 in) (0.26 in) (2.28 in)
115 mm 131 mm 6 mm 7 mm S140W-V (ARTI.)
S450LC-V BOOM
(4.53 in) (5.16 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in) S160W-V (ARTI.)
115 mm 131 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BUCKET
(4.53 in) (5.16 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
55 mm 69 mm 5 mm 6 mm
ARMS
(2.17 in) (2.72 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
40 mm 52 mm 3.5 mm 6 mm
SWING
(1.58 in) (2.05 in) (0.14 in) (0.24 in)
60 mm 74 mm 5 mm 6 mm
S55W-V BOOM
(2.36 in) (2.91 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
50 mm 62 mm 4.5 mm 6 mm
BUCKET
(1.97 in) (2.44 in) (0.18 in) (0.24 in)
60 mm 74 mm 5 mm 6 mm
DOZER
(2.36 in) (2.91 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
65 mm 79 mm 5.5 mm 6 mm
ARM
(2.56 in) (3.11 in) (0.22 in) (0.24 in)
70 mm 84 mm 5.5 mm 6 mm
S80W-III BOOM
(2.76 in) (3.31 in) (0.22 in) (0.24 in)
55 mm 69 mm 5 mm 6 mm
BUCKET
(2.17 in) (2.72 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
Cylinders S0705000
Page 21
-0.3 øB -0.2
-0.3 C 0
-0.1
D MODEL (CYLINDER)
S130W-V (S/ARM)
S130LC-V (BOOM (OP))
S140W-V (ARM)
ARM
S170W-V (BUCKET)
S220LC-V (BUCKET)
S130W-V S220LL (BUCKET (HEEL))
75 mm 89 mm 6 mm 7 mm
S/ARM
(2.95 in) (3.50 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
70 mm 84 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BOOM
(2.76 in) (3.31 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
65 mm 79 mm 6 mm 7 mm S140W-V (BUCKET)
BUCKET
(2.56 in) (3.11 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in) S160W-V (BUCKET)
70 mm 84 mm 0.5 mm 6 mm
S140W-V OR S160W-V (O/R)
(2.76 in) (3.31 in) (0.02 in) (0.24 in)
S180W-V (ARM)
S220LL (BOOM (HOIST))
90 mm 104 mm 6 mm 7 mm S250LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
ARM
(3.54 in) (4.10 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in) S255LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
S290LC-V (BUCKET, S/BUCKET)
S170W-V S300LC-V (BUCKET, S/BUCKET)
80 mm 94 mm 6 mm 7 mm
BOOM S180W-V (BOOM)
(3.15 in) (3.70 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
75 mm 89 mm 6 mm 7 mm
(2.95 in) (3.50 in) (0.24 in) (2.28 in)
S200W-V BOOM
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 22
Cylinders S0705000
Page 23
SLIPPER SEAL JIG
0
R1
R1
∅(A+2)
∅A
∅(A-14)
10°
B
(B+40)
ARS4770L
Figure 10
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 24
MODEL CYLINDER øA +0.2
+0.1 B +0.2
+0.1
MODEL (CYLINDER)
85 mm 32 mm
ARM S55W-V (ARM)
(3.35 in) (1.26 in)
110 mm 21.5 mm S55-V (BOOM (OP))
BOOM
(4.33 in) (0.85 in) S55W-V (BOOM)
S55-V S55W-V (BUCKET, SWING)
80 mm 30 mm
SWING S55-V PLUS (BUCKET)
(3.15 in) (1.18 in)
MEGA 300-III (P/S)
100 mm 18 mm
DOZER S55W-V (DOZER)
(3.94 in) (0.71 in)
90 mm 27 mm
ARM
S55-V (3.54 in) (1.06 in)
PLUS 115 mm 20 mm
BOOM
(4.53 in) (0.79 in)
85 mm 28.5 mm S55-V (ARM)
S70-III BUCKET
(3.35 in) (1.12 in) S80W-II (BUCKET, DOZER)
115 mm 25 mm
BOOM
(4.53 in) (0.90 in)
95 mm 23.5 mm
ARM
(3.74 in) (0.92 in)
S75-V
85 mm 23 mm
BUCKET
(3.35 in) (0.90 in)
110 mm 31.5 mm
SWING
(4.33 in) (1.24 in)
S170W-V (BOOM)
S180W-V (BOOM)
S210W-V (BUCKET)
115 mm 28.5 mm
S130LC-V ARM S220LC-V (BUCKET)
(4.53 in) (1.12 in)
S220LL (BUCKET (HEEL))
S225LC-V (BUCKET)
S225NLC-V (BUCKET)
S220N-V (BUCKET (OP))
120 mm 28.5 mm S225LC-V (BOOM)
S220LC-V BOOM
(4.72 in) (1.12 in) S225NLC-V (BUCKET (OP))
S225NLC-V (BOOM)
165 mm 34.5 mm S400LC-V (BOOM)
S220LL ARM (STICK)
(6.50 in) (1.36 in) S420LC-V (BOOM)
140 mm 28.5 mm S255LC-V (ARM)
ARM
(5.51 in) (1.12 in) S290-V (BOOM, BUCKET, S/BUCKET)
S250LC-V S300LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET. S/BUCKET)
130 mm 28.5 mm S250LC-V (BUCKET)
BOOM
(5.12 in) (1.12 in) S255LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
S290LL (BOOM (HOIST), BUCKET (HEEL))
S290LC-V (S/ARM)
150 mm 28.5 mm S300LC-V (ARM, S/ARM)
S290LC-V ARM
(5.91 in) (1.12 in) S340LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET, BUCKET (OP))
S360LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET, BUCKET (OP))
S370LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET, BUCKET (OP))
S340LC-V (ARM)
170 mm 34.5 mm S370LC-V (ARM)
S360LC-V ARM
(6.69 in) (1.36 in) S450LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
Cylinders S0705000
Page 25
+0.1 B +0.2
+0.1
MODEL (CYLINDER)
S140W-V (ARTI.)
180 mm 41.5 mm S160W-V (ARTI.)
ARM
(7.09 in) (1.63 in) S290LL (ARM (STICK))
S400LC-V S420LC-V (ARM)
160 mm 34.5 mm
(6.30 in) (1.36 in)
190 mm 41.5 mm
S450-V ARM S470LC-V (ARM)
(7.48 in) (1.63 in)
S55-V PLUS (SWING)
S70-III (BOOM)
S80W-III (BOOM)
S130W-V (S/ARM)
S140W-V (ARM)
110 mm 28.5 mm
ARM S140W-V (BOOM)
(4.33 in) (1.12 in)
S140W-V (O/R)
S160W-V (ARM)
S160W-V (BOOM)
S160W-V (O/R)
S130W-V S170W-V (BUCKET)
S180W-V (BUCKET)
S70-III (ARM, DOZER)
S75-V (DOZER)
S80W-III (ARM)
100 mm 28.5 mm
BOOM S130W-V (BOOM)
(3.94 in) (1.12 in)
S140W-V (DOZER)
S160W-V (DOZER)
95 mm 28.5 mm S140W-V (BUCKET)
BUCKET
(3.74 in) (1.12 in) S160W-V (BUCKET)
125 mm 28.5 mm
S170W-V ARM S1480W-V (ARM)
(4.92 in) (1.12 in)
S210W-V (ARM)
S210W-V (BOOM)
S220LC-V (ARM)
135 mm 28.5 mm
S200W-V BOOM S220N-V (ARM (OP))
(5.32 in) (1.12 in)
S225LC-V (ARM)
S225NLC-V (ARM)
P/S: Power Steering
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 26
Cylinders S0705000
Page 27
SLIPPER SEAL STRAIGHTENING JIG
1
2-C
R
2-5
∅(A+15)
∅A
1
2-R
100
25
50
ARS4780L
Figure 11
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 28
+0.1
MODEL (CYLINDER)
85 mm
ARM S55W-V (ARM)
(3.35 in)
110 mm S55-V (BOOM (OP))
BOOM
(4.33 in) S55W-V (BOOM)
S55-V S55W-V (BUCKET, SWING)
80 mm
SWING S55-V PLUS (BUCKET)
(3.15 in)
MEGA 300-III P/S
100 mm S55W-V (DOZER)
DOZER
(3.94 in) S55-V PLUS (DOZER)
90 mm
ARM
(3.54 in)
S55-V PLUS
115 mm
BOOM
(4.53 in)
115 mm
BOOM
(4.53 in)
95 mm
ARM
(3.74 in)
S75-V
85 mm
BUCKET
(3.35 in)
110 mm
SWING
(4.33 in)
S55-V (ARM)
85 mm
S70-III BUCKET S80W-III (BUCKET)
(3.35 in)
S80-III (DOZER)
S170W-V (BOOM)
S180W-V (BOOM)
S210W-V (BUCKET)
115 mm
S130LC-V ARM S220LC-V (BUCKET)
(4.53 in)
S220LL (BUCKET (HEEL))
S225LC-V (BUCKET)
S225NLC-V (BUCKET)
S220N-V (BUCKET (OP))
120 mm S225LC-V (BUCKET (OP))
S220LC-V BOOM
(4.72 in) S225NLC-V (BUCKET (OP))
S225NLC-V (BOOM)
165 mm S400LC-V (BOOM)
S220LL ARM (STICK)
(6.50 in) S420LC-V (BOOM)
140 mm S255LC-V (ARM)
ARM
(5.51 in) S290-V (BOOM, BUCKET, S/BUCKET)
S250LC-V S300LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET, S/BUCKET)
130 mm S250LC-V (BUCKET)
BOOM
(5.12 in) S255LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
S300LC-V (ARM, S/ARM)
S340LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET. BUCKET (OP))
150 mm S370LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET, BUCKET (OP))
S290LC-V ARM
(5.91 in) S290-V (S/ARM)
S360-V (BOOM, BUCKET, BUCKET (OP))
S290LL (BOOM (HOIST), BUCKET (HEEL))
S340LC-V (ARM)
170 mm S370LC-V (ARM)
S360-V ARM
(6.69 in) S470LC-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
S450-V (BOOM, BUCKET)
Cylinders S0705000
Page 29
+0.1
MODEL (CYLINDER)
S140W-V (ARTI.)
180 mm S160W-V (ARTI.)
ARM
(7.09 in) S420LC-V (ARM)
S400LC-V S290LL (ARM (STICK))
160 mm
(6.30 in)
190 mm
(7.48 in)
S55-V PLUS (SWING)
S70-III (BOOM)
S80W-III (BOOM)
S130W-V (S/ARM)
S130-V (BOOM (OP))
S140W-V (ARM)
110 mm
ARM S140W-V (BOOM)
(4.33 in)
S140W-V (O/R)
S160W-V (ARM)
S160W-V (BOOM)
S160W-V (O/R)
S130W-V S170W-V (BUCKET)
S180W-V (BUCKET)
S70-III (ARM, DOZER)
S75-V (DOZER)
S80W-III (ARM)
100 mm
BOOM S130W-V (BOOM)
(3.94 in)
S130-V (BOOM)
S140W-V (DOZER)
S160W-V (DOZER)
95 mm S140W-V (BUCKET)
BUCKET
(3.74 in) S160W-V (BUCKET)
125 mm
S170W-V ARM S180W-V (ARM)
(4.92 in)
S210W-V (ARM)
S210W-V (BOOM)
S220LC-V (ARM)
135 mm
S200W-V BOOM S220N-V (ARM (OP))
(5.32 in)
S225LC-V (ARM)
S225NLC-V (ARM)
P/S: Power Steering
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 30
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION!
Vent air from the hydraulic system before disconnecting cylinder piping connections. Use the
lever on the reservoir, while the engine is running. Discharge the hydraulic accumulator and
vent residual tank pressure after the engine is shut off. Pour clean replacement fluid back into
the system if excessive fluid is lost.
1. Following removal of cylinder from

excavator attachment, support cylinder on
some type of sturdy work platform and
drain all oil. Rotate cylinder so that piping
ports are on top, to allow trapped air to
vent.
Figure 12
2. Position piston rod so that it is extended
approximately one half meter (20").
Figure 13
3. Remove bolts (7) on the end of cylinder.
NOTE: Wrap a cloth or other protective
material around piston rod, to
avoid possibility of accidentally
scratching or scoring rod
surface while fasteners are
being loosened and removed.
Component parts (numbered in
parentheses) are keyed to
Figure 4.
Figure 14
Cylinders S0705000
Page 31
4. Tap two bolts into cover of cylinder head,
180° apart. Tighten them in a staggered,
even sequence, to back off piston rod end
cover from edge of cylinder wall. Look for
adequate clearance between cover and
end of cylinder wall before using a plastic
or other soft-faced hammer for final
disassembly.
Figure 15
5. Begin withdrawing piston rod assembly,
away from cylinder. Attach a lifting support
when final 1/3 of rod is still inside barrel of
cylinder. Prepare support blocks for piston
rod before it has been completely
withdrawn.
Figure 16
6. Lower piston rod to support blocks and
detach wear ring (outer surface) (18) from
end of rod.
Figure 17
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 32
7. Immobilize piston rod by inserting a
wooden or other nonscoring, nonmetallic
support through end of rod.
Figure 18
8. Remove set screw by using a socket
wrench.
HAOF340L
Figure 19
9. Fabricate or purchase a piston nut removal
wrench. (Dimensions are called off at
beginning of this procedure. This tool may
also be ordered through your local
Daewoo Parts distributor). Remove nut
from end of piston.
Figure 20
Cylinders S0705000
Page 33
10. Use second piston tool described at
beginning of this procedure to separate
piston. Detach cushion ring (15), taking
care not to damage cushion ring.
Figure 21
11. Use a plastic hammer to evenly pull off rod
cover (9) from end of piston rod. Be careful
not to damage rod bushing (6) and dust
wiper, U-packing and other seals.
Figure 22
12. Use a dull, rounded-tip tool to pry off
O-ring (11) and backup ring (12).
HAOF37OL
Figure 23
13. Find a screwdriver with an appropriate
width tip to facilitate removal of slipper seal
(19), wear ring (18) and slide ring (17)
from piston (16).
Figure 24
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 34
14. Pull off O-ring (20) and backup ring (21)
from cylinder head.
HAOF38OS
Figure 25
15. During disassembly of cylinder head, be
careful not to damage buffer seal (5) and
U-packing (4).
HAOF39OL
Figure 26
16. Disassemble retaining ring (3) and dust
wiper (2). Separate retaining ring (8) and
rod bushing (6).
Figure 27
Cylinders S0705000
Page 35
17. Force out pin bushing (1) from body of
cylinder.
Figure 28
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 36
ASSEMBLY
IMPORTANT
Replace any part that shows evidence of damage or excessive wear. Replacement of all O-rings
and flexible seals is strongly recommended. Before starting the cylinder assembly procedure, all
parts should be thoroughly cleaned and dried, and/or prelubricated with clean hydraulic fluid.
Prepare the work area beforehand to maintain cleanliness during the assembly procedure.
NOTE: Assemble subassemblies of

cylinder in the following order:
1. Cylinder body
2. Piston rod
3. Piston assembly
4. Cylinder head assembly
1. Assemble pin bushing (1) to piston rod
(13) and body of cylinder (14).
Figure 29
2. Following the assembly of rod cover
components, install dust wiper (2) and rod
bushing (6) to rod cover (9). Insert
retaining rings (3 and 8).
Figure 30
Cylinders S0705000
Page 37
3. Pre-lubricate O-rings and seals before
assembly (Figure 31).
Figure 31
4. Before starting to rebuild piston assembly,
heat slipper seal for 5 minutes in an oil
bath warmed to 150°-180°C (302°-356°F).
Use special slipper seal jig (third item in list
of specialized tools at the beginning of this
procedure) to attach seal. Cool seal by
pushing a retracting jig against seal for
several minutes. Apply a strip of clean,
see-through sealing tape around slipper
seal to keep it free of dust.
Figure 32
5. Immobilize piston rod on solid support
blocks. Assemble O-ring (20) and backup
ring (21). Prepare to attach rod cover
assembly to piston rod. Push rod cover by
tightening piston nut (22).
Figure 33
6. Assemble cushion ring (15) and attach
piston assembly to piston rod.
Figure 34
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 38
7. Use specially fabricate or factory-sourced
tool to tighten piston nut (22).
Figure 35
8. Assemble wear ring (18), slide ring (17)
and set screw (23) to piston assembly.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Set Screw
Figure 36
9. Immobilize body of cylinder before
assembly.
Figure 37
10. Pre-apply fastener locking compound
(Loctite #242 or #243 or an alternate
manufacturer’s equivalent product) to all
end cover retaining bolts. Wrap a
protective cushion around end of rod while
tightening fasteners, to prevent possible
damage to polished surface of rod, should
a wrench slip during retightening.
Figure 38
Cylinders S0705000
Page 39
S0705000 Cylinders
Page 40
S0707260
1SWING MOTOR
CAUTION!
SWING MOTOR S0707260


May 2002
Swing Motor S0707260

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Swing Motor Anti-cavitation Make-up Valve ............................................ 4
Relief Valve ............................................................................................. 5
Swing Brake Operation ........................................................................... 6
Parts List (Solar 140W-V, 160W-V) ......................................................... 8
Parts List (Solar 170LC-V, 170W-V, 450LC-V, 470LC-V) ...................... 10
Specifications ........................................................................................ 12
Special Tools (Solar 140W-V, 160W-V) ........................................................ 13
Special Tools (Solar 170LC-V, 170W-V)....................................................... 14
Special Tools (Solar 450LC-V, 470LC-V) ..................................................... 15
Disassembly ................................................................................................. 16
Cleaning and Inspection (Wear Limits and Tolerances) ............................... 23
Reassembly.................................................................................................. 25
S0707260 Swing Motor

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
THEORY OF OPERATION
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Valve Plate 4. Cylinder Block
2. Shoe 5. Piston
3. Swash Plate
The cross sectional views of the swing motor, show most of the main components of an axial-piston type
hydraulic motor. Arrows indicating direction of flow and other graphic symbols provide a general guide for
understanding basic operation (Figure 1).
When high-pressure oil enters the cylinder through the inlet port of the valve plate (1, Figure 1), the sliding
piston inside the cylinder is driven back, generating force "F" against the shoe behind the piston (2).
Force "F" acts in two different directions, as indicated by the arrows (Figure 1). Force F1 exerts pressure
directly on the swash plate (3) to generate oil flow through the motor, while force F2 pushes laterally - at a
right angle - against the drive shaft, providing the rotational energy to turn the cylinder block around the
drive shaft.
All nine pistons in the cylinder block have equal width bore, length and volume. They are configured in a
concentric layout around the drive shaft, as shown in the cross section end-view. As oil is forced through
the inlet port, pistons rotating past the pressurized (supply) side of the motor (indicated as the shaded
cylinders) transmit drive torque - one after the next, each in turn - to the swash plate (through F1, direct
output force) and to the cylinder block (F2, lateral force to keep the block rotating).

Page 3
If oil flow to the motor is directed to the opposite port (so that the supply side becomes the exhaust side
and vice versa), the rotation of the motor is reversed.
Trench mode allows the operator to "prioritize" hydraulic oil flow between swing function and boom and
arm function. Turning "ON" the trench mode boosts oil flow to swing circuit components, increasing swing
speed, as boom up/arm dump speed is reduced. If trench mode is turned "OFF" - diminishing the size of
the opening through the swing priority valve - boom/arm speed increases as slew rate falls off.
Connected through the e-EPOS controller, the switch of the trench mode changes the voltage of the
electronic signal sent to the solenoid valve.
IMPORTANT
The trench mode setting only has a noticeable effect if both functions are used at the same time,
when the right and the left joysticks are each engaged simultaneously, to control swing and
boom/arm functions.
When the trench mode is engaged, an engaged voltage signal to the solenoid valve shifts the "swing
priority" spool valve to increase oil flow through the swing motor. With trench mode "OFF," voltage is
disengaged while current flow is reduced, shifting the spool in the priority valve for increased oil flow to the
boom/arm side of the circuit.
SWING MOTOR ANTI-CAVITATION MAKE-UP VALVE

Unlike those designs for hydraulic swing motor application which incorporate a separate, external
counterbalance valve, the problem of motor rotational speed overtaking or surpassing oil flow rate at the
motor’s supply-side inlet is answered with pressure-control valving that is incorporated in the motor casing.
An anti-cavitation "make-up" valve is incorporated into each relief valve (Figure 2) to prevent oil starvation
on whichever side of the motor is serving as the supply side by allowing greater oil flow through one side of
the circuit. There is one valve for each side of the motor. When swing motor case drain pressure increases
past the set value of the make-up valves, oil flow is increased through that side of the motor circuit.

Page 4
RELIEF VALVE
The relief valve is one in a set of two, and is Item
"51" of the swing motor assembly.
Return line pressure (the normal pressurization
of the hydraulic reservoir, also referred to as
"tank pressure") pushes the valve piston to open
ports "R" and "P" at the end of the valve
whenever the hydraulic system is operating.
This valve initially reacts to the engagement of
hydraulic function (and pressurization of the
tank) by opening momentarily, so that there is
no pressure developed through the valve at all. Figure 2
Tank pressure at "pressurized area A2" is set
against spring pressure inside the valve,
opening the relief valve until pressure at the
spring chamber ("g") momentarily reduces "g"
chamber pressure "Pg." "Pg" subsequently
increases until the piston reaches the end of
travel inside the valve bore at "h."
After the piston reaches "h" and its normally
closed, pressurized operating position, pressure
through the valve can be continually increased
up to the relief valve maximum pressure ("Ps").
Fsp -
Ps = -----------------
A 1 – A2
Where Fsp: Spring Force

Page 5
SWING BRAKE OPERATION
The swing brake is normally held in the applied position - preventing the upper deck revolving
superstructure from rotating - whenever the hydraulic system is not operated (pressurized). The brake
system is automatically released whenever the swing controls are engaged to swing in one direction or the
other.
Figure 3
The swing brake is applied when the brake spring (712, Figure 3) locks up the friction plate (742), split
plate (743) and swing motor casing (301), preventing the motor drive shaft from turning. When hydraulic
pressure is forced to the back side of the brake piston, the friction plate and swing motor casing are
separated, releasing the brake.
IMPORTANT
Along with the swing brake, a two-position positive swing lock has also been provided. It should
be secured whenever the upper deck revolving superstructure must be locked down and
positively kept from rotating - including maintenance and/or repair intervals. (Do not rely on the
swing brake alone to hold the superstructure in position for repairs, transport, maintenance or
normal storage.

Page 6
Page 7
PARTS LIST (SOLAR 140W-V, 160W-V)
841
401
468
487
111
303
52
116 117
51 113
351
355
488 123
469 433
121
444 122
124
472
464
485 301
712
993
994
31
702
707
706
451
131
101
743
742
432
743 106
742 443
743 106
432
491
438 304
106 471
114 437
118
HAAA4340
Figure 4

Page 8
Reference Reference
Number Number
31 Brake Valve 401 Socket Bolt
31-1 O-ring 432 Snap Ring
51 Relief Valve 437 Snap Ring
51-2 Backup Ring 443 Roller Bearing
52 Reactionless Swing Valve 444 Roller Bearing
52-1 O-ring 451 Spring Pin
101 Drive Shaft 464 VP Plug
106 Spacer 468 VP Plug
111 Cylinder Block 469 RO Plug
113 Spherical Bushing 471 O-ring
114 Cylinder Spring 472 O-ring
116 Push Rod 485 O-ring
117 Front Spacer 487 O-ring
118 Rear Spacer 488 O-ring
* Piston Assembly 491 Oil Seal
121 Piston 702 Brake Piston
122 Shoe 706 O-ring
123 Retainer 707 O-ring
124 Shoe Plate 712 Brake Spring
131 Valve Plate 742 Friction Plate
301 Casing 743 Separation Plate
303 Valve Casing 841 Socket Bolt
304 Front Cover 993 PT Plug
351 Plunger 994 PT Plug
355 Spring

Page 9
PARTS LIST (SOLAR 170LC-V, 170W-V, 450LC-V, 470LC-V)
841
401
468
487
111
303
52
116 117
51 113
351
355
488 123
469 433
121
444 122
124
472
464
485 301
712
993
994
31
702
707
706
451
131
101
743
742
432
743 106
742 443
743 106
432
491
438 304
106 471
114 437
118
HAAA4340
Figure 5

Page 10
Reference Reference
Number Number
31 Brake Valve 401 Socket Bolt
51 Relief Valve 437 Snap Ring
51-2 Backup Ring 443 Roller Bearing
52 Reactionless Swing Valve 444 Roller Bearing
52-1 O-ring 451 Spring Pin
101 Drive Shaft 464 VP Plug
106 Spacer 468 VP Plug
111 Cylinder Block 469 RO Plug
113 Spherical Bushing 471 O-ring
116 Push Rod 485 O-ring
117 Front Spacer 487 O-ring
118 Rear Spacer 488 O-ring
* Piston Assembly 491 Oil Seal
121 Piston 702 Brake Piston
122 Shoe 706 O-ring
123 Retainer 707 O-ring
124 Shoe Plate 712 Brake Spring
131 Valve Plate 742 Friction Plate
301 Casing 743 Separation Plate
303 Valve Casing 841 Socket Bolt
304 Front Cover 993 PT Plug
351 Plunger 994 PT Plug
355 Spring

Page 11
SPECIFICATIONS
Specification
Solar 170W-V
Item Solar 450LC-V
Solar 140W-V Solar 220LC-V
Solar 170LC-V Solar 470LC-V
Solar 160W-V Solar 220LL
Type Axial Piston

2 x 128.0 cc/rev
64 cc/rev 121.6 cc/rev 128.0 cc/rev
Displacement (2 x 7.81 in3/
(3.91 in3/rev.) (18.85 in3/rev.) (7.81 in3/rev.)
rev.)
Crossover Relief Valve 270 kg/cm2 280 kg/cm2 280 kg/cm2 280 kg/cm2
Setting (3,840 psi) (3,980 psi) (3,980 psi) (3,980 psi)
Maximum Supply Flow 125 liter/pm 227 liter/pm 210 liter/pm 2 x 210 liter/pm
Rate @ 2000 rpm (33 gpm) (60 gpm) (55 gpm) (2 x 55 gpm)
Max. Motor Shaft 1,640 rpm
1,953 rpm 1,867 rpm 1,640 rpm
Speed
Rated Motor Shaft 27.5 kg•m 54.2 kg•m 57 kg•m 114 kg•m
Torque (199 ft lb) (392 ft lb) (412 ft lb) (825 ft lb)
29 kg 56.5 kg 62 kg 2 x 62 kg
Weight
(64 lb) (125 lb) (137 lb) (2 x 137 lb)

Page 12
SPECIAL TOOLS (SOLAR 140W-V, 160W-V)
2X 9
40
40
100
11 250
M10
10
M10
150
210
HDA3061L
Figure 6

Page 13
SPECIAL TOOLS (SOLAR 170LC-V, 170W-V)
Figure 7

Page 14
SPECIAL TOOLS (SOLAR 450LC-V, 470LC-V)
Figure 8

Page 15
DISASSEMBLY
1. The area where the motor is going to be rebuilt should be well lighted, clean and protected from dust
and/or wind gusts that could carry grit or dust. Use a rubber mat or other protective covering on the
workbench area to prevent damage or scratching of any precision machined components.
IMPORTANT
Clean all of the exterior surfaces of the motor before disassembly. There should not be any
visible dirt, grease, or other type of accumulation on the outside of the casing. Clean off or
blow dry all traces of cleaner or solvent before starting work and cap off or use other types
of protective seals, plugs or wrapping on temporarily disconnected hoses, piping or ports.
2. Open drain plug and drain all oil from motor casing.
NOTE: Swing Motor component parts (numbered in parentheses) are keyed to Figure 5.
IMPORTANT
Use a clean, dry container to catch gear oil. A clean container allows an evaluation to be
made of the used oil. The presence or lack of metal wear shavings in the used oil or
obvious deterioration or contamination of the oil can provide a useful indicator of the
motor’s general condition.
NOTE: Used oil is an environmental

contaminant and should be
disposed of promptly at
approved recycling facilities.
Prolonged physical contact with
used oil has been thought by
some to pose a health risk.
Clean oil residue from hands
and clothing promptly, and do
not allow used oil containers to
accumulate.
Figure 9
3. After oil has been drained completely,
motor should be positioned so that
exposed end of drive shaft faces
downwards.
Figure 10

Page 16
4. Make two permanent marks on exterior of
motor to indicate assembly position of
motor casing (301) and upper valve casing
(303).
Figure 11
5. Disassemble brake valve (31) from side of
casing.
Figure 12
6. Remove relief valve assemblies (51) from
upper valve casing (303).
Figure 13
7. Remove RO plug (469) from upper valve
casing (303). That will allow subsequent
separation of spring (355) and plunger
(351).
IMPORTANT
Use extra care to avoid damaging the
plunger seat.
Figure 14

Page 17
8. Remove all four socket head bolts (401)
and separate upper valve casing (303)
from lower casing (301).
NOTE: Valve plate (131) inside upper
valve casing (303) must be
separated from assembly but
take extra care to make sure
that it is not scratched or
damaged by an accidental fall,
after cover is removed.
Figure 15
9. Remove all twenty brake springs.
NOTE: If brake springs are to be
reused and not replaced, check
and record spring free height. If
a test stand is available, check
height of all twenty springs
under consistent loading.
Replace all springs that show
excessive variation or
weakness.
Figure 16
10. Disassemble brake piston assembly using
special tool and corresponding piston bolt
hole.
NOTE: See "Special Tools (Solar
140W-V, 160W-V)" portion of
this section for manufacturing
details of special tool.
Figure 17

Page 18
11. Reposition motor so that end of drive shaft
faces out to one side. Pull out cylinder
block (111) and disassemble pistons
(121), retainer plate (123), spherical
bushing (113), front spacer (117) and shoe
plate (124). Be careful not to make any
scratches or leave nicks on reciprocating
parts.
NOTE: Record or mark piston position
or store them in order in which
they were removed so that they
Figure 18
can be returned to same
cylinder bores they were taken
out of. Service life could be
extended incrementally by
maintaining previous wear-
pattern relationships by
avoiding new ones.
12. Pull out friction plates (742) and separator
plates (743) from area behind cylinder
block.
Figure 19
13. Remove lock ring (437) from around drive
shaft. Use a large enough pair of snap-ring
pliers to properly tension ring and pull it
away from locking groove.
Use extra caution in pulling off front cover
(304) behind snap ring. Drive shaft oil seal
(491) underneath cover must be replaced
if it is damaged during disassembly. Use a
little bit of extra caution (and a very large
set of channel locks, a puller or extra wide
adjustable wrench) to carefully withdraw
Figure 20
cover straight back off drive shaft.

Page 19
14. Separate casing and drive shaft (101). Tap
upper end of drive shaft with a soft-faced,
plastic hammer. To avoid damaging drive
shaft, do not use excessive force.
Figure 21
15. Tap bearing race out of casing.
Figure 22
16. Disassembly of motor has now been
completed, unless there is any reason to 1
suppose that drive shaft bearing has 2
become excessively worn.
If it is necessary, replace bearing by pulling
away stop ring (432) and spacer (106). Put 3
drive shaft in a press to separate bearing
cage from drive shaft.
4
Reference
Description
Number
1 Press HDA3078L
2 Drive Shaft Figure 23
3 Roller Bearing
4 Base of Press

Page 20
NOTE: Final disassembly of individual
components may also require:
A. Disassemble oil seal from the front 2
cover if they were not separated 1
during removal. Apply force (2,
Figure 24) and use a plug (1) to
hammer through drive shaft opening
in cover.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Plug HDA3079L
2 Applied Force Figure 24
Figure 25
B. If upper bearing is going to be
replaced, whether as a general
precaution as part of normal
rebuilding or because of
unmistakable wear, separate bearing
from cover.
Figure 26

Page 21
C. Relief valves can be replaced in sets
by ordering one part number through
your authorized Daewoo dealer/parts
distributor. To disassemble relief
valves, pull out plug (201, Figure 5),
disassemble bushing (343), spring
(322) and spring seat (331) from rod
(303). Position valve housing facing
down and separate piston (302), rod
(303), spring (321), spring seat (331)
and plunger (301).
Figure 27
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the adjusting
screw and lock nut. Replace the
valve as a complete unit if any
parts have been damaged.

Page 22
CLEANING AND INSPECTION (WEAR LIMITS AND
TOLERANCES)
Inspect all components and precision surfaces, to confirm that they haven’t been worn beyond service
limits. Refer to table below for dimensional specifications.
All parts should be cleaned, air-dried and re-lubricated with clean, approved-type hydraulic fluid, before
final reassembly or as the final step after the unit has been put back together.
Replacement of all O-rings and oil seals with new parts is generally recommended, unless motor has had
minimal use. Inspect O-rings and oil seals very carefully for cuts, nicks, brittleness or softness, or any other
type of damage or distortion, before final reassembly.
NOTE: When parts exceed the standard, replace them. When there is conspicuous surface
damage, it is always safer to replace parts, whether standards are exceeded or not.
2
1
d D
5
4
3
H
h
a
t
HBOA230L
Figure 28
NOTE: Spherical bushing and push plate must always be replaced as a set. If either one requires
replacement, replace the other
1. Clearance Between Piston and Cylinder Bore (D-d)
2. Spring Free Length (L)
3. Thickness of Shoe (t)
4. Piston Ball - Shoe Socket Clearance (a)
5. Height Between Round Bushing and Push Plate (H-h)

Page 23
Service Standards for Replacing Worn Parts
NOTE: When parts exceed the standard, replace them. When there is conspicuous surface
damage, it is always safer to replace parts, whether standards are exceeded or not.
Solar 140W-V, 160W-V
Standard Value Replacement

Item Remedy
mm (In) Limit mm (In)
Clearance between cylinder 0.016 mm 0.046 mm Replace piston or
bore and piston (D-d) (0.006 in) (0.018 in) cylinder
Clearance between piston 0 mm 0.30 mm Replace piston, shoe
and shoe socket (0 in) (0.0118 in) assembly parts
4.0 mm 3.80 mm Replace piston, shoe
Thickness of shoe (t)
(0.16 in) (0.15 in) assembly parts
Height of push plate, round 5.50 mm 5.0 mm Replace set; spherical
bushing assembly (H-h) (0.22 in) (0.20 in) bushing and retainer
3.50 mm 3.10 mm
Thickness of friction plate Replace
(0.14 in) (0.12 in)
Solar 170LC-V, 170W-V, 450LC-V, 470LC-V
Standard Value Replacement

Item Remedy
mm (In) Limit mm (In)
Clearance between cylinder 0.028 mm 0.058 mm Replace piston or
bore and piston (D-d) (0.0011 in) (0.0023 in) cylinder
Clearance between piston 0 mm 0.30 mm Replace piston, shoe
and shoe socket (0 in) (0.0118 in) assembly parts
5.5 mm 5.30 mm Replace piston, shoe
(0.2166 in) (0.2087 in) assembly parts
Height of push plate, round 6.5 mm 6.0 mm Replace set; spherical
bushing assembly (H-h) (0.256 in) (0.236 in) bushing and retainer
4.0 mm 3.6 mm
Thickness of friction plate Replace
(0.157 in) (0.142 in)
Inspect O-rings and oil seals very carefully for cuts, nicks, brittleness, softness or any other type of damage
or distortion, before final reassembly if any must be reused.

Page 24
REASSEMBLY
Reassembly of the motor is basically accomplished by reversing disassembly steps.
Use a torque wrench to make sure that assembly fasteners are tightened to specified values. Always begin
a bolt tightening sequence from the innermost part of the assembly, working outward toward the ends in
careful, even rotation.
1. Position motor casing face down (Figure
29).
Figure 29
2. If drive shaft roller bearings were not
disassembled, go onto next phase of
assembly. Bearing reassembly begins with
replacement of stop ring (432) (Figure 5
and its accompanying Parts List) and
spacer (106) on drive shaft (101).
Figure 30
Make sure that bearing raceways (collars)
are facing right direction. The drawing
shows one side of the bearing collar (1,
Figure 31), marked "R," which should be
assembled next to spacer (2) on lower end
of drive shaft.
A. Both bearing cages (inner roller
assemblies) will probably require
heating in oil before reassembly.
Heat bearings to cause sufficient
expansion of their inner diameters to
allow reassembly on drive shaft.
Figure 31

Page 25
3. Reassemble drive shaft (101, Figure 5),
roller bearing (443) and lower casing
(301). Pay attention to bearing alignment
inside bore of case. Make sure it is fully
seated.
Figure 32
4. There is a "right side" and "wrong side" on
oil seal. Be careful that you install seal
inside cover with correct side facing in.
Figure 33
5. Before replacing O-ring (471) in lower
casing (301), grease O-ring (and/or inside
of groove) very lightly, to facilitate
assembly and to help protect O-ring from
accidental damage.
Figure 34
6. Put a little grease on lip of front cover oil
seal before replacing front cover and
tapping it lightly into place with plastic
hammer.
Figure 35

Page 26
7. Use snap-ring pliers to replace lock ring
(437) into lower casing (301).
Figure 36
8. Turn motor sideways and assemble shoe
plate (124), placing it in motor housing in
same position it was in before removal.
Using grease on assembled side can help
keep individual components in place.
Figure 37
9. Carefully examine cylinder block for any
evidence of damage around rotating parts.
Put push rods (116) and front spacer (117)
back into cylinder block and replace
spherical bushing (113).
Figure 38
10. Using reference notes or marks made
earlier, replace all of the pistons and shoes
(121, 122) back in their original cylinder
bores.
Figure 39

Page 27
11. Put cylinder block (111) and retainer plate
(123) back in motor. Spherical bushing and
grooves of cylinder block splines should fit
together without undue difficulty. (Do not
try to force or pound parts together.)
Figure 40
12. Turn motor so that front cover side (304) is
down. Put separator plates (743) and
friction plates (742) back in same order in
which they were removed. There are three
separator plates (743) and two friction
plates (742), which should be positioned
as shown in drawing below, with clearance
towards side of casing with brake valve (1,
Figure 41).
Reference
Description
Number
1 Brake Valve
Figure 41 \
13. Very lightly grease larger O-rings (706 and
707, Figure 5) before replacing them in
casing (301).
Figure 42
14. Position brake piston (1, Figure 43) in
casing. The diagram shows position of four
piston grooves (2) in relation to valve-
connected side (3), and two 8 mm bolts
which should be tightened in an even,
progressive rotation.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Brake Piston
2 Groove
3 Valve-connected Side
Figure 43

Page 28
15. Reinstall brake springs, making sure that
each gets fully seated on piston.
Figure 44
16. Tap roller bearing (444) race back into
upper valve casing (303), using hammer
and copper rod specified in tool list.
Figure 45
17. Assemble valve plate (131), O-ring and
upper valve casing (303). Refer to
assembly that shows "R" part (2, Figure
46) of the valve plate turned away from
mounting flanges (1) on side of valve plate.
Lightly grease O-ring to help keep it in
place during assembly.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Flange Side
2 R Port
Figure 46
18. Bolt up two halves of motor casing (301
and 303, Figure 5). Be careful not to lose
or damage O-ring. Tighten four 20 mm
socket head bolts using a progressive,
even rotation. Make sure that all brake
springs are fully seated and that valve
casing inlet and output ports are correctly
matched.
Figure 47

Page 29
19. Put plungers (351), springs (355), O-rings
(488), and RO plugs (469) back in casing.
Make sure that both plungers are free to
move back and forth.
Figure 48
20. Reassemble relief valves (51) by putting
rod, spring, stop and piston back together,
then turning plunger side of valve up to
reassemble valve body and all
components of piston: spring seat, spring,
bushing, retainer, O-ring and plug.
Figure 49
IMPORTANT
Be careful not to damage the plunger
and spring seat.
Figure 50
21. Before replacing relief valves (51) in upper
valve casing (303), install backup rings
and O-rings.
Figure 51

Page 30
22. Replace the VP plugs (464, 468) and O-
rings (485, 487) on each of the three
plugs. Reinstall the brake cutoff valve (31).
Figure 52

Page 31
Page 32
S0707350
R2
1TRAVEL MOTOR
CAUTION!
TRAVEL MOTOR S0707350


October 2002
Travel Motor S0707350

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Parts List ................................................................................................. 6
Specifications .......................................................................................... 7
Travel Motor General Disassembly and Reassembly Instructions.................. 8
Recommended Tools .............................................................................. 8
Precautions for Disassembly and Assembly ........................................... 8
Disassembly of Travel Motor .......................................................................... 9
Appearance of Motor............................................................................... 9
Removal of counterbalance Valve........................................................... 9
Removal of Outer Piping ....................................................................... 10
Removal of Stroke Limiter ..................................................................... 11
Removal of Oil Seal .............................................................................. 12
Removal of Control Unit ........................................................................ 12
Removal of Control Valve...................................................................... 14
Disassemble Control Valve ................................................................... 16
Disassemble Stroke Limiter .................................................................. 17
Reassemble Stroke Limiter ................................................................... 18
Reassemble Control Valve .................................................................... 18
Installation of Control Valve................................................................... 19
Reassembly of Travel Motor ......................................................................... 22
Assembly of Control Unit....................................................................... 22
Installation of Oil Seal ........................................................................... 24
Installation of Stroke Limiter.................................................................. 25
Installation of Outer Piping .................................................................... 25
Installation of Counterbalance Valve ..................................................... 26
S0707350 Travel Motor

Page 2
Page 3
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
THEORY OF OPERATION
The drive train consists of a travel motor, rear axle/transmission, propeller shaft, and front axle. Drive force
form the travel motor is transmitted through the transmission to the rear axle and through a propeller shaft
to the front axle. Speed is reduced through differential and hub reduction gears.
Models Solar 130W-V
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Travel Motor 4 Front Axle
2 Transmission 5 Rear Axle
3 Propeller Shaft 6 Center Joint

Page 4
Models Solar 140W-V, 160W-V, 170W-V, 200W-V, 210W-V
5 1 2
3
4
BCS0350L
Figure 2
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Travel Motor 4 Front Axle
2 Transmission 5 Rear Axle
3 Propeller Shaft 6 Center Joint

Page 5
PARTS LIST
Figure 3
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Housing 4 Control Plate
2 Rotary Group 5 Regulator
3 Main Valve

Page 6
SPECIFICATIONS
Travel Motor Solar 130W-V Solar 140W-V / 160W-V

Type Bent Axis Piston Bent Axis Piston
Displacement 45 - 114.7 cc/rev. 42 - 114.7 cc/rev.
(2.75 - 7.0 in3/rev.) (2.56 - 7.0 in3/rev.)
Crossover Relief Valve 360 kg/cm2 360 kg/cm2
Setting (5,120 psi) (5,120 psi)
Max. Supply Flow Rate 160 lpm 166 lpm
(42 gpm) (44 gpm)
Maximum Operating Speed 3,555 rpm 3,952 rpm
Maximum Output Torque 60.7 kg•m 67 kg•m
(439 ft lb) (484.5 ft lb)
Travel Motor Solar 170W-V Solar 200W-V / 210W-V

Type Bent Axis Piston Bent Axis Piston
Displacement 50 - 172 cc/rev. 66 - 172 cc/rev.
(3.05 - 10.5 in3/rev.) (4.03 - 10.5 in3/rev.)
Crossover Relief Valve 350 kg/cm2 350 kg/cm2
Setting (4,980 psi) (4,980 psi)
Max. Supply Flow Rate 226 lpm 226 lpm
(59.7 gpm) (59.7 gpm)
Maximum Operating Speed 4,000 rpm 3,343 rpm
Maximum Output Torque 77 kg•m 77 kg•m
(557 ft lb) (557 ft lb)

Page 7
TRAVEL MOTOR GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND
REASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
Hexagon Wrench 4, 6, 8, 10, 17 mm

Spanner Wrench 17, 19, 26, 41, 51 mm
Long Nose Pliers Nominal Size About 125
Plastic hammer Medium Size
Snap Ring Pliers 50 - 130 for outer side
Driver Medium Size
Grease Spray Type Preferred
Cleaning Oil Spray Type Preferred
Rubber Disk Assembly (See Figure 4) To Prevent Cylinder Block from Releasing
Liquid Packing Three Bond 1215
Figure 4
PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

1. Replace rotary group with a new one as a complete assembly.
2. Make sure not to damage any adjustment screws, replace any damaged adjustment screw with new.
Variance of set value may result with damaged equipment.
3. Drain oil from inside motor, clean outside and place clean paper, cloth, or gum mat on workbench
before disassembly and assembly. Be careful not to damage any components, and prevent foreign
objects from entering motor assembly.
4. Clean, lubricate (with operating oil), and inspect disassembled parts. Replace damaged parts before
reassembling.

Page 8
DISASSEMBLY OF TRAVEL MOTOR
APPEARANCE OF MOTOR
1. Appearance of motor side view.
Figure 5
2. Appearance of motor rear view.
Figure 6
REMOVAL OF COUNTERBALANCE VALVE
1. Remove counterbalance valve by
removing six, hex socket bolts.
NOTE: The counterbalance valve is
covered in this section after the
travel motor.
Figure 7

Page 9
2. Do not adjust pressure adjusting screw at
this time.
Figure 8
REMOVAL OF OUTER PIPING
1. Remove control valve to stroke limiter
lubrication tube.
Figure 9
Figure 10
2. Remove control valve to regulator body
lubrication tube.
Figure 11

Page 10
Figure 12
3. Remove 90° elbows from stroke limiter
and regulator body.
Figure 13
4. Remove nipples from control valve.
Figure 14
REMOVAL OF STROKE LIMITER
1. Remove stroke limiter assembly.
Figure 15

Page 11
REMOVAL OF OIL SEAL
1. Remove C-type stop ring using snap ring
pliers.
Figure 16
2. Remove seal case using 2 screw drivers
inserted into groove.
Figure 17
3. Remove case and pull out O-ring.
Figure 18
REMOVAL OF CONTROL UNIT
1. Remove eight hex socket bolts.
Figure 19

Page 12
2. Turn motor so that shaft faces down and lift
main control body up and out.
NOTE: During this step, control plate
may come out with main control
body, be careful not to drop the
control plate and damage
cylinder block.
Figure 20
3. Remove control plate.
Figure 21
4. Install rubber disc assembly, which is used
to fix cylinder block to prevent separation.
Figure 22
5. Remove parallel pins with pliers.
Figure 23

Page 13
6. Remove plug.
Figure 24
7. Remove bushing.
Figure 25
REMOVAL OF CONTROL VALVE
1. Loosen four hex socket bolts and remove
cover.
Figure 26
2. Remove O-ring.
Figure 27

Page 14
3. Remove spool and barrel, being careful
not to cut piston ring on outside of barrel.
NOTE: If spool and barrel are not
pulled out smoothly, hold the
groove part of spool slightly,
using a long nose pliers.
Remove spool being careful not
to scratch it.
Figure 28
4. Remove spring seats.
Figure 29
5. Remove large spring.
Figure 30
6. Remove small spring.
Figure 31

Page 15
7. Remove spring seats.
Figure 32
8. Arrange removed components, as shown.
Figure 33
DISASSEMBLE CONTROL VALVE
1. Remove hex head plug.
Figure 34
2. Remove spring.
Figure 35

Page 16
3. Remove spool.
Figure 36
4. Remove socket head plug.
Figure 37
5. Arrange removed components as shown.
Figure 38
DISASSEMBLE STROKE LIMITER
1. Remove bushing.
Figure 39

Page 17
2. Remove piston.
Figure 40
REASSEMBLE STROKE LIMITER
1. Install piston.
Figure 41
2. Install bushing.
Figure 42
REASSEMBLE CONTROL VALVE
1. Install socket head plug.
Figure 43

Page 18
2. Install spool.
Figure 44
3. Install spring.
Figure 45
4. Install hex head plug.
Figure 46
INSTALLATION OF CONTROL VALVE
1. Attach spring seats.
Figure 47

Page 19
2. Attach small spring.
Figure 48
3. Attach large spring.
Figure 49
4. Attach spring seat.
Figure 50
5. Insert spool in middle of barrel.
Figure 51

Page 20
6. Install barrel into main control body, while
pushing piston ring into groove with flat
screw driver, being careful not to cut piston
ring.
Figure 52
7. Install O-ring.
Figure 53
8. Secure control valve with four socket bolts.
NOTE: Torque to 12.5 kg•m (90 ft lb).
Figure 54

Page 21
REASSEMBLY OF TRAVEL MOTOR
ASSEMBLY OF CONTROL UNIT
1. Install plug.
Figure 55
2. Install bushing.
NOTE: Torque from 22 - 27 kg•m
(159 - 195 ft lb).
Figure 56
3. Remove rubber disc assembly, which is
used to fix cylinder block.
Figure 57

Page 22
4. Check that control plate is installed in the
correct position. Grease control plate and
install in main control body.
Figure 58
5. Grease top surface of control plate and
recheck that it is installed in the right
position.
Figure 59
6. Install main control body and parallel pins.
Clean surface that contacts housing.
Figure 60
7. Clean surface that contacts main control
body and apply Three Bond 1215 (allow
sufficient time to dry).
Figure 61

Page 23
8. Attach main control body to housing, being
careful not to drop control plate.
NOTE: Though Figure 62 does not
show parallel pin on connecting
side, assemble after engaging
it.
Figure 62
9. Tighten eight, hex socket bolts.
Figure 63
INSTALLATION OF OIL SEAL
1. Install O-ring.
Figure 64
2. Install seal case.
Figure 65

Page 24
3. Secure seal case with snap ring.
Figure 66
4. Secure C-type snap ring by tapping with
plastic hammer and driver.
Figure 67
INSTALLATION OF STROKE LIMITER
1. Install stroke limiter assembly.
Figure 68
INSTALLATION OF OUTER PIPING
1. Install connectors to control valve.
Figure 69

Page 25
2. Install 90° elbows to stroke limiter and
control unit body.
Figure 70
3. Install lubrication lines from control valve
to control unit and stroke limiter.
Figure 71
INSTALLATION OF COUNTERBALANCE
VALVE
1. Install counterbalance valve with six hex
socket bolts.
NOTE: Torque to 7 kg•m (51 ft lb).
Figure 72

Page 26
S0708306K
1MAIN PUMP
(TONGMYUNG)
CAUTION!
MAIN PUMP (TONGMYUNG)S0708306K


October 2002
Main Pump (Tongmyung) S0708306K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Swash Plate Type K5V Series Axial Piston Pump.......................................... 4

Type Designation..................................................................................... 4
Specifications .......................................................................................... 5
Construction and Function ...................................................................... 6
Construction..................................................................................... 6
Function ........................................................................................... 6
Cautions for Operation ............................................................................ 8
Installation........................................................................................ 8
Cautions for Piping........................................................................... 8
Cautions for Filters........................................................................... 9
Working Oil and Temperature Range............................................. 10
Operational Cautions ..................................................................... 10
Oil filling and Air Venting ................................................................ 11
Cautions During Starting Operation............................................... 11
Troubleshooting..................................................................................... 11
General Cautions ........................................................................... 11
Check Pump Proper for Abnormalities........................................... 11
Overload of Prime Mover ............................................................... 12
Extreme Decrease of Pump Delivery Flow and
Non-increase of Delivery Pressure ................................................ 12
Abnormal Noises and Abnormal Vibrations ................................... 13
Construction of Tandem Type Duplex Pump ......................................... 14
Tools...................................................................................................... 16
Axial Piston Pump Disassembling......................................................... 18
Axial Piston Pump Reassembling ......................................................... 22
Axial Pump Maintenance Criteria.......................................................... 25
Worn Part Replacement Criteria.................................................... 25
Correction Criteria for Cylinder, Valve Plate and
Swash Plate (Shoe Plate) .............................................................. 25
Tightening Torques................................................................................ 26
S0708306K Main Pump (Tongmyung)

Page 2
Regulator for T5V Series of Tongmyung
Swash Plate Type Axial Piston Pump........................................................... 27
Type Description.................................................................................... 27
Construction of Regulator ..................................................................... 28
Functional Explanations ........................................................................ 30
Regulator Function Diagram .......................................................... 30
Negative Flow Control.................................................................... 31
Total Horsepower Control .............................................................. 32
Power shift Control......................................................................... 34
Adjustment of Maximum and Minimum Flows....................................... 35
Adjustment of Maximum Flow........................................................ 35
Adjustment of Minimum Flow......................................................... 35
Summary of Regulator Adjustment Values .................................... 36
Fault Finding and Remedies on Regulator............................................ 36
Prime Mover is Overloaded ........................................................... 36
Maximum Flow Is Not Available ..................................................... 37
Preparation for Disassembly ................................................................. 38
Tools...................................................................................................... 38
Regulator Disassembly ......................................................................... 39
Regulator Reassembly.......................................................................... 42
Tightening Torque ................................................................................. 45

Page 3
SWASH PLATE TYPE K5V SERIES AXIAL PISTON
PUMP
TYPE DESIGNATION
Regulator type:
For more details, see
the instruction manual
for the regulator.
Shaft rotation viewed from

shaft end.
R : Clockwise
L : Counterclockwise
Design series number
None : Standard
P : PTO exists
S, G : Single pump
DP : Double-pump
Size
T5V series
BCS0110L
Figure 1

Page 4
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Size 80
Displacement 73.7 cm3/ rev
Rated 31.4 MPa (320 kg/cm2)
Pressure
Max. 34.3 MPa (350 kg/cm2)
Max. *1 3,000 min-1
Speed
Max. for self-priming *2 2,400 min-1
Single
Weight
Double 91 kg
Type Mineral working oil
Oil temp range -20 ~ +95 °C
Working Oil
Oil viscosity range 10~1,000 cSt (mm2/s)
Recommended filter 10µm
*1 These are the maximum speeds for the closed-circuit specifications. For the closed-circuit
specifications, consult us in advance.
*2 These are the speeds when the suction pressure is 0 kg/cm2 (0 psi).

Page 5
CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION
Construction
This pump assembly consists of two pumps connected by a splined coupling (114). The two pumps can be
driven simultaneously as the rotation of the prime mover (engine) is transferred by the drive shaft (F) (111)
on the front side. The suction and discharge ports are integrated at the connecting part of the two pumps,
i.e. in valve block (312): The suction port serves both the front pump and the rear pump.
Function
The pumps may be classified roughly into the rotary group performing a rotary motion and working as the
major part of the whole pump function: the swash plate group that varies the delivery rates: and the valve
cover group that changes over oil suction and discharge.
1. Rotary Group
The rotary group consists of a drive shaft (F) (111), cylinder block (141), piston shoes (151, 152), set
plate (153), spherical bushing (156) and cylinder spring (157). The drive shaft is supported by
bearings (123 and 124) at both ends. The shoe is caulked to the piston to form a spherical coupling.
It has a pocket to relieve thrust force generated by loading pressure and to take hydraulic balance so
that it slides lightly over the shoe plate (211). The sub-group is composed of a piston and shoe
pressed against the shoe plate by the action of the cylinder spring via a retainer and a spherical bush.
Similarly, the cylinder block is pressed against valve plate (313) by the action of the cylinder spring.
2. Swash Plate Group
The swash plate group consists of swash
plate (212), shoe plate (211), swash plate
support (251), tilting bushing (214), tilting
pin (531) and servo piston (532).
The swash plate is a cylindrical part
formed on the opposite side of the sliding
surface of the shoe and is supported by
the swash support.
The servo piston moves to the right and
left as hydraulic oil, controlled by the
regulator is transmitted to each hydraulic Figure 2 Swash Plate Group
chamber located on both ends of the servo
piston. The swash plate slides over the
swash plate support via the spherical part
of the tilting pin to change the tilting angle
(α).

Page 6
3. Valve Block Group
The valve block group consists of valve
block (312), valve plate (313) and valve
plate pin (885). The valve plate has two
melon-shaped ports, that are mated to the
valve block. These feed and collect oil to
and from the cylinder block.
The oil changed over by the valve plate is
connected to an external pipeline by way
of valve block.
When the drive shaft is driven by the prime
mover (engine), it rotates the cylinder Figure 3 Valve Block Group
block via a splined coupling. If the swash
plate is tilted as in Figure 2, the pistons
arranged in the cylinder block make a
reciprocating motion with respect to the
cylinder block, while they revolve with the
cylinder block. If you pay attention to a
single piston, it performs a motion away
from the valve plate (oil sucking process)
within 180 degrees, and makes a motion
towards the valve plate (or oil discharging
process) in the rest of 180 degrees. When
the swash plate has no tilt angle (zero
degrees), the piston does not stroke and
neither discharges or draws oil.

Page 7
CAUTIONS FOR OPERATION
Installation
Applied
Item Caution
Type
Installed direction. Install pump with drive shaft horizontal in general. All types.
External load to Apply neither radial nor thrust load externally to the pump shaft All types.
shaft end. end.
Removal of rust Since the shaft end splined section has been coated with rust All types.
preventing paint. preventing paint, remove it with cleaning liquid before using the
pump. Apply lubricant, such as molybdenum disulfide, before
installing this section on the coupling. When cleaning liquid is
used, be careful not to get liquid on oil seal sections.
Coupling and Couple the pump drive shaft with the prime mover shaft with a All types.
centering of pump. flexible coupling in general. For centering between the coupling
and drive shaft, keep the alignment within ±0.03mm.
Tightening of pump For the tightening torques of the pump mounting bolts, refer to All types.
mounting bolts. the values of their respective sizes shown in “Tightening
Torques” on page 26.
Cautions for Piping
Applied
Item Caution
Type
Rotating direction For the variable pump, these indications depend on the All types.
and delivery command method of the regulator. For each application of the
direction. pump, refer to the indications shown in the outside dimension
drawing.
Sanitation of Carry out acid pickling and flushing of the suction / delivery All types.
pipings. pipings and tank. Especially, thoroughly clean the suction piping.
Installation of When installing pipings, prevent the suction and delivery ports of All types.
suction / delivery the pump from being forcedly-stressed.
pipings.
Also avoid sudden bending as much as possible. Refer to
attached list 1 tightening torque list in tightening the mounting
bolts.
Drain piping. Raise the drain pipe of the pump higher than the pump and All types.
route it to the tank, as shown in the following figures.
For a tandem type double-pump, install the drain pipe on the Tandem type
front pump first as far as possible. It is desirable to provide a pumps.
filter in the drain line.
Drain pressure. Allowable internal case pressure for this pump is normally less All types.
than 1 kg/cm2.(14 psi).

Page 8
Cautions for Filters
The most important factor to prevent the pumps and other components from being damaged and to
lengthen their life-spans is control of contamination in the hydraulic oil. A filter of 10µm must be provided in
the circuit.
Applied
Item Caution
Type
Tilting-to-one side In the circuit, do not forget to provide a filter of 10µm in the All types of
circuit. actuator return pipe. The following figure shows examples. In tilting-to-one
addition, provide a filter of 80 to150 mesh at the suction side. side pumps.
Tilting-to-both side It is ideal to provide a filter of 10ß¦ in the booster line as shown All types of
circuit. in (a) of the following figure, but there are also a number of tilting-to-both
experiences to provide filters of 10µm in the flushing circuits. side pumps.
Always, provide a filer of 80-150 mesh in the suction side of the
booster pump.
Contamination. The relationship between contamination and the pump's life- All types.
span is very understandable and the latter depends largely on
the kind and nature of dust. Mixing of dust in the oil will cause
any pump to have a shorter life-span. On the premise that dust
is not mixed the recommended range is class 9 or better in NAS
class, and 2 to 4 mmg/100cc or less in millipoise pollution grade.

Page 9
Working Oil and Temperature Range
Applied
Item Caution
Type
Kind of oil. Use general-use working oil that has an antifoaming additive, All types.
antioxidant, anticorrosive, sec. and has a high viscosity index.
Optimum viscosity For the open circuit, the recommended working viscosity range All types.
and temperature of is 10 to 200 cSt. For the close circuit or when used as a motor,
working oil. the range of 10 to 1000 cSt can be available, but the range of 10
to 200 cSt is desirable, considering the optimum efficiency.
The temperature range is limited approximately to -20°C to 80°C
by oil seals, O-rings, etc. It is desirable to use oil at a
temperature lower than 65°C as low as possible, considering
deterioration of working oil, seals and so on.
Working oil other When any working oil of phosphate, water-glycol, fatty acid ester All types.
than mineral oil. is to be used, do not fail to consult us in advance.
Operational Cautions
Applied
Item Caution
Type
Out of service for a It is not recommendable that the pump/motor is stored for a long All types.
long period. period (one year or more) without being operated. During such
period, rotate it even for a short time. When it is stored
independently, it is effective even to turn its shaft manually. If the
storage period is longer it is necessary to overhaul it.
Change of rotating The rotating direction is as indicated by the arrow plate. If it must All types.
direction. be changed during its life-span, consult us.

Page 10
Oil filling and Air Venting
Applied
Item Caution
Type
Oil filling. Fill the pump casing with oil. Inside the pump there are high- All types.
speed sliding and moving parts, such as bearings, pistons/
shoes, retainer, etc. If not filled with oil, these parts may suffer
some serious problems, such as seizures damage.
Air venting. When air is left in the circuit or pump, it may cause a malfunction All types.
or damage. Completely vent air.
Cautions During Starting Operation

1. Check pipings for proper installation.
2. Check that the rotating and suction / delivery directions are correct.
3. Before starting the prime mover, make sure the pump free of any load.
4. After starting, continue the idling for a while to vent air completely from the circuit.
5. Check the pump and pipings for oil leaks and abnormal vibrations.
6. When the pump is attached to a gear box, check that the box is full of oil to its proper level.
TROUBLESHOOTING
General Cautions
This section describes the countermeasures to be taken if any abnormality is detected during the operation
of the Tongmyung swash plate type axial piston pump.
The general cautions are as follows:
1. Consider the condition before starting work.
2. Judge the nature of the abnormality, before starting work. Especially, judge if it is a problem in the
circuit or caused by the regulator or attached valves and determine that something is truly wrong with
the pump or not.
3. Read and understand the maintenance manual before disassembling and follow the right
disassembling procedures.
4. Even when any section is to be disassembled, not to make dust or let it enter into the pump.
5. Since the parts are finely finished, handle them carefully to prevent damage.
Check Pump Proper for Abnormalities

The pump is often fitted with a regulator, accessory valves and associated pump. It is very difficult to find
the cause of the failure. Investigate the following items, and the abnormal point will be revealed.
1. Check filter and drain oil
Check filter elements for excessive amount of abnormal impurities. Since the shoes and cylinder may
give off worn metal particles, a small quantity may be detected there. However if a excessive amount
of metal particles is found in the filters, it should be considered that shoes may be damaged.
Similarly, check drain oil in the pump casing.
2. Existence of abnormal noises or vibrations

Page 11
Check the pump for abnormal noises and vibrations. If any, investigate if it is a noise in the regular
frequency, such as hunting of the regulator or the relief valve of an accessory valve, or not. If it is an
abnormal vibration or noise, it may be the result of cavitation or damage inside the pump.
3. Case where two pumps are used
For the circuit with two single pumps or motors or for the duplex pump, exchange the piping of one
pump with that of the other one. With the results of this exchange, it will be determined if the trouble is
the problem of the circuit downstream the pump or not.
4. Pressure Measurement at Various Points
If the failure is a problem in control, do not unnecessarily overhaul the pump, but measure pressures
at various areas to investigate the abnormal position.
Overload of Prime Mover
Cause Countermeasure Remark

Is not the speed-pressure higher than their Set them as specified.
specified values?
Is not the torque setting of the regulator Reinvestigate the regulator. See the instruction
higher? manual of the regulator.
Seizure or damage of a part inside the Replace the damaged part. Check the filter and drain
pump. oil for abnormal worn
metal particles.
Wrong installation of the regulator piping. Correct the regulator piping.
Extreme Decrease of Pump Delivery Flow and

Non-increase of Delivery Pressure

Failure of the regulator. Repair the regulator. See the instruction
manual of the regulator.
Seizure or damage of a part inside the Replace the damaged part. Check the filters and drain
pump. oil.
Failure of the associated pump. Replace the damaged part. Remove the associated
pump and check the shaft
coupling.
Failure of the accessory valve. Check the accessory See the instruction
valves. (Especially check manual of the accessory
the poppets, seats and valves.
springs).
Wrong installation of the regulator piping. Correct the regulator piping.

Page 12
Abnormal Noises and Abnormal Vibrations

Cavitation Prevention from cavitation. Check Low boost press.
working oil for emulsion.
Failure of the associated pump.
Air leakage at the suction pipe.
Increased suction resistance.
Damage in the caulking suction Replace the piston shoe, plate,
of the shoe. etc.
Cranking of the cylinder. Replace the cylinder.
Wrong installation of the pump. Correct installation.
Hunting of the regulator. Repair the regulator. See the instruction manual for
the regulator.
Hunting of the relief valve of the Repair the accessory valve. See the instruction manual for
accessory valve. the accessory valve.

Page 13
CONSTRUCTION OF TANDEM TYPE DUPLEX PUMP
04 Tightening Torque
Flange Socket (4-M6x1.0)
6.9 Nm (70kgf.cm)
401
141
152 314
Valve plate for
c.clockwise rotation
151
885
719 466
725 114
124
954
313
312 Valve plate for
clockwise rotation
901 983
981
792 534
157
702 728
467
724
548
531
Apply adhesive 156
(No 1305N of
Threebond make)
214
532 153
732 211
789 212
535 806 953 886 717 406 261 111 774 824 127 710 123 251 490
Apply (Sealup L101)
to the all sealsurface
circumferential ARS0190L
Figure 4

Page 14
Reference Reference
Number Number
04 Gear Pump 466 VP Plug
111 Drive Shaft (F) 468 VP Plug
113 Drive Shaft (R) 531 Tilting Pin
114 Spline Coupling 532 Servo Piston
116 1st Gear (for DTP) 534 Stopper (L)
123 Roller Bearing 535 Stopper (S)
124 Needle Bearing 548 Feed Back Pin
127 Bearing Spacer 702 O-ring
141 Cylinder Block 710 O-ring
151 Piston 717 O-ring
152 Shoe 719 O-ring
153 Set Plate 724 O-ring
156 Spherical Bush 725 O-ring
211 Shoe Plate 732 O-ring
212 Swash Plate 774 Oil Seal
214 Tilting Bush 789 Backup Ring
251 Swash Plate Support 792 Backup Ring
261 Seal Cover (F) 808 Nut
262 Seal Cover (R) 824 Snap Ring
271 Pump Casing 885 Valve Plate Pin
312 Valve Block 886 Spring Pin
313 Valve Plate (R) 901 Eye Bolt
314 Valve Plate (L) 953 Set Screw
325 Valve Casing 954 Set Screw
401 Hexagon Socket Head Bolt 981 Name Plate
406 Hexagon Socket Head Bolt 983 Pin

Page 15
TOOLS
The tools necessary to disassemble / reassemble the T3V pump are shown in the following list. The size of
the bolts and plugs depend on the type of pump.
Necessary Tool
Tool Name And Size (Marked with O) Part Name
Pump Type
Hexagon
Hexagon
PT plug (PT PO plug socket
Name B T5V80 T5V112 socket
thread) (PF thread) head
head bolt
setscrew
Allen wrench 2 M4
2.5 M5
3 M6
4 O O M5 BP-1/16 M8
5 O O M6 BP-1/8 M10
6 O O M8 BP-1/4 PO-1/4 M12,M14
8 O O M10 BP-3/8 PO-3/8 M16,M18
10 M12 BP-1/2 PO-1/2 M20
12 M14
14 O M16, M18 BP-3/4 PO-3/4
17 O M20, M22 BP-1 PO-1,
11/4, 11/2
19 M24, M27
21
22 M30 PO-2

Page 16
Necessary Tool
Tool Name and Size Part Name
(Marked with O)
Hexagon VP plug (PF
Name B T5V80 T5V112 Hexagon nut
headed bolt thread)
Double ring spanner, 19 O O M12 M12 VP-1/4
Socket wrench, Double 22 O VP-3/8
(single) open end
24 O O M16 M16
spanner.
27 O M18 M18 VP-1/2
30 O M20 M20
36 O VP-3/4
41 VP-1
50 VP-11/4
55 VP-11/2
Adjustable angle O O Medium size, 1 set
wrench
Screwdriver O O Minus type screwdriver, medium size, 2 sets
Hammer O O Plastic hammer, 1 set
Pliers O O For snap ring, TSR-160
Steel bar O O Steel bar of key material approximately
10x8x200
Torque wrench O O Capable of tightening with the specified
torques

Page 17
AXIAL PISTON PUMP DISASSEMBLING
For disassembling the pump, read this section thoroughly and disassemble it in the following sequence.
The figures in parentheses after part names show the items in “Construction of Tandem Type Duplex
Pump” on page 14.
This maintenance manual describes the disassembling procedures for both a single pump and tandem
type double-pump. Disassemble the pump, referring to the contents for its appropriate type.
In addition, for the double-pump, do not exchange parts of one pump with the same ones of the other
pump.
1. Select place suitable to disassembling.
IMPORTANT
Select clean place.
Spread a rubber mat or cloth on top of the overhaul workbench to prevent parts from being
damaged.
2. Remove dust, rust, etc., from pump surfaces with cleaning oil.
3. Remove drain port plug (468) and let oil out of pump casing.
IMPORTANT
For tandem type pump, remove plugs from both front and rear pumps.
4. Remove hexagon socket head bolts (412

and 413) and regulator.
IMPORTANT
Refer to “Regulator for T5V Series of
Tongmyung Swash Plate Type Axial
Piston Pump” on page 27 for
disassembling instructions.
5. Remove hexagon socket head bolts (401),

swash plate support (251), pump casing
(271) and valve block (312). Figure 5
IMPORTANT
If a gear pump is attached to rear
face of pump, remove it before
proceeding.

Page 18
6. Place pump horizontally on workbench
with its regulator mounting surface facing
down. Separate pump casing (271) from
valve block (312).
IMPORTANT
Before laying this surface down,
spread rubber mat on workbench to
prevent this surface from being
damaged.
Figure 6
7. Pull cylinder (141) straight out of pump
casing (271) over drive shaft (111). Pull
out pistons (151), set plate (153), spherical
bushing (156) and cylinder springs (157)
simutaneously.
IMPORTANT
Do not damage sliding surfaces of
cylinder, spherical bushing, shoes,
swash plate, etc.
Figure 7
8. Remove hexagon socket head bolts (406)
and seal cover (F) (261).
IMPORTANT
Install bolt into pulling-out tapped
hole of seal cover (F), and cover can
be removed easily.
Since oil seal is attached on seal
cover (F), do not damage it when
removing cover.
Figure 8
9. Remove hexagon socket head bolts (408)
and seal cover (R) (262).
NOTE: In case there is a gear pump,
remove it first.

Page 19
10. Lightly tap flange section of swash plate
support (251) on the pump casing side.
This will separate swash plate support
from pump casing.
Figure 9
11. Remove shoe plate (211) and swash plate
(212) from pump casing (271).
Figure 10
12. Lightly tap ends of drive shafts (111 and
113) with plastic hammer, to remove shafts
from swash plate supports.
Figure 11
13. Remove valve plates (314 and 314) from
valve block (312).
IMPORTANT
These may be removed in work 6.
Figure 12

Page 20
14. If necessary, remove stopper (L) (534), stopper (S) (535), servo piston (532) and tilting pin (531) from
pump casing (271). Remove needle bearing (124) and splined coupling (114) from valve block (312).
IMPORTANT
When removing tilting pin, use a protector to prevent pin head from being damaged.
Since Loctite is applied to mounting areas of tilting pin and servo piston, do not damage
servo piston.
Do not remove needle bearing if possible, except when it is considered to be worn out.
Do not loosen hexagon nuts of valve block and swash plate support. If loosened, flow
setting will be changed.

Page 21
AXIAL PISTON PUMP REASSEMBLING
For reassembling reverse the disassembling procedures, paying attention to the following items.
• Do not fail to repair the parts damaged during disassembling, and prepare replacement parts in
advance.
• Clean each part with cleaning oil and dry it with compressed air.
• Do not fail to apply clean working oil to sliding sections, bearings, etc. before assembling them.
• Always replace seal parts, such as O-rings, oil seals, etc.
• For mounting bolts, plug, etc., use a torque wrench, and tighten them with torques shown in
“Tightening Torques” on page 26.
• For the double-pump, do not exchange parts of the front pump with those of the rear pump.
1. Install swash plate support (251) on pump
casing (271), by lightly tapping it with a
hammer.
IMPORTANT
After servo piston, tilting pin,
stopper (L) and stopper (S) are
removed, Install them on pump
casing in advance for reassembling.
When tightening servo piston and
tilting pin, use a protector to prevent
tilting pin head and feedback pin Figure 13
from being damaged. In addition,
apply Loctite (medium strength) to
their threaded sections.
2. Place pump casing with its regulator

mounting surface down, Install tilting
bushing of swash plate on tilting pin (531).
Install swash plate (212) on swash plate
support (251) correctly.
IMPORTANT
Confirm with fingers of both hands
that swash plate can be moved
smoothly.
Apply grease to sliding sections of
swash plate and swash plate Figure 14
support, so drive shaft can be easily
installed.

Page 22
3. On swash plate support (251), install drive
shaft (111) with bearing (123), bearing
spacer (127) and snap ring (824).
IMPORTANT
Do not tap drive shaft with hammer.
Assemble them into support, lightly
tapping outer race of bearing with
plastic hammer. Fully seat them,
using steel bar.
Figure 15
4. Assemble seal cover (F) (261) to pump
casing (271) and attach it with hexagon
socket head bolts (406).
IMPORTANT
Lightly apply grease to oil seal in
seal cover (F).
Assemble oil seal, taking full care
not to damage it.
For tandem type pump, install rear
cover (263) and seal cover (262) in Figure 16
the same manner.
5. Assemble piston cylinder subassembly

(cylinder (141), piston subassembly (151,
152), set plate (153), spherical bushing
(156) and cylinder spring (157).
6. Fit spline phases of retainer and cylinder.
7. Then insert piston cylinder subassembly
into pump casing.
Figure 17

Page 23
8. Install valve plate (313) on valve block
(312), entering pin in to pin hole.
IMPORTANT
Do not mistake suction / delivery
directions of valve plate.
Figure 18
9. Install valve block (312) on pump casing
(271) and tighten hexagon socket head
bolts (401).
IMPORTANT
Assemble the rear pump side first, to
make the procedure easier.
Do not mistake direction of valve
block.
Clockwise rotation (viewed from
input shaft side) - Install block with Figure 19
regulator up and with delivery flange
left, viewed from front side.
Counterclockwise rotation (viewed
from input shaft side) - Install block
with regulator up and with delivery
flange right, viewed from front side.
10. Place feedback pin of tilting pin into

feedback lever of regulator. Install
regulator and tighten hexagon socket head
bolts (412 and 413).
IMPORTANT
Do not mistake regulator of front
pump for that of rear pump.
11. Install drain port plug (468).
Figure 20

Page 24
AXIAL PUMP MAINTENANCE CRITERIA
Worn Part Replacement Criteria

When a part exceeds any of the following criteria, replace or readjust it. However, when a part is seriously
damaged in appearance, replace it.
Pump Type
T3V63/T5V80 T5V140
Part Name and Inspection Item Standard Dimension / Countermeasures
Recommended Replacement
Value
Clearance between
piston and cylinder
bore (D-d) Replace piston or
0.028 / 0.056 0.043 / 0.070
cylinder
Play between piston

and shoe-caulking
section (δ) Replace assembly
0-0.1 / 0.3 0-0.1 / 0.3
of piston and shoe
Replace assembly
3.9 / 3.7 4.9 / 4.7
of piston and shoe
Free height of cylinder

spring (L)
Replace cylinder
31.3 / 30.5 41.1 / 40.3
spring
Combined height of
set plate and spherical
bushing (H-h) Replace retainer or
19.0 / 18.3 23.0 / 22.0
set plate
Correction Criteria for Cylinder, Valve Plate and

Swash Plate (Shoe Plate)
Surface roughness for valve plate Surface roughness necessary to be corrected 3-Z
(sliding face), swash plate (shoe Standard surface roughness (Corrected 0.4-Z or lower
plate area) and cylinder (sliding value) (Lapping)
face)

Page 25
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening
Part Name Size Tool Name
Torque
Hexagon socket M5 70 kg•cm B=4
head bolt M6 120 kg•cm B=5
(Material: SCM
M8 300 kg•cm B=6
435)
M 10 580 kg•cm B=8
M 12 1,000 kg•cm B=10
M 14 1,600 kg•cm B=12
M 16 2,400 kg•cm B=14
Allen wrench
M 18 3,400 kg•cm B=14
M 20 4,400 kg•cm B=17
PT plug PT 1/16 70 kg•cm B=4
(Material:S45C) PT 1/8 105 kg•cm B=5
Wind a seal tape PT 1/4 175 kg•cm B=6 Do.
11/2 to 2 turns PT 3/8 350 kg•cm B=8
round the plug. PT 1/2 500 kg•cm B=10
PF 1/4 300 kg•cm B=6
PF 1/2 1,000 kg•cm B=10
PF 3/4 1,500 kg•cm B=14
PF 1 1,900 kg•cm B=17 Do.
PF 11/4 2,700 kg•cm B=17
PF 11/2 2,800 kg•cm B=17

Page 26
REGULATOR FOR T5V SERIES OF TONGMYUNG
SWASH PLATE TYPE AXIAL PISTON PUMP
TYPE DESCRIPTION
Regulator Design Series Number
Kind of flow control

O : Without flow control
N : Negative flow control
P : Positive flow control
C : Negative flow control
(With flow cut function)
D: Positive flow control
(With flow cut function)
Kind of horsepower control

1 : Constant horsepower control
2 : Total cumulative horsepower control
4 : High pressure cut-off control
5 : Constant horsepower control
+ High Pressure cut-off control
+ High pressure cut-off control
+ Power shift (decreased horsepower) control
H : Total cumulative horsepower control
+ Power shift (increased horsepower) control
Size
6 : T5V63
G : T5V112
H : T5V140 / 180
Regulator for T5V series pump
BCS0100L
Figure 21

Page 27
CONSTRUCTION OF REGULATOR
Figure 22

Page 28
Reference Reference
Number Number
412 Hexagon Socket Head Screw 652 Spool
413 Hexagon Socket Head Screw 653 Spring Seat
436 Hexagon Socket Head Screw 654 Return Spring
438 Hexagon Socket Head Screw 655 Set Spring
496 Plug 656 Block Cover
531 Tilting Pin 708 O-ring
548 Feedback Pin 722 O-ring
601 Casing 724 O-ring
611 Feedback Lever 725 O-ring
612 Lever (1) 728 O-ring
613 Lever (2) 730 O-ring
614 Fulcrum Plug 732 O-ring
615 Adjusting Plug 733 O-ring
621 Compensating Piston 734 O-ring
622 Piston Case 735 O-ring
623 Compensating Rod 755 O-ring
624 Spring Seat (C) 756 O-ring
625 Outer Spring 763 O-ring
626 Inner Spring 801 Nut
627 Adjusting Ring (C) 814 Snap Ring
628 Adjusting Screw (C) 836 Snap Ring
629 Cover (C) 858 Locking Ring
630 Lock Nut 874 Pin
631 PF Sleeve 875 Pin
641 Pilot Cover 887 Pin
643 Pilot Piston 897 Pin
644 Spring Seat 898 Pin
645 Adjusting Ring (Q) 924 Adjusting Screw
646 Pilot Spring 925 Adjusting Screw (QI)
651 Sleeve

Page 29
FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATIONS
The regulator for Tongmyung in-line axial piston pump T5V Series consists of the following control
functions.
1. Negative flow control
2. Total cumulative horsepower control
3. Power shift control
Regulator Function Diagram
Figure 23

Page 30
Negative Flow Control
By changing the pilot pressure Pi, the pump
tilting angle (delivery flow) is regulated
arbitrarily, as shown in Figure 24.
This regulator is a negative flow control in which
the delivery flow Q decreases as the pilot
pressure Pi rises. With this mechanism, when
the pilot pressure corresponding to the flow
required for the work is commanded, the pump
discharges the required flow only, so it does not
consume unnecessary power.
1. Functional Explanation
A. Flow reducing Function Figure 24
As the pilot pressure Pi rises, the
pilot piston (643) moves to the right to a position where the force of the pilot spring (646)
balances with the hydraulic force.
The groove (A) in the pilot piston is attached with pin (875) that is fixed to lever 2 (613).
Therefore, when the pilot piston moves, lever 2 rotates around the fulcrum of point B (fixed by
the fulcrum plug (614) and pin (875). Since the large-hole section (C, Figure 23) of lever 2
contains a protruding pin (897) fixed to the feedback lever (611), the pin (897) moves to the right
as lever 2 rotates. Since the opposing-flat section (D) of the feedback lever is attached with the
pin (548) fixed by the tilting pin (531) that swings the swash plate, the feedback lever rotates
around the fulcrum of point D, as the pin (897) moves. Since the feedback lever is connected
with the spool (652) via the pin (874), the spool moves to the right.
The movement of the spool causes the delivery pressure P1 to connect to port C liter through
the spool and to be admitted to the large-diameter section of the servo position. The delivery
pressure P1 that is constantly admitted to the small-diameter section of the servo piston moves
the servo piston to the right due to the area difference, resulting in decrease of the tilting angle.
When the servo piston moves to the right, point D also moves to the right. The spool is fitted
with the return spring (654) and is tensioned to the left at all times, and so the pin (897) is
pressed against the large-hole section (C) of lever2. Therefore, as point D moves, the feedback
lever rotates around the fulcrum of point C, and the spool is shifted to the left. This causes the
opening between the sleeve (651) and spool (652) to close slowly, and the servo piston comes
to a complete stop when it closes completely.
B. Flow Increasing Function
As the pilot pressure Pi decreases, the pilot piston (643) moves to the left by the action of the
pilot spring (646) and causes lever 2 (613) to rotate around the fulcrum of point B. Since the pin
(897) is pressed against the large-hole section (C) of lever 2 by the action of the return spring
(654) via the spool (652), pin (874), and feedback lever (611), the feedback lever rotates around
the fulcrum of point D as lever 2 rotates, and shifts the spool to the left. Port C liter opens a way
to the tank port as the spool moves. This deprives the large-diameter section of the servo piston
of pressure, and shifts the servo piston to the left by the discharge pressure P1 in the small-
diameter section, resulting in an increase in the flow rate.
As the servo piston moves, point D also moves to the left, the feedback lever rotates around the
fulcrum of point C, and the spool moves to the right till the opening between the spool and
sleeve is closed.

Page 31
2. Adjustment of flow control characteristic
The flow control characteristic can be
adjusted with the adjusting screw.
Adjust it by loosening the hexagon nut
(801) and by tightening (or loosening) the
hexagonal socket head screw (924).
Tightening the screw shifts the control
chart to the right as shown in the Figure
25.
NOTE: Adjusting values are shown in
the attached Table. See
Figure 25
“Summary of Regulator
Adjustment Values” on
page -36.
Total Horsepower Control

The regulator decreases the pump tilting angle
(delivery flow) automatically to limit the input
torque within a certain value with a rise in the
delivery pressure P1 of the self pump and the
delivery pressure P2 of the companion pump.
(The input horsepower is constant when the
speed is constant.)
Since the regulator is of the simultaneous total
horsepower type that operates by the sum of
load pressures of the two pumps in the tandem
double-pump system, the prime mover is
automatically prevented from being overloaded,
irrespective of the load condition of the two Figure 26
pumps, when horsepower control is under way.
1. Functional explanation
Since this regulator is of the simultaneous total horsepower type, it controls the tilting angles
(displacement volumes) of the two pumps to the same values as represented by the following
equation:
• T in = P1 x q/2π + P2 x q/2π = (P1 + P2) x q/2π
The horsepower control function is the same as the flow control function and is summarized in the
following. (For detailed behaviors of respective parts, refer to the section of flow control).
A. Overload Preventive Function
When the self pump delivery pressure P1 or the companion pump delivery pressure P2 rises, it
acts on the stepped part of the compensating piston (621). It presses the compensating rod
(623) to the right till the force of the outer spring (625) and inner spring (626) balances with the
hydraulic force. The movement of the compensating rod is transmitted to Lever 1 via pin (875).
Lever 1 rotates around the pin (875) (E) attached to the casing (601).
Since the large-hole section (F) of Lever 1 contains a protruding pin (897) attached to the
feedback lever (611), the feedback lever rotates around the fulcrum of Point D as Lever 1
rotates, and then the spool (652) is shifted to the right. As the spool moves, the delivery
pressure P1 is admitted to the large-diameter section of the servo piston via Port C liter, causes

Page 32
the servo piston move to the right, reduces the pump delivery flow rate, and prevents the prime
mover from being overloaded.
The movement of the servo piston is transmitted to the feedback lever via point D. Then the
feedback lever rotates around the fulcrum of point F and the spool is shifted to the left. The
spool moves till the opening between the spool and sleeve (651) is closed.
B. Flow Reset Function
As the self pump delivery pressure P1 or the companion pump delivery pressure P2 decreases,
the compensating rod (623) is pushed back by the action of the springs (625 and 626) to rotate
Lever 1 around point E. Rotating of Lever 1 causes the feedback lever to rotate around the
fulcrum of point D and then the spool to move to the left. As a result, Port C liter opens a way to
the tank port. This causes the servo piston to move to the left and the pump's delivery rate to
increase.
The movement of the servo piston is transmitted to the spool by the action of the feedback
mechanism to move it till the opening between the spool and sleeve is closed.
2. Low tilting angle (low flow) command preferential function
As mentioned above, flow control and horsepower control tilting angle commands are transmitted to
the feedback lever and spool via the large-hole sections (C and F) of levers 1 and 2. However, since
sections C and F have the pins (∅4) protruding from the large hole (∅8), only the lever lessening the
tilting angle contacts the pin (897); the hole (∅8) in the lever of a larger tilting angle command is freed
without contacting the pin (897). Such a mechanical selection method permits preference of the lower
tilting angle command of the flow control and horsepower control.
3. Adjustment of Input horsepower
Since the regulator is of total cumulative horsepower type, adjust the adjusting screws of both the
front and rear pumps, when changing the horsepower set values. The pressure change values by
adjustment are based on two pumps pressurized at the same time, and the values will be doubled
when only one pump is loaded.
A. Adjustment of outer springs
Adjust it by loosening the hexagon
nut (630) and by tightening (or
loosening) the adjusting screw C
(628). Tightening the screw shifts the
control chart to the right and
increases the input horsepower as
shown in the Figure 27. Since turning
the adjusting screw C by N turns
changes the setting of the inner
spring, return the adjusting screw CI
(925) by NxA turns at first.
Figure 27

Page 33
B. Adjustment of inner spring
Adjust it by loosening the hexagon
nut (801) and by tightening (or
loosening) the adjusting screw Cl
(925). Tightening the screw
increases the flow and then the input
horsepower as shown in the Figure
28.
Figure 28
Power shift Control

The set horsepower valve is shifted by varying the command current level of the proportional pressure
reducing valve attached to the pump.
Only one proportional pressure reducing valve is provided. However, the secondary pressure Pf (power
shift pressure) is admitted to the horsepower control section of each pump regulator through the pump's
internal path to shift it to the same set horsepower level. This function permits arbitrary setting of the Pump
output power, thereby providing the optimum power level according to the operating condition.
1. Functional explanation
The power shift pressure Pf controls the
set horsepower of the pump to a desired
level, as shown in the Figure 29.
As the power shift pressure Pf rises, the
compensating rod (623) moves to the right
via the pin (898) and compensating piston
(621). This decreases the pump tilting
angle and then the set horsepower in the
same way as explained in the overload
preventive function of the horsepower
control. On the contrary, the set
Figure 29
horsepower rises as the power shift
pressure Pf falls.

Page 34
ADJUSTMENT OF MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM FLOWS
The regulator can adjust the maximum and minimum flows with the adjusting screws.
NOTE: Their respective adjustment values are shown in the attached Table. See “Summary of
Regulator Adjustment Values” on page -36.
Adjustment of Maximum Flow

Adjust it by loosening the hexagon nut (809) and
by tightening (or loosening) the set screw (954).
The maximum flow only is adjusted without
changing other control characteristics.
Figure 30
Adjustment of Minimum Flow
Adjust it by loosening the hexagon nut (909) and
by tightening (or loosening) the hexagonal
socket head set screw (953). Similarly to the
adjustment of the maximum flow, other
characteristics are not chanced. However,
remember that, if tightened too much, the
required horsepower during the maximum
delivery pressure (or during relieving) may
increase.
Figure 31

Page 35
Summary of Regulator Adjustment Values
Item Specification
Speed 2200 min-1
Adjustment of Maximum Flow Tightening amount of adjusting screw +1/4 Turn
(954)
Flow change amount -3.5 L/min
Adjustment of Minimum Flow Tightening amount of adjusting screw +1/4 Turn
(953)
Flow change amount +3.5 L/min
Adjustment of Input Adjustment of Tightening amount of adjusting screw +1/4 Turn
Horsepower outer spring (C) (628)
Compensating control starting +19 kg/cm2
pressure change amount
Input torque change amount +3 kg•m
A 1.9
Adjustment of Tightening amount of adjusting screw +1/4 Turn
inner spring (QI) (925)
Compensating control starting +27 kg/cm2
pressure change amount
Input torque change amount +2.5 kg•m
Adjustment of flow control Tightening amount of adjusting screw +1/4 Turn
characteristic (924)
Flow control starting pressure change +1.5 kg/cm2
amount
Flow change amount +8 L/min
FAULT FINDING AND REMEDIES ON REGULATOR

In case a functional fault probably resulting from the regulator occurs, disassemble and inspect it, referring
to the maintenance manual.
Prime Mover is Overloaded

Determine which is faulty, the front pump or rear pump, by loading each pump independently. When both
pumps are found faulty, investigate the following (1) and (2). Begin investigation with (3), when only one
pump is found faulty. (1) and (2) are only for cases of the variable horsepower control.
1. Check that the power shift command current I is normal.
2. The power shift pressure is low:
• Check the amplifier dither.
• Replace the proportional pressure reducing valve.
3. The compensating piston (621) and compensating rod (623) are stuck with each other:
• Disassemble and clean the regulator.
4. The Pin (898) is stuck:

Page 36
Maximum Flow Is Not Available
1. Check that the pilot pressure Pi is normal.
2. The pilot piston (643) is stuck:
3. The spool (652) is stuck:
4. The piston QMC stopper (647) and piston (648) are stuck with each other:
5. The spool (COV) (637) is stuck:
NOTE: Replace faulty parts that are deeply scored.
(1) and (2) are only for cases of the pilot control.
(4) is only for cases of the 2-stage max. flow control.
(5) is only for cases of the cut-off control.

Page 37
PREPARATION FOR DISASSEMBLY
1. Since the regulator consists of small precision-finished parts, disassembly and assembly are rather
complicated. For this reason, replacement of a regulator assembly is recommended, unless there is a
special reason, but in case disassembly is necessary for an unavoidable reason, read through this
manual to the end before starting disassembly.
2. The numbers in parentheses after part names represent those in the “Construction of Regulator” on
page 28.
TOOLS
Name Description
4,5,6
Allen wrench (Dimension B mm)
Socket wrench, double-ended (single-ended) wrench

Adjustable wrench Small size (max. 36 mm)
Screw driver
Plastic hammer
Torque wrench
Pliers 2 sets for stop ring
Steel bar 4 mm or less in dia., L=100mm
Pincers
Bolt M4, L = about 50 mm

Page 38
REGULATOR DISASSEMBLY
1. Choose a place for disassembly.
CAUTION!
1. Choose a clean place.
2. Spread rubber mat or cloth, on top of work-bench to prevent parts from being damaged.
2. Remove dust, rust, etc. from surfaces of regulator with cleaning oil.
3. Remove hexagon socket head screws
(412,413) and regulator main body from
pump main body.
IMPORTANT
Do not lose O-ring.
Figure 32
(488) and cover (C) (629).
IMPORTANT
Cover (C) is attached with adjusting
screw (C), (QI) (628, 925), adjusting
ring (C) (627), lock nut (630), hexagon
nut (801) and adjusting screw (924).
Do not loosen these screws and
nuts. If they are loosened, adjusted
pressure-flow setting will vary.
Figure 33
5. After removing cover (C) (629)
subassembly, remove outer spring (625),
inner spring (626) and spring seat (C)
(624) from compensating section. Then
draw out adjusting ring (Q) (645), pilot
spring (646) and spring seat (644) from
pilot section.
IMPORTANT
Adjusting ring (Q) (645) can easily be
drawn out with M4 bolt.
Figure 34

Page 39
(436, 438) and pilot cover (641). After
removing pilot cover, remove set spring
(655) from pilot section.
Figure 35
7. Remove snap ring (814), spring seat
(653), return spring (654) and sleeve
(651).
IMPORTANT
Sleeve (651) is attached with snap
ring (836).
When removing snap ring (814),
return spring (654) may pop out. Take
care not to lose it.
Figure 36
8. Remove locking ring (858), fulcrum plug
(614) and adjusting plug (615).
Figure 37
IMPORTANT
Fulcrum plug (614) and adjusting
plug (615) can be easily taken out
with M6 bolt.
Figure 38

Page 40
9. Remove lever (2) (613). Do not draw out
pin (875).
IMPORTANT
Work will be promoted by using
pincers.
Figure 39
10. Draw out pin (874) and remove feedback
lever (611).
Figure 40
IMPORTANT
Push out pin (874) (4 mm in dia.)
from above with slender steel bar so
that it may not interfere with lever (1)
(612).
11. Remove lever (1) (612). Do not draw out

pin (875).
12. Draw out pilot piston (643) and spool
(652).
Figure 41
13. Draw out piston case (622), compensating
piston (621) and compensating rod (623).
NOTE: Since component parts are
small, do not lose them.

Page 41
REGULATOR REASSEMBLY
For assembly, reverse disassembly procedures, but pay attention to the following.
• Always repair parts that were scored at disassembly. Get replacement parts ready beforehand.
• Mixing of foreign material will cause malfunction. Therefore, wash parts well with cleaning oil, let
them dry with jet air and handle them in clean place.
• Always tighten bolts, plugs, etc. to their specified torques.
• Do not fail to coat sliding surfaces with clean hydraulic oil before assembly.
• Replace seals such as O-rings with new ones as a rule.
1. Put compensating rod (623) into compensating hole of casing (601).
2. Press fit pin in lever (1) (612) into groove of compensating rod and fit lever (1) to pin press fitted in
casing.
3. Install spool (652) and sleeve (651) into
hole in spool of casing.
IMPORTANT
Confirm that spool and sleeve slide
smoothly in casing without binding.
Pay attention to orientation of spool.
Figure 42
4. Install feedback lever (611), matching its
pin hole with pin hole in spool. Then insert
pin (874).
IMPORTANT
Insert pin in feedback lever a little to
ease operation.
Do not mistake direction of feedback
lever.
5. Insert pilot piston (643) into pilot hole of

Figure 43
casing.
IMPORTANT
Confirm that pilot piston slides
smoothly without binding.

Page 42
6. Press fit pin in lever (2) (613) into groove of
pilot piston. Then attach lever (2).
Figure 44
7. Install fulcrum plug (614) so that pin
pressed into fulcrum plug (614) can be
inserted into pin hole of lever (2). Then
attach locking ring (858).
8. Insert adjusting plug (615) and install
locking ring.
IMPORTANT
Do not mistake inserting holes for
fulcrum plug and adjusting plug.
Now move feedback lever to confirm Figure 45
that it has no large play and is free
from binding.
9. Install return spring (654) and spring seat

(653) into spool hole. Install snap ring
(814).
Figure 46

Page 43
10. Install set spring (655) in spool hole. Slide
compensating piston (621) and piston
case (622) into compensating hole.
11. Install pilot cover (641) and secure it in
place with hexagonal socket head screws
(436 and 438).
Figure 47
12. Insert spring seat (644), pilot spring (646)
and adjusting ring (Q) (645) into pilot hole.
13. Install spring seat (624), inner spring (626)
and outer spring (625) into compensating
hole.
IMPORTANT
When fitting spring seat, do not
mistake direction of spring seat.
Figure 48
14. Install cover (C) (629) with adjusting
screws (628 and 925), adjusting ring (C)
(627), lock nut (630), hexagon nut (801)
and adjusting screw (924). Secure them
with hexagonal socket head screws (438).
Figure 49

Page 44
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Part Name Size Tightening Torque Tool Name

Hexagon socket head M5 70 kg•cm (5 ft lb) B=4
bolt (Material: SCM M6 120 kg•cm (9 ft lb) 5
435)
M8 300 kg•cm (22 ft lb) 6
M 10 580 kg•cm (42 ft lb) 7
M 12 1,000 kg•cm (72 ft lb) 8
M 14 1,600 kg•cm (116 ft lb) 10
M 16 2,400 kg•cm (174 ft lb) 12
Allen wrench
M 18 3,400 kg•cm (246 ft lb) 14
M 20 4,400 kg•cm (318 ft lb) 17
PT filling plug PT 1/16 70 kg•cm (5 ft lb) 4 Do.
(Material: S45C) PT 1/8 105 kg•cm (8 ft lb) 5
Wind a seal tape 1 1/2 PT 1/4 175 kg•cm (13 ft lb) 6
to 2 turns round the PT 3/8 350 kg•cm (25 ft lb) 8
plug. PT 1/2 500 kg•cm (36 ft lb) 10
PO plug PF 1/4 300 kg•cm (22 ft lb) 6 Do.
(Material: S35C) PF 1/2 1,000 kg•cm (72 ft lb) 10
PF 3/4 1,500 kg•cm (109 ft lb) 14
PF 1 1,900 kg•cm (137 ft lb) 17
PF 1 1/4 2,700 kg•cm (195 ft lb) 17
PF 1 1/2 2,800 kg•cm (203 ft lb) 17

Page 45
Page 46
S0708435K
1GEAR PUMP
(STEERING PUMP &
BRAKE PUMP)
CAUTION!
GEAR PUMP (STEERING PUMP & BRAKE PUMP)S0708435K


October 2002
Gear Pump (Steering Pump & Brake Pump) S0708435K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Parts List ................................................................................................. 3
Specifications .......................................................................................... 4
S0708435K Gear Pump (Steering Pump & Brake Pump)

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
THEORY OF OPERATION
The steering pump is a gear pump that directs hydraulic oil to the steering valve.
The brake pump is a gear pump that directs hydraulic oil to the brake supply valve.
PARTS LIST
BCS0730L
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Body 11 Washer
2 Body 12 Seal
3 Front Cover 13 Seal
4 Rear Cover 14 Shaft Seal
5 Thrust Plate 15 Ring
6 Drive Shaft 16 Backup Ring
7 Drive Gear 17 Flange
8 Driven Gear 18 Splined Connecting Shaft
9 Driven Gear 19 Dowel Pin
10 Screw
Gear Pump (Steering Pump & Brake Pump) S0708435K

Page 3
SPECIFICATIONS
Steering Pump
Type: Gear Pump
Max Flow Rate: 32 lpm (8.5 gal/m) @ 2,200 rpm
Brake Pump
Type: Gear Pump
Max Flow Rate: 14.5 lpm (3.8 gal/m) @ 2,200 rpm
S0708435K Gear Pump (Steering Pump & Brake Pump)

Page 4
S0709220
R1
1BRAKE SUPPLY VALVE
CAUTION!
BRAKE SUPPLY VALVES0709220


January 2001
Brake Supply Valve S0709220

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Parts List ........................................................................................................ 4

Specifications ................................................................................................. 5
S0709220 Brake Supply Valve

Page 2
Page 3
PARTS LIST
Figure 1

Page 4
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Block 4 Check Valve
2 Relief Valve 5 Unloading Valve
3 Logic Valve
SPECIFICATIONS
Brake Supply Valve
Loading-Unloading Pressure 103 - 125 kg/cm2 (1,465 - 1,778 psi)
Low Pressure Warning
65 kg/cm2 (925 psi)
Pressure Relief Valve
160 kg/cm2 (2,276 psi)

Page 5
Page 6
S0709300
R1
COUNTERBALANCE
VALVE
1
CAUTION!
COUNTERBALANCE VALVES0709300

November 2000
Counterbalance Valve S0709300

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
While Operating to Run Forward............................................................. 3
While Operating to Stop .......................................................................... 3
While Operating to Back ......................................................................... 3
Adjustment of Relief Valve ...................................................................... 4
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 5
Counterbalance Valve .................................................................................... 6
Recommended Tools .............................................................................. 6
Disassembly............................................................................................ 6
Order of Disassembly and Torque Values ............................................... 7
Reassembly ............................................................................................ 8
S0709300 Counterbalance Valve

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The counterbalance valve is used in such a way
that it is engaged in a running travel motor for
the bell-type shovel. It functions as a double
counterbalance valve which prevents the
vehicle body from overrunning while running
forward or backward.
WHILE OPERATING TO RUN FORWARD

It refers to running operation which is done by
means of applying pressure to motor either for
accelerated climbing or for running fast on a flat
road like expressway. B port working on left side
of spool will overpower spring, thanks to
pressure, and spool will open completely,
causing oil to flow through individual ports (B →
B’ →Motor →Α’ →Α) .
The vehicle body will run at higher speed than
speed of pump discharge due to inertial force
while it is in deceleration or in descent. This will
result in decreasing pressure of B port, causing
power pressing the right side of spool to decline, Figure 1
and the spool to move toward center. This will
generate counter pressure at A’ port, which will
control port pressure up to moderate level. At this time, spool will be controlled at level where pump
discharged will be counterbalanced with counter pressure, and pressure of B port will be the pressure of
spring which will be counterbalanced with the controlled level of spool.
WHILE OPERATING TO STOP

Stop operation involves decrease of pressure of B port, causing spool to move to neutral position where
only the neutral orifice will work. This set orifice will cause A’ port to generate counter pressure, allowing
the vehicle body with hydraulic brake to stop.
The relief valve regulates pressure of brake which came into operation when the pressure produced, at
stop operation, from neutral orifice (counter pressure) reached the set pressure of valve. It also offers such
operation as cutoff of surge pressure which is produced, at a rapid operation like an additional
manipulation, from A port. If there occurs no cavitation at A’ (B’) port, oil is supplied from T port. Therefore,
there are anti-cavitation check for both sides.
WHILE OPERATING TO BACK

Backward operation also has counterbalancing function like forward operation. The spool moves to left
when motor works either for accelerated climbing or for uniform running on a flat road, while oil flows
through individual ports (B → B’ to Motor to A’ to A). While in deceleration and in decent, counter
pressure is produced at B’ port, contrary to the case of forwarding, causing vehicle body to be under
control. While in operation to stop, spool moves toward neutral position and counter pressure produced
from neutral orifice (at B’ port) produces braking pressure of the relief valve, which forces the vehicle body
to stop.

Page 3
ADJUSTMENT OF RELIEF VALVE
Turning the adjusting screw right with a hexagon wrench will allow pressure to increase, and turning it left
will allow pressure to decrease. One turn of an adjusting nut will make change of about 80.0 kg/cm2 (1,140
psi).
Figure 2

Page 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Possible Cause Remedy
Motor does not operate. Malfunction of spool (It is on status Torque mounting bolts.
of deployment).
Check for damage, replace or
repair.
Malfunction of check valve of anti- Torque mounting bolts.
cavitation (Impracticable to adjust).
repair.
Acceleration time needs to Malfunction of spool (It is on status Torque mounting bolts.
be taken for operation of of deployment).
motor.
repair.
Orifice damper for counterbalance Disassemble and clean.
is clogged.
Relief valve pressure improperly Readjust pressure.
adjusted.
repair
Deceleration of motor not Damper for counterbalance is Disassemble and clean.
performed smoothly. clogged.
Neutral part of spool defective
Relief valve pressure improperly Readjust pressure.
adjusted.
repair.
Abnormal sound with rapid Damper for counterbalance is Torque mounting bolts.
deceleration at high speed. clogged.
Disassemble and clean.
Neutral part of spool defective.

Page 5
COUNTERBALANCE VALVE
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
Hexagonal Wrench 2.5, 4, 8, 14, 30 mm

Torque Wrench 0 - 15 kg•m (0 - 115 ft lb)
Loctite 242, 572
Seal Tape 150
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Disassemble counterbalance valve in reverse order of assembly.

Page 6
ORDER OF DISASSEMBLY AND TORQUE VALUES
Figure 3

Page 7
REASSEMBLY
1. Install plug (3) and spring (20) to spool (2).
Figure 4
2. Apply Loctite #242 to plug (4) and install
into spool (2). Torque to 75.5 ±7 kg•m
(548 ±50 ft lb). Install plugs on other side
following steps 1 and 2.
Figure 5
3. Install small ball bearings (12) into body
(1).
Figure 6
4. Install guide (7) into body (1).
Figure 7

Page 8
5. Install plug (33) into body and torque to
71.9 ±2.3 kg•m (520 ±16 ft lb).
Figure 8
6. Apply Loctite #241 to orifice (17) and
install into body (1) (on both sides). Torque
to 70.16 ±0.2 kg•m (507 ±2 ft lb).
Figure 9
7. Apply Loctite #572 and wind seal tape
around plug (16), and install to body (1)
(both sides). Torque to 70.25 ±0.3 kg•m
(508 ±2 ft lb).
Figure 10
8. Install small ball bearings (11) and spring
(21) into body (1) (both sides).
Figure 11

Page 9
9. Install plug (5) into body (1) (both sides)
and torque to 70.75 ±0.95 kg•m
(511 ±7 ft lb).
Figure 12
10. Install O-ring (25) into body (1) (both
sides).
NOTE: It is recommended to replace
O-ring with new.
Figure 13
11. Install spool (2) into body (1).
Figure 14
12. Install spring (19) into body (1), then install
cover (6).
Figure 15

Page 10
13. Tighten cover (6) (both sides) and torque
to 75.6 ±7 kg•m (548 ±50 ft lb).
Figure 16
14. Install plunger (8) and spring (18), in that
order, into body (1).
Figure 17
(505 ±10 ft lb).
Figure 18
(520 ±16 ft lb).
Figure 19

Page 11
17. Install relief valve (9) into body (1) (both
sides).
Figure 20
18. Torque to 78 ±9 kg•m (564 ±65 ft lb).
Figure 21
19. Install O-rings (22) and (23) into body (1).
NOTE: It is recommended to replace
O-rings with new.
Figure 22
NOTE: Reassembled counterbalance
valve is shown.
Figure 23

Page 12
S0709416K
1MAIN CONTROL VALVE
CAUTION!
MAIN CONTROL VALVES0709416K


October 2002
Main Control Valve S0709416K

Page 1
S0709416K Main Control Valve
Page 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Control Valve Operation ................................................................................. 5

Arm Priority Circuitry............................................................................... 6
Bucket (Junction) Circuitry ...................................................................... 8
Straight Traveling Circuit ....................................................................... 10
Plunger Replacement............................................................................ 14
Main Relief Valve .................................................................................. 15
Overload Relief Valve............................................................................ 16
Arm Load Holding Valve........................................................................ 18
Boom Load Holding Valve ..................................................................... 21
Arm Regeneration ................................................................................. 23
Foot Relief Valve ................................................................................... 25
Parts List ............................................................................................... 26
Specifications ........................................................................................ 35
Control Valve Drawing and Hydraulic Circuit ................................................ 36
Disassembly and Reassembly ..................................................................... 41
General Disassembly ............................................................................ 41
General Reassembly............................................................................. 41
Main Plunger Element........................................................................... 42
Main Relief Valve .................................................................................. 45
Main Relief Valve Adjustment ............................................................... 46
Overload Relief Valve............................................................................ 48
Overload Relief Valve (BM UP) ............................................................. 50
Arm Load Holding Valve........................................................................ 52
Boom Load Holding Valve ..................................................................... 55
Arm Regeneration Valve ....................................................................... 57
Foot Relief Valve ................................................................................... 58
Center Bypass Valve (CB Valve)........................................................... 59
Arm Parallel Switch Valve ..................................................................... 60
Boom Unity Check Valve....................................................................... 62
Straight Travel Selector Valve................................................................ 63

Page 3
Check Valve - Locations........................................................................ 64
Check Valve .......................................................................................... 65

Page 4
CONTROL VALVE OPERATION
Following pages show the various functions of the control valve with a brief description of each function.
They are;
1. “Arm Priority Circuitry” on Page 6
2. “Bucket (Junction) Circuitry” on Page 8
3. “Straight Traveling Circuit” on Page 10
4. “Plunger Replacement” on Page 14
5. “Main Relief Valve” on Page 15
6. “Overload Relief Valve” on Page 16
7. “Arm Load Holding Valve” on Page 18
8. “Boom Load Holding Valve” on Page 21
9. “Arm Regeneration” on Page 23
10. “Foot Relief Valve” on Page 25

Page 5
ARM PRIORITY CIRCUITRY
BCS0320L
Figure 1

Page 6
1. When the AP valve is energized, the spool is shifted to the upper position allowing pilot pressure to
pass through it. Thus hydraulic oil from the P2 pump passes through the AP valve to the low (load)
arm.
2. Hydraulic oil from the P2 pump does not trigger the AP valve. Oil, therefore, passes through a parallel
passage supplying oil to the high (load) arm and to the boom.
3. When the AP valve is de-energized, the spool is shifted to the lower position, preventing pilot
pressure from passing through it. Thus hydraulic oil from pump P2 triggers the AP valve’s spool AP
and stops the flow of oil, so that oil is supplied only to the boom.

Page 7
BUCKET (JUNCTION) CIRCUITRY
BCS0330L
Figure 2

Page 8
1. Hydraulic oil from the P2 pump flows to the bucket. Oil from the P1 pump and the bucket plunger that
controls pilot pressure act simultaneously on the center bypass valve triggering spool CB to send oil
from the center bypass through an external line (CK1 => CK2) which opens the bucket pressure
check valve and joins with oil flow from the P2 pump.

Page 9
STRAIGHT TRAVELING CIRCUIT
HAAA3350
Figure 3

Page 10
Straight traveling circuit maintains straight travel of the excavator even if other actuators (SW, AM, BKT,
BM) are operated in combination.
1. Straight Travel Circuit (Travel Only)
A. As the plunger is switched on the pilot signal line (Py) is blocked off, but since the signal line
(Px) is connected to the tank by the orifice, the hydraulic fluid flow from P1 pump is supplied to
the left travel motor without activating the travel straight (TS) switching valve.
B. The hydraulic fluid flow from P2 pump is supplied to the right travel motor in the same manner.
As a result P1 pump powers the left travel motor and P2 pump powers the right travel motor and
straight travel is achieved.

Page 11
2. Travel Straight Circuit (Combined operation with swing)
HAAA3360
Figure 4

Page 12
A. First, when the swing plunger is switched on, the pilot signal (Px) within the control valve is
blocked, as a result of that signal pressure travel straight (TS) switch valve will be switched on
and a provide a supply path to the left and right travel plunger. When the swing plunger is
completely switched on the oil flow from the P1 pump is first supplied to the swing and the oil
flow from the P2 pump is supplied to the right travel and left travel motors for straight travel and
as a result combined operation is made possible.
B. In addition, orifice C which follows a parallel path to the travel side of the valve, allows flow of
surplus hydraulic fluid to the left, right travel motors and acts to minimize sudden changes in
travel speeds.

Page 13
PLUNGER REPLACEMENT
IDENTIFICATION
PAINT
HAAA3370
Figure 5
1. The plunger is selected and toothed into the housing; as a result it is a non serviceable part and can
not be replaced on site.
A. If for some reason it needs to be replaced, please contact us with the following information;
Make and/or model number
Identification color for selected teething as inscribed on the name plate.
B. Identification color is painted on the right or left edge of the machine body. It is visible from the
bottom if the paint has been removed.

Page 14
MAIN RELIEF VALVE
1. Normal (low pressure) Operation (Pz pilot
signal: OFF)
• Piston (d) is pushed to the right most
position by spring (c).
A. The pressurized oil from the main
pump flows into chamber 3 through
the orifice (2) of the main poppet A.
Main poppet A is completely closed
because d1>d2.
Figure 6
B. When the oil pressure reaches the
set pressure of spring C, the pilot
poppet B is opened and oil flows to
the tank through paths (4) and (5).
Figure 7
C. During oil flow when pressure drops
in front and back of orifice (2) and
pressure of chamber (1) d2 >
pressure of chamber (1) d1, main
poppet A will open and pressurized
oil flows to the tank.
Figure 8
2. High pressure operation (Pz pilot signal:
ON)
When piston D is in the left most position
and the pressure has increased above the
set pressure of spring C, high pressure
condition is achieved.
Figure 9

Page 15
OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE
1. Operation of overload relief valve
A. The pressurized oil from the cylinder
port enter into chamber (2) through
orifice (3) of piston A. Main poppet B
is closed shut due to d1>d2.
Figure 10
B. When the pressurized oil overcomes
the set pressure of spring C, pilot
poppet D opens and oil flows to the
tank through the transverse hole (4)
and path (5).
Figure 11
C. Oil flows and pressure decreases in
orifice (3) of piston A moving the
piston to the left and seating at the
edge of pilot poppet D. The oil in
chamber (1) flows to the tank through
orifice (6) of piston A, traverse hole
(4) and passage (5).
Figure 12

Page 16
D. Pressure decreases behind orifice of
piston A and if chamber (1) pressure
xd2 > chamber (2) pressure xd1 the
main poppet B opens and the
pressurized oil of cylinder port flows
to the tank to protect the actuator.
Figure 13
2. Operation of make-up valve
A. The main poppet area d1 > d2 and
since the cylinder port pressure is
usually higher than the tank pressure
the main poppet will be in place.
When the cylinder port pressure
drops (approaches pressure load),
and cylinder port pressure < tank
pressure the main poppet B opens
due to the area difference d1 & d2
and the tank pressure and oil flows
from the tank to the cylinder port
preventing cavitation. Figure 14

Page 17
ARM LOAD HOLDING VALVE
1. When plunger is in neutral position (Pal pilot signal: OFF)
Figure 15
A. Piston A and poppet B are in position blocking path5 & 6. As oil flows from chamber (1) to
chamber (2), the pressure at orifice (4) is Pe. Since d1 > d2, check valve D is seated completely
blocking out chambers (2) & (3).

Page 18
2. When plunger is operated
Figure 16
A. Arm Dump Operation (p1 > pc) (PaL pilot signal: OFF)
Oil passes through path (4) and chamber (1) pressure becomes pressure Pc. At squeeze (2),
poppet (D) opens and high pressure oil is supplied to rod side of the cylinder.

Page 19
Figure 17
B. Arm Crowd (Pc > Pv) (PaL pilot signal: ON)

Pilot signal pressure enters signal port, piston A moves to the left and poppet B is opened and
paths (5) & (6) are connected. The oil from chamber (1) flows back to the tank through path (7).
The oil pressure in chamber (1) is released allowing the poppet to open, and oil from the rod
side flows to the tank.

Page 20
BOOM LOAD HOLDING VALVE
1. When plunger is neutral (Pi pilot signal:
OFF)
A. Spool A is in the position as shown
closing off the path between
chamber (1) and drain (Dr1).
Chamber (1) and chamber (2) are
connected through squeeze (4) and
the pressure is Pc. d1 > d2, poppet B
is seated closing off chamber (2) &
chamber (3).
Figure 18
2. When plunger is operated
A. Boom-up (Pv > Pc) (Pi pilot signal:
OFF)
As the plunger is operated, high
pressure oil flows in through
chamber (3). Chamber (1) and
chamber (2) pressures are Pc and
equalized through squeeze (4). Pv
overcomes set spring pressure and
high pressure oil is supplied to the
cylinder head.
Figure 19

Page 21
B. Boom-down (Pc > Pv) (Pi pilot signal:
ON).
Pilot signal pressure enters signal
port, spool A moves to the right and
chamber (1) and drain (1) are
connected allowing chamber (1) to
drain. Since pressure Pc is greater
than Pv, oil flows through the opened
poppet B and flows back to the tank.
Figure 20

Page 22
ARM REGENERATION
BCS0130L
Figure 21
1. If the arm plunger is operated to crowd side, the plunger moves to the right side and the center
bypass route is interrupted. The oil from pump opens check valve C1 from parallel route and flows to
the cylinder head through the high pressure supply route.
BCS0140L
Figure 22
2. Oil returning from the rod side flows back to the tank through regeneration valve route (2) to route (1).

Page 23
BCS0150L
Figure 23
3. When the pilot signal is supplied to port XRE, piston A is moved to the left. Rod side pressure is raised
up due to spool B closing route (1) and check valve C2 in plunger is opened, as a result oil is
regenerated to the head side through route (3) to route (4) of the plunger.

Page 24
FOOT RELIEF VALVE
1. Oil from center bypass route flows to tank
route through orifice A of poppet. The
pressure (fp) generated by flow passed
through orifice is fed back to the pump to
control the discharge volume by the pump.
Figure 24
2. A large amount of fluid flow from delayed
pump response causes pressure (fp) to
overcome set spring pressure and the
poppet is opened, allowing oil to flow to the
tank operating as a relief valve.
Figure 25

Page 25
PARTS LIST
Main Plunger Element
Figure 26
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Plunger 9 Retainer
2 Bolt With Hole 10 Cap
3 Cover 11 Backup, Ring
4 Plunger Cap 12 O-ring
5 Spring 13 Spring
6 Spring Guide 14 Check Valve
7 O-ring 15 Cap (Option Only)
8 O-ring 16 O-ring (Option Only)

Page 26
Main Relief Valve
BCS0120L
Figure 27
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Adjust Screw 10 Relief Poppet
2 Nut; Lock 11 Piston
3 Sleeve 12 Spring
4 Lock Nut 13 Spring
5 Cap 14 Spring
6 Pilot Seat 15 O-ring
7 Sleeve 16 O-ring
8 Poppet 17 O-ring
9 Orifice 18 Backup Ring

Page 27
Overload Relief Valve
Figure 28
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Hexagonal Nut 11 Main Seat
2 Cap 12 Piston
3 O-ring 13 Main Poppet
4 Sleeve 14 O-ring
5 Spring 15 Pilot Seat
6 Spring 16 Pilot Poppet
7 O-ring 17 Spring
8 Backup Ring 18 O-ring
9 Backup Ring 19 Spring Seat
10 O-ring 20 Adjusting Screw

Page 28
Boom Load Holding Valve
Figure 29
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Cover 9 Spring
2 Spool 10 Manifold
3 Spring 11 Poppet
4 Cap 12 Bolt With Hole
5 O-ring 13 O-ring
6 Backup Spring 14 O-ring
7 O-ring 15 Relief Valve
8 Spring Seat
Boom Unity Check
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 O-ring
3 Spring
4 Check
Figure 30

Page 29
Arm Regeneration Valve
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Piston
3 O-ring
4 Spool
5 Spring
6 Sleeve
Figure 31
Foot Relief Valve
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Seam
3 Seam
4 Cap
5 Spring
6 Poppet
7 O-ring
Figure 32
Arm Priority Valve (AP Valve)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Spacer
2 Screw
3 Cap
4 O-ring
5 Spring
6 Check
7 Spool Ap HAAA3420
8 O-ring Figure 33
9 Backup Ring
10 Retainer
11 Bolt With Hole

Page 30
Check Valve (Tr, Am-2)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Backup Ring
3 O-ring
4 Spring
5 Nylon Chip
6 Check
Figure 34
Check Valve (Opt, Bkt, Bm-1, Bm-2, Am-1)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Backup Ring
3 O-ring
4 Spring
5 Nylon Chip
6 Check
Figure 35
Check Valve
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Backup Ring
3 O-ring
4 Nylon Chip
5 Spring
6 Check
Figure 36

Page 31
Cap
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Backup Ring
3 O-ring
4 Nylon Chip
Figure 38
37
Check Valve (Tl)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 O-ring
3 Cap
4 Spacer
5 Backup Ring
6 O-ring
7 Spring
8 Check
9 Nylon Chip
Figure 39
Check Valve (Sw)
1
Reference
Description 2
Number
1 Cap
3
2 Backup Ring
3 O-ring
5
4 Spring
5 Nylon Clip 6
6 Check 4
HAAA3430
Figure 40

Page 32
Straight Travel Selector Valve
Reference
Description
Number
1 Check
2 O-ring
3 Spring
4 Spool TS
Figure 41
Center Bypass Valve (Cb Valve)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Check
2 O-ring
3 Spring
4 Spool
Figure 42

Page 33
Arm Load Holding Valve
Reference
Description
Number
1 Poppet
2 Spring
3 O-ring
4 O-ring
5 O-ring
6 Cap
7 Piston
8 Backup Ring
9 O-ring
10 Sleeve Figure 43
11 Backup Ring
12 O-ring
13 Poppet
14 Spring
15 O-ring
16 Cap
17 Bolt With Hole
18 Cover
19 Cap
20 Spring
21 Check
Figure 44

Page 34
SPECIFICATIONS
Control Valve Relief Valves (Main): 330 kg/cm2 (4686 psi) – normal, travel
350 kg/cm2 (4970 psi) – pressure up.

Left Side Spools: Travel: left 22 mm (0.866") diameter
(and spool diameter) Swing: 22 mm (0.866") diameter
Boom-2: 22 mm (0.866") diameter
Arm-1: 22 mm (0.866") diameter
Right Side Spools: Travel: right 22 mm (0.866") diameter
(and spool diameter) Option: open 22 mm (0.866") diameter
Boom-1: 22 mm (0.866") diameter
Bucket: 22 mm (0.866") diameter
Arm-2: 22 mm (0.866") diameter
Overload Relief Pressure: 360 kg/cm2 (5112 psi)

Page 35
CONTROL VALVE DRAWING AND HYDRAULIC
CIRCUIT
Figure 45 CONTROL VALVE TOP VIEW Figure 46 CONTROL VALVE BOTTOM VIEW
BCS0180L BCS0190L
Figure 47 CONTROL VALVE LEFT VIEW A-A Figure 48 CONTROL VALVE RIGHT VIEW B-B

Page 36
BCS0200L BCS0210L
Figure 49 CONTROL VALVE FRONT VIEW C-C Figure 50 CONTROL VALVE REAR VIEW D-D
Figure 51 CONTROL VALVE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

Page 37
BCS0230L
Figure 52
HAAA3470
Figure 53
BCS0250L
Figure 54

Page 38
HAAA3490 BCS0270L
Figure 55 Figure 56
BCS0280L BCS0290L
Figure 57 Figure 58

Page 39
Reference
Description Quantity
Number
1 Main Plunger 10
2 Main Relief Valve 1
3 Overload Relief Valve (AM, BM Down, BKT, OPT) 7
4 Overload Relief Valve (BM Up) 1
5 Boom Holding Valve 1
6 Boom 2-Speed Check 1
7 Arm Regeneration Valve 1
8 Foot Relief Valve 2
9 Arm Priority Valve (AP Valve) 1
10 Check Valve (TR, AM-2) 4
11 Check Valve (OPT, BKT, BM-1, BM-2, AM-1) 5
13 Check Valve 2
14 Cap 1
15 Check Valve (TL) 1
16 Check Valve (SW) 1
17 Overload Relief Valve Plug 1
18 Bucket Conflow (Junction) Check Cap 1
20 Center Bypass Valve (CB Valve) 1
21 Arm Holding Valve 1
22 Orifice (Px, Py) 1

Page 40
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
SOCKET
BOLT
HAAA3540
Figure 59
GENERAL DISASSEMBLY
To disassemble control valve, remove bolts from left and right side of the control valve.
Allen Key Size 10 mm
GENERAL REASSEMBLY
Stand control valve on flat surface and tighten bolts with correct torque.
Socket Bolt Tightening Torque 10 kg•m (72 ft lb)
IMPORTANT
Be sure to use extreme care when assembling and disassembling control valve. All O-rings
should be replaced with new ones. Never reuse old O-rings.

Page 41
MAIN PLUNGER ELEMENT
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Main Plunger element tag and label each component so that all parts can
be reassembled in the proper order.
IMPORTANT
The hydraulic control valve used in the S130LC-V uses 3 different plungers. Care should be
taken when disassembling and reassembling plunger assemblies.
Special Tool
This holding tool is used to clamp and hold
plunger for further disassembly, without
damaging it. The holder is comprised of 2 halves
of a hexagonal rod made from soft brass, with
the appropriate size hole and outside
dimensions.
Outside
Inside Diameter
Application
Diameter Across Flat
Surface
21.8 mm 35 mm (1.38 in) Main Plunger Figure 60
(0.86 in)
Length 100 mm (3.94 in)
Service
Figure 61
Reference
Description
Number
1 6 mm Allen head Style Bolts
2 Plunger Cover
3 Plunger cap bolt

Page 42
1. Remove two bolts (1) from cover and remove cover (2) from valve housing.
Allen head style bolt 6 mm

Tightening torque 3 kg•m (22 ft lb)
2. Pull out plunger sub-assembly from

housing.
IMPORTANT
Do not force out plunger. Pull out
plunger slowly, to avoid damage.
Figure 62
3. Use the holder tool described above to
clamp plunger assembly and loosen
plunger cap bolt.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Plunger Holding Tool
2 Spring Guide
Plunger Cap Bolt
3 Tightening Torque:
6 kg•m (43 ft lb)
Figure 63
4. Remove plunger cap bolt (3), upper spring
guide (4), spring (5) and lower spring guide
(4).
IMPORTANT
Use caution when disassembling and
assembling plungers. The travel
straight spring and plunger cap bolts
are different from the others.
Figure 64

Page 43
5. Plunger (Lower side)
AM-1: Remove cap (7), O-rings, backup
spring, spring (8) and check valve (9).
Lower cap hex hole 6 mm

Figure 65
TS: Remove cap (7), O-ring and backup
spring.
Lower cap hex hole 6 mm

Figure 66

Page 44
MAIN RELIEF VALVE
Reference
Description Size
Number
1 Adjusting screw 22 mm
2 Hexagonal nut 30 mm
3 Hexagonal nut 30 mm
4 Cap 30 mm
5 Pilot seat
6 Lower sleeve
7 Sleeve 27 mm
Figure 67
1. Hold adjusting screw (1) and loosen
hexagonal nut (2).
2. Hold cap (4) and loosen hexagonal nut (3).
3. Loosen cap (4) and remove valve
assembly by unscrewing cap (4).
Reference
Description
number
6 Lower sleeve
8 Piston
9 Spring
10 Orifice
4. Remove lower sleeve (6) from cap (4) by

gently pulling sleeve out of cap. Remove
piston (8), spring (9) and orifice (10) from
lower sleeve.
IMPORTANT Figure 68
Further disassembly of pilot sheet

from the cap is not recommended, as
it is pressed in at the factory.

Page 45
MAIN RELIEF VALVE ADJUSTMENT
IMPORTANT
Improper relief valve pressure settings may cause severe damage to the hydraulic system.
Extreme caution should be taken when making pressure adjustments.
Figure 69
IMPORTANT
Inspect all O-ring gaskets for damage and replace as necessary. Never reuse damaged or
questionable O-rings.
Main Relief Valve - Reassembly

1. Insert piston (A) into sleeve (7). Assemble hex nut (2) onto adjustment screw (1). Assemble
adjustment screw (1) to sleeve (7), until piston (A) is seated.
2. Insert pilot poppet (B) into pressure adjustment spring (C) and insert into sleeve (7). Assemble cap
(4) onto sleeve (7), making sure pilot poppet (B) is properly seated.
3. Insert orifice (10), spring (9) and piston (8) into lower sleeve (6).
4. Assemble lower sleeve (6) onto cap (4).
5. Insert assembled relief valve into control valve body and tighten cap (4).

Page 46
High Pressure Adjustment
1. Install an accurate pressure gauge at the discharge outlet of the hydraulic pump.
2. Start the engine and drive hydraulic pump at normal RPM.
3. Completely stroke one of Bm-Up, AM or BKT plungers and read pressure gauge.
4. Adjust pressure by turning sleeve (7) while monitoring pressure gauge. Each 1/4 turn changes
pressure by approximately 45 kg/cm² (640 psi).
IMPORTANT
The relief valve is extremely sensitive and sudden extreme changes should be avoided.
5. Tighten hexagonal nut (3) while sleeve (7) is secured. Recheck high side pressure.
Low Pressure Adjustment

1. After the high pressure adjustment has been completed, low pressure adjustment can be made by
turning the adjustment screw (1).
2. After the desired pressure has been adjusted, tighten hexagonal nut (2) while adjustment screw (1) is
secured. Recheck low side pressure.

Page 47
OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE
IMPORTANT
When disassembling overload relief valve, tag and label each component so that all parts can be
reassembled in the proper order.
IMPORTANT
Do not disassemble the pressure adjustment element. The pressure is factory set and can not be
correctly adjusted on the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
Each Overload Relief Valve must be reinstalled into its original position.
1. Loosen sleeve (1) and remove valve

assembly.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Sleeve
2 Cap
Sleeve hexagonal base 27 mm

6 kg•m
Tightening torque
(43 ft lb)
Figure 70
2. Loosen cap (1) subassembly from sleeve
assembly and remove O-ring, spring (2)
and pilot poppet (3).
Reference
Description
Number
2 Cap
3 Spring
4 Poppet
Cap hexagonal base 24 mm

6 kg•m
Tightening torque Figure 71
(43 ft lb)

Page 48
3. Remove pilot seat (5), outer spring (6),
inner spring (7), piston (8), O-ring, backup
spring and main poppet (9).
Reference
Description
Number
5 Pilot seat
6 Outer spring
7 Inner spring
8 Piston
9 Main Poppet
Figure 72
Figure 73

Page 49
OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE (BM UP)
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Overload Relief Valve, tag and label each component so that all parts can
IMPORTANT
Do not disassemble the pressure adjustment element. The pressure is factory set and can not be
correctly adjusted on the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
Each Overload Relief Valve must be reinstalled into its original position.
1. Loosen sleeve (1) and remove valve

assembly.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Sleeve
2 Cap
Sleeve hexagonal base 27 mm

6 kg•m
Tightening torque
(43 ft lb)
Figure 74
2. Loosen cap (1) subassembly from sleeve
assembly and remove O-ring, spring (2)
and pilot poppet (3).
Reference
Description
Number
2 Cap
3 Spring
4 Poppet
Cap hexagonal base 24 mm

6 kg•m
Tightening torque Figure 75
(43 ft lb)

Page 50
3. Remove pilot seat (5), outer spring (6),
inner spring (7), piston (8), O-ring, backup
spring and main poppet (9).
Reference
Description
Number
5 Pilot seat
6 Outer spring
7 Inner spring
8 Piston
9 Main Poppet
Figure 76
Figure 77

Page 51
ARM LOAD HOLDING VALVE
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Arm Load Holding Valve, tag and label each component so that all parts
can be reassembled in the proper order.
Check Valve Main Body

1. Remove allen-style bolts (1) and cover (2).
Figure 78
Mounting Bolt Allen Socket 10 mm

Tightening Torque 10 kg•m (72 ft lb)
IMPORTANT
When assembling cover, inspect O-rings for any damage and replace as necessary.
2. Remove spring (3) and poppet (4).
Figure 79

Page 52
Cover Assembly
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check
4 Cap
5 Piston
6 Sleeve
7 Poppet
8 Spring Figure 80
9 Cap
1. Loosen cap (1) and remove spring (2) and

check (3).
Cap hex hole size 8 mm

5 kg•m
Tightening torque
(36 ft lb)
Figure 81
2. Loosen cap (4) and remove piston (5).

6 kg•m
Tightening torque
(43 ft lb)
Figure 82

Page 53
poppet (7).

5 kg•m
Tightening torque
(36 ft lb)
4. Remove sleeve from poppet bore by gently

tapping it from the right side.
IMPORTANT
Be careful not to damage the edges Figure 83
of the inner and outer surfaces of the
sleeve.

Page 54
BOOM LOAD HOLDING VALVE
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Boom Load Holding Valve, tag and label each component so that all parts
Figure 84
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Cover 5 Spring Seat
2 Spool 6 Allen Head Bolt
3 Spring 7 Spring
4 cap 8 Poppet
1. Remove allen head bolts (6) and remove cover (1).
Allen head bolt size 8 mm

IMPORTANT
When assembling cover, inspect O-rings for any damage and replace as necessary.

Page 55
2. Remove Spring Seat (5), Spring (7) and
Poppet (8) from manifold bore.
Figure 85
spool (2).
Cap allen hole size 6 mm

3 kg•m
Tightening torque
(22 ft lb)
Figure 86

Page 56
ARM REGENERATION VALVE
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Arm Regeneration Valve, tag and label each component so that all parts
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Piston
3 Spool
4 Spring
5 Sleeve
Figure 87
1. Loosen cap (1) and remove piston (2).
Cap wrench size 27 mm

10 kg•m
Tightening torque
(72 ft lb)
Figure 88
2. Remove spool (3), spring (4) and sleeve
(5) from housing.
Figure 89

Page 57
FOOT RELIEF VALVE
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Foot Relief Valve, tag and label each component so that all parts can be
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Poppet
3 Cap
4 Shim
5 Spring
Figure 90
1. Loosen cap (1) and remove poppet (2).

6 kg•m
Tightening torque
(43 ft lb)
Figure 91
2. Loosen cap (3) and remove shim (4) and
spring (5).

6 kg•m
Tightening torque
(43 ft lb)
IMPORTANT
Shim is necessary for correct
pressure adjustment and must not be
left out.
Figure 92

Page 58
CENTER BYPASS VALVE (CB VALVE)
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Center Bypass Valve, tag and label each component so that all parts can
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Spool
Figure 93
spool (3).

8 kg•m
Tightening torque
(58 ft lb)
Figure 94

Page 59
ARM PARALLEL SWITCH VALVE
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Arm Parallel Switch Valve, tag and label each component so that all parts
Special Tool
This holding tool is used to clamp and hold BP
Spool for further disassembly, without damaging
it. The holder is comprised of 2 halves of a
hexagonal rod made from soft brass, with the
appropriate size hole and outside dimensions.
Inside Outside
Application
Diameter Diameter
19 mm 32 mm BP Spool
(0.75 in) (1.26 in)
100 mm Figure 95
Length
(3.94 in)
Service
Reference
Description
Number
1 Spacer
2 Screw
3 Cap
4 O-ring
5 Spring
6 Check
7 Spool Ap
8 O-ring HAAA3550
9 Backup Ring Figure 96
10 Retainer
11 Bolt With Hole
1. Remove allen head bolts (1) and cover (2).
Allen hole size 5 mm

1.2 kg•m
Tightening torque
(9 ft lb)
IMPORTANT
When assembling cover, inspect O-rings
for any damage and replace as necessary.

Page 60
2. Slide out spool assembly and remove
spring (3).
HAAA3560
Figure 97
3. Using the tool described above, clamp and
hold the spool in place. Remove cap (4),
Spring (5) and check (6).
Allen hole size 6 mm

3.5 kg•m
Tightening torque
(25 ft lb)
HAAA3570
Figure 98

Page 61
BOOM UNITY CHECK VALVE
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Boom Unity Check Valve, tag and label each component so that all parts
IMPORTANT
When assembling components, inspect O-rings for any damage and replace as necessary.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check
Figure 99
1. Loosen cap (1), remove stopper (2), spring
(3) and check (4).
Cap hole size 12 mm

10 kg•m
Tightening torque
(72 ft lb)
Figure 100

Page 62
STRAIGHT TRAVEL SELECTOR VALVE
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Swing Straight Travel Valve, tag and label each component so that all parts
IMPORTANT
When assembling components, inspect O-rings for any damage and replace as necessary.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Stopper
3 Spring
4 Check
Figure 101
1. Loosen cap (1), remove stopper (2), spring
(3) and check (4).
Cap hole size 8 mm

4 kg•m
Tightening torque
(29 ft lb)
Figure 102

Page 63
CHECK VALVE - LOCATIONS
Valve
Location Description
Reference
A TR, AM2
B BKT, OPT, BM1, BM2, AM1
C Main Relief Valve
D SW
E TL
F Cap Only
BCS0300L
Figure 103
BCS0310L
Figure 104

Page 64
CHECK VALVE
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Check Valves, tag and label each component so that all parts can be
A: Check Valve (TR, AM2)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check
Cap hole size 12 mm

15 kg•m
Tightening torque
(108 ft lb)
1. Loosen cap (1), remove spring (2) and

check (3).
Figure 105
B: Check Valve (OPT, BKT, BM1, BM2,
AM1)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check
Cap hole size 12 mm

15 kg•m
Tightening torque
(108 ft lb)

check (3).
Figure 106

Page 65
C: Check Valve (Main Relief Valve)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check
Cap hole size 12 mm

15 kg•m
Tightening torque
(108 ft lb)

check (3).
Figure 107

Page 66
D: Check Valve (SW)
IMPORTANT
SP valve must be removed first, before removing SW valve.
IMPORTANT
The SW & AM-1 sleeves may look similar but are different and can not be interchanged.
Reference
Description 1
Number
1 Cap 2
2 Backup Ring
3 O-ring 3
4 Spring
5 Nylon Clip 5
6 Check 6
4
HAAA3430
Figure 108
E: Check Valve (TL)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Cap
3 Spring
4 Check
Cap 1 hole size 32 mm

10 kg•m
Tightening torque
(72 ft lb) Figure 109

check (3).
Cap 2 hole size 8 mm

4 kg•m
Tightening torque
(29 ft lb)
Figure 110

Page 67
Page 68
S0709451K
1PILOT CONTROL
VALVE (WORK LEVER /
JOYSTICK)
CAUTION!
PILOT CONTROL VALVE (WORK LEVER / JOYSTICK)S0709451K


November 2002
Pilot Control Valve (Work Lever / Joystick) S0709451K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Structure .......................................................................................... 3
Function ........................................................................................... 3
Parts List ................................................................................................. 4
Specifications .......................................................................................... 5
Torques ............................................................................................ 5
Performance..................................................................................... 6
Removal ......................................................................................................... 6
Disassembly ................................................................................................... 9
Cleaning and Inspection (Wear Limits and Tolerances) ............................... 13
Reassembly.................................................................................................. 14
Installation .................................................................................................... 19
Start-up Procedures ..................................................................................... 20
S0709451K Pilot Control Valve (Work Lever / Joystick)

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
THEORY OF OPERATION
Structure
The remote control valve contains four push rods, spring holders, spools and return springs, which are
located in the valve casing. The valve works as a pressure reduction valve.
The housing has six ports, which include input port P, tank port T, and four secondary pressure ports.
The electric horn switch is installed in the valve handle. Gear pump pressure is used for operating control
spools.
Function
1. Neutral Mode
When the lever is in neutral mode, the spool is thrust upward by return spring, and the force of
balancing spring, which determines the secondary discharge pressure, is not transmitted to the
spool. The input port is closed and the pressure of the output port is the same as the pressure of the
tank port T.
2. Control Mode
When push rod is pushed, the balance spring begins to compress, and spring force is conveyed to
the spool. Ports P and T are then connected together and the pilot pressure is conveyed to the area.
Output pressure works on the bottom of the spool, thrusting the spool upward until it is balanced with
the power of the balance spring. The secondary pressure (output pressure), therefore, changes in
proportion to the compression force of the balance spring.

Page 3
PARTS LIST
30
29
28
26
27
23 25
24 14
13 20
19
22
18
21
12
17
11
31
8
15
10
16
9
36
32
33
7
34
35 6
1 2 3 5 4
ARS2260L
Figure 1

Page 4
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Case 19 O-ring
2 Plug 20 Rod Seal
3 Plug 21 Plate
4 O-ring 22 Boot
5 O-ring 23 Joint Assembly
6 Spool 24 Swash Plate
7 Shim 25 Hex Nut
8 Spring 26 Handle Bar
9 Spring Seat 27 Nut
10 Spring 28 Boot
11 Stopper 29 Spring Pin
12 Stopper 30 Handle Assembly
13 Spring 31 Bushing
14 Push Rod 32 Terminal
15 Spring 33 Seal Wire
16 Spring Seat 34 Housing
17 Stopper 35 Holder Rear
18 Plug 36 Clip Band
SPECIFICATIONS
Pilot Control Valve Specification

Type Pilot Control (2-Stage Joystick)
(1,3) 28 kg/cm2 @ 6.5 mm Stroke (398 psi @ 0.256 in. Stroke)
Pressure / Stroke
(2,4) 28 kg/cm2 @ 7.5 mm Stroke (398 psi @ 0.295 in. Stroke)
Weight 4.8 kg (11 lb)
Torques
Reference
Bolt Size Tool Torque
Number
2 PT 1/8 5 mm L-Wrench 150 kg•cm (11 ft lb)
3 PF 3/8 8 mm L-Wrench 500 kg•cm (36 ft lb)
24 M14 24 mm Spanner 1,240 kg•cm (90 ft lb)

Page 5
Performance
ARS2270L
Figure 2
REMOVAL
ground.
WARNING!
running.
6. Fully stroke work levers (joysticks) in all directions to relieve pressure from accumulators.

Page 6
4) and cover (1). 1 2
12. Pull cap (5, Figure 4) out and remove two
screws, two bolts and washers (6) and 7 4
cover (3).
3
13. Remove three screws, one bolt and
washers (7, Figure 4) and cover (4).
6
5
ARS2910L
Figure 4
14. Remove four bolts (3, Figure 5) and cover
(2), and pull remote control valve L.H. (1) 3
out.
15. Tag and disconnect hoses from remote 2
control valve L.H. (1, Figure 5). Plug and 1
cap hoses and ports to prevent
contamination from entering hydraulic
system or component.
ARS2920L
Figure 5
16. Remove four bolts and washer (2, Figure
6), and cover (2). 2
1
17. Pull cap (5, Figure 6) out and remove
screw, three bolts and washers (6) and
cover (3). 4
3
18. Remove two screws, two bolts and
washers (7 and 8, Figure 6) and cover (4).
6 7
5
8 ARS2930L
Figure 6

Page 7
19. Remove four bolts (3, Figure 7) and cover
(2), and pull remote control valve R.H. (1) 3
out.
20. Tag and disconnect hoses from remote 2
control valve R.H. (1, Figure 7). Plug and 1
cap hoses and ports to prevent
contamination from entering hydraulic
system or component.
ARS2920L
Figure 7

Page 8
DISASSEMBLY
1. Lift up the boot (28) and pull the switch
cord through the hole in the case (1).
Figure 8
Figure 9
2. Loosen nut (27) from hex nut (25) and
remove handle assembly (30).
Figure 10

Page 9
3. Remove hex nut (25) and swash plate
(24).
Figure 11
4. Remove joint (23) from case (1).
Figure 12
5. Remove plate (21).
Figure 13
6. Press spring (10) and remove plug (18).
Figure 14

Page 10
7. Remove pressure reduction valve (6, 7, 8,
9, 11) and spring (10).
IMPORTANT
Mark valve disassembling position
(port).
Figure 15
8. Remove plug (3) and four plugs (2).
Figure 16
9. Remove stopper (11) from pressure
reduction valve (6, 7, 8, 9, 11).
Figure 17
10. Remove spool (6), spring seat (9), spring
(8) and shim (7).
Figure 18

Page 11
11. Remove push rod (14) and plug (18).
Figure 19
12. Remove O-ring (19) from plug (18).
Figure 20
13. Remove seal (20) from plug (18).
Figure 21

Page 12
CLEANING AND INSPECTION (WEAR LIMITS AND
TOLERANCES)
For general cleaning and inspection procedures, refer to "General Maintenance Procedures" section.
Clean all parts and dry them with compressed air. Keep all parts free from dust. Lubricate all moving parts.

Page 13
REASSEMBLY
1. Tighten plug (3) slowly.
NOTE: Tightening torque: 350 kg•cm
(25 ft lb).
Tighten four plugs (2).
NOTE: Use Loctite #592 pipe sealant
on plugs.
NOTE: Tightening torque 150 kg•cm
(11 ft lb).
Figure 22
2. Install shim (7), spring (8), spring seat (9),
and spool (6).
Figure 23
3. Press spring (9) and install stopper (11).
Figure 24

Page 14
4. Install spring (10) in case (1) and pressure
reducing valve assembly (6, 7, 8, 9, 11).
Figure 25
5. Install seal (20) on plug (18).
Figure 26
6. Install O-ring (19) on plug (18).
Figure 27
7. Install push rod (14) on plug (18).
Figure 28

Page 15
8. Install spring (13) on stopper (12).
Figure 29
9. Position stopper (12) and spring (13) on
pressure reducing valve.
Figure 30
10. Install plug (18) in case (1).
Figure 31
11. Install plate (21) and tighten joint (23).
Figure 32

Page 16
12. Install swash plate (24) on joint (23).
Figure 33
13. Install hex nut (25) and tighten swash plate
(24).
NOTE: Tightening torque 1,240 kg•cm
(90 ft lb).
Figure 34
14. Pull cord and tube out through hole of hex
nut (25).
Figure 35
15. Align the direction of handle (30) and
tighten hex nut (25) and nut (27).
NOTE: Tightening torque 1,240 kg•cm
(90 ft lb).
Figure 36

Page 17
16. Grease joint (23), swash plate (24) and
push rod (14).
Figure 37
17. Install boot (28).
Figure 38

Page 18
INSTALLATION
to remote control valve R.H. (1, Figure 39). 3
2. Position remote control valve R.H. (1,
Figure 39) on control stand and install four 2 1
bolts and washers (3) and cover (2).
ARS2920L
Figure 39
3. Install two screws, two bolts and washers
(7 and 8, Figure 40) and cover (4). 2
1
4. Install a screw, three bolts and washers (6,
Figure 40) and cover (3). Push cap (5) into
cover (3). 4
3
5. Install four bolts and washers (2, Figure
40) and cover (1).
6 7
5
8 ARS2930L
Figure 40
to remote control valve L.H. (1, Figure 41). 3
7. Position remote control valve L.H. (1,
Figure 41) on control stand and install four 2 1
bolts and washers (3), and cover (2).
ARS2920L
Figure 41

Page 19
8. Install three screws, one bolts and
washers (7, Figure 42), and cover (4). 1 2
9. Install two screws, two bolts and washers
(6, Figure 42), and cover (3). Push cap (5) 7 4
into cover (3).
3
10. Install four bolts and washers (2, Figure
42), and cover (1).
6
5
ARS2910L
Figure 42
START-UP PROCEDURES
1. Start engine and set throttle at "LOW
IDLE."
2. Set safety lever on "UNLOCK" position.
HAOB290L
Figure 43
3. Slowly cycle boom, arm, bucket cylinders
and swing motor about five times without a
load to vent air from pilot lines. Do this for
5 minutes.
ARO0470L
Figure 44

Page 20
S0709710
R3
1STEERING VALVE
CAUTION!
STEERING VALVE S0709710


January 2001
Steering Valve S0709710

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Parts List ................................................................................................. 6
Specifications .......................................................................................... 7
Special Tools ........................................................................................... 8
Disassembly ................................................................................................. 10
Reassembly.................................................................................................. 19
S0709710 Steering Valve

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Turning the steering wheel causes hydraulic oil to be sent from the steering gear type pump to the steering
valve which directs oil to the steering cylinders.
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Knuckle Arm 3 Steering Valve
2 Steering Cylinder

Page 3
THEORY OF OPERATION
The steering valve, which directs hydraulic oil from the pump to the steering cylinder, is comprised of a
housing, control sleeve, control spool and drive. Turning the steering wheel counterclockwise causes oil to
flow to the steering cylinder L. Return oil goes through passage R to passage T. Oil supplied to the rotor
turns the rotor and transmits oil to the control sleeve through the drive or spring. Turning the wheel
clockwise sends oil through passage R, while return oil passes from L of the cylinder to passage T. With
the steering wheel in a neutral position, oil returns to the tank through passages P and T.
Figure 2

Page 4
Page 5
PARTS LIST
26 2
26
1
27
29
25
24 2
5
32
7
34
8
11
9
2
13
14
12
15
16 21
17 22
18
20
BCS0850L
Figure 3

Page 6
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Dust Seal Ring 16 O-ring
2 Spool Housing Assembly 17 End Cover
3 Ball 18 Washer
4 Threaded Bushing 20 Screw
5 O-ring 21 Screw with Pin
7 Bearing Assembly 22 Name Plate
8 Ring 24 Relief Valve Assembly
9 Cross Pin 25 Wire Spring
11 Cardan Shaft 26 Shock Valve Assembly
12 Spring Set 27 Ball
13 O-ring 29 Bushing with Pin
14 Distributor Plate 30 Check Valve
15 Gear Wheel Set * Seal Kit (1, 5, 13, 16, and
18)
SPECIFICATIONS
Solar 140W-V Solar 170W-V Solar 200W-V

Steering Unit Solar 130W-V
/ Solar 160W-V / Solar 180W-V / Solar 210W-V
Type Open Center, Open Center, Open Center, Open Center,
Non reaction Non reaction Non reaction Non reaction
Displacement 200 cc/rev 200 cc/rev 315 cc/rev 315 cc/rev
(12.2 in3/rev.) (12.2 in3/rev.) (19.22 in3/rev) (19.22 in3/rev)
Relief Valve Set 140 kg/cm2 170 kg/cm2 195 - 200 kg/cm2 150 kg/cm2
Pressure (1,990 psi) (2,418 psi) (2,770 - 2,840 (2,130 psi)
psi)
Overload Relief 200 kg/cm2 225 kg/cm2 240 - 250 kg/cm2 200 kg/cm2
Valve Set Pressure (2,840 psi) (3,200 psi) (3,400 - 3,600 (2,840 psi)
psi)

Page 7
SPECIAL TOOLS
NOTE: Part numbers listed here for special tools are Danfoss. Contact Danfoss for purchasing
tools.
A. Holding tool. Code no.: SJ 150-9000-2.
Figure 4
B. Assembly tool for O-ring and kin-ring. Code
no. SJ 150-9000-11.
Figure 5

Page 8
C. Assembly tool for lip seal. Code no. SJ 150-
9000-17.
Figure 6
D. Assembly tool for cardin shaft. Code no. 150-
9000-3.
Figure 7
E. Assembly tool for dust seal. Code no. SJ
150-9000-22.
Figure 8

Page 9
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove steering column and secure
steering valve in a vise. Remove screws
from end cover (six screws plus one
special screw, used as a special tool).
Figure 9
2. Slide end cover to one side.
Figure 10

Page 10
3. Lift gear wheel set, with spacer on some
models, off unit. Remove two O-rings.
Figure 11
4. Remove cardan shaft.
Figure 12
5. Remove distributor plate.
Figure 13

Page 11
6. Screw out threaded bushing over check
valve.
Figure 14
7. Remove O-ring.
Figure 15
8. Shake out check valve ball, and suction
valve pins and balls.
Figure 16

Page 12
9. Taking care to keep cross pin in sleeve
and spool horizontal, press spool in and
push sleeve, ring, bearing races and
needle bearing out of housing together.
Figure 17
10. Remove ring, bearing races and needle
bearing from sleeve and spool. Check that
outer, thin bearing race is not stuck in
housing.
Figure 18
11. Press out cross pin, using special screw
from end cover.
Figure 19

Page 13
NOTE: If there are no alignment marks
on spool and sleeve, close to
one of the slots for neutral
position springs, mark with
pumice stone before removing
springs.
Figure 20
12. Carefully press spool out of sleeve.
Figure 21
13. Press neutral springs out of their slots in
spool.
Figure 22

Page 14
14. Remove dust seal and O-ring.
Figure 23
15. Remove plugs from shock valves using a 6
mm hex socket spanner.
Figure 24
16. Remove two seal washers.
Figure 25

Page 15
17. Unscrew set screws using 6 mm hex
socket spanner.
Figure 26
18. Shake two springs and valve balls out of
housing.
NOTE: Valve seats are bonded into
housing and cannot be
removed.
Figure 27
19. Dual Shock Valves are shown
disassembled.
Figure 28

Page 16
20. Screw out plug using 8 mm hex socket
spanner. Remove seal washers.
Figure 29
21. Unscrew set screw using 8 mm hex socket
spanner.
Figure 30
22. Shake out spring and piston. (Note: valve
seat is bonded into housing and cannot be
removed).
Figure 31

Page 17
23. Pressure relief valve is shown
disassembled.
Figure 32

Page 18
REASSEMBLY
1. Assemble spool/sleeve, making sure
marks on spool and sleeve are lined up.
Figure 33
2. Place two, flat, neutral position springs in
slot. Place curved springs between flat
springs and press into place.
Figure 34
3. Line up spring set.
Figure 35

Page 19
4. Guide spool into sleeve.
Figure 36
5. Press springs together and push neutral
position springs into place in sleeve.
Figure 37
6. Line up springs and center them.
Figure 38

Page 20
7. Guide ring down over sleeve so that ring
can turn free of the springs.
Figure 39
8. Fit cross pin into spool/sleeve.
Figure 40
9. Assemble bearing races and needle
bearing as shown in Figure 41 and Figure
42.
Figure 41

Page 21
Reference
Description
Number
1 Outer Bearing Race
2 Needle Bearing
3 Inner Bearing Race
4 Spool
5 Sleeve
Figure 42
10. Turn unit until bore is horizontal. Guide
outer part of assembly tool into bore of
spool/ sleeve.
Figure 43
11. Grease O-ring and ring with oil and place
on tool.
Figure 44

Page 22
12. Hold outer part of assembly tool in bottom
of housing and guide inner part of tool to
bottom.
Figure 45
13. Press and turn O-ring and ring into
position in housing.
Figure 46
14. Draw inner and outer parts of assembly
tool out of housing bore, leaving guide
from inner part inside.
Figure 47

Page 23
15. Lubricate lip seal and place on assembly
tool.
Figure 48
16. Guide assembly tool to bottom of housing.
Figure 49
17. Press and turn lip seal into place in
housing.
Figure 50

Page 24
18. Holding cross pin horizontal, guide spool
and sleeve into bore with light turning
movement.
Figure 51
NOTE: O-ring and ring are now in
position; spool set will push out
assembly tool guide.
Figure 52
19. Turn steering until bore is vertical. Place
check valve ball into hole shown in
illustration.
Figure 53

Page 25
20. Screw threaded bushing lightly into check
valve bore so that top of bushing lies just
below housing surface.
Figure 54
21. Place ball in two holes shown in
illustration.
Figure 55
22. Place pin in holes.
Figure 56

Page 26
23. Install pin, with spring on some models,
into housing.
Figure 57
24. Grease O-ring with mineral oil (500 cst
viscosity at 20°C [68°F]).
Figure 58
25. Install distributor plate so that channel
holes match holes in housing.
Figure 59

Page 27
26. Guide cardan shaft into bore so that slot is
parallel with connection flange.
Figure 60
27. Place cardan shaft so that it is held in
position by mounting fork.
Figure 61
28. Grease two O-rings with mineral oil (500
cst viscosity at 20°C [68°F]) and place in
grooves in rear rim. Fit gearwheel and rim
on cardan shaft.
Figure 62

Page 28
29. Fit gearwheel (rotor) and cardan shaft so
that a tooth base in the rotor is positioned
in relation to shaft slot as shown. Turn gear
rim so that seven holes match holes in
housing.
Figure 63
30. Install spacer, if used.
Figure 64
31. Place end cover in position.
Figure 65

Page 29
32. Fit special screw with washer and place in
hole shown.
Figure 66
33. Fit six screws with washers and install.
Cross-tighten screws and roll pin to
30 N•m (22 ft lb)
Figure 67
34. Place dust seal ring in housing after
pressure relief valve and shock valves are
installed.
Figure 68

Page 30
35. Install dust seal ring to housing using
special tool and plastic hammer.
Figure 69
36. Press plastic plugs into connection ports,
by hand, DO NOT use hammer.
Figure 70
37. Install piston.
Figure 71

Page 31
38. Install spring.
Figure 72
39. Screw in set screw using 8 mm hex socket
spanner and set pressure setting as
follows.
Spring Dia. Pressure

1.7 mm 50 - 70 bar
(0.066") (725 - 1,015 psi)
1.9 mm 70 - 105 bar
(0.075") (1,015 - 1,522 psi)
2.1 mm 110 - 155 bar
(0.083") (1,595 - 2,248 psi)
Figure 73
40. Screw plug with dust seal into housing
using 8 mm hex socket spanner. Tighten to
5 ±1 N•m (1.12 ±0.22 ft lb).
Figure 74

Page 32
S0709905K
1DOZER CONTROL
VALVE
CAUTION!
DOZER CONTROL VALVES0709905K


July 2002
Dozer Control Valve S0709905K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Parts List ........................................................................................................ 3

Specifications ................................................................................................. 4
S0709905K Dozer Control Valve

Page 2
PARTS LIST
24
23
20
22
16
21
14
19
13
15
11
18
9 17
5 10
8 12
4
7
6 2
3 1
BCS0530L
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Body 13 Push Rod
2 Plug 14 Cover
3 O-ring 15 Wrench Bolt
4 Spring 16 Guide
5 Spring Seat 17 Pin
6 Spool 18 Socket Bolt
7 Spring Seat 19 Nut
8 Spring 20 Lever
9 Stopper 21 Spring Pin
10 Plug 22 Boot
11 Rod Seal 23 Bushing
12 O-ring 24 Snap Ring
Dozer Control Valve S0709905K

Page 3
SPECIFICATIONS
Remote Blade (Dozer) Control Valve
Type: Pilot Control
Pressure/Stroke: 28 kg/cm2 (398 psi) at 6.5 mm (0.256")
stroke
S0709905K Dozer Control Valve

Page 4
S0792145K
2HYDRAULIC
SCHEMATIC
(S140W-V / 160W-V)
CAUTION!
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC (S140W-V / 160W-V)S0792145K


July 2002
Hydraulic Schematic (S140W-V / 160W-V) S0792145K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Solar 140W-V / 160W-V ................................................................................. 4
S0792145K Hydraulic Schematic (S140W-V / 160W-V)

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Schematic(s) presented in this section are laid out on facing pages.
An overlapping edge has been taken into consideration so that a photocopy can be made and pasted
together to make a complete schematic.
Figure 1

Page 3
SOLAR 140W-V / 160W-V
Figure 2

Page 4
SOLAR 140W-V /160W-V
BCS0860L

Page 5
Page 6
1ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
S0802125K
1ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CAUTION!
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS0802125K

October 2002
Electrical System S0802125K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Troubleshooting - Electrical System ............................................................... 5
Overview ........................................................................................................ 6
Electric Supply System .................................................................................. 7
Engine Starting Circuit ................................................................................... 8
Operation During Start Process .............................................................. 8
Operation After Start Process ................................................................. 9
Engine Preheating System........................................................................... 10
Engine Stop System..................................................................................... 11
Charging System.......................................................................................... 14
Monitoring System ....................................................................................... 16
Instrument Panel ................................................................................... 18
Monitoring System Schematic .............................................................. 20
Operation...................................................................................................... 22
Instruments ........................................................................................... 22
Warning and Indicator Lights........................................................................ 24
Control Unit .................................................................................................. 26
Operation Schematic............................................................................. 26
Operation Specification ......................................................................... 27
Console Warning Light ................................................................................. 28
Initial Operation ............................................................................................ 30
Mode Select Switch...................................................................................... 31
Graphic Information Area Display ................................................................ 32
Overview ............................................................................................... 32
Main Menus for the Graphic Display Area............................................. 33
Menu Selection Buttons ........................................................................ 33
Main Menu.................................................................................................... 34
Language setting................................................................................... 34
Time Setting .......................................................................................... 34
Filter/Oil information .............................................................................. 35
Special Menu................................................................................................ 36
Entering/Accessing and Exiting/Escaping Menus ................................. 36
S0802125K Electrical System

Page 2
Special Menu Selections....................................................................... 37
Electronic Hydraulic Control System
(e-EPOS)...................................................................................................... 50
Power Mode Control..................................................................................... 52
Operation .............................................................................................. 53
Throttle Position Sensor ............................................................................... 56
Power Mode Control - Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 58
Work Mode Control ...................................................................................... 60
Operation .............................................................................................. 61
Work Mode Control - Circuit Diagram .......................................................... 62
Engine Control System................................................................................. 64
Engine Control Motor ................................................................................... 65
Engine Control Dial ...................................................................................... 66
Engine Control Circuit Diagram.................................................................... 68
Automatic Deceleration Control (Auto Idle Control)...................................... 69
Automatic Deceleration Control Circuit ........................................................ 70
Operation .............................................................................................. 71
Engine Overheat Protection System ............................................................ 72
Power Boost Mode ....................................................................................... 73
Operation .............................................................................................. 73
Power Boost Control - Circuit Diagram ................................................. 74
Cruise Control .............................................................................................. 76
Cruise Control Circuit ............................................................................ 78
Adjusting Method of Engine Control Unit ..................................................... 80
Adjusting Method of Engine Control System......................................... 80
Adjusting Method of Engine RPM ......................................................... 82
Adjustment of TPS (Throttle Position Sensor)....................................... 87
Self-diagnostic Function ............................................................................... 92
e-EPOS Controller ................................................................................ 92
Engine Throttle Controller ............................................................................ 96
Wiper System ............................................................................................... 98
Wiper Circuit.......................................................................................... 98
Wiper Operation .................................................................................... 98

Page 3
Window Washer Operation ................................................................... 99
Overload Warning Device........................................................................... 100
Overload Warning Device Circuit Diagram.......................................... 100

Page 4
TROUBLESHOOTING - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Battery will not stay Internal battery short. Replace battery.
charged. Short in other part of circuit. Repair wiring or replace component.
Battery does not Battery worn out or defective. Replace battery.
charge. Defective alternator or belt. Repair or replace.
Cable connection loose or severely Repair or replace.
corroded. Circuit ground corroded or
weak.
Engine rpm not Engine speed potentiometer or dial Repair or replace.
controllable. defective.
Engine control cable broken or loose. Repair or replace.
Engine control motor defective or not Repair connection or replace
connected. component.
Engine throttle controller defective or Repair connection or replace
not connected. component.
Blown fuse. Replace fuse. Check connections
and circuit components for shorts or
other damage.
Wiring harness or connector Repair or replace.
defective or damaged.
Power mode selection Blown fuse. Replace fuse. Check connections
does not change. and circuit components for shorts or
other damage.
Instrument Panel switch broken. Repair or replace.
e-EPOS controller defective. Replace.
Speed sensor defective. Replace.
Work mode selection Blown fuse. Replace fuse. Check connections
does not change. and circuit components for shorts or
other damage.
Instrument Panel switch broken. Repair or replace.
e-EPOS controller defective. Replace.
Solenoid valve defective. Replace.

Page 5
OVERVIEW
The electrical system for this equipment is DC 24 volts. The rated voltage for all electric components is 24
volts with the exception of the car stereo and the air-conditioning control actuator. The system contains two
12 volt batteries connected in series and a three phase AC generator with a rectifier. The electric wiring
used in the system is easily identifiable by the insulator color. The color symbols used in the electrical
system are listed in the following chart.
Electric Wire Color
Symbol Color Symbol Color

W White R Red
G Green Gr Gray
Or Orange P Pink
B Black Y Yellow
L Blue Br Brown
Lg Light green V Violet
NOTE: RW: Red wire with White stripe

R - Base Color, W - Stripe Color
NOTE: 0.85G: Nominal sectional area of wire core less insulator = 0.85 mm2

Page 6
ELECTRIC SUPPLY SYSTEM
The electric power circuit supplies electric current to each electric component. It consists of a battery,
battery relay, starter switch, circuit breaker, fusible link and fuse box.
The negative terminal of the battery is grounded to the vehicle body.
Even when the starter switch (5) is in the "OFF" position, electric current is supplied to the following
components through battery (1) →fusible link (3) →fuse (6).
1. Cabin light, fuel pump switch, No. 1 terminal of DC-DC converter (backup for car stereo memory)
2. "B" terminal of starter switch and No. 22 terminal of air conditioner control panel.
3. No. 17 terminal of instrument panel (backup for instrument panel).
4. Power terminal "B" of engine stop motor.
When the starter switch (5) is in the preheat, on and start positions, the current flows from the battery (1)
→ fusible link (3) → fuse (6) → starter switch (5) "B" terminal/starter switch (5) "BR" terminal → battery
relay (2) "BR" terminal which activates the coil of the battery relay and the electric supply system is
energized.
When the battery relay’s contacts are connected, all electric devices can be operated.
While the engine is not running, the electric power for all electric devices are supplied by the battery. Once
the engine is started the power is supplied from the alternator (7).
ACC C
B
R2
5
BR
0.5G
R1
6
3
8
4 2
B A
BR
E
- + - +
12V 150AH 12V 150AH
R(I) B(B+)
1
PST TML B BR R1 R2 C ACC
OFF
PREHEAT 7
ON
R
START F
E
E
ARS0010L
Figure 1 ELECTRIC POWER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 5 Starter Switch
2 Battery Relay 6 Fuse Box
3 Fusible Link 7 Alternator
4 Circuit Breaker 8 Diode

Page 7
ENGINE STARTING CIRCUIT
OPERATION DURING START PROCESS
When the starter switch is turned to the start position, the and "E" terminals of the starter controller (7) are
connected. At this time the contacts in the starter relay (8) are closed by the current flow from the battery
(1, Figure 2) →fusible link (3) →"B" terminal of the starter switch (5) →"C" terminal of the starter switch (5)
→"C" terminal of the starter relay (8) →"D" terminal of starter relay (8) →"S" terminal of starter controller (7)
→"E" terminal of the starter controller (7) →ground.
The contact point "B" and "PP" of starter relay (8) are connected, the pinion gear of the starter (9) is
pushed forward and makes contact with the ring gear of the flywheel and the internal contacts of the starter
are connected.
The current flows from the battery (1) →"A" terminal of the battery relay (2) →"B" terminal of the battery
relay (2, Figure 2) →"B" terminal of the starter (9). The starter motor is rotated and the engine is started.
7 8
N S D PP C
P B
B E
11
9
A
ACC C
B
R2
BR
5 R1
3
6
2
4
B A
BR
E
R(I) P(R)

OFF SG
- + - +
PREHEAT 10
ON R
START
F 1
E
E
ARS0020L
Figure 2 STARTER CIRCUIT (1) - WHILE STARTING
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Starter Controller
2 Battery Relay 8 Starter Relay
3 Fusible Link 9 Starter
4 Circuit Breaker 10 Alternator
5 Starter Switch 11 Diode
6 Fuse Box

Page 8
OPERATION AFTER START PROCESS
Once the engine has been started, the belt driven alternator (10) generates a current.
The output generated by the alternator (10) is a square wave pulse voltage through the "P" terminal and
the frequency of the pulse voltage is proportional to the rotation of the alternator.
The starter controller (7) monitors the frequency of the output current. Once the frequency equivalent to
500 rpm is sensed the connection between "S" and "E" terminals and the connection between "B" and
"PP" terminals are opened. As a result the rotation of the starter (9) is stopped. Once the engine is
running, the starter (9) will not operate even if the starter switch (5) is moved to the start position,
preventing possible damage to the starter.
Operation of the Start Circuit (2) - Immediately After Start
7 8
N S D PP C
P B B
B E
11
9
A
ACC C
B
R2
BR
5 R1
3
6
2
4
B A
BR
E
11
R(I) B( P(R)

OFF
PREHEAT - + - +
10
ON
R
START F 1
E
ARS0030L
Figure 3 OPERATION OF START CIRCUIT (2) - IMMEDIATELY AFTER START
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Starter Controller
2 Battery Relay 8 Starter Relay
3 Fusible Link 9 Starter
4 Circuit Breaker 10 Alternator
6 Fuse Box

Page 9
ENGINE PREHEATING SYSTEM
An air heater (8) device is installed in the intake manifold of the engine.
When the starter switch (5) is turned to the "Preheat" position, the current flows from the battery (1) →
fusible link (3) →"B" terminal of starter switch (5) →"R1" terminal of starter switch (5) →"C" terminal of
preheat relay (7) →ground and the contact points of the preheat relay are closed.
When the contact points of the preheat relay (7) are closed, the heating coils of the air heating device are
heated by current flowing from the battery (1) →battery relay (2) →preheat relay (7) →air heater (8) →
ground.
The preheat time is approximately 19 seconds. A built-in timer in the instrument panel will activate an
indicator light approximately 19 seconds after the preheat process has been selected.
Even after the starter switch (5) has been moved to the start position the current will continue to flow
through the "R2" terminal of the starter switch (5) to the coil of the preheat relay (7) without disruption of
the preheat process.
6
9 4
CN7-9 2
ACC C B A
PREHEAT CN7-6
L4 B 5
R2 BR
R1 BR E
10
C B
10 - + - +
7
1
H
STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION

OFF
8
PREHEAT
ON
START
ARS0040L
Figure 4 ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 6 Fuse Box
2 Battery Relay 7 Preheat Relay
3 Fusible Link 8 Air Heater
4 Circuit Breaker 9 Indicator Lamp

Page 10
ENGINE STOP SYSTEM
The engine stop circuit consists of a starter switch (5), engine stop motor (9) and engine stop relay (8).
There are two modes of operation - engine running and engine stop.
The worm gear built into the motor reduces the engine stop motor’s speed and changes motor’s revolution
to reciprocation. The fuel shut off lever is pushed or pulled by this change.
When the start switch is in the "ON" position, the engine stop motor rotates 180° and comes to a stop due
to the cam switch. When the start switch is in the "OFF" position, the engine stop motor moves 180° from
the running mode position and is stopped by the cam switch.
A STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION

P1 87a TML
PST B BR R1 R2 C ACC
30
P2 87 OFF
A 85 86 PREHEAT
B
ON
E
START
8
9
0.5G
6
3
ACC C
B
R2
5
BR
4 2
R1 B A
BR
E
7
- + - +
1
ARS0050L
Figure 5 ENGINE STOP CIRCUIT
Reference Reference
Number Number
2 Battery Relay 7 Diode
3 Fusible Link 8 Engine Stop Relay
4 Circuit Breaker 9 Engine Stop Motor
5 Starter Switch

Page 11
Operation In Engine Running Mode
When the starter switch (3) is turned to the "ON" position, the contact points "30" and "87" of the engine
stop relay (5) are closed due to current flowing from the battery (1) → fusible link (2) → "B" terminal of
starter switch (3) →"ACC" terminal of starter switch (3) →"86" terminal of engine stop relay (5) →"85"
terminal of engine stop relay (5) →ground.
As a result, the engine stop motor (6) is rotated by the current flow from the battery (1) →fusible link (2) →
"B" terminal of the engine stop motor (6) → "P2" terminal of engine stop motor (6) → "87" terminal of
engine stop relay (5) →"30" terminal of the engine stop relay (5) →"A" terminal of engine stop motor (6) →
"E" terminal of engine stop motor (6) →ground. The engine stop motor opens (pushes) the fuel shut off
lever of the fuel injection pump and the system is in the running mode. The engine stop motor rotates 180°
and comes to a stop due to the cam switch which shuts off the current to the motor.
When the starter switch is in the "ON" position, the internal components of the engine stop motor‘s cam
switch is in running mode position.

P1 87a TML
30
P2 87 OFF
A 85 86 PREHEAT
B
ON
E
START
5
6
0.5G
4
2
ACC C
B
R2
3
A BR
R1 - + - +
P1
P2 1
A B
ENGINE RUNNING MODE

ARS0060L
Figure 6 ENGINE STOP CIRCUIT - RUNNING MODE
Reference Reference
Number Number
3 Starter Switch 6 Engine Stop Motor

Page 12
Operation In Engine Stop Mode
When the starter switch (3) is in the "OFF" position, the electric current flow to the coil of the engine stop
relay (5) is shut off.
As a result, the "30" and "87a" contact point of the engine stop relay are connected and current is supplied
to the engine stop motor from the battery (1) →fusible link (2) →"B" terminal of engine stop motor (6) →
"P1" terminal of engine stop motor (6) →"87a" terminal of engine stop relay (5) →"30" terminal of engine
stop relay (5) →"A" terminal of engine stop motor (6) →"E" terminal of engine stop motor (6) → ground
and the motor is rotated.
The shut off lever of the fuel injection pump, linked to the engine stop motor by a cable, is moved to the
close (pull) position and the engine is stopped. The engine stop motor moves 180° from the running mode
position and is stopped by the internal cam switch which cuts off the current to the motor.
When the starter switch is in the "OFF" position, the internal components of the engine stop motor‘s cam
switch is in the stop mode position.

P1 87a TML
30
P2 87 OFF
A 85 86 PREHEAT
B
ON
E
START
5
6
0.5G
4
2
ACC C
B
R2
3
A BR
R1 - + - +
P1
P2 1
A B
ENGINE STOP MODE

ARS0070L
Figure 7 ENGINE STOP CIRCUIT - STOP MODE
Reference Reference
Number Number
3 Starter Switch 6 Engine Stop Motor

Page 13
CHARGING SYSTEM
When the starter switch (5) is turned to the "ON" position, an initial excited current flows to the field coil of
the alternator (7) through the battery relay (2) and circuit breaker (4). When the engine is started from this
condition the alternator (7) starts charging. The current flows from the "B" terminal of alternator (7) →
circuit breaker (4) →battery relay (2) →battery (1).
The alternator also supplies electric current to other electrical components. When the alternator (7) starts
to operate, a current flows from the "R(I)" terminal of alternator → diode (8) → battery relay (2) coil
securing a path for the charging current to the battery (1). Thus preventing the possibility of a high voltage
build up and possible damage to the electric system.
ACC C
B
R2
5
BR
0.5G
R1
6
3
8
4 2
B A
BR
E
- + - +
R(I) B(B+) P(R) 12V 150AH 12V 150AH
STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION
1
OFF SG
PREHEAT 7
ON
R
START F
E
ARS0080L
Figure 8 CHARGING CIRCUIT
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 5 Starter Switch
2 Battery Relay 6 Fuse Box
3 Fusible Link 7 Alternator
4 Circuit Breaker 8 Diode

Page 14
Page 15
MONITORING SYSTEM
5
+ 7
-
2
4 R
3 9
1
10
6
02/05 [MO] 11:30A
ENG SPEED
2059 RPM
11
POWER DISPLAY
AUTO
ESC
14
12
13
15
16 21
22 IT
UN 43-1046
L
RO 25 V
NT .
24
CO RT NO
PA LT .
VO T NO
LO OO
EW
DA
23 19
20
17 24 18
BLS0100L
Figure 9

Page 16
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 14 Light Switch
2 Battery 15 Steering Console
3 Engine Speed Sensor 16 Control Unit
4 Return Filter Switch 17 High Beam Switch
5 Pilot Filter Switch 18 Parking Switch
6 e-EPOS Controller 19 Travel, Work, Park Select
7 Alternator Switch
8 Warning Buzzer 20 Transmission Pressure
Sensor
Pump Discharge Pressure
9 21 Brake Pressure Sensor
Sensor
Engine Coolant 22 Right Side Combination
10 Switch
Temperature Sensor
11 Fuel Sensor 23 Left side Combination
Switch
12 Air Cleaner Indicator
24 Pilot Relay
13 Engine Oil Pressure Switch
The monitoring system displays the various data and warning signals onto the instrument panel by
processing the information gathered from the e-EPOS controller. It displays information selected by the
operator.

Page 17
INSTRUMENT PANEL
6 7 8 9 10 11
< CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL NO.>
AMP 040 20P
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
(CN7)
1 2
5 1
10
12 13
02/05 [MO] 11:30A 4
ENG SPEED
3
2059 RPM
POWER DISPLAY
AUTO
ESC
14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21
BLS0110L
Figure 10

Page 18
Gauges Warning Lights Mode Select Switches
1. Engine Coolant Temp. 6. Charge Warning Light 18. Power Mode Select Switch
Gauge (Up Arrow Button)
7. Engine Oil Pressure
2. Fuel Gauge Warning Light 19. Trenching Mode Select
Switch (Down Arrow
3. Multifunction Gauge and 8. Coolant Temp. Warning
Button)
Graphic Information Area Light
20. Auto Idle Switch (Enter
4. Digital Clock 9. Preheat Completion Light
Button)
5. Service Hour Meter 10. Work Lamp Indicator Light
21. Display Select Switch
11. Overload Warning Light (Escape Button)
12. Left Directional / Hazard
Indicator Light
13. Right Directional / Hazard
Indicator Light
14. High Beam Indicator Light
15. Travel Indicator Light
16. Parking Brake Indicator
Light
17. Brake Fluid Pressure
Warning Light
When the engine starter switch is turned to the "I" (ON) position, all bands of gauges, indicator lights of
switches/buttons and indicator/warning lights will turn "ON" and the alarm buzzer will sound for about 2
seconds.
During this time, a moving excavator will appear on the digital clock and graphic information area (3 and 4,
Figure 10).

Page 19
MONITORING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
23
26 27
TURN SIGNAL (R)
L2
30
TURN SIGNAL (L)
L1
31
BEAM
L3
32
35
TRAVEL
L4
33 34 36
PARKING (T / M)
L5
BRAKE OIL PRESS
L6 28
37
25 24
1 HOUR
29
2 21
3
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6
4
19
ILLUMINATION 18
16
EL
5
6
WARNING LAMP
L1 : BATTERY CHARGE 20
L2 : ENG OIL PRESS
L3 : WATER TEMP
17
L4 : PREHEAT 7
L5 : WORK LAMP 22
L6 : OVER LOAD
8
LOD DISPLAY PANEL
WATER TEMPERATURE
FUEL LEVEL
9
GRAPHIC DISPLAY 11
10 12
13
14
POWE R DISPLA Y
AUTO
ES C
15
BCS0620L
Figure 11

Page 20
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 20 Fusible Link
2 Warning Buzzer 21 Fuse Box
3 Light Switch 22 Check Connector
4 Starter Switch 23 Steering Console
5 Pump Discharge Pressure 24 Hour Meter
Sensor (Front Pump) 25 Control Unit
6 Pump Discharge Pressure 26 Blinker Unit
Sensor (Rear Pump)
27 Pilot Relay
7 Coolant Temperature
28 Transmission Pressure
Sensor
Sensor
8 Fuel Level Sensor
29 Brake Oil Pressure Sensor
9 Engine Speed Sensor
30 Left Directional Indicator
10 Hydraulic Oil Temp. Sensor Light Switch
11 Engine Oil Pressure Switch 31 Right Directional Indicator
12 Air Cleaner Indicator Light Switch
13 Return Filter Switch 32 High Beam Switch
14 Pilot Filter Switch 33 Travel Select Switch
15 Alternator 34 Parking Brake Switch
16 e-EPOS Controller 35 Forward Run Select Switch
17 Battery 36 Backward Run Select
18 Battery Relay Switch
19 Circuit Breaker 37 Zener Diode

Page 21
OPERATION
INSTRUMENTS
Sensor Specification
Function Display Input
Input Specification
Terminal
RED 41°C (106°F) →1,372
H ohms
GREEN
61°C (142°F) →855 ohms
Engine WHITE CN4-5
107°C 102°C (216°F)→160 ohms
Coolant
Temperature 105°C
CN4-6 105°C (221°F) →147
C ohms
61°C 107°C (225°F) →128
41°C ARS0780L ohms
GREEN
F
RED 1/10 LCD Blinking →over
CN4-7
Fuel Level 5K ohms
CN4-8
E FULL →under 525 ohms
1/10 ARS0790L
02/05 [MO] 11:30A N = 129 f / 60 (S140W-V)
ENG SPEED CN4-16 N = 129 f / 60 (S160W-V)

Tachometer
CN4-17 N = 129 f / 60 (S180W-V)
1950 RPM N = 129 f / 60 (S210W-V)
ARO0160L
02/05 [MO] 11:30A
BATTERY CN7-9
Voltmeter 0 - 32 VDC
CN7-19
28.5 VOLT
ARO0180L

Page 22
Sensor Specification
Function Display Input
Input Specification
Terminal
02/05 [MO] 11:30A

Main pump
discharge FRONT PUMP CN4-1
pressure CN4-2
(front pump)
320 BAR V = 0.00816 x P + 1.0
ARO0190L V: Sensor output voltage

(V)
P: Displayed pressure
02/05 [MO] 11:30A (Bar)
Main pump
discharge
REAR PUMP CN4-3
pressure
(rear pump) CN4-4
313 BAR
ARO0200L

Page 23
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Input
Description Symbol Operation Remarks
Terminal
Lights up when not

charging [R(I)
Lights up before
terminal output
engine start up and
Charge CN2 - 1 drops below 12±1V]
shut off once engine
and over charging
is running.
[R(I) terminal output
HAOA610L increase over 33 V].
Lights up when After starting

engine oil pressure engine, if engine oil
Engine Oil switch is turned pressure is
CN2 - 11 "ON" (Oil pressure
Pressure insufficient after 8
drops below 0.7 kg/ seconds, a warning
HAOA620L
cm2 (10 psi). buzzer will sound.
Lights up when the

resistance of
Engine CN4 - 5 engine coolant
Coolant
CN 4 - 6 temperature sensor
Temperature
drops below 128
HAOD350L
ohms.
Lights up when
preheat process is
Preheat CN7 - 6 completed.
(Approximately 19
seconds from start)
HAOA639L
Lights up when
Work Light CN2 - 7 work light switch is
turned "ON."

Page 24
Input
Terminal
Lights up when
Warning buzzer will
lifting load exceeds
sound.
limit. (When the
CN1 - 3 over load warning 2.39 V (S140W-V)
Overload
switch is turned
(Optional) CN1 - 4 2.39 V (S160W-V)
"ON," output
voltage increases 2.39 V (S210W-V)
ARO0220L
over reading in
2.31 V (S180W-V)
remarks.)
Graphic Information Area
02/05 [MO] 11:30A
2059 RPM Lights up when air

Air Cleaner CN2 - 12 Symbol is blinking.
Air Cleaner cleaner is clogged
CLOGGED!!
ARO0210L
02/05 [MO] 11:30A Lights up when

2059 RPM return filter
Return Filter CN2 - 13 pressure increases Symbol is blinking.
Return Filter
over 1.5 kg/cm2 (21
CLOGGED!!
psi).
ARO0230L
02/05 [MO] 11:30A

Lights up when pilot
2059 RPM filter pressure
Pilot Filter CN2 - 14 increases over 1.0 Symbol is blinking.
Pilot Filter
CLOGGED!! kg/cm2 (14 psi).
ARO0240L

Page 25
CONTROL UNIT
OPERATION SCHEMATIC
1 B
E
8 19
L
TURN SIGNAL (R) L2
2 11 87a
30
87
TURN SIGNAL (L)
L1
1 12
85 86
BEAM L3
3 13
9
7 3 4
TRAVEL
L4
4 1 2 14 15 5
5 8 13 +
PARKING (T/M) L5
6 4 9 S
BRAKE OIL PRESS
L6 17
12 5
|
8
7 6
20
11
10 R(1)
10
2 7
7
8
9
|
+
6
18
16
BCS0630L
Figure 12
Reference
Description Number
Number
11 Right Directional Indicator
1 Steering Console Light Switch
2 Instrument Panel 12 Left Directional Indicator
3 Starter Switch Light Switch
4 Forward Run Select Switch 13 High Beam Switch
5 Backward Run Select 14 Travel Select Switch
Switch 15 Parking Brake Switch
6 Fuse Box 16 Lamp Switch
7 Control Unit 17 Transmission Pressure
8 Blinker Unit Sensor
9 Warning Buzzer 18 Brake Oil Pressure Switch
10 Alternator 19 Pilot Relay
20 Zener Diode

Page 26
OPERATION SPECIFICATION
No Input Output Remark

Warning buzzer sounds
1 Starter switch turns "OFF"/Lamp switch turns "ON."
(Immediately).
Brake pressure switch turns Warning buzzer sounds
"ON." (Immediately).
When the output of
2 alternator’s "I" terminal is Forward run and backward
over 14.5V ±1V. run select switches turn Warning buzzer sounds
"ON" and parking brake (Immediately).
indicator light turns "ON."
Parking brake indicator
The voltage of Over 2.60V ±0.1V
light turns "OFF."
3 transmission pressure
sensor (Between 5 and 9). Parking brake indicator
Below 2.51V ±0.1V
light turns "ON."
Travel, work select switch is Travel indicator light
When the parking brake placed in "TRAVEL." turns "ON."
4
switch turns "OFF." Travel, work select switch is Travel indicator light
placed in "WORK." turns "OFF."

Page 27
CONSOLE WARNING LIGHT
Input
Terminal
Turns on and
flashes when the
Directional left turn signal
Indicator CN11-1 switch is selected
(Left) and the hazard
switch is turned
BCS0760L "ON"
Turns on and
flashes when the
Directional right turn signal
Indicator CN11-2 switch is selected
(Right) and the hazard
switch is turned
BCS0761L "ON"
Lights up when the

High Beam CN11-3 high beams are
turned "ON"
BCS0770L
Lights up when the

"travel, work" select
switch is placed in
Travel CN11-4 the travel position
and the parking
brake switch turns
BCS0780L "OFF"
Lights up when the

Parking P CN11-5 "park" select switch
is turned "ON"
BCS0790L

Page 28
Lights up when the
brake oil pressure
switch is turned A warning buzzer
Brake CN11-6 "ON" (Oil pressure will simultaneously
drops below 65 kg/ sound
BCS080
cm2)

Page 29
INITIAL OPERATION
Item Input (Terminal) Output (Operation and initial setting mode)
Initial When battery voltage is input • All LCD, LED and warning lights are turned on
Operation to CN7 - 9 (starter switch is and turned off after about 2 seconds.
turned from "OFF" to "ON"
• Warning buzzer is activated and turned off
position).
after about 2 seconds.
• Power mode: Standard mode.
• Work Mode: Digging mode.
• Auto Idle: High Output (Activation).
• Numerical display: Engine speed.
• Clock: Current time display.
NOTE: Refer to the clock setting method of operation manual for time setting.

Page 30
MODE SELECT SWITCH
Power Mode / Trenching Mode Switch
e-EPOS Output
Output Check
(Operation Pump Discharge
Operation Mode Swing Priority
mode display Volume Control 7-Segment
Solenoid
LED) Valve Current Display
Valve
(mA)
Power Mode Power Mode ON Variable Output - 9x
Standard Mode OFF 0 - 7x
Work Mode Trenching Mode ON - ON x2
Digging Mode OFF - OFF x0
Auto Idle Switch
Output Check (Operation e-EPOS Output (CN1 - 7

Operation Mode
mode display LED) Terminal)
Auto Idle Activation ON H (11 ±1.5V)
Cancellation OFF L (0 - 1V)

Page 31
GRAPHIC INFORMATION AREA DISPLAY
OVERVIEW
Many kinds of condition of machine are displayed on the letter information display department. The
information display department is divided into two menus. One is main menu for user and the other is
special menu for specialist. These menus can be moved from normal display mode by the combination of
select buttons.
02/05 [MO] 11:30A

ENG SPEED
5
2059 RPM
POWER DISPLAY
AUTO
ESC
1 2 3 4
ARS0801L
Figure 13
Selection Buttons Graphic Display Area

1. Up Arrow Button 5. Letter Information Display Department
2. Down Arrow Button
3. Enter Button
4. Escape Button

Page 32
MAIN MENUS FOR THE GRAPHIC DISPLAY AREA
1. Main menu: Language setting, Time setting, Filter/Oil information
2. Special menu: Information of machine status, failure information, Information of machine operation.
MENU SELECTION BUTTONS
1. Up Arrow Button ( , 1 on Figure 13): Move the cursor to up, left and previous screen.
2. Down Arrow Button ( , 2 on Figure 13): Move the cursor to down, right and next screen.
3. Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 13): Move the menu to selected mode. When setting the menu, this
button is used to function as the select button.
4. Escape Button (ESC, 4 on Figure 13): Move a screen to previous menu or main menu.

Page 33
MAIN MENU
When the "ESC" button is pressed for more than
3 seconds, the main menu screen is displayed.
Main menu offers three sub-menus (language
setting, time setting, or filter/oil information) to
MAIN MENU
the operator.
Language 1
Refer to the "Operation and Maintenance
Manual" for details. Set Clock
Filter / Oil Info
ARO0330L
Figure 14
LANGUAGE SETTING
This mode is used for setting desired language.
LANGUAGE
Francais
Deutsch 4
Set : English
ARO0341L
Figure 15
TIME SETTING
This mode is used for setting time on the digital
clock.
SET CLOCK
02 : 30 P
2001 02 / 15
:+ : :MOVE
ARO0380L
Figure 16

Page 34
FILTER/OIL INFORMATION
This mode displays total operating hours of
filters and oils.
After changing the filter and oil, reset the
operating hour and then the operating hours
until the next service interval can be easily
checked.
1.Fuel Filter
Hrs: 0232 Reset:
ARO0400L
Figure 17
Menu Display Order and Icon Explanation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Fuel Filter 2. Air Cleaner 3. Engine Oil Filter 4. Return Filter
8. Coolant Water 7. Hydraulic Oil 6. Engine Oil 5. Pilot Filter

ARO0410L
Figure 18

Page 35
SPECIAL MENU
In this menu, many types of operating conditions and functions can be accessed and disp[layed, including
the e-EPOS controller. This menu is mainly used for machine testing and failure diagnostics.
The special menu offers three sub-menus;
1. Machine status.
2. Failure information.
3. Information on machine operation
ENTERING/ACCESSING AND EXITING/ESCAPING MENUS
Entering/Accessing Menus
1 2 3 4
ARO0250L
Figure 19
When normal mode screen is displayed, if the enter button ( , 3) and escape button (ESC, 4) are
pressed simultaneously for more than 3 seconds, normal mode screen (Figure 20) will be changed to
special menu screen (Figure 21).
Normal Mode Screen
NOTE: Normal mode screen can
display many kinds of display 02/05 [MO] 11:30A
mode by selecting, for example,
engine revolution (RPM),
battery voltage (V), front pump ENG SPEED
pressure (BAR), rear pump
1950 RPM
pressure (BAR) and so on by
selecting.
ARO0160L
Figure 20

Page 36
Special Menu Screen
NOTE: Displayed language on the
special menu screen consists
of Korean and English.
SPECIAL MENU
If any language except for achine Info 1
Korean is selected during
language selection mode of
main menu, only English will be
Failure Info
displayed on special menu
screen.
Operating Hrs
ARS0850L
Figure 21
Exiting/Escaping Menus
1. If escape button (ESC, 4 on Figure 19) is pressed for more than 1 second, the special menu screen
will be returned to the normal mode screen.
2. If this special menu is "ON" without any activity, for more than 20 seconds, it will turn to the normal
mode screen.
3. After the turning starter switch to the "OFF" position, turn it back to the "ON" position, and the normal
mode screen displayed once again.
SPECIAL MENU SELECTIONS

Sub-menu Selection Method
Various sub-menus can be selected by pressing
"Up ( , 1 on Figure 19)" and "Down ( , 2 on SPECIAL MENU
Figure 19)" button.
Move the cursor to desired menu and a selected achine Info 1
menu will be inverse displayed.
When the selected menu is inverse displayed, Failure Info
press the "Enter ( , 3 on Figure 19)" button for
menu selection.
Operating Hrs
ARS0850L
Figure 22
Information of Machine Status
1. Entering Sub-menus: When cursor is
located on "Machine Info" of special menu
screen, press "Enter ( , 3 on Figure 19)"
MACHINE INFO
button and the "Machine Info Sub-menu"
will be displayed. EPPR Current 1
2. Exiting Sub-menus: If escape button (ESC,
4 on Figure 19) is pressed for more than 1
Dial Voltage
second, display will be turned to previous
sub-menu.
TPS Voltage
ARS0820L
Figure 23

Page 37
Contents of Machine Status
Display Item of Machine State Information Display Remarks

1. EPPR Current "mA" EPPR valve current
2. Dial Voltage "mV" Dial voltage
3. TPS Voltage "mV" TPS voltage
1. Alternator 8. Pressure (Px) Input status delivered from
2. Power Max 9. E/G Oil Press. switches and sensors to e-
3. Work/Travel EPOS controller is displayed as
10. Air Cleaner on or off.
Solenoid
4. Input State 4. Hi Speed On or Off * Number 3 (Work/Travel
11. Return Filter
Solenoid Solenoid) is used only wheel
5. Auto Travel 12. Pilot Filter type machine.
6. Work Lamp 13. OWD Select * Number 13 (OWD Select) is
7. Pressure (Py) optional part.
1. Relief Press Up 4. Spare Out 1 Output status delivered from e-
5. Output
2. High Speed 5. Spare Out 2 On or Off EPOS controller to solenoid
State
3. Swing Priority valves is displayed as on or off.
6. Hydraulic Oil Temp °C (°F) Hydraulic oil temperature.
On machine with overload
7. Boom Pressure (Opt) BAR warning device, it displays
cylinder pressure.
8. T/M Pressure (Wheel Type) BAR Gear pump pressure.
Sub-menu Selections
EPPPR Current Input State

Dial Voltage Output State
TPS Voltage Hyd. Oil Temp.
Boom Press
T/M Press
ARS0860L
Figure 24

Page 38
Display Example: Machine Status Information
1. EPPR Valve Current
EPPR CURRENT
598 mA
ARS0870L
Figure 25
2. Dial Voltage
DIAL VOLTAGE
2089 mV
ARS0880L
Figure 26
3. TPS Voltage
Output voltage of throttle position sensor.
TPS VOLTAGE
2095 mV
ARS0890L
Figure 27

Page 39
4. Input Status
"YES" or "NO" for alternator’s generation
(Generation: "ON"/ Non generation:
"OFF"), selection status of select switch
M AC H I N E I N F O
(Selection: "ON"/ Non selection: "OFF")
and the other statuses of on/off type Input State 4
sensors.
Output State
Hyd. Oil Temp
ARS1780L
Figure 28
1. Alternator : OFF 4. Hi Speed Sel. : OFF

2. Power Max. : ON 5. Auto Travel : ON
3. Work/Travel Sel. : OFF 6. Work Lamp : OFF
13. OWD Select : OFF 7. Pressure (Py) : OFF

8. Pressure (Px) : ON
9. E/G Oil Pres. : OFF
10. Air Cleaner : OFF

11. Return Filter : ON
12. Pilot Filter : OFF
ARS0900L
Figure 29

Page 40
5. Output Status: Output status of solenoid valves and spare valves are displayed. (Output: "ON"/ Non
output: "OFF")
1. Relief Pess Up : OFF 4. Spare Out 1 : OFF

2. High Speed : ON 5. Spare Out 2 : ON
3. Swing Priority : OFF
ARS0920L
Figure 30
6. Hydraulic Oil Temperature
HYD. OIL TEMP

LOW HIGH
ARS0870L
Figure 31
• Display Specification
Sensor Input
BAR Graph Display Input Terminal Remarks
Specification
Below 30°C
1/6 BAR Lit Over 1,510 Ω
(Below 86°F)
31 - 50°C
1/6 - 2/6 BAR Lit 745 - 1,510 Ω
(87 - 122°F)
51 - 75°C
1/6 - 3/6 BAR Lit CN 3 - 4 332 - 745 Ω
(123 - 167°F)
CN 3 - 5 76 - 85°C
1/6 - 4/6 BAR Lit 244 - 332 Ω
(168 - 185°F)
86 - 95°C
1/6 - 5/6 BAR Lit 181 - 244 Ω
(186 - 203°F)
Over 96°C
1/6 - 6/6 BAR Lit Under 181 Ω
(Over 204°F)

Page 41
7. Boom Pressure (Optional)
On machine with OWD (Overload Warning
Device), detected pressure from boom
cylinder is displayed with numeric values BOOM PRESSURE
(Unit: Bar).
The relative equation between the, output
voltage of pressure sensor, and the
pressure of boom cylinder, is as follows. 205 BAR
• V = 0.00816P + 1
V: Output voltage of pressure sensor (V).
ARS0940L
P: Displayed pressure (Bar).
Figure 32
NOTE: At standard machine, "0 BAR"
is always displayed.
Failure Information
1. Entering Sub-menus: When a cursor is
located in "Failure Info" of special menu
screen press enter button ( , 3 on
Figure 19) and "Failure Info" screen is SPECIAL MENU
displayed.
2. Exiting Sub-menus: If escape button (ESC,
Machine Info 1
4 on Figure 19) is pressed for more than 1
second, this information screen will be ailure Info 2
returned to previous screen.
Operating Info 3
ARS0930L
Figure 33
* Real-time Failure:
Current status of failure is
displayed.
* Failure Log:
FA I L U R E I N F O
Memorized record of past
failure is displayed. Realtime Fail
* Delete Fail Log:
This mode is used to delete all
Failure Log
of the memorized record of past
failure.
Delete Fail Log
ARS0950L
Figure 34

Page 42
A. Current failure information
Current status of failure is displayed
(Failure code, failure contents).
REALTIME FAIL
When a number of failures are
produced, failure information can be
checked by using "PRV" ( , 1 on
CODE:12
Figure 19) or "NXT" ( , 2 on Figure Press up s/v open
19) button.
* CODE: 12: Unique code of failure PRV: NXT: 01/02
information.
ARS0960L
* 01/02: A serial number of current Figure 35
failure/ total quantity of failure.
This example shows one of two
failures.
B. Past failure information
Memorized record of past failure is
displayed (Failure code, failure
contents).
FAILURE LOG
When a number of failures are
produced, failure information can be
CODE:12 N:001 0075 Hr
checked by using "PRV" ( , 1 on Press up s/v open
Figure 19) or "NXT" ( , 2 on Figure
19) button. PRV: NXT: 01/01
NOTE: " N: xxx ": "xxx" means that the
ARS0980L
totally counted number of the
same failure. Figure 36
" xxxx Hr ": It will display the

operation hour until the failure
is generated. (Above example
screen shows that breaking of a
wire of pressure solenoid valve
is generated at 75Hr.)

Page 43
C. Failure record deletion
This mode is used to delete the
memorized record of past failure. If
this mode is selected, all records will
FA I L U R E L O G
be deleted.
When "YES" ( , 3 on Figure 19)
All Fail Log
button is pressed, the memorized will be DELETE.
record will be deleted.
At this time, deletion signal will be YES: NO: ESC
displayed and the screen will move to
previous menu after deletion. ARS0970L
Figure 37
This screen will be displayed during 3
seconds.
When "NO" (ESC, 4 on Figure 19)
button is pressed, the screen will
recover to previous menu without
deletion.
Code Description of Failure Information
Code State
0x Short Circuit
1x Open circuit
2x Output error
3x Output error
8x Communication

Page 44
Display Contents of Failure Information Code
Reset
Code Contents Cause Operation
Procedure
Communication error
Automatic reset
between e-EPOS
82 Communication Error
controller and instrument
* Note when problem is
corrected
panel
01 EPPR v/v short Short Circuit After correcting
problem, turn
02 Press Up s/v short Short Circuit Cut off output
start switch
current (0 mA)
from "OFF" to
03 Swing pri. s/v short Short Circuit
"ON."

Page 45
Reset
Code Contents Cause Operation
Procedure
11 EPPR v/v open Open Circuit -
12 Press Up s/v open Open Circuit -
13 Swing pri. s/v open Open Circuit -
Output voltage Over
21 Dial Voltage Err (H)
4.6±0.2 V
-
Output voltage Over

22 Dial Voltage Err (L)
0.4±0.2 V
-
Output voltage Over Cut off EPPR v/

23 TPS Voltage Err (H)
4.6±0.2 V v current (0 mA)
Output voltage Over Cut off EPPR v/
24 TPS Voltage Err (L)
0.4±0.2 V v current (0 mA)
Output voltage Over
25 Fpump Sensor Err (H)
4.6±0.2 V
-
Output voltage Over

26 Fpump Sensor Err (L)
0.4±0.2 V
-
Output voltage Over

27 Rpump Sensor Err (H)
4.6±0.2 V
-
Output voltage Over Automatic reset

28 Rpump Sensor Err (L)
0.4±0.2 V
- when problem is
corrected
Under 1067±20Hz (On
condition that alternator
29 Speed Sensor Err
output exceeds over
-
12±1V)
Sensor’s resistance -
31 Fuel shot to GND between two terminals is
under 150±100Ω
Sensor’s resistance -
32 Fuel Sensor open between two terminals is
under 6.5±0.5 kΩ
Output voltage of -
33 Alternator too high alternator exceeds 33 V
for more than 3 seconds
When the output voltage -
is maintained under 18±1
for more than 3 seconds
34 Alternator too low
(On condition that speed
sensor output exceeds
over 1,067Hz)
NOTE:
1. If a communication error is generated during operation, the power mode, work mode and auto
idle mode will be maintained at the last mode setting before the failure took place until the unit is
shut down.
2. When start switch is turned to the "ON" position during a period of a communication error, the
e-EPOS controller will operate in the following modes.
• Power mode: Standard mode

Page 46
• Work mode: Digging mode
• Auto idle: "ON" (Selection state)
3. The above mentioned two statuses are applicable to normal condition of an e-EPOS controller.
4. Under the abnormal condition of an e-EPOS controller, communication cable or instrument
panel failure, "Failure code: 82" can be generated.
Information of Machine Operation

Accumulated operation hour of each mode and status is displayed.
1. Operating Hour Information
A. Entering Sub-menus: When a cursor
is located in "Operating Info" of
special menu screen (Figure 38)
SPECIAL MENU
press enter button ( , 3 on Figure
19) and "Operating Info" screen will
Machine Info 1
be displayed (Figure 39).
Failure Info 2
Operating Info 3
ARS0990L
Figure 38
B. Information screen of machine
operation (Figure 39).
OPERATING INFO
Operating Hrs
Reset Hrs
ARS1000L
Figure 39
C. Operation Hour Screen
D. Exiting Sub-menus: If escape button
(ESC, 4 on Figure 19) is pressed for
more than 1 second, this information
OPERATING HRS
screen will be returned to previous
screen. 1. Power : 0345 Hr
2. Trenching : 0190 Hr
3. Auto Idle : 0227 Hr
ARS1330L
Figure 40

Page 47
Information contents of operation hour
Item Information Contents Detection Method

Power mode switch (Instrument panel) -
Operation hours used power mode
Power Mode "ON" status and Alternator signal (CN2-
are displayed.
1)
Trenching mode switch (Instrument
Trenching Operation hours used trenching
panel) - "ON" status and Alternator signal
Mode mode are displayed.
(CN2-1)
Operation hours used auto idle Auto idle switch (Instrument panel) - "ON"
Auto Idle
status are displayed. status and Alternator signal (CN2-1)
Low speed: High speed s/v "OFF" status
and travel pressure switch "Py" (control
Travel Speed:
Operation hours used low speed valve) - "ON" status
- Low speed and high speed are displayed High speed: High speed s/v and travel
- High speed
pressure switch "Py" (control valve) -
"ON" status
Temperature of hydraulic oil is
classified 6 steps. And operation
hours of each step are displayed The resistance delivered from
Hydraulic Oil
Under 30°C (87°F) temperature sensor of hydraulic oil is
Temperature
31 - 50°C (88 - 123°F) classified 6 steps. And operation hours of
Distribution
51 - 75°C (124 - 168°F) each step are displayed. (Alternator
(°C (°F))
76 - 85°C (169 - 186°F) output)
86 - 95°C (187 - 203°F)
Over 96°C (204°F)
Temperature of coolant is classified
6 steps. And operation hours of
each step are displayed
Coolant The resistance delivered from coolant
Temperature Under 40°C (105°F) sensor is classified 6 steps. And
Distribution 41 - 60°C (106 - 141°F) operation hours of each step are
(°C (°F)) 61 - 85°C (142 - 186°F) displayed. (Alternator output)
86 - 95°C (187 - 204°F)
96 - 105°C (205 - 222°F)
Over 106°C (223°F)

Page 48
Menu Selection of Operation Hour Information
1. Power : 0345 Hr 4. Travel Speed

2. Trenching : 0190 Hr High : 0012 Hr
3. Auto Idle : 0227 Hr Low : 0059 Hr
6. Coolant Temp (°C) 5. Hyd. Oil Temp (°C)

40 ↓ : 0030 Hr 30 ↓ : 0030 Hr
41 ~ 60 : 0045 Hr 31 ~ 50 : 0045 Hr
ARS1010L
Figure 41
2. Operation hour reset

A. Entering Sub-menus: When cursor is
located in "Reset Hrs" of information
screen of operation hour press enter
OPERATING INFO
button ( , 3 on Figure 19) and
"Reset Hrs" screen will be displayed.
Operating Hrs
Reset Hrs
ARS1001L
Figure 42
B. Reset screen of operation hour
C. Exiting Sub-menus: If escape button
(ESC, 4 on Figure 19) is pressed for
more than 1 second, this information
RESET HRS
screen will be returned to previous
screen. All Operating Hours
NOTE: When "YES" ( , 3 on Figure will be DELETE.
19) button is pressed, operation
hours will reset. At this time, YES: NO: ESC
resetting signal will be
displayed and the screen will ARS1020L
move to previous menu after Figure 43
resetting.
NOTE: When "NO" (ESC, 4) button is
pressed, the screen will recover
to previous menu without
resetting.

Page 49
ELECTRONIC HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(e-EPOS)
Control System Schematic
7
11
12
3
(Wheel)
P
13
4 5
N
9
19
10
(Pump control signal)
(Potentiometer signal)
(Engine speed sensor signal) (Switch signal)

(Drive signal)
(Throttle signal)
(Engine throttle control signal)
15 17
Hi
(Throttle command)
Lo 1
(Coolant water temp. signal)
(Mode select signal)
(Auto idle signal)
(Machine information)
Sensors
18
30L
Figure 44

Page 50
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel Solenoid Valve (Pressure
11
2 Engine Control Motor Up)
3 Engine Solenoid Valve (Swing
12
Priority)
4 Main Hydraulic Pump
Solenoid Valve (High
5 Control Pump 13
Speed)
6 Control Valve
14 Travel Motor
7 Pressure Switch
15 Engine Throttle Control
8 Pump Pressure Sensor
16 Engine Control Dial
9 Engine Speed Sensor
17 e-EPOS Controller
Electro-magnetic
18 Auto Travel Select Switch
Proportional Pressure
10 Boost Switch (Right Work
Reducing Valve (E.P.P.R. 19
Valve) Lever)

Page 51
POWER MODE CONTROL
6 6
3
(Wheel type)
P
4 5
N
10
1 (Pump control signal)
g
(Drive signal)
(Engine speed sensor signal)

17
(Throttle Position signal)
(Engine throttle control signal)

15
Hi
20
(Throttle signal) Low 16
(Power mode switch signal)
ARS1040L
Figure 45
Reference Reference
Number Number
Instrument Panel (Power 9 Engine Speed Sensor
1
Mode Selection Switch) 10 E.P.P.R. Valve
2 Engine Control Motor 15 Engine Throttle Controller
3 Engine 16 Engine Control Dial
4 Main Hydraulic Pump 17 e-EPOS Controller
5 Control Pump Work / Travel Selection
20
6 Control Valve Switch (Wheel Type)
The power mode switch permits the selection of the appropriate engine power depending on the working
condition. One of the two, Power Mode or Standard Mode, setting can be selected. When the engine start
switch is turned "ON," the power mode is automatically defaulted to standard mode. The desired mode can
be selected by pressing the select button on the instrument panel. When the power mode is selected, the
indicator lamp will turn "ON" to display the selected mode.

Page 52
The quantity of oil discharged by the pump and the engine speed are determined by the mode selected by
the operator. The pump output in each mode is determined by the mode selection and is listed in the
following table
Mode Standard Mode Power Mode

Output (%) Approximately 85% 100%
OPERATION
1. Power Mode
This mode should be selected for high
speed work. In this mode the engine
output is most efficiently utilized due to the
discharged oil volume being controlled
based on the equivalent horsepower curve
at various loaded pressures. The e-EPOS
controller compares the target engine
speed with the actual engine speed and
controls the signal to the E.P.P.R. (Electric
Proportional Pressure Reducing) valve
which in turn varies the pump output
quantity. ARO0260L
If the load increases, the engine speed will Figure 46
fall below the rated speed. When this
occurs, the controller senses this decrease
and immediately reduces the pump
discharge volume to maintain the engine
speed at the rated level.
On the other hand, if the load is decreased the controller increases the discharge volume of the pump
to maintain the engine speed at the rated level.
By repeating these control operations, the engine speed is maintained at the rated speed so that
maximum power can be generated.
In Power Mode, the controller receives engine speed signals from the engine speed sensor and the
throttle position sensor (sensor is built into engine control motor) and converts it to an operating
signal current and is then transferred to the pump’s E.P.P.R valve. At this time the E.P.P.R. valve
converts the electric signal to the corresponding control pressure and sends it to the two pumps,
adjusting the pump discharge volume to the desired level.

Page 53
A C
B D
HDA6020L
Figure 47
Reference Reference
Number Number
A Engine Horsepower (hp) D Pump Discharge Pressure
B Engine Speed (rpm) (kg/cm2)
C Pump Discharge Volume
(liter/min)

Page 54
2. Standard Mode
Standard Mode is used for general work. When this mode is selected it will reduce noise and fuel
consumption in comparison with Power Mode. The current to the E.P.P.R. valve is shut off and pump
discharge volume is controlled by pump regulator.
A C
B D
HDA6022L
Figure 48
Reference Reference
Number Number
A Engine Horsepower (hp) D Pump Discharge Pressure
B Engine Speed (rpm) (kg/cm2)
C Pump Discharge Volume
(liter/min)

Page 55
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
As sensor that senses the engine fuel levers position (angle), in case of selecting III speed mode, by
informing the position of fuel lever to EPOS-V controller. It will act a role to determine the rated engine rpm
in the sensing control of rotation.
As shown in the graph below, in case that the fuel changes from low to high speed, the output voltage
between No.2 terminal and No.3 terminal will change from 3.75V to 1.0V.
NOTE: If the throttle position sensor is not adjusted properly, since the performance of the
equipment may not be displayed or overloaded at the work, the accurate adjustment is
required.
1
2
3
5V
4V 3.75 0.15V
3V
2V 1.49 0.05V
1.0 0.1V
1V
1050 2050 2250
HAAA4421
Figure 49
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Ground (-) 3 5V INput (+)
2 Output

Page 56
Page 57
POWER MODE CONTROL - CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
BCS0640L
Figure 50

Page 58
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Engine Throttle Controller
2 Battery Relay 8 Engine Control Motor
3 Fuse 9 Engine Control Dial
4 e-EPOS Controller 10 Throttle Position Sensor
5 Instrument Panel 11 Travel Select Switch
6 Engine Speed Sensor 12 E.P.P.R Valve

Page 59
WORK MODE CONTROL
6 Main Relief v/v 6
12
3
(Wheel)
1 4
(Drive signal)
17
15 (Engine throttle control signal)
Hi
(Throttle signal) Lo
16
(Trenching mode switch signal)
ARS1070L
Figure 51
Reference Reference
Number Number
Instrument Panel (Trenching 6 Control Valve
1
Mode Select Switch) 12 Solenoid Valve
2 Engine Control Motor 15 Engine Throttle Control
4 Main Hydraulic Pump 17 e-EPOS Controller
5 Control Pump
Depending on the working condition, one of two work modes, "DIGGING" or "TRENCHING" can be
selected from the instrument panel.
When the engine start switch is turned "ON," the work mode is automatically defaulted to digging mode.
Depending on the trenching mode selected, the control valve solenoid adjusts the assignment of hydraulic
oil flow to each device on the equipment.

Page 60
OPERATION
1. Digging Mode
This mode is used for general digging work, loading work and ground leveling work requiring quick
stops. The current to the solenoid valve for swing priority is shut off.
2. Trenching Mode
This mode is used for heavy duty ditch
digging work or for loading work requiring
big swing angles. The voltage is assigned
to the swing priority control valve activating
the swing control valve restricting the flow
of oil to the boom and the arm.
ARO0270L
Figure 52

Page 61
WORK MODE CONTROL - CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
10A 3 20A
2
5
9
10
4 1
CN1-1
19
CN1-2
20
CN1-8
CN1-9
1
2
CN3-9
CN3-10
TxD CN1-14 6
RxD TxD RS-422
CN3-11 RxD
5 CN3-12
TxD RxD
3 CN3-8
CN7
CN4
CN1 CN2 CN3
TERMINAL NO
6 5 3 2 1 5 4 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 12 11 10 12 11 10 7 6 14 13
(CN4) (CN3)
(CN7)
8 7 6 5 4 3 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 14 13 12 11 9 21 18 17 16 15 13 12 11
(CN2) (CN1)
ARS1080L
Figure 53
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 4 e-EPOS Controller
2 Battery Relay 5 Instrument Panel
3 Fuse Solenoid Valve (Swing
6
Priority)

Page 62
Page 63
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
(Feedback Signal)
15 3
16
(Command Signal) (Drive Signal)
10A
BATT. RELAY
9
10 AUTO IDLE COMMAND
5 4
17 OVER HEAT e-EPOS CONTROLLER

M
5 5 BATTERY
RETRACT 3 8 (+) 5V 1 1
5V (+) CW LOW
2
1 6
(-) (-)
3
12
3 16
2
15
ARS1090L
Figure 54
Reference Reference
Number Number
When the engine control dial is moved the output voltage changes according to the dial position. This
signal is input to the engine throttle controller. The engine throttle controller then compares the input
voltage from the engine speed dial with the feedback signal from the throttle position sensor built into the
engine control motor and drives the motor to the position set by the control dial. When the command signal
and the potentiometer feed back signals are the same the engine controller shuts off the current to the
control motor. The engine control motor cable is a solid type and is connected to the engine fuel injection
control lever. The engine speed is controlled by the movement of the fuel injection lever which is directly
linked with the rotation of the control motor.

Page 64
ENGINE CONTROL MOTOR
1
2 3
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
P4
(GREEN)
P1(Gr) P2(P) P3(L) M

P5
(YELLOW)
(RETRACT) (GRAY) P1
ACCEL
(PINK) P2
P4(G) P5(Y) + Vs
-
(5.0V)
(BLUE) P3 Vp
DECEL
(EXTEND)
ARS1100L
Figure 55
Reference
Description
Number
1 Motor Assembly
2 Cable
3 Spring Assembly
The engine control motor uses a D.C. motor with a built in potentiometer to sense the position of the control
cable. If an abnormal load (worn or kinked control cable) is sensed in the control motor, the engine
controller cuts off the electric current flowing to the engine control motor to protect the system. In such a
case, the engine control motor will not operate even though the engine control dial is moved.
The starter switch should be turned off and the cause of abnormal load should be repaired and the starter
switch can be turned on again. The engine control dial can once again be used to control the engine
speed.
IMPORTANT
When the engine control motor has been replaced or repaired refer to Adjusting the Engine
Control Device for correct adjustment of the engine control system. The engine will not perform
to its maximum efficiency if it is not adjusted properly.

Page 65
ENGINE CONTROL DIAL
1st STEP 7th STEP 13th STEP
CCW ( 10 ) ( 10 ) CW
MECHANICAL MECHANICAL
STOP STOP
(V)
5
4.0V
4
3 2.5V
2
2 1.0V
1
0 SETUP
1ST 2nd 7th 12th 13th
CCW CW
STOP STOP
VIEW ( POTENTIOMETER BOTTOM)

1 2 3
HDA6033L
Figure 56

Page 66
Reference
Description
Number
1 Knob
2 Potentiometer (Variable
Resistor)
The engine control dial has a built in potentiometer. When the control knob is moved the output voltage
(through terminals 2 and 3) will vary from the 5 V supplied from the throttle controller as shown in the
graph.

Page 67
ENGINE CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
BCS0650L
Figure 57
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 8 Engine Control Motor
2 Battery Relay 9 Engine Control Dial
3 Fuse 10 Pressure Switch (Py Port)
4 e-EPOS Controller 11 Pressure Switch (Px Port)
5 Instrument Panel 12 E.P.P.R Valve
7 Engine Throttle Controller 13 Throttle Position Sensor

Page 68
AUTOMATIC DECELERATION CONTROL (AUTO IDLE
CONTROL)
(Feedback Signal)
16 15 2 3
M
(Command Signal) (Drive Signal)
7 1
17
7 Auto deceleration Switch Signal
ARS1120L
Figure 58
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 15 Engine Throttle Controller
2 Engine Control Motor 16 Engine Control Dial
3 Engine 17 e-EPOS Controller
7 Pressure Switch
If the machine is idling without the controls being operated or is waiting for a dump truck the engine speed
is automatically lowered. Once the controls are operated and work is being started the machine will be
restored to the previous settings. As a result, noise and fuel consumption will be reduced. This function can
be selected or cancelled through the Auto Idle Select Switch on the instrument panel.
The initial setting at start-up is with this switch in the select position. Approximately 4 seconds after this
function is selected, if all work levers are in the neutral position, the e-EPOS controller sends an automatic
reduction signal to the throttle controller. When the engine throttle controller receives this signal, it is
compared with the signal set by the engine control dial. The lower of the two signals is selected and the
engine control motor is adjusted to this engine speed.
The neutral status of the machine is detected by the two pressure switches in the control valve. When the
work levers are in the neutral position, the switch is in the off position.

Page 69
AUTOMATIC DECELERATION CONTROL CIRCUIT
BCS0660L
Figure 59
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Engine Throttle Controller
2 Battery Relay 8 Engine Control Motor
3 Fuse 9 Engine Control Dial
4 e-EPOS Controller 10 Pressure Switch (Py port)
5 Instrument Panel 11 Pressure Switch (Px port)

Page 70
OPERATION
Division Auto Idle Operation Auto Idle Cancel

Control condition Auto idle switch: OFF and Auto idle switch: OFF and Travel/
Travel/Work levers: Neutral Work levers: Operation
Pressure switch Open Close
Control signal of High (DC10-12V), Low (Immediately after the pressure
Engine speed Approximately 4seconds after switch is closed.)
the pressure switch is opened.)
Engine speed Preset rpmrpm Return to the position of engine
control dial or selected rpm of power
mode
NOTE: The auto idle function will be only operated when the pressure switch and the control
conditions are corresponded with each other.

Page 71
ENGINE OVERHEAT PROTECTION SYSTEM
1
21
(Pump control signal)
10
(Drive signal)
15 17
Engine overheat signal

Engine overheat signal
ARS1130L
Figure 60
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 10 E.P.P.R. Valve
3 Engine 17 e-EPOS Controller
4 Main Pump 21 Warning Buzzer
5 Control Pump
When the engine coolant temperature increases to over 107°C (225°F), the sensor mounted in the coolant
line will send a signal to the instrument panel. A overheat signal is also sent to the e-EPOS controller and
the overheat warning buzzer will sound. The e-EPOS controller will send a signal to the engine throttle
controller and the engine speed is adjusted to standard mode. The engine throttle controller will signal the
engine control motor to decrease the engine speed.
When the coolant is overheated, the warning buzzer will sound, standard mode is selected and low engine
speed will be selected.
When the coolant temperature falls below 95°C (203°F), normal operation will resume.

Page 72
POWER BOOST MODE
OPERATION
BCS0670L
Figure 61
Reference Reference
Number Number
3 Engine 11 Solenoid Valve
4 Main Pump 17 e-EPOS Controller
5 Control Pump 18 Travel Select Switch
6 Control Valve Power Boost Switch (Top of
19
7 Pressure Switch Right Work Lever)
The Power Boost function is used to temporarily increase the main relief pressure to enhance excavation
ability. When the switch button on top of the right work lever is pressed during work, the e-EPOS controller
will activate the power boost solenoid valve and increase the relief valve pressure from 330 - 350 kg/cm2
(4,700 - 5,000 psi). The excavation ability is increased by approximately 6%.
The excavation ability is increased by approximately 6%.

Page 73
If the travel, work, park select switch is placed in TRAVEL or if machine travels during working state it will
activate the solenoid valve for pressure increase. In this situation, the relief valve setting pressure is always
maintained at about 350kg/cm2.
NOTE: Do not use this switch for more than 10 seconds.
POWER BOOST CONTROL - CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
BCS0680L
Figure 62

Page 74
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 6 Solenoid Valve (Pressure Up)
2 Battery Relay Power Boost Switch (Top of
7
3 Fuse Right Work Lever)
4 e-EPOS Controller 8 Travel Select Switch
5 Instrument Panel 9 Pressure Switch

Page 75
CRUISE CONTROL
BCS0690L
Figure 63
Reference Reference
Number Number
2 Engine Control Motor 15 e-EPOS Controller
3 Engine 16 Engine Speed Control Dial
4 Main Pump 17 Forward Run Solenoid
5 Control Pump Valve
6 Control Valve 18 Relay
13 Cruise Solenoid Valve 19 Cruise Switch
14 Travel Motor 20 Brake Pedal
Cruise control is used for the purpose of reducing operator’s fatigue during long travel distances.

Page 76
1. Run Method
F = Forward Travel
Forward/reverse lever is placed at forward
position (F), although accelerator pedal is not
stepped on, the unit can travel. At this time, F
faster or slower travel speed can be obtained by F
adjusting the engine speed control dial. When Cruise
N N = Neutral
I II
Switch
engine speed control dial is adjusted to desired R
speed, the unit will travel at a constant speed. If R
there is a change in the load, a change of travel

speed can occur. When the forward/reverse Forward/reverse Lever R = Reverse Travel
lever is placed in reverse position, this function
will be not operated. BCS0811L
Figure 64
2. Cancel
when the brake is applied the cruise control will
be canceled.
Bring the forward/reverse lever back to neutral
(N), will also cancel the cruise control.
If the engine is running at an excessive rpm
when the cruise control is canceled, reduce the
engine rpm setting.
NOTE: If the auto idle is "ON" when the
cruise control is canceled, the
HAOA690L
engine will return to idle in
Figure 65
approximately four seconds.
When the cruise control is
turned back "ON" the engine
will return to the rpm setting
control by the engine speed
control dial.
3. Cruise Operation
Division Run Cancel

Condition 1. Forward/reverse lever is placed 1. When the brake is applied.
in FORWARD. 2. Forward/reverse lever is placed
2.Accelerator pedal is stepped ON. in NEUTRAL or REVERSE.
3. Cruise switch turns "ON."
Forward Relay Operation Cancel
Forward Solenoid Operation Cancel
Valve
Cruise Relay (1) Operation Cancel
Cruise Relay (2) Cancel Operation
Cruise Solenoid Operation Cancel
Valve
Speed Control Engine Speed Control Dial Accelerator Pedal

Page 77
CRUISE CONTROL CIRCUIT
BCS0700L
Figure 66
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 8 Forward/Reverse Lever
2 Battery Relay Switch
3 Fuse 9 Brake Light Switch
4 Pilot Relay 10 Pressure Switch
5 Forward Run Relay 11 Forward Run Solenoid
Valve
6 Cruise Relay (2)
12 Cruise Solenoid Valve
7 Cruise Relay (1)
If the cruise switch is turned on during the forward run, the "15/1 (+)" and "49" terminals of the travel speed
control switch are connected. At this time the current flows from the battery (1) →battery relay (2) →fuse
box (3) →"15/1" (+) and "49" terminals of the travel speed control switch (8) → "86" and "85" terminals of
cruise relay 1(7) →pressure switch (10) →ground. The other side, the current flows from the fuse box (3)
→ "30" and "87a" terminals of pilot relay (4) →"30" and "87" terminals of forward run relay (5) →"30" and
"87" of cruise relay 1(7) →cruise solenoid valve (12) and the machine runs as a cruise state. Also the
cruise relay 1 (7) is activated by the current flows from the "87a" and "30" terminals of cruise relay 2 (6) →
diode (13) and it makes self - activated circuit.

Page 78
If the forward/reverse lever (8) is place in neutral or reverse position during the cruise, the forward run relay
will be deactivated and cruise function will be cancelled.
Also If the brake pedal is pressed, the brake light switch (9) will be turned "ON". At this time, the cruise
relay2(6) will be activated and the cruise relay1(7) will be deactivated. So cruise function will be cancelled.

Page 79
ADJUSTING METHOD OF ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
NOTE: If the adjustment of engine control unit is improper, it may cause overloading of the engine,
and lowering speed of Work/Run. This will affect the performance of equipment During
repair and adjustment of engine control system, use the following directions.
ADJUSTING METHOD OF ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
Accelerator Pedal (Refer to Figure 68)

1. Assembled length of rod (B, Figure 68)
must be adjusted to 250 mm.
2. With rod (B, Figure 68) adjusted to 250
mm, adjust stop bolt (C) so that pedal (A)
touches plunger (K) of run modulation
valve.
NOTE: Make sure that plunger (K,
Figure 68) is not being
depressed.
3. After the rod (H, Figure 68) is temporarily
assembled to bracket, install spring (G) Figure 67 ACCELERATOR PEDAL LINKAGE
between lever (D) and rod (H). Adjust the
rod (H) to an initial installation length of 67
mm. Spring (G) should be adjusted to a
length of 140 mm.
4. Extend cable (J, Figure 68) out of cable sheath 150 mm, attach end of cable to clevis (F, Figure 68).
Attach the cable to bracket.
At this time, adjust the insertion depth of cable (J, Figure 68) end into clevis (F). Then adjust cable in
bracket so that it is again adjusted to 150 mm.
NOTE: Clevis pin should be 207.5 mm from bracket.
NOTE: During assembling, if the cable is pulled on either end, the assembly length will change,
take care not to apply any force.
5. Inject grease into grease fitting (E, Figure 68) to ensure proper lubrication.

Page 80
A
F J
C
H
D
E G
BCS0590L
Figure 68
Engine Control Motor (Refer to Figure 69 and Figure 70)

1. The engine control motor (Figure 69) holds the cable length that was set pulled at maximum when
responding to a "HIGH IDLE" position.
2. When installing the motor on frame, be careful not to bend cable, connect it to bracket (B, Figure 70)
temporarily with nuts.

Page 81
ADJUSTING METHOD OF ENGINE RPM
Inspection Before Adjustment (Refer to Figure 70)

1. Adjust bolt (E, Figure 70), so that its head is at the minimum height "Lb."
2. Turn starter switch "ON" and position engine speed control dial to "LOW IDLE."
3. Adjust accelerator pedal cable (J, Figure 70) and engine control motor cable (K, Figure 70) using the
following method.
A. Attach cables (J and K, Figure 70) to levers (C) and (C), in the hole positions shown in Figure
70.
B. Cable (J, Figure 70) has a tendency to hang-up once in a while on the accelerator pedal end.
Before attaching cable (J) to bracket (B), pull cable (J) to ensure it is extended all the way. (Do
not apply excessive force.)
C. Attach cables (J and K) to bracket (B) so that levers (C) and (C) touch the stop plate on lever
(N). Adjust cables so they do not hang down.
NOTE: Lever (N) is between the two (C) levers. There are a total of three levers.
Travel Mode RPM adjustment (Refer to Figure 70)

Engine rpm adjustment is performed at no load state.
Start engine, set work/travel select switch to "TRAVEL" and check if forward/reverse lever is in
"NEUTRAL."
NOTE: Work/travel select switch is at right side end on the console below steering wheel.
Adjust according to following steps.
1. Adjustment of High Idle RPM - Engine Control Motor
A. Turn starter switch "ON," select "POWER MODE," turn auto idle switch "OFF," and set work/
travel select switch to "TRAVEL."
B. Set engine speed control dial to "HIGH IDLE" position. This will make engine control motor
cable (K) be pulled to maximum.
C. Adjust the screw part of cable (K) in bracket (B) so that lever (A) touches the high idle stop.
2. Adjustment of Low Idle RPM - Engine Control Motor.
A. Set engine speed control dial to "LOW IDLE." This will make engine control motor cable (K) be
extended to its maximum position.
B. Check that lever (A) touches engine low idle stop and that cable installation is correct.
C. If lever (A) does not touch the low idle engine stop, move cable (K) one stage down in holes on
lever (C). If cable is extending to far (with excessive bending) move cable one stage up on holes
in lever (C). When cable is moved either up or down on lever (C), adjust the cable position in
bracket (B) up or down so that the end of cable (K) is not pointing up or down.
NOTE: Lightly pull levers (C) and (C) toward high idle position. Levers should not come out of
contact with stop on lever (N), When released, lever (A) should not come out of contact
from engine low idle stop.
3. Repeat preceding steps and try to satisfy both high idle and low idle adjustments.

Page 82
4. When above procedure is completed, set engine speed control dial to "HIGH IDLE." Loosen the left
side attachment nut of cable (K) and tighten the right side nut 2/3 - 1 turn more so the cable is pulled
1 - 1.25 mm (0.04 - 0.05 in) more.
NOTE: Securely hold the right side nut and cable (K) in position, while tightening left side nut.
5. Adjustment of High Idle RPM - Accelerator Pedal.
A. Set engine speed control dial to "LOW IDLE." Fully depress accelerator pedal.
B. Adjust the screw part of cable (J, Figure 70) installed on bracket (B, Figure 70) so that lever (A)
just touches engine high idle stop.
NOTE: By adjusting cable (J, Figure 70) at bracket (B, Figure 70) this will ensure that the
accelerator pedal is properly depressing plunger (K, Figure 68).
6. Adjustment of Low Idle RPM - Accelerator Pedal.
A. Release accelerator pedal.
B. Check that lever (A, Figure 70) touches the engine low idle stop and the cable’s installation
position is proper.
C. If lever (A, Figure 70) does not touch the engine low idle stop this means that there is not
enough cable stroke.
1) Move the screw part of cable (J, Figure 70) to the left till lever (A, Figure 70) touches the
engine low idle stop.
2) When fully depressing accelerator pedal, adjust length of rod (B, Figure 68) longer (more
than 250 mm) so that lever (A, Figure 70) touches the high idle stop.
NOTE: If length of rod (B, Figure 68) is made excessively long, lever (A, Figure 70) will touch the
engine high idle stop before the accelerator pedal (A, Figure 68) fully depresses plunger
(K, Figure 68). Check whether the plunger is fully depressed or not.
D. In case that cable (J) hanging is excessive. (Pedal stroke excessive.)
1) If cable is hanging, it should still function properly. The excessive play will not effect the
normal operation of plunger (K).

Page 83
ENGINE CONTROL MOTOR
HGA5016I
Figure 69

Page 84
G
F
C C'
K J
H
A
E/G INJECTION PUMP
TIMING GEAR CASE

D
PILOT CUT - OFF SIGNAL

HGA5017I
Figure 70
Adjustment of Work Mode RPM (Refer to

Figure 72)
1. Engine Control Motor Adjustment
A. Start engine, set to "POWER" for
power mode, "OFF" for auto idle
switch.
B. Set work/travel select switch to
"WORK," and check that forward/
reverse lever is in "NEUTRAL."
C. Set engine speed control dial to
"HIGH IDLE."
Figure 71 ENGINE THROTTLE LINKAGE
D. With a small screw driver adjust the
variable resistor "VR4" shown in
Figure 72. Adjust it until the engine is
at "A (Table 1)" rpm.
E. Check the "A" rpm setting by turning the engine speed control dial from "LOW IDLE" to "HIGH
IDLE," and work/travel select switch to "TRAVEL"/"WORK."
NOTE: The values of the engine rpm may vary as the engine speed is changed from high to low
and low to high. This deviation is normal.

Page 85
2. Accelerator Pedal Adjustment
A. Lower left side control stand. (Pilot Cutoff Switch "ON")
B. Check that plunger (D, Figure 70) of engine speed limiter (pilot cutoff signal) works as work/
travel select switch is set to "WORK" or "TRAVEL."
NOTE: When in "WORK" mode the plunger should be extended. When in "TRAVEL" mode the
plunger should be retracted to about 6 mm.
NOTE: In case of operating in "WORK" mode, for in order for plunger to be shrunken, adequate
external force is required, confirm by pressing plunger.
C. When operational check is over, set work/travel select switch to "WORK" position.
D. Step on accelerator pedal slowly to maintain the engine speed at "A" rpm. Adjust length of stop
bolt (E) till its head contacts plunger (D). Tighten jam nut.
E. Step on the accelerator pedal two to three times to check if engine is running at "A" rpm.
Adjustment of Auto Idle and Other RPM (Refer to Figure 72)

1. Adjustment of Auto Idle.
A. Start engine, set engine speed control dial to "HIGH IDLE" position.
B. Set work/travel select switch to "WORK," select "POWER MODE," and auto idle switch to "ON."
C. With a small screw driver adjust the variable resistor "VR1" shown in Figure 72. Adjust it until
the engine is at "B" rpm.
2. Standard Mode
A. Set engine speed control dial at "HIGH IDLE."
B. Set work/travel select switch to "WORK," and auto idle switch to "ON."
C. With a small screw driver adjust the variable resistor "VR2" shown in Figure 72. Adjust it until
the engine is at "C" rpm.
Table 1
Model "A" RPM "B" RPM "C" RPM
S140W-V 1,900 ±50 1,250 ±50 1,750 ±50
S160W-V 1,900 ±50 1,250 ±50 1,750 ±50
S180W-V 2,050 ±50 1,400 ±50 1,950 ±50
S210W-V 2,150 ±50 1,400 ±50 2,050 ±50

Page 86
2 3
1
POWER
POWER
BCS0740L
Figure 72
Reference
Description
Number
1 VR1 (Automatic Deceleration Adjusting Variable
Resister)
2 VR2 (Standard Mode Adjusting Variable Resister)
3 Name Plate
4 VR4 (Power Mode Adjusting Variable Resister)
ADJUSTMENT OF TPS (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)

NOTE: Refer to Figure 72 thru Figure 74.
NOTE: If TPS adjustment is not correct, the performance of equipment will not be exerted and
may become the cause of overloading and so correct adjustment is necessitated.
1. After connecting the harness for test to TPS, install multi tester, and select DC voltage (DCV) (Refer
to "Figure 73").
2. Set work/travel select switch at "WORK."
3. Set engine speed control dial at "HIGH IDLE" position.
4. After reading the engine rpm at gauge panel, look for the corresponding TPS voltage value.
5. Rotate shaft (F, Figure 70) so that the TPS voltage value matches the value found on the table and
tighten bolt (G).
6. Set work/travel select switch to "TRAVEL," select "POWER MODE" and turn the engine speed control
dial to "HIGH IDLE."
7. Read the engine speed displayed on the gauge panel and find the corresponding TPS voltage on
table "Figure 74."
8. Check to see if the TPS voltage matches the voltage found on the table.

Page 87
9. Turn the engine speed control dial to "LOW IDLE" position and check to see if the TPS voltage
matches the voltage found on the table "9-7."
10. If the measured voltage is greater than the listed voltage on the table, move the H lever one hole
lower than the present position; if it is less than the voltage listed on the table move the lever one hole
higher than the present position.
11. By repeating steps 2 - 10 the maximum engine rpm voltage for work mode and the maximum rpm
voltage for travel mode can be simultaneously set.
MULTI-TESTER
DCV
TPS
TEST HARNESS MAIN HARNESS
HGA5019I
Figure 73

Page 88
S140W-V / S160W-V
(TRAVEL MODE RPM)

1070 (LOW RPM) 1900 (WORK MODE RPM) ENGINE SPEED (RPM)
BGS0050L
Figure 74
Engine Speed @ Approx. Engine Speed @ Approx. Engine Speed @ Approx.

1070 rpm 1900 rpm 2350 rpm
Speed Tolerance Speed Tolerance Speed Tolerance
1070 rpm 2350 rpm
3.60 - 3.90V 1850 rpm 2.05 ± 0.05V 0.90 - 1.10V
and under and over
1080 rpm 3.58 - 3.88V 1860 rpm 2.03 ± 0.05V 2340 rpm 0.92 - 1.12V
1090 rpm 3.56 - 3.86V 1870 rpm 2.01 ± 0.05V 2330 rpm 0.94 - 1.14V
1100 rpm 3.54 - 3.84V 1880 rpm 1.99 ± 0.05V 2320 rpm 0.96 - 1.16V
1110 rpm 3.52 - 3.81V 1890 rpm 1.97 ± 0.05V 2310 rpm 0.98 - 1.19V
1120 rpm 3.50 - 3.79V 1900 rpm 1.95 ± 0.05V 2300 rpm 1.00 - 1.21V
1910 rpm 1.93 ± 0.05V
1920 rpm 1.91 ± 0.05V
1930 rpm 1.89 ± 0.05V
1940 rpm 1.87 ± 0.05V
1950 rpm 1.85 ± 0.05V

Page 89
S180W-V
1150 (LOW RPM) ENGINE SPEED (RPM) 2050 (WORK MODE RPM) 2250 (TRAVEL MODE RPM)
BGS0060L
Figure 75

1150 rpm 2050 rpm 2250 rpm
1150 rpm 2250 rpm
3.60 - 3.90V 2000 rpm 1.61 ± 0.05V 0.90 - 1.10V
and under and over
1160 rpm 3.58 - 3.88V 2010 rpm 1.59 ± 0.05V 2240 rpm 0.92 - 1.13V
1170 rpm 3.55 - 3.85V 2020 rpm 1.56 ± 0.05V 2230 rpm 0.95 - 1.15V
1180 rpm 3.53 - 3.83V 2030 rpm 1.54 ± 0.05V 2220 rpm 0.97 - 1.18V
1190 rpm 3.50 - 3.80V 2040 rpm 1.52 ± 0.05V 2210 rpm 1.00 - 1.20V
1200 rpm 3.48 - 3.77V 2050 rpm 1.49 ± 0.05V 2200 rpm 1.02 - 1.23V
2060 rpm 1.47 ± 0.05V
2070 rpm 1.44 ± 0.05V
2080 rpm 1.42 ± 0.05V
2090 rpm 1.39 ± 0.05V
2100 rpm 1.37 ± 0.05V

Page 90
S210W-V
(TRAVEL MODE RPM)

1050 (LOW RPM) 1900 (WORK MODE RPM) ENGINE SPEED (RPM)
BGS0070L
Figure 76

1100 rpm 2150 rpm 2350 rpm
1100 rpm 2350 rpm
3.60 - 3.90V 2100rpm 1.54 ± 0.05V 0.90 - 1.10V
and under and over
1110 rpm 3.58 - 3.88V 2110rpm 1.52 ± 0.05V 2340 rpm 0.92 - 1.12V
1120 rpm 3.56 - 3.86V 2120rpm 1.49 ± 0.05V 2330 rpm 0.94 - 1.14V
1130 rpm 3.54 - 3.84V 2130rpm 1.47 ± 0.05V 2320 rpm 0.96 - 1.16V
1140 rpm 3.52 - 3.81V 2140rpm 1.45 ± 0.05V 2310 rpm 0.98 - 1.19V
1150 rpm 3.50 - 3.79V 2150rpm 1.43 ± 0.05V 2300 rpm 1.00 - 1.21V
2160rpm 1.41 ± 0.05V
2170rpm 1.39 ± 0.05V
2180rpm 1.37 ± 0.05V
2190rpm 1.34 ± 0.05V
2200rpm 1.32 ± 0.05V

Page 91
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
E-EPOS CONTROLLER
The system operation status and malfunction codes can be checked through the display on top of the e-
EPOS controller box in the drawer under the operator’s seat.
1 2
5
4 3
ARS1190L
Figure 77
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Upper Digit Power Monitor (Stays On
2 Lower Digit 4 While Power Is In Normal
Range,)
Engine Speed Monitor LED
3 (Flash Interval Increases With 5 Communication Monitor LED
Engine Speed.) 6 (Flash when normal condition)
1. Power Monitor
This LED is turned off when the input voltage to the e-EPOS controller is below 18.5 ±1 V or above
32.5 ±1 V. Stays on while in normal range.
2. Engine Speed Monitor
This LED light flashes according to the engine speed. The flashing interval is proportional to the
engine speed.
3. Communication Monitor
These LED lamps flash when normal state of communication between main controller and instrument
panel.

Page 92
4. Normal Operation Display Readout
Display Readout
Mode Selection Operation Status
Upper Digit Lower Digit
Normal Operation
Power Mode
Power Mode
HAOH340L
Power Mode
Normal Operation
Standard Mode
Standard Mode
HAOH350L
Normal Operation
Digging
Digging Mode
HAOH370L
Work Mode
Normal Operation
Trenching
Trenching Mode
HAOH380L
5. Malfunction Display and Reset Procedure

The malfunction codes displayed on the top of the e-EPOS controller and reset procedure are the
same with failure information codes a part of failure information.
Refer to the failure information part of letter information display for details.
Display
No. Fault Area Cause Action Reset Procedure
Readout
Pump
Cut Off After correcting
Discharge
Output problem, turn
1 Volume Control Short Circuit
Current starter switch from
Valve (E.P.P.R.
HAOH400L (0 mA) "OFF" to "ON."
Valve)

Relief Pressure
2 Up Solenoid Short Circuit
Valve

Travel Speed -
3 II Solenoid Short Circuit
Valve
HAOH420L
(0 mA) "OFF" to "ON."

Swing Priority
4 Control Short Circuit
Solenoid Valve
HAOH430L
(0 mA) "OFF" to "ON."

Page 93
Display
Readout
Arm Cut Off After correcting

Regeneration Output problem, turn
5 Short Circuit
Control Current starter switch from
Solenoid Valve HAOH440L (0 mA) "OFF" to "ON."

Arm Priority
6 Control Short Circuit
Solenoid Valve
Relief Pressure Automatic reset

7 Up Solenoid Open Circuit when problem is
Valve corrected.
HAOH460L
Travel Speed - Automatic reset

8 II Solenoid Open Circuit when problem is
Valve corrected.
HAOH470L
Swing Priority Automatic reset

9 Control Open Circuit when problem is
Solenoid Valve corrected.
HAOH480L
Arm
Automatic reset
Regeneration
10 Open Circuit when problem is
Control
corrected.
Solenoid Valve HAOH490L
Arm Priority Automatic reset

11 Control Open Circuit when problem is
Solenoid Valve corrected.
HAOH500L
Output Voltage:
over 4.6 ±0.2 V Automatic reset
Engine Speed
12 when problem is
Control Dial Abnormal: under corrected.
0.4 ±0.2 V HAOH510L
Output Voltage:
Engine Control over 4.6 ±0.2 V Automatic reset
13 Motor when problem is
(Potentiometer) Abnormal: under corrected.
0.4 ±0.2 V HAOH520L
Output Voltage: Automatic reset

over 4.6 ±0.2 V when problem is
Front Pump
14 corrected.
Pressure Abnormal: under
0.4 ±0.2 V HAOH530L

Page 94
Display
Readout
Output Voltage: Automatic reset
over 4.6 ±0.2 V when problem is
Rear Pump
15 corrected.
Pressure Abnormal: under
0.4 ±0.2 V HAOH540L
Automatic reset
CN1 - 12 and CN1 when problem is
Mode Select
16 - 13 Terminals At corrected.
Signal Input
High Level (12 V)
HAOH550L

Page 95
ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROLLER
Under the rubber cap on the surface of the engine controller, there are three LEDs. Based on the
equipment status the following LEDs will turn "ON."
LED Status Voltage At

Throttle Controller
Status Control Motor
Input Signal Red Green Yellow Terminal
Dial Voltage < Motor While Control Motor Is Approximately
X ∆ O
Potentiometer Voltage Operating (Increasing rpm) +24 V
Dial Voltage > Motor While Control Motor Is Approximately -
Potentiometer Voltage Operating (Decreasing ∆ X O 24 V
rpm)
Dial Voltage = Motor
Control Motor Stopped O O O 0V
Potentiometer Voltage
Motor Overload (Cut Off
X X O 0V
Motor Current)
Abnormal Controller Power
X X X 0V
Voltage (Low Or No Input)
∆ O X
Brightly Lit ON OFF
NOTE: 1. Control Motor Voltage is Measured at throttle controller 4 (+) and 5 (-) terminals.
2. Yellow LED indicates power status (ON, OFF).
3. To protect the control motor from overloads, the control motor automatically cuts off
supply voltage to the motor when there is a heavy load on the motor and the
possibility of motor damage or burn out exists.
4. After the malfunction is corrected, turn the starter switch from "OFF" to the "ON"
position and normal operation will resume.

Page 96
BCS0710L
Figure 78
Reference
Description
Number
1 Red LED
2 Yellow LED
3 Green LED

Page 97
WIPER SYSTEM
WIPER CIRCUIT
4
3
BCS0820L
Figure 79
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Fuse Box 4 Wiper Motor
2 Combination Switch (Left) 5 Window Washer
3 Washer Timer
WIPER OPERATION
Intermittent Operation (I - position)

When the wiper switch (4) is turned "I" position, the current flows from the fuse (3) →"B" terminal of wiper
motor (7) → "L" terminal of wiper motor (7) → "5" terminal of wiper timer (6) →"6" terminal of wiper timer
(6) → ground and the wiper motor operates intermittently by the timer built in wiper timer. (On:
approximately 1 second, Off: approximately 5 seconds)

Page 98
Continuous Operation (II - Position)
When the wiper switch (4) is turned "I" position, the current flows from the fuse (3) →"B" terminal of wiper
motor (7) →"L" terminal of wiper motor (7) →No. 5 terminal of wiper timer (6) →No. 6 terminal of wiper timer
(6) →ground and the contact points No. 5 and No. 6 of wiper timer (6) are connected continuously, the
wiper motor operates continuously.
When the wiper switch (4) is turned "OFF," the current flows from the fuse (3) →"B" terminal of wiper motor
(7) →"L" terminal of wiper motor (7) →No. 5 terminal of wiper timer (6) →No. 4 terminal of wiper timer (6)
→"S" terminal of wiper motor (7) →"B" terminal of wiper motor (7) and the wiper motor is stopped at the
auto stop position.
WINDOW WASHER OPERATION

When the window washer switch is turned "ON," the current flows from the fuse (3) →No. 1 terminal of
washer switch (5) →No. 5 terminal of washer switch (5) →"+" terminal of window washer (8) →ground
and windshield washer fluid is sprayed.

Page 99
OVERLOAD WARNING DEVICE
OVERLOAD WARNING DEVICE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
4 1
5
ARS1260L
Figure 80
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 4 e-EPOS Controller
2 Battery Relay 5 OWD Select Switch
3 Fuse Box 6 Pressure Sensor

Page 100
S0892075K
1ELECTRICAL
SCHEMATIC
(S140W-V / 160W-V)
CAUTION!
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC (S140W-V / 160W-V)S0892075K


November 2002
Electrical Schematic (S140W-V / 160W-V) S0892075K

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Solar 140W-V / 160W-V ................................................................................. 4
S0892075K Electrical Schematic (S140W-V / 160W-V)

Page 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Schematic(s) presented in this section are laid out on facing pages.
An overlapping edge has been taken into consideration so that a photocopy can be made and pasted
together to make a complete schematic.
Figure 1

Page 3
SOLAR 140W-V / 160W-V
POWE R DISPLAY
AUTO
ES C
Figure 2

Page 4
S140W-V /160W-V
BCS0900L

Page 5
Page 6
1ATTACHMENTS
S0902060
R1
1BOOM AND ARM
CAUTION!
BOOM AND ARM S0902060


January 2002
Boom and Arm S0902060

Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Front Attachment Pin Specifications .............................................................. 3

Front Attachment - Removal and Installation ................................................. 4
Arm Removal Procedure......................................................................... 4
Boom Removal Procedure ...................................................................... 6
Front Attachment - Installation ....................................................................... 7
Arm Installation Procedure...................................................................... 7
Boom Installation Procedure ................................................................... 7
Start-up Procedures ....................................................................................... 8
S0902060 Boom and Arm

Page 2
FRONT ATTACHMENT PIN SPECIFICATIONS
The table below has a complete listing of dimensional specifications for all mounting pins used on the front
attachment.
NOTE: Some mounting pins must be drilled and tapped for lubrication fittings and piping, or may
have other required specifications. Consult Daewoo After Sales Service for information on
wear tolerances and replacement limits for mounting pins.
Mounting Pin Diameter, mm (Inches) Length, mm (Inches)

A 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 651.0 mm (25.63 in)
B 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 176.0 mm (6.93 in)
C 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 670.0 mm (26.38 in)
D 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 413.0 mm (16.26 in)
E 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 201.0 mm (7.91 in)
F 71.0 mm (2.80 in) 201.0 mm (7.91 in)
G 65.0 mm (2.56 in) 380.0 mm (14.96 in)
H 65.0 mm (2.56 in) 431.0 mm (16.97 in)
I 65.0 mm (2.56 in) 187.0 mm (7.36 in)
J 65.0 mm (2.56 in) 380.0 mm (14.96 in)
K 65.0 mm (2.56 in) 431.0 mm (16.97 in)
E
C
F
D
A
B
G
H
J
K
BCS4520L
Figure 1

Page 3
FRONT ATTACHMENT - REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION
DANGER!
Daewoo warns any user, that the removal of
the counterweight from the machine, front
attachment or any other part, may affect X
the stability of the machine. This could
cause unexpected movement, resulting in
death or serious injuries. Daewoo is not
liable for any misuse.
attachment unless the upper structure is
X
been removed.
BCS0830L
Figure 2
IMPORTANT
Always break down the front attachment by removing outermost sections first - the bucket
before the arm, the arm before the boom. Reinstallation of the attachment should begin with the
boom and end with the bucket.
Refer to the appropriate Bucket section for its removal and installation procedure before going onto the
initial step of the front attachment removal or installation procedure.
ARM REMOVAL PROCEDURE
WARNING!
This procedure is only intended for routine removal or replacement of the attachment, while
working under normal, safe operating conditions. In the event of a major structural collapse of
some part of the attachment, an accident or complete loss of attachment hydraulic function, DO
NOT proceed with attachment disassembly unless you are completely sure of what you are
doing. Please call your local Daewoo distributor or Daewoo After Sales Service for assistance.
DO NOT allow personnel to stand underneath a weakened or only partially supported
attachment section. Keep clear of hydraulic lines that may have fluid escaping at high pressure -
it can cause severe or even fatal injuries.
Complete the bucket end removal procedure by pulling out the two bucket linkage pins and the bucket
cylinder mounting pin, on the arm. Use an assist crane or hoist to lift the cylinder and relieve weight on
mounting pins.

Page 4
Park the excavator away from obstructions and all traffic on clear, flat, level ground. Extend the arm
cylinder and crowd the arm into the boom. Partially retract the boom cylinder so that the boom is stretched
out in front of the excavator, as low to the ground as possible, with the arm crowded under the boom.
The tip of the arm point should be lowered to secure blocking that will safely support the weight of the arm.
Place the blocking directly in front of the excavator and make sure that it will not be unbalanced with an
initial weight load that is all to one end, under the arm point.
Shut off the engine and release hydraulic system pressure - move any of the control levers with the engine
off to release pressure built up in the accumulator. Manually vent residual hydraulic pressure in the tank by
moving the lever near the cap, on top of the reservoir.
WARNING!
Secure the swing lock and tag and lock out controls in the operator’s cab to keep anyone from
moving or inadvertently starting the engine. Restrict access to the work site while sections of
the attachment are in the air, or while they are being supported by the assist crane. The safe
lifting capacity of the assist crane or hoist that is used must exceed the weight of the heaviest
section of the attachment, the boom (approximately 2,000 kg [4,400 lb], not including the weight
of accessories or fixtures).
Before beginning the disassembly of attachment mounting pins, disconnect the arm cylinder hydraulic
hose couplings and put a clean plug in the end of each one. Use any and all reasonable precautions
necessary to avoid introducing dirt or other contaminants into the hydraulic system. Wipe down coupling
points before disconnecting hydraulic lines and use evaporative-type solvent spray cleaner. Tag and mark
hoses for reassembly, if necessary.
Place a sling under the arm cylinder (the cylinder used to extend and retract the attachment arm, pinned to
the top of the boom). Lift the sling so that the weight load on the rod end of the arm cylinder (pinned to the
ears on the inner end of the arm) is released. Prepare blocking under the arm that will securely support the
weight of the arm and arm cylinder.
CAUTION!
To make sure that the polished surfaces of cylinder rod ends will not suffer accidental damage
during disassembly or removal procedures, wrap exposed rod surfaces (especially those of
boom cylinders) with a protective covering material. Immediately following disassembly and
removal, cylinder rods should always be fully retracted. This eases handling problems and also
avoids possible damage.
Remove retainers on the end of the mounting pin for the arm cylinder rod end. Use the assist crane to
relieve the weight load and withdraw the pin. Lower the arm down to the blocking support for any continued
disassembly procedures.

Page 5
BOOM REMOVAL PROCEDURE
NOTE: Boom removal may be simplified if the shell of the operator’s cab is taken off the turntable
deck first. Refer to the Operator’s Cab Removal procedure before continuing, if both
components are to be removed from the excavator.
After the bucket, arm and arm cylinder have been removed, lower the end of the boom to a stable, secure
blocking support.
Attach the assist crane sling to the body of either boom cylinder, break the mounting pin connection to the
boom by tapping through the pin from the same side of the boom and repeat for the opposite cylinder.
Release hydraulic pressure and disconnect line couplings as previously outlined in the Arm Removal
Procedure, observing the same precautions.
Disconnect wiring for work light assemblies and any other accessory lines or connections. Locate the sling
of the assist crane near the center of gravity, optimum lift point for the boom, and use the crane to take
pressure off the boom foot pin. Drive out the pin after disassembling retainers and carefully lift away the
boom.
WARNING!
Traveling the excavator, swinging the turntable or movement over bumps or sloping, uneven
surfaces could all produce loss of control and possible accidents or injuries, if the turntable
deck has been unbalanced by removal of weight from one end only.
To maintain stability, the counterweight should be removed whenever the front attachment is taken off the
machine.

Page 6
FRONT ATTACHMENT - INSTALLATION
ARM INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Re-attach the base of the arm cylinder to the mounting point on top of the boom.
WARNING!
Before assembling the front attachment, make sure that the individual boom, arm and bucket
sections are all compatible and can be used safely for work intended. Refer to the General
Safety Pages, Lift Ratings, Working Range Diagrams and Weights of Materials sections in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Consult your dealer or Daewoo After Sales Service for more
information if you have any questions or require more information.
Begin with the arm securely supported on blocking in front of the excavator. Pre-grease the mounting pin
for the rod end of the arm cylinder and push it through the ears on the end of the arm. Attach a sling
around that mounting pin and lift the arm with an assist crane until it is in position for the boom-arm pin
connection to be made.
Relieve hydraulic pressure from all points of the system before any hydraulic lines are opened, then
carefully assemble hydraulic connections to the arm cylinder.
Remove the sling from around the rod end arm cylinder pin, withdraw the pin and lift the body of the arm
cylinder to re-pin the mounting connection.
BOOM INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Before reassembling the attachment, make sure to inspect all bushings and pivot points of each section.
To avoid damaging the seats, bushings should never be hammered or chiseled out of their seats.
Installation is otherwise a reversal of the removal procedures.

Page 7
START-UP PROCEDURES
Once the boom has been serviced, it should be lubricated as outlined in the initial start-up procedures of
the operation manual. Refer to the appropriate operation and maintenance manual for unit.

Page 8
S0904000
R4
1BUCKET
CAUTION!
BUCKET S0904000
Solar 015 PLUS 1001 and Up
November 2002
Bucket S0904000
Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Bucket Tooth Inspection and Replacement .................................................... 3

Type 1...................................................................................................... 3
Type 2...................................................................................................... 4
Type 3...................................................................................................... 5
Bucket O-ring Replacement ........................................................................... 7
Type 1...................................................................................................... 7
Type 2...................................................................................................... 8
Bucket Shimming Procedures ...................................................................... 10
New Bucket Installation ......................................................................... 10
Type 1.................................................................................................... 10
Type 2.................................................................................................... 11
Bucket Attachment, Removal and Reversal ................................................. 12
Detaching the Bucket ............................................................................ 12
Attaching The bucket............................................................................. 12
Reversing the Bucket ............................................................................ 13
S0904000 Bucket
Page 2
BUCKET TOOTH INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT
There are several different types of attachment methods for replaceable bucket teeth. Some of the most
common types are shown in the following drawings.
Bucket teeth are usually replaced in sets but it may sometimes be necessary to replace individual teeth.
TYPE 1
Look for the following indications of wear or damage:
• Lock pins protrude unevenly on one side.
• Lock pins have been worn down so far that they no longer make full contact through the length
of the pin hole.
• Lock washers or pins show obvious damage or weakness.
• Wear points on the working surfaces of tooth points - pits, cracks, chips or craters - are larger
than 8 - 10 mm (1/3" - 1/2") across.
HAOC680L
Figure 1
1. On a routine basis, inspect the bucket

teeth to make sure that tooth wear or
breakage has not developed. Do not allow
the replaceable bucket teeth to wear down
to the point that the bucket adapter is
exposed. See Figure 7.
2. To replace a tooth (1, Figure 4), use a
hammer and punch to drive the locking pin
(2) and lock washer (3) out of the tooth
adapter (4).
3. Once the worn tooth has been removed,
use a putty knife to scrape the adapter as
Figure 2
clean as possible.
4. Slide the new tooth into position and insert
the lock washer.
5. Insert the locking pin into the tooth and
with a hammer, drive the pin in until the
lock washer seats in the locking groove.
Bucket S0904000
Page 3
TYPE 2
WARNING!
Due to the possibility of flying metal objects, always wear safety helmet, protective gloves and
eye protection when changing bucket teeth.
Curl the bucket upwards and place the round rear surface of the bucket firmly on the ground.
Shut the engine off and lock out the hydraulic controls before working on the bucket.
NOTE: These instructions are only for Daewoo OEM buckets. If you are using other
manufacturers buckets, refer to their specific instructions.
Figure 3
1. On a routine basis, inspect the bucket

teeth to make sure that tooth wear or
breakage has not developed. Do not allow
the replaceable bucket teeth to wear down
to the point that the bucket is exposed.
See Figure 3.
2. To replace a tooth, remove bolts, lock
washers and plain washers from seat.
Remove tooth and shim(s) from bucket.
See Figure 4.
use a putty knife to scrape bucket as clean
as possible. Figure 4
S0904000 Bucket
Page 4
4. Slide the new tooth into position and insert
shims. Shim tooth until gap is less than "X"
[0.5 mm (0.020 in)]. See Figure 5.
5. Secure tooth and shim into position with
seat, plain washers, lock washers and
bolts.
Figure 5
TYPE 3
WARNING!
Due to the possibility of flying metal objects, always wear safety helmet, protective gloves and
eye protection when changing bucket teeth.
Curl the bucket upwards and place the round rear surface of the bucket firmly on the ground.
Place wooden blocks under front of bucket. Shut the engine off and lock out the hydraulic
controls before working on the bucket.
Inspect locking pin assembly and replace it if the following conditions exist;
1. The locking pin is too short when both surfaces are aligned.
2. The rubber has been torn and bosses of the steel balls are liable to slip off.
3. Pressing steel ball causes the boss to go inside.
X 1/3T
X X
T
4 3
HAOE380L
Figure 6
Bucket S0904000
Page 5
HAOC680L
Figure 7
1. On a routine basis, inspect bucket teeth to

make sure that tooth wear or breakage has
not developed. Do not allow replaceable
bucket teeth to wear down to a point that 1
bucket adapter is exposed. See Figure 7.
2. To replace a tooth, use a hammer (1, 2
Figure 8) and punch (2) to drive locking pin
assembly out of tooth and tooth adapter.
use a putty knife to scrape adapter as
clean as possible.
HAOE370L
4. Slide new tooth into position and insert Figure 8
locking pin assembly.
S0904000 Bucket
Page 6
BUCKET O-RING REPLACEMENT
TYPE 1
WARNING!
Due to possibility of flying metal objects, always wear safety helmet, protective gloves and eye
protection when changing pins.
1. Inspect the bucket O-rings on a routine

basis. If worn or damaged, replacement is
necessary.
HAOH640I
Figure 9
2. Roll the old O-ring (1, Figure 10) onto the
boss (2) around the bucket pin (3).
1 4
Remove the bucket pin and move the arm 2
or bucket link (4) out of the way.
HAOC710L
Figure 10
3. Remove the old O-ring and temporarily
install the new O-ring (1, Figure 11) onto 4
the bucket boss (2). Make sure that the O- 1
2
ring groove on both the bucket link (4) and
boss have been cleaned.
4. Realign the arm or link with the bucket pin
hole and insert the bucket pin (3, Figure
10).
HAOC701L
Figure 11
Bucket S0904000
Page 7
5. Roll the new O-ring (1, Figure 12) into the
O-ring groove.
1
HAOC720L
Figure 12
TYPE 2
WARNING!
Due to possibility of flying metal objects, always wear safety helmet, protective gloves and eye
protection when changing pins.
1. Inspect the bucket O-rings on a routine

basis. If worn or damaged, replacement is
necessary.
HAOE360L
Figure 13
2. Roll the old O-ring (1, Figure 10) onto the
bushing (2) around the bucket pin (3).
1 4
Remove the bucket pin and move the arm 2
or bucket link (4) out of the way.
HAOC710L
Figure 14
S0904000 Bucket
Page 8
3. Remove the old O-ring and temporarily
install the new O-ring (1, Figure 11) onto
the bucket bushing (2). Make sure that the 1 3
2
O-ring groove on both the bucket link (3)
and bushing have been cleaned.
4. Realign the arm or link with the bucket pin
hole and insert the bucket pin (3, Figure
10).
HAOC700L
Figure 15
5. Roll the new O-ring (1, Figure 12) into the
O-ring groove.
1
HAOC720L
Figure 16
Bucket S0904000
Page 9
BUCKET SHIMMING PROCEDURES
NEW BUCKET INSTALLATION
1. If a new bucket is being installed on the excavator, measure the inside dimension between the bucket
ears and the outside dimension across the arm mounting boss.
2. Subtract the clearance on both sides from the difference of the two and shim accordingly, prior to
assembly.
WARNING!
To check end play (side-to-side) clearance at bucket attachment point, the bucket must be free
to move but at all other times lower it to the ground or use support blocks to immobilize this
assembly. Shut off engine and tag and lock out controls to prevent movement during this
procedure.
TYPE 1
Shimming Procedures for Installed Bucket

1. With bucket attached, curl bucket and arm outward and lower boom so that bucket teeth are pointing
away from excavator, just a few inches off ground. This position provides easy accessibility for
dimensional measurements.
2. Force bucket to one side and check for end
play (side-to-side) clearance under O-rings
at attachment point. Total clearance
should be 1 mm (0.04 in) between side
face of boss and inside edge of ear
bushing (Y, Figure 17). Too tight a fit (less
than 1 mm (0.04 in)) can cause excessive
wear while too much clearance may
produce excessive noise and potentially
hazardous slack control.
3. Recheck end play by forcing bucket
towards opposite side and repeating
clearance measurements.
4. If an adjustment is required, remove two
jam nuts (1, Figure 17) and bolt (2) from
pin (3). Add or remove shims (4) as
required. Use equal amount of shims on
each side. Install bolt (2) and two jam nuts
(1). Jam nuts must clear boss by 1 - 2 mm Figure 17
(0.04 - 0.08 in) at point (X).
S0904000 Bucket
Page 10
TYPE 2
Shimming Procedures for Installed Bucket

1. With bucket attached, curl bucket and arm outward and lower boom so that bucket teeth are pointing
away from excavator, just a few inches off ground. This position provides easy accessibility for
dimensional measurements.
2. Force bucket to one side and check for end
play (side-to-side) clearance under O-rings
at attachment point. Clearance should be
between 0.2 - 0.7 mm (0.0078 - 0.0275 in)
on each end of arm boss, between side
face of boss and inside edge of ear
bushing. Too tight a fit can cause
excessive wear while too much clearance
may produce excessive noise and
potentially hazardous slack control.
3. Recheck end play by forcing bucket
towards opposite side and repeating HAOE361L
clearance measurements. Figure 18
4. If an adjustment is required, remove bolt
(Figure 17) and pin. Add or remove shims
as required. Install pin and bolt. Torque
bolts to 42 N•m / 4.3 kg•m (31 ft lb).
Bucket S0904000
Page 11
BUCKET ATTACHMENT, REMOVAL AND REVERSAL
DETACHING THE BUCKET
Park the excavator away from obstructions on clear, flat, level ground. Lower the bucket carefully to pre-
assembled blocking on the ground. Brace the bucket so that there is no load weight on the pin connecting
the bucket and arm. Disassemble the fasteners on the end of the bucket pin and pull out the pin.
If the pin sticks and resists normal withdrawal, there may be a load on it. Raise and lower the arm slightly
until the unstressed pin position is located.
CAUTION!
Use care pulling out the pin to avoid damaging the dust seals on either end of the arm.
When the pin has been withdrawn, move the operating joystick slightly to take weight off the remaining link
pin. Disassemble the link pin end retainers and pull out the pin.
Lift the arm away from the bucket so that the bucket can be carried away or another end attachment can be
put on the excavator.
ATTACHING THE BUCKET

Carefully inspect all parts before reassembling
the bucket linkage. Look for cracks or any other
evidence of physical damage and replace any
seal or O-ring that is not in like-new condition.
Pre-lube linkage pins before assembly.
Use an old cylinder rod, a long breaker bar or a
similar, relatively thin diameter support bar for
making the first (temporary) pin connection,
between the bucket and arm. If the support bar
is straight, the arm can be raised and the bucket
will hang level, allowing direct insertion of the
bucket ear-attachment linkage pin.
Figure 19
S0904000 Bucket
Page 12
When the link pin has been installed, withdraw
the temporary support rod from the bucket pin
holes, lower and raise the arm and boom and
install the bucket pin.
WARNING!
When making linkage alignments, never
insert fingers into pin holes. The
attachment or bucket could shift position
and cause a severe injury. Match holes by
visually lining them up. Use the sharp
tipped, soft point of a pencil or a similar
tool to check for high spots or
irregularities.
REVERSING THE BUCKET

Follow instructions for "Detaching the Bucket"
and remove both the bucket and link pins.
Rotate the bucket 180° to change bucket
configuration. This procedure is greatly
simplified if some type of rotating or swiveling
support can be used, on the ground underneath
the bucket. Follow instructions for "Bucket
Attachment" to replace pins.
Figure 20
WARNING!
Bucket curl and dump levers must be
used in opposite directions, after the
bucket has been reversed.
Bucket S0904000
Page 13
S0904000 Bucket
Page 14
1PUBLICATION REQUEST FOR
PROPOSED REVISION
In Daewoo’s continuing effort to provide the best customer satisfaction, we invite you to help us improve the
manuals that you work with on a daily basis. This form is provided to give you a means of feedback to the
publication department.
COMPANY NAME: DATE:

STREET ADDRESS: TELEPHONE:
CITY: FAX:
STATE / PROVINCE:
COUNTRY:
NAME:
MACHINE MODEL:
SERIAL NUMBER:
MANUAL NUMBER:
SHOP MANUAL SECTION NUMBER:
PROPOSED DESCRIPTION OF CORRECTION AND/OR SUGGESTION:
Use additional paper if needed. Please include copy of current manual pages for reference. Attach any photos or
illustrations. If digital photos are available, e-mail them to [email protected] (If possible, use 1024 x 768
resolution.).
HAS THIS BEEN DISCUSSED WITH A DAEWOO SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE: YES NO
IF YES - WHO:
(It is advised to discuss this with a Daewoo service representative to ensure that the above correction is appropriate
and valid.)
Mail to:
Daewoo Heavy Industries America Corporation
2905 Shawnee Industrial Way
Suwanee, GA 30024
Attention: Publications

Deawoo Solar S140W-V Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Deawoo Solar S140W-V Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Deawoo Solar S140W-V Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Solar 140/160W-V

023-00065E Shop Manual

Trim Out The Label Along

Pub. No. 023-00065E

Lower Structure and Chassis

Engine and Drive Train

Publication Request for Proposed Revision

WHEEL EXCAVATOR SAFETYS0102025K

MODEL SERIAL NUMBER RANGE

Copyright 2002 Daewoo

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

To the Operator of a Daewoo Excavator ........................................................ 3

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Safety precautions are described in SAFETY from page -6 on.

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

LIFTING CAPACITY RATING CONFIGURATION

LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

GENERAL HAZARD INFORMATION

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

BREATHING MASKS, EAR PROTECTION MAY BE REQUIRED

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING FLUIDS

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

INJURY FROM WORK EQUIPMENT

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

PROTECTION FROM FALLING OR FLYING OBJECTS

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

CHECKS BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

BEFORE OPERATING MACHINE

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

AVOID HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLES

Voltage Minimum Safe Distance

6.6 kV 3 m (9’ 10'') HGB1005L

66.0 kV 5 m (16’ 5'')

154.0 kV 8 m (26’ 3'')

275.0 kV 10 m (32’ 10'')

OPERATE CAREFULLY ON SNOW, ICE AND IN VERY COLD TEMPERATURES

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

NEVER LET ANYONE RIDE ON

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Warning tags, for controls are available from 190-00695

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

FIRE PREVENTION AND EXPLOSION PREVENTION

S0102025K Wheel Excavator Safety

Wheel Excavator Safety S0102025K

WARNING FOR COUNTERWEIGHT AND FRONT ATTACHMENT REMOVAL